ED2010 User Guide

USE R GU ID E
© 2010 ACERI, S.A. 10.06.17-BCN1
-1-
ACERI reserves the right to change any of the features or commands described in this
manual without prior warning or notification. Many of the topics contained within this
manual are covered in automated, explanatory tutorials; these have been created to help
increase your understanding of eds’ functionality’s, and act as an aid in allowing you to
realise eds’ full potential more rapidly in your workplace.
Tutorials can be obtained through your local distributor, or from Aceri.

To learn more contact us through our web site.
http://w ww .aceri.com
-2-
C o n ten ts
1 ED2010 MANUAL GUIDE _______________________________________ 7
1.1 Activation codes and Updating software _____________________________ 7
2 ED VERSIONS ________________________________________________ 9
2.1 electrical designer modules _______________________________________ 9
2.2 electrical designer versions ______________________________________ 10
3 WORKING WITH ED __________________________________________ 11
3.1 Getting started _________________________________________________ 12
3.2 Working on a network ___________________________________________ 12
3.3 Data directory structure __________________________________________ 12
3.4 Program directory structure ______________________________________ 15
4 MAIN MANAGER _____________________________________________ 16
4.1 Launching electrical designer _____________________________________ 16
4.2 Entering electrical designer ______________________________________ 17
4.3 The Main Manager ______________________________________________ 18
4.4 ED browser pages ______________________________________________ 19
4.5 Common browser commands _____________________________________ 19
5 EDSQL _____________________________________________________ 27
5.1 System requirements ____________________________________________ 27
5.2 Installing SQL __________________________________________________ 28
5.3 Absorbing existing Filters/Text styles ______________________________ 29
5.4 Creating a new SQL Database ____________________________________ 29
5.5 Connecting to SQL Server ________________________________________ 32
5.6 Working with SQL Server in ED ___________________________________ 35
6 PROJECTS _________________________________________________ 36
6.1 Drawing Previews_______________________________________________ 37
6.2 Creating a new project ___________________________________________ 37
6.3 Project browser screen commands ________________________________ 62
7 DRAWINGS _________________________________________________ 69
7.1 Creating a new drawing / document ________________________________ 69
7.2 Re use existing data_____________________________________________ 70
7.3 Drawing types __________________________________________________ 70
7.4 Drawing information card ________________________________________ 73
7.5 Drawing browser screen commands _______________________________ 77
8 SCHEMATIC TOOLS __________________________________________ 94
8.1 MDI / SDI environments __________________________________________ 94
8.2 Activating ED commands and toolbars _____________________________ 94
8.3 Commands and parameters ______________________________________ 95
8.4 ED environments (Profiles) _______________________________________ 97
-3-
8.5 Fast commands ________________________________________________ 98
8.6 Schematic connectivity __________________________________________ 98
8.7 Elec Manager toolbar ___________________________________________ 103
8.8 Wires toolbar _________________________________________________ 104
8.9 Element categories toolbar ______________________________________ 129
8.10 Set toolbar ___________________________________________________ 133
8.11 Numbering toolbar _____________________________________________ 147
8.12 Reset toolbar _________________________________________________ 154
8.13 Layer utilities toolbar ___________________________________________ 161
8.14 Navigate toolbar _______________________________________________ 165
8.15 Various toolbar ________________________________________________ 170
8.16 Miscellaneous keyboard commands ______________________________ 190
9 LAYOUT TOOLS ____________________________________________ 195
9.1 Layout toolbar commands ______________________________________ 195
9.2 Panels toolbar ________________________________________________ 206
9.3 Miscellaneous layout commands _________________________________ 208
10 HARNESS TOOLS __________________________________________ 210
10.1 Harness toolbar commands _____________________________________ 210
11 LIBRARIES ________________________________________________ 220
11.1 Schematic libraries ____________________________________________ 220
11.2 Cabinet libraries _______________________________________________ 220
11.3 Physical libraries ______________________________________________ 221
11.4 System library ________________________________________________ 221
11.5 Libraries from other s/w ________________________________________ 221
11.6 Creating libraries ______________________________________________ 222
11.7 Library information card ________________________________________ 222
11.8 Library browser commands _____________________________________ 224
11.9 Create your own libraries _______________________________________ 224
12 ELEMENTS ________________________________________________ 226
12.1 Schematic library elements ______________________________________ 226
12.2 Cabinet library elements ________________________________________ 226
12.3 Physical library elements _______________________________________ 226
12.4 Creating elements _____________________________________________ 227
12.5 Element information card _______________________________________ 227
12.6 Element definitions ____________________________________________ 236
12.7 Parent and child elements _______________________________________ 238
12.8 Defining a scheme element ______________________________________ 239
12.9 Element representations ________________________________________ 257
12.10 Element attributes ___________________________________________ 259
12.11 Attributes for scheme elements ________________________________ 260
12.12 Attributes for physical elements ________________________________ 276
12.13 Attributes for terminal graphic elements _________________________ 278
12.14 Attributes for cabinet elements_________________________________ 279
12.15 Making elements intelligent____________________________________ 279
12.16 Drawing measurements _______________________________________ 287
12.17 Miscellaneous make element commands ________________________ 294
12.18 Element browser screen commands ____________________________ 294
-4-
13 CATALOGUES and REFERENCES _____________________________ 299
13.1 Catalogues ___________________________________________________ 299
13.2 Catalogue browser screen commands _____________________________ 300
13.3 References ___________________________________________________ 301
13.4 Technical data ________________________________________________ 304
13.5 Family, element - reference association ___________________________ 305
13.6 Accessories __________________________________________________ 306
13.7 Define components ____________________________________________ 307
13.8 Reference browser screen commands _____________________________ 308
14 ANALYSIS _________________________________________________ 314
14.1 Cross references formulas ______________________________________ 314
14.2 Cross-references for relays and contacts __________________________ 315
14.3 Cross-reference options for elements with contacts _________________ 316
14.4 Cross reference of equipotentials ________________________________ 318
14.5 Cross-reference of functional blocks and sub-blocks ________________ 319
14.6 Cross references on push-buttons ________________________________ 320
14.7 Cross-referencing of plc’s _______________________________________ 321
14.8 Cross-reference parameters _____________________________________ 321
14.9 Common relay and contact cross-reference errors __________________ 324
14.10 Analysing technical data ______________________________________ 324
14.11 Analyse Harness ____________________________________________ 325
14.12 Define parts_________________________________________________ 325
14.13 Reverse engineering _________________________________________ 331
14.14 Check errors ________________________________________________ 334
15 REPORTS _________________________________________________ 336
15.1 List items ____________________________________________________ 337
15.2 Report Centre _________________________________________________ 340
15.3 Report Groups ________________________________________________ 340
16 CONNECTION AND CABLES EDITOR __________________________ 342
16.1 Entering the connection and cables editor _________________________ 342
16.2 Terminal / Device / Both connections editors in SQL _________________ 346
16.3 Common editor tools ___________________________________________ 347
16.4 Cables (terminals and elements) _________________________________ 351
16.5 Cabling (terminals and elements) _________________________________ 354
16.6 Terminal editor commands and options ___________________________ 356
16.7 Go To: (terminals) _____________________________________________ 360
16.8 Configure terminals ____________________________________________ 360
16.9 Terminal editor Tools ___________________________________________ 364
16.10 Bridges ____________________________________________________ 365
16.11 Terminal drawings ___________________________________________ 367
16.12 Terminal reports _____________________________________________ 368
16.13 Reindex ____________________________________________________ 369
16.14 Insert terminals______________________________________________ 370
16.15 Connections editor interface commands and options ______________ 371
16.16 Go To: (devices) _____________________________________________ 372
16.17 Configure elements __________________________________________ 372
16.18 Element reports _____________________________________________ 373
-5-
16.19 Check cables _______________________________________________ 374
16.20 Four level Export terminals (M-comm, M-Print, M-Label, Rail Designer) 375
16.21 Multi-deck terminals __________________________________________ 377
17 PLC’s _____________________________________________________ 382
17.1 PLC elements _________________________________________________ 382
17.2 PLC toolbar commands _________________________________________ 384
17.3 PLC reports ___________________________________________________ 394
18 XLS AUTOMATION® ________________________________________ 395
18.1 XLS Spreadsheets _____________________________________________ 395
18.2 XLS to PLC settings ____________________________________________ 399
18.3 Defining XLS data placement ____________________________________ 400
18.4 XLS to PLC (XLS2PLC) _________________________________________ 401
18.5 Automation elements ___________________________________________ 402
19 MAX MODULE ______________________________________________ 403
19.1 Max toolbar commands _________________________________________ 403
20 UTILITIES __________________________________________________ 412
20.1 Changing the user _____________________________________________ 412
20.2 Configuring ___________________________________________________ 412
20.3 Reorganise all _________________________________________________ 421
20.4 Text editor ____________________________________________________ 422
20.5 Exiting electrical designer 2010 __________________________________ 422
-6-
1 ED2010 M ANU AL GUIDE
electrical designer has been structured to allow engineers to complete all the standard
tasks required for the generation of an electrical project, more quickly and easily.
To help you achieve this goal, the User guide has been structured in a way, which follows a
logical path for new users. Covering the data managed by ED, its relationship with
AutoCAD, to management interfaces, and tools common to these.
The following chapters deal with specific topics, so that the Drawings chapter will address
items such as the different drawing types available within ED; the Elements chapter has a
breakdown of the element types available within ED, as well as how ED will treat them
when they are inserted into drawings, etc.
At the end of this manual, you can also find an alphabetically sorted index, so that you can
more easily locate specific topics.
The User and Technical guides for ED2010 cover all the commands, analyses, and data
relationships found within the package.
If you cannot find, or feel that any item outlined within the manuals does not provide a full or
concise explanation, or that any aspect of the manuals could be improved upon, please
report it to Aceri through the suggestions area of our web site, www.aceri.com
1 . 1 A c t i va t i o n c o d e s a n d U p d a t i n g s o f t w a r e
If you are a first time user of ED, you will receive a box containing an installation cd, two
manuals, and a hardware lock, (dongle), unless a soft protection system has been
requested. Existing users of ED who are upgrading from one version to another will receive
the same, with the exception of the hardware lock, (dongle), as your existing lock needs
only to be reprogrammed in order to enable the new version of ED.
Where Aceri has shipped an ED package direct to a new user the hardware lock, (dongle)
will already have been programmed, however it can be the case that the shipment has
come from an Electrical Designer distributors stock of licenses where customers require ED
as soon as possible; in this instance you will need to authorise your hardware lock by
obtaining codes through your distributor, or from the Aceri Support department.
Upon inserting the installation cd into your PC’s CD/DVD drive an html file will automatically
be displayed on screen, covering all aspects of installing, upgrading, enabling soft or
hardware locks to enable ED.
To ascertain if your lock has been programmed all you need do is install ED onto your
system, please refer to the Technical Guide for further details on this, and then run ED from
you desktop shortcut or from Windows Programs, if your lock is enabled ED will start up
automatically, if it has not, you will receive a message stating:
Please note that the codes displayed will vary

as all locks have unique short and long codes.
To learn how to enable your hardware lock,
please refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide.
-7-
-8-
2 E D V E R S IO N S
There are two main versions of electrical designer, Pro, and LT, these have different
modular features available and are compatible with different versions of AutoCAD.
2 . 1 e l e c tr i c a l d e s i g n e r m o d u l e s
There are 3 modular versions of ED available that provide a range of tools, throughout the
manual you will find references to the modules certain commands are available in; if you
are unsure of which modules you have, simply look at the Main Manger screen where you
will find a graphic display of those modules active on your system.
A synopsis of the modules is as follows:
ED
 The SQL module allows you to replace the current databases with one SQL
SERVER 2000 database.
 Provides users with a range of management and design tools to automate and
speed the production of projects, circuits, and all associated documentation in
native AutoCAD Dwg and DXF formats. Includes library symbols standards, and
manufacturers parts data as standard.
Professional
 The assembly module provides panel designers with scheme-layout consistency

checks, clash detection, and a variety of tools to allow for the semi automatic
generation of cabinet drawings.
 ED’s Connection and Cables editor is an advanced management tool for the
manipulation of terminals and devices. Assign cables to scheme terminals and
elements, automatically generate terminal wiring diagrams, and define
connections between terminals and/or elements.
-9-
 The PLC module ensures consistency of information between the PLC
programming software and your schematics. Address, comments, labels etc. can
be imported or exported to any manufacturer’s PLC ladder software, (Mitsubishi,
Omron, RS-Logic, etc).
Premium
 The assembly module provides panel designers with scheme-layout consistency

checks, clash detection, and a variety of tools to allow for the semi automatic
generation of cabinet drawings.
 ED’s Connection and Cables editor is an advanced management tool for the
manipulation of terminals and devices. Assign cables to scheme terminals and
elements, automatically generate terminal wiring diagrams, and define
connections between terminals and/or elements.
 The PLC module ensures consistency of information between the PLC

programming software and your schematics. Address, comments, labels etc. can
be imported or exported to any manufacturer’s PLC ladder software, (Mitsubishi,
Omron, RS-Logic, etc).
 This module is specifically targeted at customers who require a tool for defining
true point to point connections, between their project components.
 The Harness module provides all the tools required for the creation of multi core
harnesses, it is available as an additional module within ED, or as a individual
module for AutoCAD.
2 . 2 e l e c t r i c a l d e s i g n e r ve r s i o n s
The two main versions of electrical designer available are
electrical designer PRO
EDPro works with full AutoCAD
electrical designer LT
EDLT runs with AutoCADLT
- 10 -
3 W O R K I N G W I T H ED
electrical designer’s power is based upon the intelligence held within DWG files, this
connects to databases that can be controlled and manipulated through an advanced
manager.
The electrical scheme drawings created in ED are in a native DWG format, and contain
blocks (library elements), made intelligent through the association of attributes.
Groups of drawings go to make up projects.

Library Scheme
Projects associated to Library
project
Dwg files held in Dwg blocks held in

project directory library directory
Library elements
inserted into
Drawings project drawings Elements
as intelligent
blocks
The elements inside the schemes are assigned manufacturers references, these
references serve two purposes, the first is to provide information for reports, (bills of
materials, parts lists…), and the second is for the physical representation of the scheme
elements in the cabinets.
Reference (ABB)
Reference (SIEMENS) BOM

Schemes
Reference (MOELLER)
Projects
Physical components
Layouts
- 11 -
Due to electrical designer drawings being DWG files, they can be modified, and even
created in “vanilla” AutoCAD with basic commands such as LINE, INSERT BLOCKS, EDIT
attributes.
3 . 1 G e tti n g s ta r te d
Before creating a scheme or cabinet drawing, you need to either to select an existing
project or create a new one
To create a project, it is only necessary to associate a library, (symbols standard), and

assign a name to it.
The following steps are a summary of how to create a project and drawing.
I want to... Minimum input data required
Create a project Choose a library + assign a project name
Create a drawing Select a project + choose the drawing type + assign a name
Create a library Choose the library type + assign a name
Create a element Select a library + choose the element type + assign a name
Create a catalogue Assign a name
Create a reference Choose the catalogue + assign a name
In the above table you can see that in order to create a drawing you need to select or
create a project, in the same way if you want to create an element you need to select or
create a library, creating a reference requires the selection or creation of an catalogue.
To learn more about this data hierarchy, as well as the files that are stored in each area of
the program, refer to page 12.
3 . 2 W o r k i n g o n a n e t w o rk
To work on a network, you must have the program installed on you PC, with the data stored
on a server.
3.2.1 Universal Naming Convention

ED2010 allows you to employ UNC’s when specifying paths to data on your network,
through this system you can identify a shared file in a computer without having to specify
(or know) the storage device it is on. In Windows operating systems, the UNC can be used
instead of the local naming system (such as the DOS naming system in Windows).
In Windows operating systems, the UNC name format is:
\\servername\sharename\path\filename
3 . 3 D a t a d i r e c to r y s tr u c t u r e
ED’s data structure is as follows:
Projects A group of drawings and documents, that go to make up an electrical

installation, machine, etc.
- 12 -
Drawings Electrical scheme’s, cabinets, terminal drawings, reports etc in a dwg
format.
Documents Supporting project documentation, such as technical specifications, parts
lists, etc. Documents maybe stored in any format, other than dwg/dxf.
Library Contains symbols representative of electrical standards, standards such

as DIN, BS, IEC, ANSI, NEN etc and are employed in the generation of projects.
Elements These are the symbols used in the schemes and are representations of
fuses, motors, switches, etc.
Catalogue Contains references of manufacturers parts

References Manufacturers part data, including price, size, technical information etc.
Reports Contains reports
Common Contains default and shared databases, such as general wire types.
By default ED will order this data in a directory structure within the \ED2010\ folder on the
drive that you have specified for as the installation path, C:\, D:\ ,for example.
For more information on the folder structure of ED, refer to the following sections and the
Technical Guide.
3.3.1 Projects and drawings

ED has a subdirectory for each project that is created; this holds
the databases, used in the generation of reports, and the
AutoCAD dwg files.
The directory structure of the projects, when ED is first installed is

includes example projects.
- 13 -
3.3.2 Libraries and elements
Libraries are made up of symbols
representative of electrical standards,
standards such as DIN, BS, IEC, ANSI,
NEN etc and are employed in the
generation of projects.
The information and the Dwg format

Scheme libraries elements are kept in subdirectories.
Cabinet libraries electrical designer has three types of
library: schematic, cabinets and
physical (containing physical
components or the true representation
of electrical components).
Physical libraries
3.3.3 Catalogues and references

Catalogues are manufacturers’ databases which contain different
component references. Directories will be created for each catalogue,
as follows:
Inside each directory, are reference and accessories databases. In

addition to this image files of the references may be stored.
- 14 -
3 . 4 P r o g r a m d i r e c to r y s tr u c tu r e
When running ED2010, it is only necessary to have the ED2010\P directory installed. All
other program and data files can be stored on a server. This allows users working on a
network to share scripts for projects, libraries, and reports.
The program directories are covered in full in the ED2010 Technical Guide.
- 15 -
4 M AIN M AN AGER
Part of electrical designer 2010’s power is due to the intelligent management of its data.
The ED2010 main manager and browser screens provide you with tools for the
management of all data required for the creation and maintenance of electrical projects.
The Manager itself can be broken down in 7 main interfaces, these being the:
 Project Browser Provides all of the commands specifically related to the

management of your projects, from analyses to report generation.
 Drawing Browser Provides all of the commands related to the
management of your selected projects drawings.
 Library Browser Provides all of the commands related to the

management of standard symbols libraries, such as IEC, JIC, NEN etc.
 Element Browser Provides all of the commands related to the
management of your various libraries element symbols.
 Catalogues Browser Provides all of the commands related to the

management of manufacturers catalogues, such as Siemens, ABB etc.
 Reference Browser Provides all of the commands related to the
management of your manufacturer’s catalogue parts data.
 Main Manager Provides you with tools for the customisation of the ED
environment through the various Utilities. Through the Utilities you can control everything
from the language you wish to work in, to the templates you want assigned to new projects.
The Main manager also allows you to see at a glance the data that you have been working
with, available hard drive space, as well as providing easy access to the various browser
screens.
4 . 1 L a u n c h i n g e l e c tr i c a l d e s i g n e r
There are two ways to launch ED, select the shortcut that is automatically added to your
desktop, or select the Windows Start button, Programs, electrical designer 2010.
- 16 -
4 . 2 E n te r i n g e l e c tr i c a l d e s i g n e r
Every time you run Electrical Designer, the first screen that you must pass in order to
access the Main Manager is the Username and Password dialogue, (illustrated).
No password is required by default for any user types.
When first working with ED it is advisable to employ the Normal username, which does not
require a password. The rights for the users ED and Normal are outlined below.
NORMAL / ED This user types provides you with full privileges for the administration of
project data. In addition, the ED user type allows you to manage and control other users’
passwords, through the Control administrative tools, (refer to Control page 421). The
Normal / ED user type does not have to retain the username ED, and can be changed. The
ED user is also the only person who can change the directory structure, (refer to
Configuring page 412).
NORMAL This user types provides you with full privileges for the administration of
project, library, and catalogue data. You cannot however alter other users passwords or
change directory configuration (refer to Configuring page 412).
- 17 -
4 . 3 Th e M a i n M a n a g e r
When first entering ED2010 as an ED user type, the Main Manager screen will appear.
The user need only

select one of the
buttons to access the
appropriate Browser
page.
System information Access the

relating to ED lock Aceri site /
hardware
lock content
Information from the

program
Displays currently selected Project, Drawing, Library,

Element, Catalogue and Reference, double click to access
From here, you can access any of the ED2010 browser cards relating to your projects,
drawings, libraries, elements, catalogues, and references, simply by selecting the relevant
tab running along the top of the interface.
Where items have been selected, they will be displayed, in the fields running along the
bottom of the screen.
You can access, any selected item directly by double clicking on the appropriate item, so
that if you wanted to go direct to a projects drawing you should simply double click on the
drawing number; this will take you direct to the drawing which will be automatically loaded.
Likewise you can double click on any other selected item to be taken direct to the
appropriate browser page and item.
You also have access to many of the utilities that control ED everything from, project
default parameters, ED interface text styles to the language you want to work in, (refer to
Configuring page 412 for further details on the various utility options).
4.3.1 Your company logo

Within the main manager display is a picture, which by default upon install will show the
following.
This can be changed at anytime to display your own company’s logo. The image itself is
stored in the ED2010\F directory and is called YourLogo.Bmp by overwriting this file and
restarting ED you will find that the image has been updated.
- 18 -
The benefit of using your own company logo is that the image
stored in the ED2010\F with the name YourLogo.Bmp will also
be displayed on any reports generated within ED. This provides
you a way of telling at a glance if you have the correct image
stored for display within your reports.
4.3.2 Main Manager commands

The command options available to you for the management and configuration of ED, are
displayed below.
Level Icon Command Page Level Icon Command Page
ED-Pro-Prem Activate User 412 ED-Pro-Prem Reorganise all 421
ED-Pro-Prem Configure 412 ED-Pro-Prem Edit text 422
4 . 4 E D b r ow s e r p a g e s
Within the Browser pages, you can preview any project, drawing, library, etc., prior to
commencing work.
Each of the tabs at the top of the screen allows access to the corresponding browser cards.
In each browser screen you will find commands related specifically to the management of
those areas of the program to which the browser page relates. So that the Projects
browser screen will only have command icons that are directly related to maintaining and
managing your projects data.
4.4.1 Status
ED’s Projects, Libraries, and Catalogues have icons displayed beside the listed items, to
assist you in quickly ascertaining the status of any items.
Icon Description
Item is available
Item in Backup
4.5 C o m m o n b ro w ser co m m a n d s
All of the browser pages have certain commands that are common to all, as illustrated
below.
Delete
Remove
- 19 -
Quick Search / Fast Find
Back up
Restore
Filter
4.5.1 Delete (common browser command)

When the delete, (project), icon is selected, the following dialogue will be displayed, the
Check data… option allows you to view the project information card and so ensure that the
correct, (project), information is selected prior to deletion. The more information you fill out
when creating a project, the better insight you will have into what information will be lost
before committing the execution of this command.
It is not possible to delete data within ED without Accepting to do a back up; this has been
added as a security measure to
help avoid mistakenly losing
information. If you do not wish Select this
to have files stored on your button to
hard drive when deleting view the
information, you can employ an information
unused back up system such card prior to
as USER1, for example. deletion.
NOTE
You cannot delete a library when a project has been associated to it. You must first
remove all the associated projects from your system
4.5.2 Remove (common browser command)

Deleting a project will remove all drawing data, from your system, unless a copy has been
made. The deleted items information card will remain however, as well as the deleted
items title in the various browser screens, (this is to allow you to quickly locate any data that
you have archived as a back up).
In the illustration below the project PROJECT1, has been deleted but still remains in the
project list, the boxed information shows that the projects status is backup, as denoted by
the icon, and that currently all of its drawing have been deleted.
- 20 -
By selecting the remove, (project), icon,
all the remaining data will be eliminated.
The remove icon will only be enabled
after a deletion has been carried out.
4.5.3 Quick search (common browser command)

The Quick Search option gives you the ability to locate a project, drawing, library, element,
catalogue, or reference, when only a part of the item data is available, or can be
remembered.
When selected, a blank information

card will be displayed, (as illustrated).
You can enter any parameter, into any

of the fields, i.e. by typing the letter O in
the Name of Project field, and 3 in the
No. of Drawings, upon pressing Accept,
all projects containing 3 drawings,
which have the letter O in their name,
will be displayed.
In this case, you will obtain a list containing only DEMO and PROJECT4, for example,
because they accomplish the two conditions, set, namely they contain O in their names and
are made up of 3 drawings.
This can be applied to any dialogue within an information card and is very useful in the
location of data, which you have only a limited knowledge of, and for those users that do
not want to do complex filters.
The fast find facility is not case sensitive, so that you may enter search criteria in upper
and/or lower case.
NOTE
Upon applying a Quick Search the Filter button will appear to be depressed as illustrated
below:
This indicates that the Quick Search is currently being applied to the list of information
being displayed. The Quick Search filter will remain on, until you select the Filter button,
effectively de-selecting it.
4.5.4 Filter (common browser command)

A filter is used to set the criteria of the data to be worked on. It reduces the number of
items in a list when searching, editing, modifying etc.
- 21 -
The idea of filtering data is based upon establishing a condition that the items to be
selected must fulfil.
Each filter has a description and syntax. To select a filter, simply select it from the window
of pre-defined filters; all of the pre-defined filters have self-explanatory titles.
NOTE
Upon applying a Filter the Filter button will appear to be depressed as illustrated below:
This indicates that the Filter is currently being applied to the list of information displayed.
The filter will remain on, until you select the Filter button, effectively de-selecting it.
4.5.4.1 Filtering selections
To employ a filter simply select the filter that will best complement the data that you are
looking for.
Example
You are looking for a drawing, which was only recently created, you should therefore select
the filter, Drawings modified in the last 60 days.
Select to Edit, Create,

and/or Delete filters.
- 22 -
4.5.4.2 Editing filters
Within the Projects filter window, the user can choose to either edit or create new filters.
Name of the
filter
List of the fields

available that can
be used to define
the filter. If the Functions that
user clicks on a can be used in
database, it will the filter
show its available
fields.
Use this button for test that Expression of the filter,

the syntaxes are correct. (in DBF format). You can
write its fields & functions
4.5.4.3 Filtering syntax

The syntax to write a filter is similar to that of DBASE. E.g. writing syntax where the criteria
are:
‘DATA’ condition DATA-BASE FIELD
DATA is the data to compare. This may be a number, date or text, and is written in
inverted commas for text data. E.g. ‘FUSE’,1,123.
CONDITION is the requirement of the data in the field. Example: $ included in.> Greater
than. = Equal to
DATABASE is the field and database used. Example ELEMS->DENOM
Examples of some commonly used filter syntaxes are as follows.

Projects beginning with D – Example of a Project filter
PROJS->NOMPRO=’D’
Schematic drawings– Example of a Drawing filter
“97” $ DTOC[LIBS->DATACREA]
Libraries created in 1997 – Example of a Library filter
PLANOS->TYP_PLA=’S’
Functional block – Example of an Element filter
ELEMS->REC_DES=18
Catalogues with more than 1000 references – Example of a Catalogue filter
CATS->NELS > 1000
Motors only – Example of a Reference filter
'MOTOR' $ DENOM1
- 23 -
4.5.4.4 Saving element filters
When you select an element filter, in the Browser, the selected filter will be retained and
applied regardless of where, or what, functions are carried out in the program, until the filter
is changed back to the Without Filter default.
4.5.4.5 Locating data by name
The blank field located above the browser selection windows, is provided to allow you to
enter letters and/or numbers to locate browser information.
This provides you with the benefit of not having time

restrictions on data that you are entering when locating a
specific entity within the browser.
For more information on filters refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide.
4.5.5 Backing-up and restoring (common browser command)

These options are available for Projects, Drawings, Libraries, Elements, and Catalogues.
ED will extract the SQL server data and automatically compile ED databases. It is possible
to restore ED dbf files stored in back up direct to an SQL server.
They allow you a choice of ways to back-up and restore various ED data. The backup and
restore batch files can be located in the \ED2010\P directory, (when working with EDPro
please refer also to section the Error! Reference source not found., page Error!
Bookmark not defined.).
When you want to do a BACKUP copy for example, there is a choice between four
standard systems, and two user customisable methods. Dependent upon the system
employed, you are able to enter parameters in the Other Parameters field, for maximum
compression, inclusion of sub directories in compression etc.
The program remembers the Target and Source units, and the parameters used, for each
system, so that no record need be kept of where data is being placed the next time you
want to restore or archive information.
When restoring data an extra option is available as illustrated, by

checking the Restore card option the information card data will
also be restored.
You are also able to employ File Transfer Protocol to transfer data from one computer to
another or to a web site. To do this you must have rights to access such a location, and
ensure that the address is filled out in full.
- 24 -
Select to check
correct data is
selected prior to
backing up. Select a
destination for
back-up data.
Select a system to
be used when
backing up or
restoring.
By selecting one of the various systems, you can edit

the BAT files if desired, or view its parameter options.
Where you select to back-up / restore data to or from an

FTP site, certain of the compression systems available
will be automatically greyed out, as illustrated.
4.5.6 Reorganise
This option is available for Projects, Libraries, and Catalogues. Reorganise repairs the
databases of groups, and sub-groups, and deletes temporary files, (such as dwg bak files)
as well as re-ordering the registers.
When this command is carried out on a project that contains a large amount of data it can
drastically increase the process speed. With small projects, the difference will be negligible.
4.5.7 Dates
You may change the dates in any of the various information
cards throughout ED by selecting the date option and selecting
a preferred date.
You can set the date to Today at anytime, by simply selecting

the option at the bottom of the date pop out.
4.5.7.1 Managing dates
The program negotiates the dates of the different records automatically. The date fields
that electrical designer uses, creation, modification and verification, are managed in the
following way:
Creation Modification Verification

Projects U ED x
Drawings U U U
Libraries U U x
Elements U U U
Catalogues U U x
Reference U U U
- 25 -
ED: Automatically assigned by ED
U: User definable
x: Unavailable
In the cases where the user can assign a date, the program will apply the same date as the
creation of the registration. For example, if a reference has been created on 15/07/2004,
then ED will set the same date in the three available fields.
4.5.8 Field lengths

The name of any item created in ED accepts the character . (point) provided this it is not at
the beginning or at the end of the name, that is to say the program accepts 2000.25, but it
doesn't accept .25 or 25. Other reserved characters that cannot be employed include, /, \, *,
+?, =, ; or comma , .
Article No. of characters

Projects 32
Drawings / Documents 16
Libraries 6
Elements 32
Catalogues 16
Reference 20
- 26 -
5 EDSQ L
ED2010 only runs using SQL server, you can connect ED’s databases to an SQL
2000/2003/2005/2008 server, and convert the individual databases to a single SQL server
database.
5.1 S ystem requirements

In order to run the SQL it is a requirement that users have ED2010\P directory installed,
Microsoft SQL Server client, or MDAC (Microsoft Data Access Components) installed
on your system, and at least one database within the SQL Server to connect to.
SQL Server minimum requirements:

Windows NT 4.0 Server Service Pack 5
SQL Server 2000 Service Pack 3 or MDAC
256 MB. of RAM
250 MB. free Hard disc space
Depending on the amount of data to be managed, systems should be improved.
Network bandwidth
Windows 2000 or 2003 Server, with SQL Server 2000 SP 3, with 2 GB. of RAM and several
Gigabytes free Hard disc space
LAN’s, require 100 MB/s or 1 GB/s (you could put a sub-network of 1 GB/s to the server
and the client computers that have ED, connected to the rest with a 100 MB/s network).
In order to have the correct rights, it is assumed that there is a Windows Domain User
Group called Electrical domain users running the program, should be a part of this group.
The user group name is a default only, and can be changed by altering the name at the
beginning of the EDStart.sql script located in the ED2010\P directory.
When working with EDPro please refer also to section the Error! Reference source not
found., page Error! Bookmark not defined.
You may open and modify the EDStart.sql script with Microsoft SQL Server Query Analyzer,
or similar, below you can see part of the script, with the areas of the script that can be
modified.
- 27 -
5 . 2 I n s ta l l i n g S Q L
To correctly connect and run EDSQL you will need to have the name of a User Group on
your network domain. By default ED uses a group called Electrical, this can be changed,
but it is essential that a group exists.
If you want to set up a new group you need Workgroup Administration rights on the server.
The location to change the workgroup name is explained later in this section.
You will need to install Microsoft SQL Server 2000/2005/2008, (this can only be fully
installed if your PC is a recognised Windows Server), or the Microsoft SQL Client tools, this
includes the Query Analyzer, and Enterprise Manager, these are essential as they allow
you to create and delete databases from the SQL Server, run filters on the data, revise the
database tables etc.
If you are just a basic user and will not create / manage databases or an SQL server
installed on your PC you will need MDAC tools at a minimum, (Microsoft Database Access),
to be able to connect to SQL.
If your PC is not a Windows Server then you will need to install the MS SQL Desktop
Edition, (a cut down version of the full server 2000 which does not require your OS to be a
Windows Server), this can be installed on any PC.
The install of the Desktop Edition can be achieved easily. Use Windows Start -> Run and
drag and drop the Setup.exe for the MS SQL Desktop Edition into it to obtain the full path.
Add to the end of the exe path SAPWD=PASSWORD without this the installation will not be
completed successfully, after the = you should enter any password that you want to use, an
example of the "RUN" path is as follows:
"Y:\UTIL\MS SQL Desktop Edition English\SETUP.EXE" SAPWD=ACERI
This will install the server and will display the following icon by your taskbar clock;
(operating system dependent).
- 28 -
The final step is to create a database on the server to connect to. Run Query Analyser,
select SQL Server (local) in the Connect to SQL Server screen, Connect using Windows
authentification.
Select Open, and browse to the ED2010\P directory and select the EDStart.sql
When working with EDPro please refer also to section the Error! Reference source not
found., page Error! Bookmark not defined.
You will see the script displayed, the two important parts of which are as follows:
select @dbnamea='ACERI' - Change the name here, if required/preferred.

select @usergroup='Electrical' - Default user group. Change the name if
required/preferred.
Aceri is the default name for the database that will be created in the server, Electrical is
the server user group.
This script is used every time you create a database, so once the user group is set, you can
simply change the database name and run the script to create more in the future.
For example, you could change ACERI to COMPANY, and revise the user group:
select @dbnamea='COMPANY' - Change the name here, if required/preferred.

select @usergroup='ACERIUK' - Default user group. Change the name if
required/preferred.
Select the Execute Query icon, (it is the green triangle "play" button, or just press F5), this
runs the script, and creates the database, if you have entered an incorrect user group then
an error will be displayed.
You can now launch ED2010 and connect to SQL, you will see (local) available from the
SQL server name pop down, and should simply type in the name of the database you've
created, (COMPANY using the above example).
To delete a database, run Query analyser, turn on Object Browser (F8), (4th icon from
the right on the toolbar), right click on the database and select Delete. Then Run the
STARTSQL script again to create another.
5.3 Absorbing existing Filters/Text styles

If you have existing Filters and/or text styles that you wish to have included in the SQL
database you should copy the FILTROS.DBF and ATTTXTSTYLE.DBF from the ED root
directory and paste them into the \ED2010 folder prior to connecting to the SQL database.
By doing this ED will automatically absorb the data contained in these databases into SQL.
- 29 -
5 . 4 L e g a c y R e p o r ts
ED2010 uses Crystal 10 for the SQL reports, as such legacy reports created in Crystal
version 8.5 cannot be run in ED2010, and will have to be updated to Crystal 10. One
benefit of using SQL is that you can create scripts to generate custom reports, without the
use of Crystal if required.
5 . 5 C r e a t i n g a n ew S Q L D a t a b a s e
The following method, screenshots and descriptions relate to Microsoft SQL Server
Management Studio Express 2005, only.
After installing and launching Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express 2005, you
will be prompted to connect to a server; this is defined by the PC name on which the server
is installed followed by \ and SQLEXPRESS, (the default database).
On connecting to the database you have the ability to create a new Server Database
By using the Open icon you can access the EDStart.sql located in the C:\ED2010\P
directory.
- 30 -
You will then have to confirm the database connection.
When you have connected you can either run the script “as is” or modify it and define
another database name, and/or workgroup.
The default database name is ACERI, while the default user group is Electrical. By
changing ACERI to ED2010 and executing the script a new ED2010 database will be
created on the server:
-- Default name is ACERI, but you could substitute it for

other name
- 31 -
select @dbnamea='ED2010' -- Change the name here, if
you please.
select @usergroup='Electrical' -- Default user group. Change
the name if you please.
5 . 6 C o n n e c t i n g t o S Q L S e r ve r
Upon starting up ED2010 the username and
password screen will be displayed.
By selecting the Connection button, you can

connect to an SQL Server.
By selecting the Connect to SQL database checkbox you will be able to select an SQL
server database from the network. The Timeout field allows you to specify the length of
time ED will wait before timing out the connection when reports are not received from the
server.
- 32 -
The database name to which you want to connect must be manually entered in the
Database name field.
To check the validity of the connection, select the Attempt Connection button, this will
cause an interface to be displayed, stating that the connection is Correct, or Incorrect.
Once a correct connection is established, you should Accept. To then connect, you should
restart the program.
When you restart ED, if the database that you are connecting to is empty you will be
informed that the SQL database configuration is incorrect.
- 33 -
This is because the SQL database contains no tables and ED needs to convert the
standard Dbf’s into SQL tables.
Pressing Yes will allow ED to start converting the databases to the SQL Server.
Once the conversion is completed ED should close down automatically. If you have
projects, catalogues and/or libraries in a location that is different from the Program path,
you should open the ED_PATHS table using the SQL Query Analyser data in directories
other than the default, in which you installed ED.
NOTE
If the process terminates before the conversion is complete, the database must be cleaned
before attempting to connect to it once again.
Once the conversion is completed, and you enter the Main Manager, you should see the
word displayed in the lower left hand side of the Manager, which indicates that
ED is connected to the SQL server.
5.6.1 Log files

Should any data not be correctly imported, you should check the ED2010\P directory,
(when working with ED please refer also to section the Error! Reference source not
found., page Error! Bookmark not defined.), for *.log file types, these files contain SQL
- 34 -
error messages relating to the reasons for data not being imported, in some cases these
error must be repaired in Dbase in order to allow the import to SQL to be completed.
5.6.2 Data Test
This command allows you to check individual or multiple projects, libraries, and/or
catalogues for any issues that may cause data not to not be imported correctly to SQL.
 Command line: DATATEST

 Module required: ED / Professional / Premium
When the command is activated the following

interface will be displayed.
By checking any listed project, library, and/or

catalogue you can test and identify errors that
may stop the correct importation of the data into
SQL.
By selecting the Display Error Data icon ED

will test the information and then display any
errors.
You may choose to automatically resolve these errors by selecting the Correct Import Data
icon . ED will analyse and rectify the problems, once the process is completed a
message will displayed and you may import the information to SQL.
5 . 7 W o r k i n g w i t h S Q L S e r ve r i n E D
The SQL server and the ED data contained within it has a dynamic link, so that any
changes applied within electrical designer are immediately affected within the SQL tables.
This means that ED interface commands, such as the Terminal Device, Both editors, define
parts, handle drawings, elements, and/or references.
- 35 -
6 P RO J E CTS
As stated in the previous chapter, projects are made up of sets of drawings that represent a
particular installation or assembly.
Upon creation of a project and assignment of a name a sub-directory will be automatically

created where all your projects drawings, documents, and data will be located.
The default location of the project will be \ED2010\PR\Project Name; you can change the
location of the project subdirectory at any time, by changing the project directory within the
information card. ED will automatically move or copy the sub directory and all it contents to
the new location; the project directory path is limited to a maximum of 256 characters.
Projects have a number of parameters that can be assigned to them during creation, such
as preferred automatic numbering systems, titleboxes for drawings etc. You are able to set
up default parameters for projects through the configuration Default parameters option,
(refer to page 421 for further details).
The command options available to you for the management of your project data, are
displayed below.

ED-Pro-Prem
ED-Pro-Prem New… 37 Analyse Cross. Ref 314
- 36 -
ED-Pro-Prem ED-Pro-Prem
Edit… 39 Analyse Equipotentials 318
ED-Pro-Prem ED-Pro-Prem Analyse Technical

Report Centre 340 324
Characteristics
Delete… 20 Analyse Harness 325
Remove… 20 Check Errors 334
Back up… 24 Consult revisions 64
Restore… 24 Project element show 66
ED-Pro-Prem Error ED-Pro-Prem

!
Book
Define Parts mark Edit Counters 152
not
defin
ed.
ED-Pro-Prem Reorganise ED-Pro-Prem
25 Export terminals 68
Projects
ED-Pro-Prem Printing layers 62 ED-Pro-Prem Absorb ATLAN project 68
Edit terminals
Pro-Prem 342
& connections
The following reports are accessible through the Report Centre

ED-Pro-Prem Pro-Prem
List Projects 336 List Physical Layout 336
ED-Pro-Prem Pro-Prem
List Drawings 336 List PLC 394
ED-Pro-Prem
Bill of Materials 336 Prem PCP report 125
ED-Pro-Prem
List Parts 336 Prem MAX report 336
ED-Pro-Prem
Cross Ref. list 336 Prem Trunking Report
ED-Pro-Prem
C.R.Errors List 336 Prem Harness Report
Pro-Prem
Connections List 336 Report Groups 340
- 37 -
6.1 Draw ing Preview s
The project browser screen has a check box above the drawing previews, as illustrated
below.
By checking, or un-checking this option,

you are able to show or hide the
selected projects drawings. Any
changes to the check box will be applied
across all your projects, so that the
check box will either be selected or not
for all project data. This is a time saving
feature as where a project is made up of 1000’s of drawings, a slight load time is required
to generate all the projects drawing images. Where you do not need to see the drawings,
you may deselect the checkbox to increase project selection time.
6 . 2 C r e a t i n g a n ew p r o j e c t
When a new project is created, ED first requires that you specify a schematic symbols
library to be assigned to the project. Only one schematic library can be associated to a
project, and therefore the drawings within it, this is to provide symbol consistency
throughout your project drawings.
After choosing the symbols standard, ED will display the information card, which can be
filled in with the information you consider useful. The only necessary field being the project
name.
The project information card itself acts as a template for your drawings, as the titlebox,
prototype, automatic numbering systems, and numbering order configuration will be applied
to your drawings. If you work to a standard set up and do not wish to configure every
project card in the same way, you can define project default parameters, which will
automatically be assigned to all new projects.
As mentioned previously in Delete section page 20, the more information you incorporate in
the information card the easier it is to identify your projects, in the future.
The project information card maybe edited at any time, although the project name and
associated library may not be changed, after they have been assigned and accepted by
you.
6.2.1 Library associated to a project

The first thing you must do when a new project is created is to assign a library from which
all the drawings symbols, (elements), shall be obtained.
Illustrated below is the Select a library screen. Through this screen, you have the option to
select any one of the available standard symbols libraries. To help you in your selection if
you are unsure of which standard you wish to employ, you can scroll through the various
elements held within each library. Right hand mouse clicking on the desired preview
screen; will magnify the image. When you have found the library that will best suit your
project requirements, select Accept.
- 38 -
The Select a library screen also provides you with information pertaining to the library
status at the time of selection.
Preview of elements contained within the selected
library. Right mouse click to magnify the highlighted
element
Double-click to select a
Selected library
schematic library, which information
will then be associated
to the new project.
After accepting an association between a particular symbols library and a project, it cannot
be changed. Therefore, it is essential that you are certain of the information contained
within a library that is to be employed, before assigning it to a project.
6.2.2 Edit project

The Edit icon is used to alter the information associated to a project, drawing etc., when it is
initially created. Edition can be carried out at any time, to any of the projects data (with the
exception of the project name). Moreover, certain changes are automatically annotated
into your drawings.
6.2.3 Project information card

The next step after associating a library to a project is filling out a project information card.
To help locate a project in the future, it is advisable to fill in as many details as possible. All
of the field data will be incorporated into your drawing titlebox with the exception of the
Remarks.
- 39 -
Dates are automatically filled but can also be
edited at the users discretion.
Select to set the projects

hard drive and network
location.
Select to define numbering

analyses options.
Formulas allow access Here you can choose

to the ANS formulas the default prototype for
for automatic new drawings
numbering
Illustrated above is a typical project information card.

NOTE
Modifications will not be saved if a project information card is edited and you exit via the
Esc key or by clicking the CANCEL button.
6.2.4 Project card fields

The fields of the project information card are:
Field Description UPS
This creates a sub-directory of the same name by default
Name of the Project
\ED2010\PR.
This indicates how many drawings are contained within a
No. of drawings
project.
This indicates the library associated to the project ensuring
Associated library drawings, held within the project, are drawn to the specified
symbols library.
The projects can be Available or in Backup status. The
Available projects are projects that are accessible to work
with and may be found either on the local hard drive or on
Status the network.
The Backup projects have been backed up to disks or tapes

and are not currently available on the hard disk.
Creation The date on which the project was created.
- 40 -
Modification The date on which the project was last modified.
The price / hour field allows you to apply a cost / hour for
Price / hour work carried out on the project. This will be added into
reports to provide project budget costs.
Description 1/3 Description of the project lines 1/3
Description 2/4 Description of the project lines 2/4
Used for indicating a different project name from the eight
Project Code characters of the project field or an enhanced project name,
or a job number.
Standard This library standard defines the drawings within the project.
This is entirely for your benefit and can be used to aid in the
Remarks identification of the project when backing up, restoring or
deleting
Project Data 1-4 Description of the project.
NOTE
The fields marked with a  are automatically annotated to the drawing title box, if they
are not incorporated automatically it is because you have changed your configuration
options, or do not have the appropriate attributes within the titlebox element. By carrying
out a UPS command, (update title box), your titlebox can be updated within the drawing
itself.
6.2.4.1 Password
The password of a project allows you to define an entrance
password to limit it to allowed accesses.
The password can be changed and checked at any time by

you through the selection of the password button.
6.2.5 Automatic Numbering Systems and formulas

Automatic numbering systems are an important feature of ED, as they allow you to assign
an unlimited variation of numbering systems to your project data.
ANS formulas can be applied to the following:
 Elements
 Physical components
 Wires
 Elements Cross-references
 Equipotential Cross-references
 Titlebox columns and/or rows
 Wiring Diagram internal/external data
 Drawing numbering system
ANS formulas can be edited through the project information card, either during the creation
of a project or later through the edit project option.
- 41 -
You are able to set project default ANS systems through the Configuring Default
parameters option.
The only formula, which can be changed outside of the project information card, is the ANS
for wires; this is for ease of use, as many wire types can be contained within just one
schematic. To learn more about applying wire ANS systems refer to Wire type page 107.
To change a particular ANS system when creating

a project you should select the formula button,
located to the right of the system you wish to define
or amend.
The ANS formulas use a set of system parameters

to create the numbering annotations, depending
upon the ANS formula ED will note the data into
various elements attributes as follows.
ANS For… Attribute the information is written to…
Elements SNA
Physical components SNA2
Wire marks MARK of the block ~MARK
Wire names WIRENAME of the block ~MARK
Cross reference XR_MAIN
Equipotentials XR_PREV and XR_NEXT
Internal wiring diagram WIRE1A and WIRE1B
External wiring diagram WIRE2A and WIRE2B
Drawing numbering system PLANOS->PLANO
You should take note that by altering any of these formulas, (the defaults of which are
illustrated in the project information card); the numbering for the entire project will be
effected, from that time forward.
Therefore, that if you have a project in which you have elements numbered in a certain
style in 3 drawings. By revising the ANS formula for elements and then choosing to insert
and number a new element, will ensure that the newly inserted element has the new ANS
formula applied to it, this will not affect the already inserted and numbered elements
however.
If you do change, an ANS formula during the course of a projects creation ED will not
automatically change any formulas that have already been applied within a project. The
formulas can be revised by, for example carrying out a cross-reference analysis, resetting,
and renumbering elements etc. This then provides you with the ability to apply multiple
numbering systems within a single project, however strict project management and working
practices do need to be maintained.
As previously mentioned wire, ANS formulas are something of an exception to the rules
that govern the other systems. As a single drawing can contain many different wire types,
you are able to define a different numbering system for each one if you so choose.
Below can be seen the wires ANS formula table. Different formula tables contain different
symbols that can be employed in creating an ANS, as well as having differing options
available for specific numbering formulas, which are covered in the following sections.
- 42 -
These are
Once inside the table
numeration samples
you can select one of
Commonly created by the
the existing formulas, or
used formulas formulas
you can create your own.
By selecting the Insert

icon, (displayed here on
the left) a new line will
be added at the bottom
of the list of formulas,
with the word NEW in it,
to create a formula look
at the available symbols
and type in the letters
that represent the
information you want
your formula to contain.
To give you an idea of

how this would work in
practice consider this, I
want to have a wire
which will be
automatically numbered, Use these Symbols
which will state its codes to build a new Select Insert to create
position within a drawing, formula. a new formula
as well as naming the
project that it is in.
The best way to this would be to type in the following:
P-A%/O.M
If you look at the symbols on the left of the dialogue, you will see that the formula can be
broken down as follows:
P - will provide a project name
A - gives you the drawing location
% - this is for a special character, or wild card value, and allows you to include the forward
slash, / character into your formula.
O - gives you the drawing zone.

. - provides a stop or point in your formula to act as a separator.
M – is the sequential numbering system.
When all of these symbols are put together and used in a drawing, you will obtain
something like this:
ED_DEMO-BAY1/ENCLOSURE2.1
- 43 -
Obviously, project name, location, and zone are variables.
Once the formula has been set, it will be applied across all of your projects drawings, when
numbering is carried out.
6.2.5.1 ANS Formula options
There are a number of options available for the creation of ANS formula’s that may not be
immediately apparent, such as the facility to trim formula information, and include leading
zeros. In addition, certain formula types have options available for numbering redundancy;
as well as the facility to determine how you would like to have items commence their
numbering, when indexed by column.
These options are outlined in the following sections.
6.2.5.1.1 Leading zero’s

Certain formula symbols can have leading zeros applied to them; these can easily be
identified as the symbol is preceded by a 00 box, illustrated here on the left.
The number of leading zero’s is user definable, and may be applied simply by adding a
number preceding the formula symbol.
Example
In the illustration below you can see a formula of 3M, this effectively means that you would
like to have 3 leading zeros followed by the Counter, 1, 2, 3, etc. This results in a
numbering system of 001, 002…009, 010 etc.
6.2.5.1.2 Data trim

Another option available within ED’s ANS formulas is the ability to trim field data within your
formula. This can be done very precisely as you are able to specify the characters that you
want to be included.
There are three trim options that allow you to specify information from the beginning of a
field, (left trim), the end of a field, (right trim), or any other part of the field.
6.2.5.1.3 Left trim

To trim from the left you should simply enter the field symbol, P, for example, followed by a
squared bracket [ then the character number you want to start with 1 followed by a hyphen
– and the number of the character that you want to end on, 4, with another squared bracket
to close the field trim. This will then give you a formula of P[1-4], if you have a project
A1001B this will then only show the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th characters of you project name,
so trimming off the 5th to 16th; so that the result of the formula would be A100.
You can employ this system to trim data so that only the middle of a field is displayed, for
example P[2-5] would only show the 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th characters of you project name,
so trimming off the 6th to 16th; so that the result of the formula would be 1001.
- 44 -
6.2.5.1.4 Right trim
To trim from the right you should simply enter the field symbol, P, for example, followed by
a squared bracket [ then a minus or hyphen -, the character number you want to start with 1
followed by a hyphen – and the number of the character that you want to end on, 4, with
another squared bracket to close the field trim. This will then give you a formula of P[-1-4]
By using this formula ED will read the field data from right to left; this allows you to create a
formula that will consistently include only the last 4 characters of a project name. When
you consider that, any project can have from 1 to 16 characters this helps to ensure that
you do not have to alter a formula dependent upon the number of characters used in your
various projects.
If you have two projects, ABB1001-2300 and D6200-1300 the same formula would provide
you with results 2300 and 1300 respectively, despite the two project names being of
different lengths.
You can employ this system to trim data so that only the middle of a field is displayed, for
example P[-2-4] would only show the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th characters of you project name from
the right. So trimming off the 5th to 16th characters; so that the result of the formula would
be 230, and 130 based upon the previously used project example names.
WARNING!
The ANS formulas are saved in the project database. The default formulas are found in the
database called SNA (beware its SNA and not ANS) in the data directory, (by default
\ED2010). If you create a new formula, it will be saved in this database. So that when a
Formula is Inserted, it will automatically be available to all of your projects. This means that
when a Formula is DELETED, it will be erased from ALL projects
NOTE
Before reading the following sections on formula types, you should take note of the fact that
for the inclusion of special characters such as: /, \, #, etc., that they must have the
operator %, before placing the special character, (i.e. a character not found in the list of
available symbols. Using the % allows you to create any formula you want, for
example %E%A%R%T%H, will give you an ANS formula of EARTH.
6.2.5.1.5 Redundancy options

You may employ brackets ( ) to form an association between fixed formula data and a
symbol with redundancy. For example, by including a fixed value of = with a symbol value
A, for location, within a set of brackets (%=A) ED will group the = symbol to the location A,
so that if the location A value is redundant within the scheme the fixed = value will also be
redundant and therefore hidden.
Employing a formula of (%=A)-NM(%+O) the location will be grouped with = and the zone
with +
In the above illustrations you can see the results of a fuse that has been inserted into a
scheme drawing using two different ANS formula systems.
- 45 -
The scheme drawing has a location and zone of LOC1 / ZON1. This means that the fuses
location and zone data is redundant, as it is the same as the drawing.
With the standard %=A-NM%+O formula, the location and zone data is hidden in the
elements number, however the fixed data = and + is still displayed.
When using the formula (%=A)-NM(%+O) the fixed = and + characters are grouped to the
potentially redundant location & zone so that these are automatically hidden when the
location and zone are redundant in the scheme.
The benefit of this system is that the results will be the same where the grouped variable is
not redundant.
or
6.2.5.1.6 Numbering with redundancy of location & zone

This checkbox option is available for all of the ANS formulas with the exception of ANS
formulas for wires.
The option essentially is to allow you the ability to reduce extraneous information within
your drawings. If you want to apply an ANS formula, which contains a location and zone,
but you do not want to fill up your elements, with location and zone information which is
exactly the same as the setting for the drawing that the element is in. Then you can use
this option to turn off the ANS location and zone information, unless it happens to be
different from that of the drawing.
6.2.5.1.6.1 Example using checked location and zone redundancy

I have decided that I will have an
ANS formula for elements, which is
AO-M, (location, zone, and counter).
I want the location and zone information added to the formula, whether the location and
zone is the default defined by the drawing information card, or another that I set in the
drawing. To achieve this I simply check the box, (illustrated below), when choosing my
ANS formula.
6.2.5.1.6.2 Example using unchecked location and zone redundancy

I have decided that I will have an
ANS formula for elements, which is
AO-M, (location, zone, and counter).
I want the location and zone information added to the formula, only if the location and zone
differ from that of the drawing. While creating the drawing I decided to keep the ED
- 46 -
defaults of DFS/DFZ for the location and zone, but do not want this information
incorporated into every element that I place in the schematic. However, where I assign a
different location and zone from the default it will be of use to be able to see the information
within the ANS.
By leaving the redundancy box unchecked, I will be able to achieve my aim.
I can place elements within my drawing but the location and zone is not added into the ANS,
formula; only the counter number.
I set the location and zone for one of the elements as BAY3/WORKSHOP2. By then
carrying out a super reset numbering command on this element the ANS changes so that
the counter is preceded by BAY3/WORKSHOP2.
6.2.5.1.7 First column index number

This option is available only for Element and Wire ANS formulas, as these are the only two
formulas that allow you to employ a Row Index ($) within your ANS formula.
The options provided allow you to determine the way in which ED will automatically number
items contained in the same column. Dependent upon preference you are able to specify
that the first element or wire in a column will be numbered with nothing, 0 or 1, this of
course will have an effect on all other element and wire numbers in that column.
Below are examples of relays that have been numbered with the formula BNM.$ using the
Nothing, 0 and 1 options.
- 47 -
6.2.6 ANS formula for elements
The default formula for elements is -NM, (unless the default parameters have been
changed by yourself), and adds the symbol of the element (N) and a counter for each
symbol (M), e.g. -K2.
The elements ANS can only be changed within the project information card.
Once an ANS is set and is applied to elements that are inserted into a drawing, changing
the formula will not affect those elements that have already been placed. Only elements
that are inserted after the ANS has been altered will have the new formula applied to them.
To have an element update its ANS you will need to carry out a reset element command,
followed by number element, (Super Reset Numbering will do both these functions in one),
this may require you to alter your elements counters.
If this is unclear, read the following.
Example
I have created a project with an ANS formula for elements set to –NM, after having created
3Nº. schematics, and placing 5 elements in each I decide that I want to change my ANS
formula to –NB.S$.
After going into the project information card and altering the elements ANS I return to my
schematics, but find that the elements numbering is still –NM.
I carry on working and insert 2 more elements and find that both of these have the new
ANS formula –NB.S$, applied to them.
I then realize that the only way to have my first 15 elements update their formulas is if I
reset them and number them again, by doing this, I will be re-applying the ANS to them.
I use the Super Rest Numbering command, and find that my elements have their
numbering system changed to –NB.S$.
6.2.7 ANS formula for physic components

This formula differs from the other ANS types, in that it is applied to physical elements
placed inside cabinets only.
The way of creating the ANS formula is the same as for other formula types, but provides
you with a secondary numbering system for your cabinet drawings elements, the formula
being noted in the attribute SNA2.
So through the utilization of this formula type you can have an element with not only the
schematic numbering applied to it, but also another numbering system, to help in the actual
placement of your cabinet components, on site.
This second numbering system may also be SNA

used for identifying components in an item
list that is embedded into the layout drawing.
Below you can see an example of a physical SNA2

element, which has had the ANS for physic
components formula %=A-NM applied to it.
- 48 -
6.2.8 ANS formula for wires
The default formula used for wires is M, a basic counter option, which will number your
wires 1, 2, 3, 4, 5….
There are two ways, which have been mentioned previously, to change wires ANS. The
first is through the Project information card; the second is through the Wire types command,
located on the Wires toolbar, which can be used while generating your schematic drawings,
for more information on this second option, Wire type page 107.
You should note that until you create new wire types within your project that the default
wires which are automatically assigned to all new projects, (unless edited by yourself), have
a predefined ANS, which may not correspond to the ANS you set, when creating your
project. For further clarification on this, it is important that you read the Wire type section.
The wires’ formulas can include prefixes, suffixes, the name of the drawing, etc.
By defining an ANS formula for wires, all new wires created in a project will have the
formula applied to them; the formula itself will not have an effect upon any wires, which
have already been created in the Wire type, General Wires, however.
NOTE
The ANS formula for wires will be applied to equipotentials within your scheme drawings.
6.2.9 ANS formula for wire names

The default formula used for wire names is M, a basic counter option, which will number
your wires 1, 2, 3, 4, 5….
There are two ways, which have been mentioned previously, to change wire names ANS.
The first is through the Project information card; the second is through the Wire types
command, located on the Wires toolbar, which can be used while generating your
schematic drawings, for more information on this second option, refer to Wire type page
107.
You should note that until you create new wire types within your project that the default
wires which are automatically assigned to all new projects, (unless edited by yourself), have
a predefined ANS, which may not correspond to the ANS you set, when creating your
project. For further clarification on this, it is important that you read the Wire type section.
The wires’ formulas can include prefixes, suffixes, the name of the drawing, etc.
By defining an ANS formula for wires, all new wires created in a project will have the
formula applied to them; the formula itself will not have an effect upon any wires, which
have already been created in the General Wires, however.
NOTE
The ANS formula for wire names will be applied to the individual wires that make up your
equipotentials within your scheme drawings.
6.2.10 ANS for elements cross-reference

With this option, you can define the formula for the annotations of cross-references
between elements.
These annotations are the result of carrying out a Cross-Reference Analysis.
- 49 -
These are for example; the texts annotated under the coils/relays or in the XR_MAIN
attributes of contacts/push buttons etc.
The default formula is B%/SZ. This means that the program will annotate:
B Name of the drawing
%/ Character /
S Column
Z Row
Result: 1/3B
You can only change the cross-reference formula through the project information card.
If you a change formula, which has already been applied, to elements that cross-reference
to one another, you will need to carry out a cross-reference analysis to update their
formulas to suit your alterations.
For more information about all aspects of cross-referencing within ED, you can refer to
page 314.
6.2.11 ANS for equipotentials cross-reference

With this option, you can define the formula applied to the annotations of equipotentials
cross-references. These annotations are the result of carrying out a Cross reference of
equipotentials.
The ANS formulas are applied to two attributes in the equipotential elements, these being
XR_NEXT and XR_PREV. (These are further explained in the following section).
The default formula is B%/SZ. This means that the program will annotate:
B Name of the drawing

%/ Character /
S Column
Z Row
Result: 1/3B
You can only change the cross-reference formula through the project information card.
If you change a formula, which has already been applied, to equipotentials that cross-
reference to one another, you will need to carry out a cross-reference analysis of
equipotentials to update their formulas to suit your alterations.
6.2.11.1 Equipotentials not connected
This option allows you to define the notation that will be made on an equipotential where
there is no connected item. When this item is not checked, ED will by default fill in a value
of -/- in an equipotentials XR_NEXT or XR_PREV attributes where there is no other
equipotential for the element to connect to.
Setting Explanation Result
Standard ED setting
- 50 -
When the option is checked
you have the facility to fill data
into the Equipotentials not
connected field.
Alternatively you can simply
leave the field blank to have
the unused attribute not
displayed in the drawing.
6.2.12 ANS for internal wiring

This option allows you to define the ANS that will be applied to wiring diagram component
internal pin connections. To learn more about how ED distinguishes between internal and
external wiring diagram connection refer to External wiring by…page 314.
6.2.13 ANS for external wiring

This formula will be applied to wiring diagram component external pin connections. You
may define through this interface, the manner in which ED will distinguish between an
internal and external connection. This is based upon whether elements connected to one
another have different locations and/or zone data.
6.2.13.1 External wiring by…
Within the ANS for external wiring you have two checkbox options, that allow you to define
how ED will identify an external connection between elements.
The options are Location and Zone, as illustrated.
By checking either or both these checkboxes ED will compare location and/or zone data
applied to connected elements, where the location and/or zone data differs between the
connected elements, ED will regard these as being external connections. If connected
elements have the same location and/or zone then ED will consider the elements to be
connected internally.
Example
I want to employ location to denote whether connected elements are
internal or external to a given element. By applying the same location to
connected elements ED will regard them as being connected internally,
any connected element with a different location will be regarded as
external.
In the example you can see that the terminal –X1 1 will have an internal
connection to the fuse –F1, and an external connection to the
pushbutton –S1. This will be reflected in the wiring diagram, as ED will
use an internal ANS formula on one side of the terminal, and an
external ANS formula on the other side of the terminal.
So that when the wiring diagram is created the terminal pin connecting
to –S1 will have an External ANS formula applied to it, while the
terminal pin connecting to the fuse –F1 will have an Internal ANS
formula applied.
- 51 -
6.2.14 Drawing numbering system
With this option, you can define the numbering that will automatically be applied to
drawings when they are created within your project.
When you can edit information that is included in the ANS formula such as location and
zone, at anytime, the drawing name, (and subsequently the DWG name), will automatically
be updated.
6.2.15 Analysis (project options) Project numbering options
When this button is selected, you will enter the

Project Flag prompt screen, illustrated below:
This interface provides you with an assortment

of tools to configure information within your
projects drawings.
Select to define row and column

annotation type
6.2.15.1 Do not repeat numbering in
These checkbox options allow a choice of ways for numbering your terminals, elements,
and wires. By selecting the checkbox, ED will not repeat numbering for any elements,
terminals, or wires that are already numbered within your project drawings. This system
will not be affected by any changes you make to your project counters, (refer to Counters
page 152 for further information on counters).
So that if you have selected the Do not renumber elements checkbox in a project
containing 3 elements numbered –F1, -F3, -F4, and change the counter to 0 when you next
number an element it will be numbered –F2 automatically. By deselecting the checkbox,
the above example would number the element –F1.
6.2.15.2 Same counter for…Wires
If this option is left unchecked ED will create a new counter for all wire types within a project,
so that a wire type EARTH will have a counter #Ca EARTH while a wire type BUS would
have a counter #Ca BUS.
NOTE
The counter #Ca will be created for Wire MARKS, where wire NAMES are being used,
another counter will be created #Wi in addition to #Ca.
- 52 -
By employing this option you are able to ensure that only one counter is created for all
wires within a project, regardless of the wire types created and numbered within you
schematics.
More than one counter will be created where this option is applied in conjunction with other
utilities such as Wire counter by Drawing, and Schematic counters by Location and Zone
for Wires.
6.2.15.3 Different counters for…
These check box options are to provide you with a choice of how to differentiate between
your elements, and terminals, and in a more limited way wires, the options for these is
outlined below.
6.2.15.3.1 Schematic/Layout counters by Location and Zone for Elements

Only elements can have their numbering differentiated by location and zone in both
schematics and layouts, this is due to the fact that elements and their physical components
have two numbering attributes, one for the schematic element, and another for the cabinet
component.
One of the uses of this functionality relates to the fact that you no longer need to have a
different counter number for each element within a drawing and a cabinet; you can now
choose to differentiate the elements by where they are to be physically placed. This, of
course, provides you with the perfect tool for the generation of M.C.C’s, (Multiple Control
Centres).
Take the example of a schematic drawing containing four control circuits which contain four
break contact pushbuttons, all of them carry out the same function within the circuits, but
they are all related to different circuits.
If you want to generate four cabinets to house the four circuits, but do not want to simply
have a different number for each of the buttons, you can assign them different locations
and/or zones. By selecting the checkbox options, you are able to automatically create
different counters for each pushbutton, while having the same numbering applied to them.
The check box options will allow you to obtain the following schematic results:
6.2.15.3.2 Differentiate between elements using location and zone.

Through this option you will obtain the same numbering for all four elements, as long as the
Location only / Zone only, or both the Location and Zone are different for each pushbutton.
Also four number counters will be created, one for each different location and / or zone.
In the illustration shown above,

you can see four pushbuttons,
each one with a different
- 53 -
location and zone assigned to them. When numbered; these elements will all be given the
same numeration, as shown.
As each of the buttons have a different location and zone the numbering for all of them will
be the same, but there will be four counters, created separated by location and zone
differentials.
6.2.15.3.3 Differentiate between elements using location

Through this option, you will obtain the same numbering for
all elements, as long as the Location is different for each
pushbutton. In addition, two number counters will be
created, one for each different location.
6.2.15.3.4 Differentiate between elements using zone.

Through this option, you will obtain the same numbering for
all elements, as long as the Zone is different for each
pushbutton. In addition, two number counters will be
created, one for each different Zone.
When neither checkbox is selected, elements will be

numbered in the normal manner.
This system also applies to elements in cabinet drawings; however the numbering will be
noted to the Physical components attribute SNA2, rather than SNA as with schematic
elements.
6.2.15.3.5 Schematic counters by Location and Zone for Terminals

Terminals numeration options operate in exactly the same ways as with elements, except
you are not able to utilise this option within your cabinets.
- 54 -
6.2.15.3.6 Schematic counters by Location and Zone for Wires
Unlike terminals and elements, wires cannot have a location and/or zone assigned to them
within a drawing.
This means that cables automatically adopt the location and zone that has been defined to
the drawing in which they have been drawn, or the location and zone defined to the
connecting element.
Due to this, the numbering of wires by location and zone can only be applied to wires
contained in one drawing; it is not possible to define different locations and/or zones to
different wires contained in one drawing.
If you attempt to change a drawings location and/or zone and number more wires using this
system, so that two wires have the numbering 1 for example, a short circuit error message
will be given.
Cable counters will be created as with elements or terminals, by location, zone or both.
However, this has a system restriction, so that only one location and/or zone can be applied
to cables in one drawing, as described previously.
6.2.15.4 Wire counter by Drawing
This option allows you to decide whether you prefer to number wires incrementally across
an entire project, or to have wire counters created by project page, so that each new
drawing will have its own wires counter, as illustrated below:
So that by checking this option ED will automatically create a new counter based upon the
drawings that wires are in.
Where the option is not checked then a counter will be created for any one particular wire
type, and will be applied throughout the project.
6.2.15.5 Cross-reference parameters (projects)
Cross-reference parameters can be accessed from three different locations within ED as
follows:
 Project information card

Changes made to cross-reference parameters within the project information card will affect
that project only.
 Default Parameters
Changes made to the parameters through this dialogue will cause all new projects to adopt
the settings by default. Any changes will be noted in the settings found in the Analysis and
Lists toolbar.
 Analysis / Lists toolbar

Changes made to the parameters here will cause all new projects to adopt the settings by
default. Any changes will be noted in the settings found in the Default parameters.
- 55 -
For full details of the tools and features available to you through the cross-reference
parameters interface refer to page 321 Cross-reference parameters.
6.2.15.6 Update technical data
This option allows you to determine whether ED will or will not update your elements
technical data attributes upon execution of a Technical Data Analysis. The reason for this
is due to the fact they you may have entered technical data to an element manually, rather
than via the reference information card, and as such do not wish it to be overwritten by the
reference cards data.
To ensure that your technical data is respected and never overwritten, you should uncheck
the Update Technical Data checkbox. To allow ED to update you elements TECHDATA
attributes with information from the various reference information cards, you should check
this option. It should be noted that your elements technical data attributes will not be
updated, unless you assign a new reference to an element, or carryout an Analyse
technical characteristics command.
6.2.15.7 Use reference contacts
When checked on this option will employ the contact information applied to a catalogue
reference, (refer to page 304 for further information), rather than the contacts applied to a
library element. This then allows you to determine the manner in which relays or elements
with contacts obtain the contact types and pin numbering associated to them.
6.2.15.8 Multi-User
This checkbox allows you to make the project available for multiple users to work on
simultaneously. By activating this option process times may be increased due to increased
server traffic.
6.2.15.9 Connections for pin
These options allow you to determine
how many connections you wish to use
for your terminals, and in the case that
you prefer to use 2 connections whether
you want to have an open or closed connection. Refer to Number of connections page 361
for further details on the uses of 1 or 2 connections.
WARNING!
The number of connections employed will affect the manner in which connections are
automatically formed within the terminals editor. This setting should be applied during the
creation of your project. Changing the number of connections in the later stages of a
projects design can result in the loss of connections, which have been formed manually;
(changing from 2 to 1 connections will half the number of connections available for
example).
6.2.15.10 Schematic connections
These options allow you to define the way in which you will form
your projects schematic connections.
6.2.15.10.1 Without connections

This is the default system within ED, and allows you to draw and form element connections
within your scheme drawings using T connections. ED regards this system of connecting
elements as being Without connections.
- 56 -
6.2.15.10.2 With connections
This option is only available to users who have the Premium version. When selected
PCP’s can be employed to define Preferred Connection Paths between elements, refer to
Schematic connectivity page 98 for more details.
By selecting this option, ED will allow you to assign PCP’s while drawing your wires. This
changes the way in which the One phase wire, and Multi-phase wire commands operate,
and the manner in which ED analyses element connections within your schematics. Refer
to page 77 Schematic connectivity, for further details.
6.2.15.10.3 With names

This option is only available to users who have the Premium version. With Connections
must be active in order to enable With names. The option allows you to specify whether
you want to use wire marks only, or wire marks and wire names, for your scheme wires and
equipotentials. If the option is not selected wire, marks will only have their MARK
(equipotential) attribute numbered; by employing With names, wire marks NAME (wire)
attributes will also be numbered. NAMES are indicative of the individual wires that make up
a single equipotential. Refer to Wire Mark: Mark-Name page 118 for further details on
these options.
6.2.15.10.4 1 or 2 Names per wire

Upon selecting to use Names, you are provided with the
option to employ 1 or 2 names / wire.
6.2.15.10.4.1 1 Name per wire

By employing this option only one wire name can be
placed on a wire, by placing more than one wire name,
ED will display an error message, as illustrated:
The equipotential value of the wires is L1, but the
names of the wire connecting directly between –F1 and
–F2 are indicated as being 1 and 2, which indicates that there are Too many wires.
TIP!
The number of connections employed will affect the manner in which If you want to indicate
/ display more than one name on a wire, when using 1 Name per wire, you should use
Dependent marks, which are for display purposes only, and which are not analysed by ED.
6.2.15.10.4.2 2 Names per wire

By using this option you may specify two wire names to every wire, which goes to make up
an equipotential. This information is then available within PCP reports to provide you with
exact From To data.
Where you are placing two marks on each wire you must employ Main Marks, refer to
Marking wires – FAST page 114 for more information on Main marks. To learn about this
option and other wire mark applications, refer to Wire Mark applications page 115.
6.2.15.10.5 Distance
This option is only available to users who have the Premium version. With
Connections must be active in order to enable the Distance field. The field
allows you specify a preferred Distance for PCP, (Preferred Connection
Paths). This option is for aesthetic purposes only, and allows you to specify
- 57 -
the size that your V connections will be, illustrated below, you can see a PCP that has been
drawn the dimension shows you the effect that the Distance setting will have on your
connection.
6.2.16 Project Titlebox options

Through these options, you are able to specify the manner in which project title boxes will
be numbered.
The titlebox has attributes named COL1, COL2, COL3,... and ROW1, ROW2,
ROW3…(Refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide for further details).
These attributes are automatically numbered when entering a drawing.

6.2.16.1 Continuity
You can set ‘Continuity’ for either Rows OR Columns. ED numbers them continuing the
numbering from one drawing to the next, as indicated in the following illustration.
If you select the IEC, DIN… button, the row and column parameters are automatically set to
match the IEC, DIN standards, likewise selection of the ANSI, JIC… button will set the row
and column-numbering systems to Continuous / Discontinuous as illustrated.
DRAWING 1 DRAWING2
6.2.16.2 Column and Row ANS Formulas
An ANS formula may be applied to your columns and/or rows, these operate in the same
manner as those available for elements, wires, etc. the symbol options available to you
when creating a titlebox ANS formula are illustrated:
This will cause the applied formula information to

automatically noted to your titlebox, columns and/or
rows upon entry to a drawing. For more information
on ANS, (Automatic Numbering Systems, page 41)
Where no ANS formula is applied, ED will employ a

formula of M – Counter by default.
6.2.16.3 Column and Row Types
You are able to employ either alphabetical or numerical notations to your columns and/or
rows by changing the Row / Column types illustrated below.
Furthermore, you have the ability to define the number at which you would prefer
numbering to start from by entering a value into the Initial col. / row fields.
- 58 -
Should you require incremental numbering in your columns or rows, you are able to set the
preferred incremental jump by changing the Increment values, so that if you wanted to have
your row attributes numbered, 2, 4, 6, 8, etc. you should change the Row Increment to 2
and the initial row to 0.
NOTE
The rows and columns cannot both be set to Continuous in the same instance, e.g. the
column and row numbering must be Continuous/Discontinuous, and the settings will
automatically alter to suit this style if you attempt to set both row and column numbering to
continuous.
The title box numbering system can be set to Discontinuous/Discontinuous, if you so

choose.
When you accept the desired, numbering system, the option is given to renumber the
existing rows and/or columns, (dependent upon
your selection). Simply check the Renumber box
to update your project titlebox column and row
information.
This is very useful when you alter the projects title box row and column-numbering style, as
all the project drawings will be automatically updated upon entering.
6.2.17 Update technical data
This option allows you to determine whether ED will or will not update your elements
technical data attributes upon execution of a Technical Data Analysis. The reason for this
is due to the fact they you may have entered technical data to an element manually, rather
than via the reference information card, and as such do not wish it to be overwritten by the
reference cards data.
To ensure that your technical data is respected and never overwritten, you should uncheck
the Update Technical Data checkbox. To allow ED to update you elements TECHDATA
attributes with information from the various reference information cards, you should check
this option.
It should be noted that your elements technical data attributes would never be updated
unless you assign a new reference to an element, or carryout an Analyze technical
characteristics command.
6.2.18 Directory
This button allows you to specify the preferred location for your project on either a local
drive, or network. The path can be up to 256 characters in length, and can be defined
through the interface illustrated below.
There are a number of options available through

this interface, which vary, dependent upon
whether you are creating a new project from
scratch, creating a project while copying its data,
and/or whether you choose to copy a project
folder from one location to another. The options
are outlined below.
6.2.18.1 Creating an empty project
- 59 -
When you create an empty project it is possible
to change the location in which it is created by
selecting the Other directory check box, and by
either typing an existing folders location, or by
using the folder icon to browse to a directories
location, as illustrated.
The Move project contents option will be greyed out until after you have Accepted the
projects location and have Accepted on the project information card, thereby creating a new
project.
The reason for this is due to the fact that until you have carried out the above, there is no
project data available to be moved.
You can edit the project information card at anytime and edit the directory location if you
choose.
6.2.18.2 Creating a project from another
When you choose to create a project from
another and choose to copy the records,
contents or both, you are able to specify another
directory location for the project data other than
the default as illustrated:
This will then create the new project directory in your preferred location and will copy the
selected data to it.
The Move project contents option will be greyed out due to the fact that you have already
chosen to copy some or all of the project data.
You can edit the project information card at anytime in the future, and edit the directory
location if you choose.
6.2.18.3 Copy an existing project
When you choose to edit a project you can choose to change the projects location, when
this is done you have two options available to you. The options being to copy the project
data to another location, or to move the project folder.
By changing the project location through the Other directory option the projects information
will be copied to the new location and the newly specified location will be used as the folder
to which any new changes are stored.
Example
If you changed the default location a project called PROJ1 from C:\ED2010\Pr to
D:\EDProjects, a new folder would be created in D:\EDProjects called PROJ1 and all of the
data would be copied from C:\ED2010\Pr\PROJ1 to this new location.
The project then displayed within the ED projects browser would contain the data located in
the Other directory, namely D:\EDProjects, rather than the original or default directory
C:\ED2010\Pr\PROJ1. Any changes made to the project, such as creation of new drawings,
would have the dwg’s stored in D:\EDProjects\PROJ1 rather than C:\ED2010\Pr\PROJ1.
It is possible to change back to the default directory at anytime by simply checking either
the Default directory checkbox, but ED will COPY your Other directories data overwriting
- 60 -
the original or Default directory information. ED will display a warning message prior to
overwriting any information, as displayed below:
By selecting Yes the data from the current

directory will be copied to the other,
overwriting it in the process. By selecting No,
you will remain at the Other directory location.
When using this option you are also able to select the Move Project Contents checkbox to
automatically relocate the project folder and all of its contents to the new location. If the
Move Project Contents option is not checked then ED will copy your project folder and all its
contents to the new location as outlined previously. To successfully move information from
an Other directory location to the Default directory, you must select Yes to overwrite the
default directory.
6.2.19 Numbering configuration

This button allows you to define the way in which you
want ED to analyse your drawings when numbering,
terminals, elements, and wires.
When selected the following interface will be displayed,

by selecting the various checkbox options, you are able
to define whether ED will number from left to right
bottom to top etc. of your drawings.
6.2.20 Prototype
Through this option, you can specify the default title box and prototypes for all forms of
project related drawings, that will be used as the default for any newly created drawings.
To select a different titlebox/prototypes simply

click on the appropriate Change button.
6.2.20.1 Default title box
Through this option, you can specify the default
title box that will be automatically assigned to
your project drawings.
 Change: When selected you are able to define

the Library that your title box will be obtained from, as
well as the title box type to be used.
These selections are made through the following

dialogue screen, Drawing title box, as you can see there
are two libraries from which you can obtain your titlebox.
The MONTA library is available by default, but the
project library is defined by the library standard chosen when creating your project.
- 61 -
You are able to magnify the image in the preview screen by right mouse clicking over it.
TIP!
By creating titleboxes in the MONTA library, they will be available to you no matter what
library you are using for your project.
6.2.20.2 Default prototype
Prototype drawings are essentially blank dwg files; their purpose is to store all of your layer
table information, as well as any particular AutoCAD line styles that you may want to use.
By selecting a prototype for a drawing you will be ensuring that you have all of the layers,
with the appropriate colours assigned to them, for whatever drawing you may be about to
create.
By using the correct prototype when creating a drawing, you will be saving yourself a great
deal of time; as you will not have to customise any of the drawings basic set-up information
more than once, ever.
You can have as many prototype drawings as you wish, so that changing plot set-up for
different drawings becomes outdated.
The default prototype drawing is called PROTO, and can be found in the MONTA library; it
may be modified in the library of elements drawings.
The prototypes can also be stored in any of your various project libraries. When defining a
prototype to a project, you will do so through the interface illustrated below:
Schematic
Default
libraries can
prototypes
also have
are stored in
prototypes
MONTA
library
NOTE
You can employ Handle drawings; refer to page 79, to copy prototypes from one project to
another.
6.3 P ro ject b ro w ser scre en co m m an d s

The Project Browser screen has commands that are specific to project management these
are outlined below.
6.3.1 Printing layers (Projects / Libraries)
- 62 -
When connected to an SQL Server the printing layers interface connects directly to the ED
tables within the server. This means that any changes carried out are written immediately
to the tables, due to this you cannot cancel any changes after they have been made.
This command allows you to specify which layers are plotted and viewed in a working
drawing, in either a library or a project.
Through this function, you can also control the options XPLOT and XVIEW.
 XPLOT is used inside the drawings for switching on only the layers that you want
to print. Refer to XPLOT page 164 for full details on this command.
 XVIEW is used inside the drawings to specify which layers will be turned on when
working within ED2010. Refer to XVIEW page 164 for full details on this command.
When the icon Printing layers is selected, the screen illustrated below will be seen, by
double clicking in the XVIEW or XPLOT you can toggle the layers ON or OFF.
6.3.1.1 General layer
Contains all of the layers that are added to new projects, and libraries, when they are
created. By adding layers to the General layers, you will increase the layers automatically
assigned to new projects, and libraries.
Double click to turn the

Choose between general layers
layer to be plotted ON or
and project specific layers
OFF
Select
Insert/Delete
to a layer
Double click
to turn the
layer to be
viewed ON
or OFF
6.3.1.2 Project plot layers…

Option is the group of layers within the specified project.
6.3.1.3 Insert
Option allows you to add layers to a project. Though
the following dialogue you can assign a name,
description, and by checking the XVIEW and/or the
XPLOT checkboxes, determine which is to be turned
ON when you Accept and the layer is created.
- 63 -
6.3.1.4 Delete
Option allows you to remove a selected project layer.
The General layers are kept for each project, in a database called CAPES. These layers
are also used to define the default layers for new projects, so that every time a project is
created, the default layers database is copied to the new project directory.
The default database is called CAPESP and can be found in directory \ED2010\M.
6.3.2 Printing layers effect upon previews

The state of the XPLOT within the printing layers tables allow you to define what
information will be displayed in the element or drawing preview. Setting the XPLOT value
to ON will display that layer in the element or drawing preview, as illustrated.
6.3.3 Comparator
The project comparator, allows you to save project data during the course of a projects
development, and carry out comparisons on data that has been added, removed and/or
changed in the project drawings between revisions.
So that you could save a project revision upon issuing

drawings for construction, and then save another
project revision when the project drawing set is
confirmed as built. You can then run any of the reports
available within ED to learn what information has been
added and removed from the drawings sets between
the construction issue and the product “as built”.
When the command icon is selected the following interface will be displayed.
Through this interface, you are able to create, edit, delete, back up, restore, reorganise,
and compare project revisions, as follows.
6.3.3.1 Create revision
When selected the following interface will be displayed
through which you are able to determine the type of project
data you wish to save, as well as being able to assign a
description to the revision that you are creating.
ED will automatically tell you the number of revisions that

you currently have assigned to a project, and the number of
drawings contained within the project at the time of the
revisions creation.
- 64 -
You are able to alter the revisions creation date by selecting the Revision file field pop
down, you can then select the preferred date, which will be
applied to your revision upon Accepting.
The Save checkboxes allow you to decide what data you

wish to be included when creating your revision.
By selecting the Data option ED will automatically create a

sub folder within your project with the name of the revision
assigned to it and will make a copy of all of the databases in
the project at that time.
By selecting the Data, drawing and documents option ED

will automatically create a sub folder within your project
folder with the name of the revision assigned to it, and will
make a copy of all of the databases, drawings and documents in the project at that time.
NOTE
ED only requires databases to make a comparison, but if you want to have a drawing and
document record set included with each revision choose to create revisions with Data,
drawing and documents.
The Description field allows you to enter data that relates to the nature of the project,
drawing or data set that is being saved, this is purely for your information, and ensures
ease of use when identifying the revisions that you wish to compare.
6.3.3.2 Edit revision
When selected you will enter the Edit a revision
interface, you are able to edit the revision date, and/or
the description, but you may not affect the information
set that has been saved to this revision.
6.3.3.3 List comparison
To use this option, you must first ensure that two
revisions have been selected for comparison, and
that you have run a compare revisions command.
To determine the revisions that you wish to be

included in a comparison you should select the
Description checkboxes, as illustrated.
Once you have chosen the revisions, you should choose

to Compare Revisions, the icon for which is illustrated
here on the left. ED will then compare the databases in
the selected revisions folders; after a brief process you
can select the List comparisons icon and select any one
of the lists from the following interface.
Depending upon the report type selected, ED will give you

a list of all the items added, deleted, and changed from
the projects between revisions.
- 65 -
6.3.3.4 Delete revision
This command allows you to delete any one revision, for more information on this
command, refer to Delete page 20.
6.3.3.5 Editing items data
The Edit icon is used to alter the standard information specified when a project, drawing
etc., is initially created. Edition can be carried out at any time. Moreover, certain changes
are automatically annotated into your drawings.
6.3.3.6 Remove revision
This command allows you to remove any one deleted revision, for more information on this
command, refer to Remove page 20.
6.3.3.7 Back up revision
As you can make copies of effectively an entire project you can save on disk space by
backing up revision data, for more information on this command refer to Backing-up and
restoring page 24.
6.3.3.8 Restore revision
You can restore revision data stored in back up at anytime by using this command, for
more information; refer to Backing-up and restoring page 24.
6.3.3.9 Reorganise revision
This command allows you to delete BAK files that maybe contained within your revisions
sub directories, for more information on this command refer to page 25.
6.3.3.10 Compare revision
You must execute this command before creating comparison lists; a minimum of two
revisions must be selected in order to successfully make a revision comparison.
6.3.3.11 Red and Yellow
This command option allows you to create drawings automatically that graphically denote
changes made to project elements.
Two revisions need to be selected and the Compare revisions command run prior to using
the Red and Yellow command.
When activated two drawings will be created for each drawing you have in your project, one
red and one yellow.
The drawings will be automatically named with the selected revision name, followed by a
hyphen, the name of the drawing it represents, underscore, A (for yellow), or R, (for red).
- 66 -
Yellow drawings show any elements that have been modified or erased in yellow.
Red drawings show any elements that have been modified or added in red.
6.3.4 Project (element) show
This command allows you to automatically

generate drawing sheets showing all of the
elements that are in the currently selected project,
or to automatically create wiring diagrams.
You can specify a cell type that you wish to

employ in the display of your project element
show only, although the titlebox, and prototype
that will be associated to the drawing itself, may
be defined for either project element shows,
and/or wiring diagrams through the interface
illustrated.
6.3.4.1 Project element show / Wiring diagrams
Depending upon the option you select you may automatically generate project element
shows or wiring diagrams.
Project element show Wiring Diagram

6.3.4.2 Interface options
6.3.4.2.1 Prototype / Titlebox

You are able to change either the prototype and/or titlebox by selecting the Edit icon
displayed here on the left. To ensure that ED correctly analyses the space available, to
insert your cells/wiring diagram elements, it is a requirement that a titlebox containing LIMIT
- 67 -
attributes is employed. Refer to the Technical Guide for further information on limits. All
titleboxes supplied with ED2010 have LIMIT attributes already placed.
6.3.4.2.2 Number of elements

This field displays, the number of elements contained within a project, upon selecting to
execute the command, this field will countdown as the cells/wiring diagram elements are
inserted in the drawing, upon reaching one, the drawings will be completed, and the
interface will automatically close.
6.3.4.2.3 Drawing set-up

These options allow you to specify the library from which the cells will be taken as well as
the preferred cell type. You are able to manually enter the number of columns and rows of
cells that you want to have in each drawing, by entering values into the column and row
fields.
NOTE
These options are only available where you have selected to create a Project element show.
6.3.4.2.4 Margins / Space between cells

Here you can define the setting out point for the cells/wiring diagram elements within your
drawing; you are able to change the XY co-ordinates to suit different titleboxes.
You are also able to set your preferred spacing between cells/wiring diagram elements. To
ensure ease of use ED has an Optimise icon, displayed here on the left, which will
automatically calculate the best number of columns and rows to fit your drawing titlebox,
based upon the cell size and preferred spacing, the optimise option is only available when
creating project element shows.
You can also use drawing Filters to accomplish selective project element samples.
6.3.5 Export terminals (M-comm, M-Print, M-Label, Rail Designer)

For more information on this feature refer to, Four level Export terminals (M-comm, M-Print,
M-Label, Rail Designer) page 375.
6.3.6 Import ATLAN project
This command allows you to import project data from ATLAN direct into electrical designer.
ATLAN data imported into ED is in an XML format.
With the evolution of substations, and the integration of the IEC 61850 norm, ATLAN in
cooperation with Spain's national electrical network, (REE), was created; a tool that allows
users to define the different control logic and apparatus. ATLAN allows for the creation of
single line diagrams and the programming of the different elements that make up the
substation.
To learn more about ATLAN’s substation design solutions you can refer to their site
http://www.atlan61850.com/
- 68 -
- 69 -
7 DR AWINGS
Drawings are native AutoCAD2009, 2008, 2007 dwg files created with a combination of
AutoCAD and ED commands, or from any other package that you have available on your
system.
Dwg drawings can be viewed, printed, and edited with pure AutoCAD2009, 2008, 2007 but
the best productivity performance is achieved within ED2010.
The command options available to you for the management of your drawing and document
data, are displayed below.
ED-Pro-Prem New… 69 ED-Pro-Prem Plot drawings 88
ED-Pro-Prem
Edit… 73 ED-Pro-Prem Back up… 24
ED-Pro-Prem
List… 337 ED-Pro-Prem Restore… 24
ED-Pro-Prem
Delete… 20 ED-Pro-Prem AutoCAD drawing 90
ED-Pro-Prem
Handle… 79 ED-Pro-Prem Import… 90
ED-Pro-Prem Quick search of

Process drawings 83 ED-Pro-Prem 92
multiple projects
7 . 1 C r e a t i n g a n e w d r a w in g / d o c u m e n t
Creating a drawing within ED is very easy; there are only four steps to follow in order to
create a titled drawing with all the relevant information automatically annotated into the
titlebox.
The four steps you should follow are as follows:
Select the New Drawing icon, in the drawing browser.
Decide if you want to create a blank drawing, or to use information from an existing drawing.
If you have chosen to create a blank drawing, then you now have
to define the Type of drawing.
- 70 -
Fill out the drawing information card, to annotate your
titlebox.
You do have the option to re-use data from any other

drawings contained within your project, you can either
re-use the actual contents of an existing drawing, or the
information card record data, or both. This is the
second step, and dependent upon your response step
three may become redundant.
All of these steps are covered during the course of this

chapter, as well as all of the options available to you
when creating a drawing.
7 . 2 R e u s e e x i s ti n g d a t a
You have the option when creating your drawings to use data from any one drawing, which
already exists within your project.
You are also given a choice of what data you want to reuse;
this option is available through the following interface, which is
automatically displayed upon the selection of the New drawing
icon:
You can define the drawing you want to copy data from, by
selecting it, in the Drawing Browser screen, prior to selecting
the New Drawing icon.
By selecting the Create from checkbox, the two options below it will become live. These
two options provide you with the following possibilities:
 Copy record When selected you will copy the type of drawing, (scheme,
layout, or data), as well as all the information contained within the drawings information
card.
 Copy contents When selected you will copy the actual drawing, i.e. the circuit
or cabinet that you have previously drawn.
If you do not have any drawings in your project then the Copy from checkbox will not be
available, however you can copy drawings from one project to another with the Handle
drawings command, (refer to page 79 for more details); alternatively you can use the
Importing a DWG / DXF files command into your project, (see page 91 for more details).
7.3 Draw ing types

When you create a drawing one of the first questions that you will be asked by ED is what
type of drawing you want to create.
There are five drawing types that will be generated in an AutoCAD format and a document
option, which can be in any format you have available on your system. The drawing types
are, scheme, layout, wiring diagram, data, and terminal drawings each of these has its own
- 71 -
unique properties; and ED will treat the data contained within each drawing type differently,
so it is important that you choose the correct drawing type, dependent upon the data you
want it to contain.
In the Drawing Browser screen ED will display an icon beside each drawing, to assist you in
identifying a drawings type.
Icon Level Description

ED-Pro-Prem Schematic
Pro-Prem Cabinet layout
Pro-Prem Terminal drawing
Prem Wiring diagrams
ED-Pro-Prem Data drawing
ED-Pro-Prem Project element show
ED-Pro-Prem Access database
ED-Pro-Prem Excel Spreadsheet
ED-Pro-Prem HTML
ED-Pro-Prem PDF
ED-Pro-Prem Text document
ED-Pro-Prem Word document
ED-Pro-Prem All other document formats
Prem Harness drawings
7.3.1 Scheme
These drawings are for your electrical circuits, ED will automatically analyse them every
time an end drawing command is carried out. There is a direct link between elements in
your schemes and the components in your layout drawings, wiring diagrams, and graphics,
(if used), in terminal drawings. ED uses information contained in your schemes to produce
a large amount of automatically generated report data, such as BOM, parts lists, etc.
7.3.2 Layout
These drawings are for your cabinet enclosures, and are directly linked with your schemes.
When used in conjunction with the Premium version, these drawings will provide you with
3D drawings, containing true point to point wiring based upon your schematic data, trunking
fill percentages, trunking segregation etc.
7.3.3 Data
These drawings can be used for the creation of reports in a Dwg. format, they are not
analysed by ED, and can be used for project title sheets, or any other form of information
that you do not want ED to analyse.
7.3.4 Terminal
This drawing type is automatically generated by ED through the CONNECTION AND
CABLES EDITOR, where terminal drawings can be automatically generated, based upon
the terminal and cabling information taken from both schemes, and the terminal editor itself.
- 72 -
7.3.5 Document
This option allows you to create a document type within the ED databases and effectively
create any file type that you choose access and manage their data through the ED
Manager. There is one requirement that must be met in order to create these documents,
please refer to Document templates page 72, for further information.
Document drawing types can be associated to any program that you have available. When
this option is selected a drawing information card will be displayed, this differs from
standard drawing information cards, in that it is not possible to assign a titlebox, or
prototype.
By changing the Extension field to any of the available options, and Accepting ED will
automatically create a document in this format, be it Word, Excel, Access, etc.
Beyond the standard Office formats available, in the pop down, you are able to define a
preferred extension to a file, by simply typing the file extension that you want to use into the
field; the only restrictions are:
 That you must have a program installed on your computer that supports the file
type that you are creating.
 You must have a template corresponding to the file type you are creating, refer to
Document templates below, for further details.
So you could create a PDF file, which would be associated to Adobe, for example, by
highlighting the Extension field and typing in PDF in its place.
Due to this there is effectively no limitation on the type of documents

that you can create, and manage within a project.
Once the document has been created it will be stored in your project
directory, the documents will be accessible through the ED Drawing
Browser, (as outlined previously), and will have an icon assigned to
them appropriate to the associated program, as illustrated.
To open any of the project documents, you should simply select the document in the
browser, followed by the AutoCAD drawing icon, (illustrated here on the left), this will
launch the associated program automatically loading your document, and by saving the
document it will be stored to your project directory.
NOTE
Only certain standard Microsoft Office document formats will have the appropriate icon
displayed beside them. Any other document types not part of the standard Office tools will
have an icon type displayed beside them.
7.3.5.1 Document templates
Templates are essential, for the generation of documents within ED, as certain programs
such as PowerPoint; for example, require that you specify parameters to the presentation
- 73 -
during creation. By setting up a default template, in the form of a PowerPoint presentation,
you can store it in the ED2010\M default directory, as New.PPT. Anytime you then create a
PowerPoint, PPT document in ED this NEW template will be applied to the document within
the project folder. The same process applies to any other document types that you wish to
create within ED, such as DOC, HTM, PCX, etc. all that is required is a template of the file
type you wish to create with the name NEW and the correct extension, so that a Word
document would be New.DOC.
7.3.6 Wiring Diagrams

Wiring diagrams are a third level of drawing that are directly linked to scheme and layout
drawing types, and will adopt information from the schemes and/or cabinet drawings, when
annotating data to components placed within them.
The components placed in wiring diagrams are linked to elements through the catalogue
reference applied to scheme elements. This is the same way in which cabinet component
representations are applied; in ED2010 you are able to apply one graphic representation for
cabinet components, and another for wiring diagrams.
The drawings allow you to place representations of scheme elements, into a unique
drawing type, with a representation that is independent of either the schematic element or
the cabinet component. These element representations will have internal and/or external
pin connection data noted to them, based upon the settings applied within your project
information cards, Automatic Numbering Systems and formulas.
7.3.7 Harness
Harness drawings can only be created when the Premium version is enabled.
These drawings are specifically for the creation of harness assemblies, specific tools are
available for the insertion of connectors, and multi-core cables, you can define from to
connections between connectors and automatically display information relating to the
cables/connectors either in a graphical format in the drawing, or via reports.
7 . 4 D r a w i n g i n fo r m a ti o n c a r d
When you have chosen how to create your drawing, you have to fill in the drawing
information card. The card holds data about the drawing, most of which will be
automatically added to your titlebox. The drawing numbers will be incrementally assigned
by ED based upon the last drawing number in your project although you can change this
manually should you so wish.
- 74 -
Select to assign different Select to note any revisions
drawing type. made to the drawing.
Select to change the

drawing titlebox
The card has a fixed structure with the following fields:

Field Description UPS
Name of the drawing, this matches the name of the automatically
Sheet number
created Dwg held in the project subdirectory.
The date the on the drawing was created. This maybe revised
Creation Date manually by selecting the pop down and choosing a preferred
data.
The date on the drawing was modified. This maybe revised
Modification Date manually by selecting the pop down and choosing a preferred
data.
The date on the drawing was verified. This maybe revised
Verification Date manually by selecting the pop down and choosing a preferred
data.
Of free usage for drawing classification. It may be used, for
Type example, for specifying the type of electrical circuit
(control/power/other, etc.)
Of free usage. It may be used, for example, for specifying the
Manufacturer
assigned manufacturer of the assembly or installation.
Of free usage. This field can be used to fill in information about
the project number specified in the project information card.
Project No However it can be used for any other data you so choose, as the
project code will be annotated into your titlebox through the
project information card, project code field.
Verifier Name of the drawing verifier
Description Description of the drawing.
Title line 1 Description of the drawing line 1
- 75 -
Title line 2 Description of the drawing line 2
Title line 3 Description of the drawing line 3.
Title line 4 Description of the drawing line 4.
Of free usage. It may be used for specifying a brief drawing
Drawing Number 1
description or drawing number.
Of free usage. It may be use for specifying a brief drawing
Drawing Number 2
description or drawing number.
Approved Name of the person who approves drawings.
The location, (assembly), is the position where an assembly is
Location placed. A default value is specified as DFS but it can be
overwritten with an alternative location.
The zone (sub-assembly) is the position where a component is
Zone placed. A default value is specified as DFZ but it can be
overwritten with an alternative zone.
Drawn Name of user who created drawing.
Modified Name of user who modified drawing.
Approved Name of user who approved drawing.
NOTE
The fields marked with a  are automatically annotated to the drawing title box, if they
are not incorporated automatically, carry out a UPS command, (Update titlebox), within the
drawing.
For the future identification of drawings, either by browsing through references or by listing
drawings, it is advisable to fill in as many details as possible when creating the drawing.
The drawing reference card can always be edited later if necessary.
7.4.1 Revisions
This option allows the edition of revisions information. You can maintain the last five-
revisions, including five memo fields, which can be annotated into your drawings.
You also have the option to copy

amendments to all of your drawings within a
project; this is extremely useful where you
have handled drawings from different
projects into a new project.
The copy to all drawings option will copy, Name, Date, Rev, and Memo field, to all your
project drawings, so that you are able to amend only one drawing with FOR ISSUE, for
example, and then copy this to all other drawings in your project.
You are able to move all your revisions either up or down where you need to place a
revision beyond the first five available, F for example. This can be done by selecting the up
or down arrows located between the notes and date fields, although all the revisions will be
stored by ED, while in the revisions interface, upon accepting out of the revisions and
Drawing information card only the five revisions, notes, dates and memo fields currently
displayed will be stored, any other revisions will be deleted.
- 76 -
NOTE
You can selectively alter revisions for multiple drawings, through the Handle Drawings
command, refer to page 79
7.4.2 Title box co-ordinates

The only time that you will need to use this option is if you are using an old PRPRO type
prototype, normal titlebox elements do not require this co-ordinate data to be set.
The Titlebox button will only be available when you do not have a titlebox element assigned
within your Drawing information card.
By selecting the Title Box prompt, the following dialogue

will appear where you can modify the X and Y columns,
co-ordinates:
X and Y co-ordinates for columns and rows are used for calculating the distance between
rows and columns of the Title Box, contained within the prototype drawing.
7.4.3 Change titlebox

Selecting the Change button will cause the following interface to be opened
The left of the interface displays any titlebox elements held within the projects associated
library, while the right hand side, has those found within the MONTA library.
If you change the titlebox style of a Schematic, Layout, Data, or Terminal strip drawing an
interface will be displayed, giving you the opportunity to apply the new titlebox to all of the
project drawings that are of the same type, for example, all Scheme drawings, or all Layout
drawings.
By selecting Yes, all of one drawing types

titleboxes will be changed. By selecting
No only the current drawing will have the
new titlebox applied.
7.4.4 Change prototype

You only have the opportunity to Change a drawings prototype during creation, after
Accepting to create your drawing, the prototype will be applied to the automatically created
Dwg file and it will not be possible to change it.
Selecting the Change button will cause the following

interface to be opened.
- 77 -
The left of the interface displays any prototypes held within the projects associated library,
while the right hand side, has those found within the MONTA library.
7.4.5 Change layout
This option is only available within Cabinet, or Layout drawings. When selected you my
first choose the cabinet library you want to obtain your cabinet from, you may then select
any of the available cabinet layouts from that library.
7.4.6 Ending drawings

Upon completion of any plan, you should always press the icon End Drawing/Element,
located in the Manager toolbar, or type the command EDEND. By doing this you allow the
plan to be analysed, (in the case that any errors are detected they will be shown on screen).
Once this process is finished, you will be returned to the Browser or Manager screen,
(dependent on which you entered the drawing through), of ED2010.
Another way to carry out this command is to press CONTROL, SHIFT, and right mouse
click at the same time, thus ending the drawing, saving and carrying out analyses on it, and
updating the project databases. You can also type EDEND.
7 . 5 D r a w i n g b r ow s e r s c r e e n c o m m a n d s
The Drawing Browser screen has certain commands that are specific to drawings and are
outlined below.
7.5.1 Drawing browser sorting

You can select to group drawings in a variety of ways,
by right mouse clicking on the drawing list a number of
options will displayed on a pop-out.
There are four default sorting options that have a

variety of criteria; by selecting one of these the
drawings will be sorted in the selected default order. For example DISPOS, LUGAR,
TYP_PLA, DOCNAME would group the drawings by Location, then Zone, then drawing
type, and finally by the drawing names.
The default sorting options available are as follows:

 DOCNAME Default display system, sorts by drawing name
 DISPOS, LUGAR, TYP_PLA, DOCNAME Groups by Location, Zone, Drawing
type, and drawing name
Grouped by
location Sorted by
zone
Grouped by
drawing type
Listed by
drawing
name
 TIPUS, DOCNAME Drawing type field, and drawing name
- 78 -
 TITLEBOX, DOCNAME Titlebox applied to the drawing and the drawing name.
7.5.1.1 Changing the sorting options
Should you want to change the default sorting criteria you can do so by changing the
ED_PARAMS DWGTREE1-4 fields; this is achieved through the employment of the SQL
Query Analyzer,(or equivalent tool), you must be a Data Base Owner or Administrator as
follows.
 Run the SQL Query Analyzer

 Connect to the SQL Server
 Select the Database from the Object Browser
 Expand the User Tables folder
 Select the ED_PARAMS table, and open it
 Scroll through the table to the STRKEY fields DWGTREEORDER1….

DWGTREEORDER4 fields
You can enter preferred fields into the STRVALUE

Example
By changing the DWGTREEORDER1 STRVALUE from DOCNAME to LUGAR, TYP_PLA,
DOCNAME when you apply the first sorting option, the drawings will then be sorted by
Zone, Drawing type and Drawing name.
WARNING!
You can enter any ED_PLANOS table field into the STRVALUE, however the sort criteria
must include DOCNAME, as by definition the drawing names have to be listed in order that
you can edit, open them etc.
7.5.1.2 Changing the sorting option descriptions
Should you want to change the descriptions in the pop out to more clearly reflect the sorting
order; so that you could change DISPOS, LUGAR, TYP_PLA, DOCNAME to Location,
Zone, Drawing type, Drawing name. This is done by adding DWGTREEORDER_DESC*
fields, (where * is equal to the number of DWGTREEORDER field that you want to change
the descriptions of); this is achieved through the employment of the SQL Query Analyzer,
(or equivalent tool), you must be a Data Base Owner or Administrator as follows.
 Run the SQL Query Analyzer

 Connect to the SQL Server
 Select the Database from the Object Browser
 Expand the User Tables folder
 Select the ED_PARAMS table, and open it
 Right click on the Open Table screen and select the

Add option
- 79 -
 Apply the STRKEY name DWGTREEORDER_DESC1,
DWGTREEORDER_DESC2, DWGTREEORDER_DESC3 or
DWGTREEORDER_DESC4
 Fill in the STRVALUE description that matches the DWGTREEORDER1 settings
 Close the table to save the changes

 Close and reopen the ED Manager
 When you now right click on the drawing list
you will see your changes have been
applied
7.5.2 Handle drawings
This command is one of the ways by which you can re-use drawing data; you are
connected to an SQL Server, you do not have the option to cancel, so that any changes
implemented will take effect immediately, these include deletion, renaming, copying
drawings etc. The Handle Drawings icon is available in new projects, which do not contain
any drawings.
Through this command you are able to handle drawing data, from any project, (regardless
of the library standard), into the project that you are currently working with.
Furthermore, you are provided tools for the edition of drawing names, and the deletion of
drawings from your current, or destiny, project.
Any drawings that are handled into your destiny project will have all their associated data
automatically added to the project database, so that you are able to obtain report and other
automatically generated data from them, without having to carry out any other commands
or modifications.
All of these processes are carried out through the manipulation screen, (shown below), the
screen itself is loosely divided into two halves, and the left side is for the selection of the
origin project from which you want to handle data; and the right hand side which is for the
viewing and manipulation of your destiny project drawing data.
- 80 -
Checked allows selection of any Copy drawings to destiny and/or rename
project regardless of standard during transfer
Data to be handled
Origin Project
drawings
Delete and/or
Reindex Destiny rename Destiny
Project drawings Project drawings
Selected Destiny
Selected drawings project drawing
information card preview.
data
The various options available to you are in the following sections

7.5.2.1 All the projects
This checkbox option allows you to select origin projects that have a different library
standard assigned to them, than that of the destiny project. So that you are able to handle
drawings from an origin project, which is associated to an ANSI standard library, into a
destiny project that has an IEC symbols library associated to it.
NOTE
When drawings from different library standards are handled into a project, the drawings will
not cross-reference until the elements contained in the drawings are created in the project
associated symbols library.
Example
If a project is created with the standard DIN, and two drawings are handled into the project,
one from a project with an associated standard IEC, and another from a project, standard,
ANSI, all of the elements contained in the two drawings will have to be created, or imported
into the DIN library, for cross-referencing to function correctly.
This is because ED looks inside the project defined standard for elements to ascertain
contact type and element definitions as well as various other crucial data.
7.5.2.2 Origin project
This can be any project of any library standard that you have within ED, (refer to All the
projects, below for further details). The origin project is the project from which you wish to
take drawing data, by using the control and/or shift keys you are able to select any
drawings that are contained within the project; that you want to be manipulated into your
destiny project.
- 81 -
7.5.2.3 Handling the origin data
With the arrow button, (illustrated below), the selected origin project drawings and their data
will be transferred to the destiny project. When only one drawing is being handled you can
apply a New name to the drawing being handled, (refer to New name, below for further
details).
7.5.2.4 Data to handle

This pop down option allows you to decide the information that you want to copy from the
Origin to the Destiny project, as follows:
Only DWG – Only the dwg file will be copied from the origin to the destiny project
Components – The dwg file and the Components data will be copied to the destiny project.
Connections - The dwg file the Components and the Connections data will be copied to
the destiny project.
PLC - The dwg file the Components, Connections and PLC data will be copied to the
destiny project.
Accessories - The dwg file Components, Connections, PLC and Accessories data will be
copied to the destiny project.
Preferred connections - The dwg file Components, Connections, PLC, Accessories, and
preferred connections data will be copied to the destiny project.
7.5.2.5 Delete
Erases the selected drawings. This operation will only delete selected drawings that are
contained in the destiny project. You will NOT be given a warning prior to deletion of a
selected drawing. So the function should be used with care, you are connected to an SQL
Server, you do not have the option to cancel, so that any changes implemented will take
effect immediately.
7.5.2.6 Rename
Changes the name of a selected drawing, within the destiny project only. You should select
a drawing within the destiny project, and then enter a new name in the Rename edit box
prior to pressing the Rename button.
7.5.2.7 New name
When you have a single drawing in the origin project that you want to copy into your destiny
project, you are able to provide a new name for it, as it is being handled from one project to
another.
This is achieved by first selecting an origin project drawing, and then typing a name into the
New name dialogue box, (located above the arrow button), by then pressing the arrow
button illustrated below, the drawing will be copied to the destiny project with the new name
applied.
Example
In the illustration below, drawing no.4 of the DEMO project is going to be copied into
PROJECT1.
- 82 -
As there already is a drawing no.4 in PROJECT1, the drawing is to be given a New name,
(6), by selecting the arrow, drawing no.4 will be copied into PROJECT1 and renamed as
drawing 6.
If a drawing, which is copied, into the destiny project has a title box with rows or columns
whose numbering systems overlap the existing project standard, you will be given the
option illustrated.
Simply select Yes to renumber the

projects title boxes to assure drawing
consistency.
7.5.2.8 Reindex
This option will only be made available when you select multiple drawings in your destiny
project. It allows you to automatically renumber drawings from a user defined start point,
(10 for example), in numerical increments, set by you.
By pressing this button, your selected destiny project drawings will be renumbered to suit
the parameters you have defined in the Start and Incremental dialogue boxes.
Drawings can only be reindexed numerically; it is not possible to use an alphabetical

system. If you enter any parameters into the start field, the Reindex button will be
automatically enabled.
7.5.2.8.1 Start
This dialogue box is part of the reindex functionality and will not be available until multiple
drawings are selected within the destiny project.
By typing a number in this dialogue box, you are effectively stating the number at which you
want your selected drawings to be numbered from. By entering the number 10, for
example, the first of your selected drawings will be renamed 10.
7.5.2.8.2 Incremental
This dialogue box is part of the reindex functionality and will not be available until multiple
drawings are selected within the destiny project. You are able to reindex numerical and
alphanumerical drawings.
By typing a number in this dialogue box, you are effectively stating the increments that you
want your drawings to be numbered in. The increments will start from the base number
defined in the Start dialogue, (see above for more details).
Thus if you fill in the Incremental field with the number 1, for example, and you have stated
that your Start number is 10, your drawings will be renamed, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,
etc.
Re indexing of your selected drawings will not occur until you press the Reindex button.
- 83 -
NOTE
If the CANCEL button is selected at the end of the handle drawings process, all the
processed information will be cancelled; none of the processed drawings will be added into
the project until confirmation is given through the selection of the Accept button.
7.5.2.8.3 Generic information

The generic information tabs displays the selected drawing(s) information card data. You
can revise any of the fields to update individual or multiple drawings data; this includes
selected drawings revision data, indeed any drawing information card.
7.5.3 Process drawings (Batch process)
This function allows commands to be automatically performed

on a group of project drawings by means of a batch process.
Any of the processes outlined below, run in the background
allowing you to continue working with other programs while
awaiting a processes completion.
A batch process can be performed on all the drawings within a

project or specific drawings where a filter has been applied, in
the Drawing browser screen (refer to page 21 for more
information on filters).
The standard options are:

7.5.3.1 Only drawings pending annotations
This is very useful if you have a project of hundreds of drawings, but where only a few need
to be opened to ensure that drawing notation changes are made. The option itself will only
open those drawings, which ED has pending information to be added or updated.
Example
If only 3 of 200 drawings, have been affected by a cross-reference analysis ED will only
open those 3 drawings, rather than all 200, to provide significant time savings.
7.5.3.2 Save drawings without analysing the drawings
This option allows you to run processes on drawings while not having them analysed. This
is very useful where you are creating a project with drawings copied or imported from other
projects. It allows you, to run process on projects where there are errors, without having
the error messages displayed, and also will speed up the process by not carrying out
analyses, which at the early stages of a projects design may not be required.
7.5.3.3 Reset elements
Reset element is a process that permits you to reset element numbering.
7.5.3.4 Number elements
Is a process that permits the numbering of elements, which are not presently numbered.
- 84 -
7.5.3.5 Reset wires
Reset wire is a process that permits you to reset wire
marks to 00. Where you are employing Names in your
project, you have the option to reset marks and/or wire
names, you can check, these options dependent upon
where you want to reset the equipotential marks, and/or
the equipotentials individual wire names.
7.5.3.6 Number wires
Number wire is a process that automatically numbers any wire marks set to 00.
7.5.3.7 Reset terminals
Reset Terminals gives you the option to reset either All
the terminals, i.e. Terminals that have been given an
alphabetical or alphanumerical value; PE1, EARTH, for
example. The Numerical option only, resets terminals
with a numerical counter, such as 1, 2, 3, etc.
7.5.3.8 Number terminals
Number Terminals is a process that permits the numbering of terminals, only when a
terminal strip has been previously defined to the terminals.
7.5.3.9 Execute a script
Execute a script permits the use of the option Script of
AutoCAD. A Script creates a sequence of commands
and is very useful for the modification of drawings in
AutoCAD, (refer to AutoCAD’s manual for further
information).
When you check the option, Execute a script you view all the available scripts, for use with
projects, as well as a preview of them. You can edit these, create new scripts, or choose to
delete them, through the Batch Script screen shown above.
7.5.3.10 Reset the counters
Permits you to reset the project databases of counters. This is usually done simultaneously
with the reset options. If this is not used with the reset options, the program will re-number
the new elements, terminals, and wires in order with their counters.
7.5.3.11 Plot drawings
Permits you to print all the drawings of the selected project
For more information relating to the plot options available,

refer to Plot drawings page 88.
7.5.3.12 Execute end script

This tool allows you to run a script at the end of standard batch processes.
- 85 -
Example end scripts can be found in the default installation of ED for both drawings, and
libraries.
Example
You may have created a New project from an existing one and want to reset and renumber
all of your elements, which can be achieved through the use of standard batch process
options. Once this has been achieved, the End script will be run in order to, for example,
create reports, change catalogue and reference information etc. any of which can be done
by employing ED macro’s.
7.5.3.13 Create Navigable DWF
This option allows you to generate an AutoCAD DSD file which can be used to publish
navigable DWF files.
Running the process will automatically create a DSD file in the selected project folder, the
DSD file will have the same name as the project; so that if the process is run in the DEMO
project a DEMO.DSD file will be created in the C:\ED2010\Pr\DEMO folder.
Once the process is completed you should use the AutoCAD File, Publish command.
- 86 -
In the Publish dialogue, use the Open icon to select the DSD file created in the Project
folder where the process was run.
On selecting the DSD file you will be prompted to append or replace listed sheets.
You can then select the listed sheets that you wish to publish.
- 87 -
You can open any of the DWF files in the Autodesk Design Review, for example, where you
can navigate the cross-referenced elements.
- 88 -
NOTE
The symbol denotes those processes that will require a confirmation prior to the running of
the batch process. This confirmation will be in the form of a prompt box, which
will automatically be shown upon selecting the batch process check box.
7.5.4 Plot drawings
If you are unaccustomed to the plot configuration changes between AutoCAD14, (or
previous), it is essential that you read all the AutoCAD data relating to the latest plot
configuration and set up options. As ED works within AutoCAD it is of the utmost
importance that you fully understand AutoCAD’s various plot options, prior to employing the
plot drawings commands within ED.
The plot drawings command within ED allows you to plot a projects drawings either
selectively, or all at once. When the icon is selected, the following interface will be
displayed:
Select printer to
which you wish to
send drawings to
plot.
Apply a filter to
create a selective
drawing list. Enter number of
copies required
Select drawings
you want to be
plotted. Select the
AutoCAD plot
style you wish to
employ.
Through the dialogue, you are provided with a number of options, which will determine how
and where your drawings are plotted, as follows.
 Printer: By picking the pop down button you will have a list of all the
plotters available to you in Windows.
- 89 -
By selecting one of these printers, all
your selected drawings will be plotted to that destination.
 Paper size: Allows you define the size of paper onto which you want to print,
A0, B, A3, etc.
 Offset: Allows you to define an offset along the X and/or Y-axis within AutoCAD,
at which your drawing will commence printing should you wish to include a border for
example.
 As is: This checkbox will print your drawing with the options defined within
AutoCAD.
 Portrait: This option will plot your drawing horizontally.
 Landscape: This option will plot your drawing vertically.

 180 degrees: This will rotate the drawing by 180º.
 Filter: Through the employment of this option you are able to obtain a selective
list of the drawings contained within your project.
Example
If you only wish to plot Terminal Drawings, you could select the filter Terminal Drawings to
have only those types of drawings displayed.
 All: When this button is selected all the drawings within your project, will be
highlighted for printing, you can apply a filter to the project drawings in order to obtain a
selective list of drawings for printing.
 List: This will produce a transmittal document, showing which drawings you
have printed and in what quantity.
 Drawing: The list of drawings is all those drawings contained within your
project, if you choose not to apply a filter to the list, or to plot all the drawings at once; you
are able to employ the Shift and/or Control keys to select only those drawings you wish to
print.
 Copies: Here you are able to enter the number of each selected drawing you wish
to plot.
 Collate: Checking this box will ensure that multiple copies of drawings are printed
in ordered numerical sets.
 Area to plot: Through the selection of one of the

available checkboxes, (illustrated below), you are able to define
the area of your drawing which you want plotted. These areas
correspond to AutoCAD’s various zoom options.
 mm / Inches: By checking either of these boxes you are able to define if you
want your drawing units to be in either metric or imperial measurements.
- 90 -
 Plot Style: This pop down allows you to select
any of the AutoCAD CTB or STB files that you have available
within AutoCAD2009, 2008, 2007 or the defaults or new ctb/stb’s,
which you have created. It is not essential to provide a plot style
to print your drawings, and is at your discretion. Also if you have
a mixture of ctb’s and stb’s assigned to different drawings in your
project, you can simply provide a plot style name, which is
common to both, such as ACAD.
ED will print out all of the drawings, automatically applying the ACAD.STB, or ACAD.CTB to
your drawings wherever applicable.
 Execute Ups / Xplot: Either of these options can be employed to update title
boxes prior to printing, (UPS); or to switch off printing layers that you do not wish displayed
in your printed drawings, (XPLOT). Select the checkboxes to confirm which command(s)
you wish to employ.
7.5.5 Opening an AutoCAD drawing
In order to access a selected drawing in AutoCAD you need only select the AutoCAD icon;
this command will then load the drawing information and place you in AutoCAD.
Other ways to load drawings include double-clicking with the mouse on the desired drawing
name from the list, double clicking on the drawing preview screen.
7.5.6 Import Data
This command allows you to import dwg and/or dxf drawings, and/or documents, from
databases, or folders. When selected the following dialogue screen will appear, by
selecting the folder icon another dialogue will appear, which allows you to browse
through your system files to locate DBF, (database), dwg/dxf files, and/or any other file
types which you wish to import.
When importing data, ED will not overwrite any existing

information, so that if you are importing a Dwg drawing called
22 into a project where drawing number 22 already exists, ED
will retain the project original.
Upon locating the database that you wish to import from, you
should select it and carry out one of the following operations.
7.5.6.1 Importing a DBF
By selecting this option only DBF files will shown in the browser, by choosing a DBF file
and selecting to open it, all drawings and their associated information card data will be
imported.
- 91 -
7.5.6.2 Importing a DWG / DXF
By changing the File of type field, from Projects (Planos.dbf), to
Drawings (*.dwg/*.dxf) you will then be presented with a list of all
the dwg/dxf files available within the selected database. The
selected dwg files will show a drawing preview in the lower half
of the screen, to help aid the selection process.
Select those drawings that you wish to import and select Open;
this will then download the files to your project.
7.5.6.3 Importing Documents
By selecting the document option only those file types listed will be displayed in the browser;
you are able to select individual and/or multiple documents to import into your project.
If you have created document type drawings, which are not

covered by DOC, HTM, HTML, MDB, TXT, XLS, you can All
Files from the Files of type, as illustrated:
Upon pressing Enter, every file type on your computer will be displayed, you are then able
to locate, select, and import them direct to your project.
NOTE
This command cannot be used to import database information from other systems where
the database file is not correctly formatted.
TIP!
Where you are sending Dwg’s to other users of ED you should include a PLANOS.DBF or
ELEMS.DBF, (dependent upon the Dwg types you are sending), as upon importing the
individual and/or multiple Dwg’s the information cards will automatically be filled in by ED
from the database. This allows you to have a better quality of information when importing.
- 92 -
7.5.7 Quick search of multiple projects
Using this command, you are able to carry out searches throughout all of your projects, to
locate specific drawings, as well as being able to edit individual drawing information cards;
and go directly to project drawings.
When selected the Quick Search of Multiple Projects

interface will appear, (illustrated below), this interface
will provide you with a list of all the projects that you
currently have inside ED.
To carry out a drawing search you must first select

those projects through which you want search, individual or multiple projects can be
selected with the Ctrl. and/or Shift keys. Selecting the All button will include all of your
projects in the search.
The various command options available to you are as follows:

 Fast Find: When selected a standard drawing information card will be
displayed, by filling out any of the available fields and accepting you will find that the
Projects Drawings column will have numbers filled in.
These figures indicate the number of drawings within each project that match your search
criteria.
 All: The All button will automatically select all of the projects, and thus include
them into your search.
 Edit Drawing Information: By choosing a drawing from the list of those

that match your search criteria, you will be able to see that drawing information card data.
Selecting the Edit Card icon you will enter the Drawing information card, where you can edit
or add to any of the fields available.
After carrying out your changes, you can Accept to update the card and return to the Quick
search interface or Cancel to reject your amendments.
NOTE
Once you have accepted changes, they will be implemented in your projects drawing, even
if you choose to Cancel from the Quick Search.
 Projects: The projects window contains two columns, the project column
displays the names of all the projects that you currently have inside ED.
The drawing column contains numbers, when you first enter the quick search dialogue all of
the drawing numbers will be set to 0; by setting search criteria through the fast find these
numbers will change to inform you how many drawings in each project match your search.
 Drawings: By selecting an individual project you will have see that the
drawings field lists the names of all the drawings that contain your search criteria.
Example
- 93 -
If you select the fast find icon and fill in the Drawing Number field as being 1, and accept,
you should see that every project has at least 1 drawing that fulfils these search criteria.
By selecting an individual project from the list, you will see

that any drawings within the project that contain the
number 1 will be listed. Furthermore,
any drawing that you select from the
list will allow you to see that drawings
information card data.
Selecting the Edit Card icon will open the selected drawings
information card where you can change any of the fields’ data.
- 94 -
8 SCHEM ATIC TOOLS
electrical designer has many commands for the edition and creation of drawings. This
chapter contains information relating to some of those toolbars which are most commonly
used, and which provide commands vital to the generation and maintenance of schematics
drawings.
8.1 M DI / SDI environments

SDI is a single document interface, this allows you to open a single DWG file at a time.
This is the only interface option available when working with ED2010 and AutoCAD2007.
MDI is a multi document interface that allows you to have two or more DWG files open at
any one time. This allows you to easily cut and paste information from one drawing to
another, or to actively work on multiple drawings that require amendment, for example.
8 . 2 A c t i va t i n g E D c o m m a n d s a n d t o o l b a r s
To access the toolbars and commands available to create and modify your projects
drawings, you can both activate the appropriate toolbar and select the required command
icon; or you can simply select the command from the ELECTRICAL menu pop down.
8.2.1 Command interfaces

Many ED commands will display interfaces upon selecting items within project drawings,
where required these screens contain Refresh buttons that allow you to refresh the listed
information. Where you are connected to an Server SQL The refresh button is unavailable
as data will be automatically written to the SQL tables.
8.2.2 Tool palettes

Users can employ tool palettes and create customised electrical
designer palettes displaying those commands that they use most
often.
Refer to the AutoCAD manuals for more information on accessing

palettes.
To customise a palette and apply ED commands, simply call up the

toolbar that you want to take a command from. Right mouse click on
the toolbar, and select Customise from the pop down. Once this is
done you can simply left click on a particular icon command, and drag
it onto the tool palette; this will add the command to the tool palette.
8.2.3 Displaying toolbars
If the toolbar is not displayed on screen, you can right
mouse click on the screen border, where there is no
toolbar, and select the ELEC option, to have displayed
all the available ED toolbars. By moving your mouse
over the appropriate toolbar name and left clicking, that
toolbar will be displayed.
- 95 -
8.2.4 Accessing commands through the menu
You can access any toolbar command, by selecting the
command option from the ELECTRICAL menu pop down.
8.2.5 Contextual menus

Electrical designer will provide you with contextual commands depending on the item
selected in a drawing. For example selecting an element in a scheme drawing and right
mouse clicking will display element specific commands such as number element, reset
element, force pins etc.
8 . 3 C o m m a n d s a n d p a r a m e te r s
The following sections are provided to assist those users who are unfamiliar with AutoCAD.
8.3.1 AutoCAD environment
AutoCAD menu
Toolbar
AutoCAD graphic area
Tool palette
AutoCAD command line
AutoCAD status bar
8.3.2 Activating commands

There are three different to activate a command, all of which are outlined in each of the
command sections, throughout the manual, as follows.
- 96 -
 By selecting the toolbar icon ( Toolbar)
 By selecting the command from the menu (ELECTRICAL menu:)
 By entering the command in the command line ( Command line)
For example, to activate the One Phase wire command:
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires 1-Phase Wire
 Command line: TCA
In addition to the three command activation options, there is a protection key icon that
informs you, which of ED’s 5 modules the command is available in.
8.3.3 Command options
If you select a command and it is not activated automatically, then you will either have an
option dialogue window displayed. Alternatively you will have a number of options
displayed in the AutoCAD command line; the structure of the command line options is as
follows.
Command: commandname
Current parameters: Parameter1 Parameter2 Parameter 3
Instruction text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3 /...] <default or predetermined value>:
The current parameters show the commands current parameter settings, or the commands
system variables.
Instruction text provide options, (one of which should be selected), in order to complete or
activate the command.
When options are available they will be displayed between squared brackets, any current
default option will be displayed at the end of the line, between angled brackets. Depending
upon the command, the default value will be applied based upon either the last option
applied, or system variables.
In general, the first command line, word, indicates the action type that can be carried out.
Most applications command lines begin with the word Specify, Select, or Enter. These
indicate the form of response required.
Command line terminology
If the command starts… You must…
Select Select on screen the objects with your pointing device
Enter Write text in the command line
Specify Use your pointing device, or write text in the command line
to specify a point on screen.
- 97 -
8.3.4 Activate command line options
To select one of the options that appear among the brackets, you can write the options
complete name or the capital letter and press Enter or the Spacebar.
To select the default option displayed in an angled bracket < >, (if available), press Enter or
the Spacebar.
You do not have to enter command line data in order to select an option; by right mouse
clicking within the drawing area, a contextual menu will be displayed, from which an option
can be selected. To obtain information about how to activate or to disable these contextual
menus, refer to your AutoCAD manual.
8.3.5 Enter command line options

Some commands request the introduction of data, instead of proposing options for you to
select from. In order to do this, write the text in the command line and press Enter or the
Spacebar.
It should be remembered that if you are requests the name of an item, pressing the
Spacebar will simply insert a space; rather than confirming to activate the command. This
allows you to enter extended names of items.
Default options are often available when command line data is requested, for example the
Nodes command, when activated will display the following.
Command: APO
Diameter of nodes in millimetres <2.0000>:
To accept the default value size of the nodes that will be placed, simply press Enter or the
Spacebar.
8.3.6 Repeating a command
If no command is active you may repeat the last command run, by pressing Enter, or the
Spacebar. Another way is to right mouse click in the drawing area and selecting the
Repeat command name from the contextual pop down.
8.3.7 Recently used commands

You may access any recently used
commands, by right mouse clicking on the
AutoCAD command line, and selecting the
Recent Commands option as illustrated.
8 . 4 E D e n vi r o n m e n t s ( P r o f i l e s )
Within ED you have three working environments, these being within schematic, layout, and
element drawings. You are able to arrange only those toolbars, that you require in any of
these three environments, in a location which best suits you; so that you may choose to
have the numbering, reset, and set toolbars open within your schematic drawings, but only
- 98 -
the make elements toolbar within your element drawings. By employing AutoCAD profiles
ED will remember the toolbar types that you have displayed in any of these three drawing
types, and their location on screen; so that upon entering one of these drawing types your
favourite toolbars will automatically be displayed.
To set your profiles correctly, you should carryout the following steps:
 Open a schematic drawing and arrange your toolbars in the manner you prefer.
Select AutoCAD Tools pop down, and pick Options, select the Profiles tab. In the screen,
which is displayed, you should find the ELEC profile is currently highlighted press the Set
Current button to save your schematic toolbar configuration and Accept to return to ED.
 Open a layout drawing and arrange your toolbars in the manner you prefer. Select
AutoCAD Tools pop down, and pick Options, select the Profiles tab. In the screen, which is
displayed, you should select the Add to list button and enter assign the name EDLAYOUT
then press the Set Current button to save your layout toolbar configuration and Accept to
return to ED
 Open an element drawing and arrange your toolbars in the manner you prefer.
Select AutoCAD Tools pop down, and pick Options, select the Profiles tab. In the screen,
which is displayed, you should select the Add to list button and enter assign the name
EDELEM then press the Set Current button to save your element toolbar configuration and
Accept to return to ED
8.5 F as t co m m an d s
Certain toolbar commands within ED allow users to automatically run the command on
every item within a drawing, as if the command had been selected and ALL typed in the
AutoCAD command line. To activate the fast option, you need only double click on the icon,
to activate the command normally single click.
The fast commands available are marked beside the various section headings in this
chapter; this is denoted by the word FAST beside the command title.
8 . 6 S c h e m a t i c c o n n e c t i vi t y
It is possible to define how you would like ED to form connections between elements,
through the use of certain commands within ED. This can be achieved, within schematics,
within the cabinet drawings, (when using the Premium version), and with the connections
and cables editor. To learn more about connectivity when using the Premium version refer
to page 403 Components connection. To learn more about connectivity when using the
connections and cables editor refer to page 342.
Within ED, there are three ways of connecting your elements, these being with PCP’s
(Preferred Connection Paths (PCP’s)), within the schematic, through the Premium version
within a layout drawing, and within the CONNECTION AND CABLES EDITOR.
Dependent upon the method used to connect elements connections will take precedence
over one another in the following manner.
- 99 -
 Schematic PCP’s
PCP’s control the manner in which elements connect in the first instance, and dictate the
order in which components will be wired by MAX within a cabinet drawing; and how
element connections will be formed in the connections and cables editor. Where PCP’s are
used the only way to change elements connection order is within the schematics.
 Connection and cables editor (available only with the Professional /

Premium version) / CONNECTDWG (available only with the Premium version)
The connections and cables editor allows you to define the way that elements and
terminals will connect to one another; where PCP’s are used, connections formed are
considered locked by ED within the connections and cables editor and only elements on a
T connection type can be manipulated.
In addition to the terminals editor you may employ the CONNECTDWG command in your
scheme drawings, when the connections are defined the will be stored and used in the
MAX cabinet.
 MAX module (available only with the Premium version)

MAX cabinets will automatically connect elements based upon your schematic PCP’s.
MAX will take precedence over the connections and cables editor where schematic T
connection types have been used. This connection precedence is based upon MAX
employing the shortest possible route to connect elements to one another.
8.6.1 PCP and T connections

ED will analyse the connections differently in schematics based upon your use of PCP’s, or
standard T connections, below you can see two illustrations each of which show a different
connection type.
T Junction PCP
The T junction regards the lines connecting –S1 pin 13, -F1 pin 2 and –K1 pin A2 as being
an equipotential upon which there are a number of possible connection variables, as any of
the three elements could connect to any of the other two in any order.
The use of a PCP means that ED will not only form connections between elements based
upon your preference, but will also define the connection order, in effect providing you with
a true point to point schematic connection tool.
TIP!
As it is not compulsory that you work only with PCP or T-Junctions it is easy to mix the two
connection types; this is not a problem for ED, and will not cause an issue within your
- 100 -
drawings, however where you are connecting a PCP to a T-junction the one will negate the
other, making the use of the PCP a pointless exercise, where you are looking to form
preferred connection paths throughout.
This example shows a PCP connecting to a T-Junction. ?

Through the PCP ED knows the path to follow to locate
the connected element, however as soon as the T-
Junction is reached, ED will not know which direction
should be followed in order to locate the element.
So that the employment of the PCP in this case will not

increase your drawings connectivity intelligence.
Of course it can be that you simply do not know how you

want to connect elements at the time you draw the circuit,
and where this is the case, you are always able to use the
Toggle connections command later to complete your
circuits PCP’s.
8.6.2 Preferred Connection Paths (PCP’s)

It is possible to indicate Preferred Connection Paths or PCP’s within ED through the
employment of three commands, namely:
 Single Phase Wire

 Multi-Phase wires
 Toggle Connection
All three options allow you to define graphically the preferred path that elements must take
when forming connections, there are four PCP possibilities in total, 2 of these can be
formed using One phase wire and/or Multi-phase wire, while the other two options may only
be formed with the use of Toggle connections command.
There is a fifth connection type T-junctions, (as described previously), however this does
not allow you to precisely define connections, and is therefore not regarded as a PCP.
You may specify a preferred size for PCP connections, within the project information card.
8.6.2.1 PCP auto connections
Examples of the four basic PCP types are illustrated below.
This option will form two PCP’s these being:
-S1 pin 13 to –F1 pin 2
–F1 pin 2 to –K1 pin A2
- 101 -
-S1 pin 13 to –K1 pin A2
–K1 pin A2 to -F1 pin 2
-S1 pin 13 to –F1 pin 2
–K1 pin A2 to –S1 pin 13
–F1 pin 2 to –S1 pin 13
The two types of PCP being formed in the above examples will make connections based
upon the following paths.
- 102 -
Here you can see the arrows showing the connection path that will be followed in the two
main PCP instances.
Although these are very basic connections they may be built upon to create more complex
paths. Dependent upon your design requirements the drawing itself will also define
whether a circuit is to be open or closed; below you can see examples of both open and
closed circuits.
Open Circuit Closed Circuit

In the open circuit there is one connection left on pin 2 of –F1, and –D1 pin 1 the
connections being formed as follows:
-D1 pin 1 to –S2 pin 3

-K1 pin A2 to –F1 pin 2
In the closed circuit example the elements are connecting to one another in a manner,
which leaves no pin connections available.
-D1 pin 1 to –S2 pin 3

-K1 pin A2 to –F1 pin 2
-F1 pin 2 to –D1 pin 1
- 103 -
8.6.3 PCP Tips
The are a few issues that should be realised when working with PCP’s, such as how to
create exactly the connection ordering you want, and reasons for connection errors.
8.6.3.1 PCP Errors
The standard error that can be made when using PCP’s is to include more connections
options than are viable. Where this occurs ED will place an error message on the first node,
of the path, the reason for this is because
ED cannot be certain which connection you
consider correct and which is incorrect.
In the above illustration you can see an

error that has occurred. ED has given this
error as the first PCP indicates that –K3 pin
A1 should connect to–S2 pin 13, but before
this connection can be made a second PCP
shows that –K3 pin A1 should be connecting
to –H2 pin X1.
As the fuse –F5 pin 2 must be connected to

–K3 pin A1, this leaves only one connection available for the relay at pin A1.
The two PCP’s both indicate that the connection should be formed to -S2 and –H2, as there
can be only one connection both PCP’s cannot be correct, and an error is shown.
It should be noted that as every element pin has a potential of two connections, and by
schematically indicating that an element pin will have 3 or more PCP’s you will effectively
be generating an error.
8 . 7 E l e c M a n a g e r to o l b a r
The commands available on this toolbar allow you to save your drawing data and return to
ED’s manager.
8.7.1 Manager
This command will save your current drawing and return you to the ED manager.
 Toolbar: ELEC Manager

 ELECTRICAL menu: ELEC Manager…
 Command line: ELEC
 Module required: ED / Professional / Premium version
TIP!
You can go direct to the manager by pressing and holding down Control, and right mouse
clicking.
8.7.2 End Drawing/Element

This command will save your drawing or element, and analyse the information within it,
which will be saved to ED’s databases. If ED finds any errors during the analysis a
message will be displayed.
- 104 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: End Drawing/Element
 Command line: EDEND
 Module required: ED / Professional / Premium version
TIP!
You can also run this command by pressing and holding down Control, Shift and right
mouse clicking.
8.7.3 ED Help
By selecting this icon you will activate the ED help files, through which you can search for
assistance on any area of the program.

 ELECTRICAL menu: ELEC Help…
 Command line: HELPED
 Module required: ED / Professional / Premium versions
8.8 W ir es t o o lb ar
These toolbar commands are used for drawing and maintaining wires to form connections
between schematic elements.
8.8.1 One phase wire

This command draws a wire using the current wire-type. TCA also automatically puts
nodes on the intersections where necessary, and allows you to define Preferred
Connection Paths between elements while designing your circuits.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires 1-Phase Wire
 Command line: TCA
Upon activation of the command you will see the currently selected wire type displayed with
the following command line option:
Wire Type = 480V

First point of line or [Wiretype]
By entering W into the command line you can access the Wire Types interface directly in
order to select a different wire type, or simply left click to indicate the start point of the line
you will be prompted to click on the:
Next point :
- 105 -
This will continue until you press Enter or ‘right click’ on the mouse to end the command, or
until you draw a line that connects perpendicular to another wire, where this occurs ED will
prompt you:
Indicate the inclination of cut: None [Right/Left]:

Right/Left are variables depending upon whether the wire to which you are connecting is
horizontal; where you indicate a connection to a vertical line ED will prompt:
Indicate the inclination of cut: None [Up/Down]:
The available options allow you to indicate the connection path that you would prefer ED to
follow.
NOTE
The use of PCP’s is optional; if you prefer not to employ them when drawing wires go to the
Project information card, Analysis and check the Without Connections radial button, refer to
page 56 Schematic connections.
8.8.1.1 Inclination of cut: None
By selecting this option ED will form a standard connection
between two wires as illustrated:
It is not a requirement that a keyboard entry be made in

order to create this connection, as you can simply drag your
cursor up, (rather than to the right or left), and left click, to
have the perpendicular connection formed.
By employing this option ED will choose the element to which the Pushbutton is connected
first; this will be either the Fuse –F6 or the Relay –K3, as no Preferred Connection Path or
PCP has been given.
8.8.1.2 Inclination of cut: Right
By selecting this option ED will form a preferred
connection between two elements as illustrated:

order to create this connection, as you can simply drag
your cursor to the right, (rather than up or left), and left
click, to have the connection formed.
By employing this option you will have created a Preferred

Connection Path or PCP between the Pushbutton –S4
and the Relay –K3.
8.8.1.3 Inclination of cut: Left
By selecting this option ED will form a preferred
connection between two elements as illustrated:

order to create this connection, as you can simply drag
your cursor to the left, (rather than up or right), and left
click, to have the connection formed.
- 106 -
By employing this option you will have created a Preferred Connection Path or PCP
between the Pushbutton –S4 and the Fuse –F6.
8.8.1.4 Inclination of cut: Up/Down
These options are the same as left and right inclinations of cut, except that the PCP angles
will be inclined either upward, or downward within your drawings. This is obviously dictated
by drawing orientation, and by whether you are drawing horizontally or vertically.
8.8.1.5 Connection nodes
ED automatically places nodes at wire connections, and breaks the wires at these
connection points.
In the following illustration you can be seen that where wires meet the line is automatically
broken by ED to form a connection. So that when Moved, the line breaks will remain in the
original position.
Due to this, Aceri recommends using the Stretch command of AutoCAD to reposition wires;
alternatively, you can Move the wires and use the Fix Lines command to heal the breaks
followed by the Nodes - FAST command to automatically break the wires at the new
connection points(s), remove any redundant nodes and automatically place nodes on the
new connections(s).
Connection
Connection
8.8.2 Multi-phase wire

This command allows you to draw equidistant multi-phase wires with a user-definable
distance between wires, as well as a user definable number of wires.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires M-Phase Wire
 Command line: L3
 Module required: ED /
Professional / Premium versions 1 3
The wires end at an angle of 90º or 45º 2 4

depending upon the placement of points that
will define the angles at the beginning, the
1 3
- 107 - 2 4
end, or both the beginning and end of the wires.
The illustrations indicate how you should work the command to achieve specific results; the
numbers correspond to the number of mouse clicks you should carryout out to obtain 90º or
45º angles of cut and the length you want your wires to be.
Point 1 indicates the start point of the wires, point 2 the first angle of cut, point 3 the length
that you want your wires to be relative to the start point (1), the 4th point indicates the angle
of cut at the end of your wires.
This command also cuts the wires where they begin, and/or end on other wires, as well as
placing connection point nodes.
Other angles that can be achieved are illustrated below.
8.8.2.1 Phases and Distance

You can change the number of phases to draw by entering P in the command line, followed
by a number to indicate how many phases you wish to draw. The default number of
phases is 3.
To alter the distance between phases type D in the command line, followed by a number to
indicate your preferred distance. The default distance is 5 mm, or 0.250 inches.
8.8.2.2 Multi-phase wire PCP’s
3-Phase wires have the same options available to them as found in single-phase wires, (as
outlined in the previous section), in regards to PCP’s (Preferred Connection Paths) where
the wires connected horizontally or vertically with other wires.
8.8.3 Wire type

This command allows you to create different types of wires, for use in your project
schematics.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Wire Type
 Command line: LAYCAB
When the icon or command is given, the following prompt box will appear:
- 108 -
Select to insert/delete a (new) Select general wires to access
wire type the general database
Double click to set Line Assign cable type and

Double click to style gauge
select a colour
The options available to you are outlined in the following sections.

8.8.3.1 Wire types
8.8.3.1.1 Wire Types of project…

This check box will show you the wires that are contained in your project, you can have
different wires specified for every project that you create.
8.8.3.1.2 General Wires

This check box will allow you to view your default wires data, i.e. your company standards.
The wires contained here, are the wires that will be added to every project that you create;
their names, colour, line style, ANS etc. will always be the same, (these are the three wires
in the illustration shown above). By entering into the General wires, you are able to add as
many wires as you wish with as many different colours, ANS formulas, and line styles as
you want. By adding wires here, every time you create a new project, they will all be added
to that project by default.
8.8.3.2 Wire types main display
8.8.3.2.1 Selection
This shows the wire that you have currently selected, once selected any wires you draw will
be of the selected type, changing drawings, or even projects will not change the selected
wire type, you must change it.
NOTE
The last wire type selected will be retained by ED even where a new project and/or drawing
is created in which the wire type does not exist, by drawing a line in a wire type that does
not currently exist within a project, ED will automatically create the wires within the Wire
types interface.
- 109 -
8.8.3.2.2 Name
The name is what the wire will be called; you can assign any name that you choose, of up
to 10 characters in length. For every wire, that you create a new layer will be inserted into
your layer table. Wire layers are always preceded by PCAB, so you will know which layers
are for wires. In the wire type table illustrated previously, the layer names of the three
default wires will be: PCAB, PCABB, PCABPE, (the first wire A will always be assigned the
name PCAB, without an extension).
8.8.3.2.3 Colour
Double click on this field to set your on screen wire colour, as
this helps you more readily differentiate between wires.
8.8.3.2.4 Line Style

You can employ any line style you choose that is available to you
within AutoCAD. For information on how to load all of your AutoCAD
line style, refer to the AutoCAD manual.
8.8.3.2.5 Thickness
This field allows you to define a thickness to a particular wire type,
upon double clicking in this column, the following interface will appear, through which you
can assign a wire width.
You are able to specify to use mm or inches as your preferred thickness units by selecting
the Units options at the top of the interface. The option itself is simply to allow you to
improve the presentation quality of your drawings.
8.8.3.2.6 ANS (equipotential)

Double clicking here will allow you to set individual
automatic numbering systems for each individual
equipotential wire type within your project, or your
default database, (refer to General Wires for more
details on default wires). The numbering systems
- 110 -
assigned to default wires will not be affected by an ANS set in the project information card,
(refer to Automatic Numbering Systems and formulas page 41, for more details). Only
wires inserted into your Wire types for project…, will have the project information cards
ANS formula applied to them by default, you are able to change this at anytime, through the
following interface.
The ANS field will be applied to the MARK attributes of the ~MARK element only, this data
is used to differentiate between equipotential values in your project schematics.
Example
In the following illustration, you can see 3
fuses on a closed circuit on the
equipotential L4
Although 3 actual wires are required to

close the circuit, all the elements are
connected on a single equipotential.
TIP!
As an equipotential will only ever require 1 MARK value, you can ensure that after placing a
single wire mark, that all other marks placed on the equipotential automatically adopt the
same mark numbering by employing the Dependent mark command.
Dependent marks will only adopt the MARK information from an equipotentials main mark,
not the main marks wire name, (refer to the next section for information on wire names);
due to this it provides a fast way of ensuring that all the equipotential values on a single
equipotential, made up of multiple wires, have the same information applied to them.
8.8.3.2.7 ANS Name

Double clicking here will allow you to set individual automatic numbering systems for each
individual wire within your project, or your default database, (refer to General Wires for
more details on default wires). The numbering systems assigned to default wires will not
be affected by an ANS set in the project information card, (refer to Automatic Numbering
Systems and formulas page 41, for more details). Only wires inserted into your Wire Types
of project…, will have the project information cards ANS formula applied to them by default,
you are able to change this at anytime.
The ANS field will be applied to the WIRENAME attributes of the ~MARK element only, this
data is used to differentiate between the wires which go to make up an equipotential in your
project schematics.
Example
In the following illustration you can see 3 fuses
on a closed circuit on the equipotential L4, the
equipotential itself is made of 3 wires,
numbered using a COUNTER ANS formula,
they are numbered independently of the
equipotential MARK value L4.
- 111 -
8.8.3.2.8 Cable types
Assigning a cable type to a wire is not a requirement unless you have the Max module. By
double clicking on this field you will access the
cable types interface illustrated below, here
you are able to associate a true cable type,
and size (gauge) to your schematic wires.
To learn more about creating new cables, refer

to Cable types page 403.
By accepting a selected cable type and wire

size, the Cable types, Gauge, and Size fields
will be automatically filled in.
8.8.3.2.9 Gauge
Employment of this field is not a requirement for users who do not have the MAX module.
The field is linked with the Cable Types field, as the Gauge data noted in this field is
defined when choosing a cable type; refer to the previous section, for details on assigning a
cable types.
The field allows you to specify a gauge to a specific wire type, when wiring up physical
components within the max module, (or indeed when using PCP’s to form point to point
connections within your schematics), ED will automatically use the defined gauge to
connect components to one another, in max cabinets, or display the gauge data in reports
and/or the scheme drawings where PCP’s are used.
This system of wire assignment can be used as an alternative to specifying a cable Size; so
that by assigning a gauge you will have automatically applied a size to your wire type.
Should you choose to change the Size field the gauge will automatically be cleared, as ED
regards the Gauge as defining a cable size.
Example
When working in Inches or to AWG, (American Wire Gauge), standard, then Gauge is
employed to define a cable size. As a 14 gauge cable will have a size of 0.1390” the use of
gauge to define a cables size provides an easier way of working with fixed wire standards.
You may revise the information displayed in this interface, through the Section and colour
edition interface, refer to page 121 for more details.
8.8.3.2.10 Size
It is not a requirement for users who do not have the MAX module to employ this field.
The field allows you apply a wire conductor size to your various schematic wires, the figure
entered does not need to be exact, but only an estimate of the size required to handle the
load that it will bear. ED will automatically compare the figure entered against those
available in a selected cable type, when connecting components using the MAX module,
(refer to page 403 Components connection).
If you do not use max cabinets but employ PCP’s to form schematic point to point
connections, then you may also fill in the size field to add extra information to your reports
and/or your scheme drawings.
- 112 -
This system of cable assignment can be used as an alternative to specifying a fixed gauge
where you are not working to a wires standard, should you choose to change the Size field
the gauge will automatically be blanked.
8.8.3.2.11 Wire Colour

This field allows you to set the true, default colour of a cable. Unless
other wise specified in the max cabinet layout, using Section and
colour edition, this default colour will be applied to your wires, for the
purposes of reports and/or wiring diagrams.
By double clicking on the field the following interface will be displayed.
From here you can select an existing wire colour, and press the insert
button to enter a new one.
8.8.3.2.12 Mark Colour

This field allows you to set the on-screen colour of the selected wire
types main marks. This option allows you to quickly identify
between standard wire marks. By double clicking on the field, the
AutoCAD Select Colour table is displayed from which you can select
your preferred on screen colour.
8.8.3.2.13 Dependent Mark Colour

This field allows you to set the on-screen colour of the selected wire types dependent
marks. This option allows you to quickly identify main and dependent marks within your
scheme drawings. By double clicking on the field, the AutoCAD Select Colour table is
displayed from which you can select your preferred on screen colour.
8.8.3.2.14 Frozen Mark Colour

This field allows you to set the on-screen colour of the selected wire types wire marks
which have been frozen. This option allows you to quickly identify between standard wire
marks and frozen marks within your scheme drawings. By double clicking on the field, the
AutoCAD Select Colour table is displayed from which you can select your preferred on
screen colour.
8.8.3.3 Internal / External Jumpers
In addition to the Wire Types tools outlined in the previous sections, you are also able to
create Jumper cables for your scheme drawings.
8.8.3.3.1 External Jumpers

External jumpers allow you to define a physical connection between scheme terminals by
using a specific wire type. By creating a wire type called EJUMPER it will be regarded by
ED as an external jumper. External jumpers will cannot be numbered, however ED will
realise and report on the connection that is being formed.
A wire jumper is a physical wire or metal link bar connecting two or more components
together. An example of this would be a link between two terminals where the link is
removed to connect an optional circuit.
- 113 -
External
jumper
8.8.3.3.2 Internal Jumpers

An internal jumper indicates a link where the schematic shows connections between two
components, such as between an overload and a contactor. However the overload
physically plugs directly into the contactors.
Internal jumpers are recognised by ED, where the wire type is defined as IJUMPER
8.8.4 Toggle connections

This command allows you to modify your schematic PCP connections, or convert a T
connection to a PCP.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Toggle Connection
 Command line: CNXTOGGLE
 Module required: Premium version
If you have not chosen to employ PCP’s within your

project, upon selecting this command the following
message will be displayed:
By selecting Yes, ED will automatically activate the

connections option.
The command itself allows you to select any 3 wires forming a T connection, this will then
automatically deleted your current connection node. By left mouse clicking ED will cycle
through the different PCP connection types, when you have your preferred connection type
displayed, simply right mouse click to confirm, and the PCP will be applied.
Select one of the 3 wires Left mouse click to cycle Right mouse click to
though the PCP’s confirm you PCP, and end
available. the command; this will
automatically place the
node at the new
connection point.
- 114 -
8.8.5 Break wires
This command divides a cable into two parts.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Break Wire
 Command line: PCA
It also converts an apparent wire intersection

into a real connection. This then automatically
registers an intersection and places a node, as
in the example.
8.8.6 Marking wires - FAST

ED2010 has a new form of wire mark from previous versions, instead of a simple text item,
ED2010 uses an element called ~MARK, which contains a number of attributes to allow you
to obtain more information from your wires. To learn more about ~MARK elements refer to
page 255. Throughout the ED manuals reference is made to Main Marks, a Main Mark is
any wire mark that is placed using this command option.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Wire Mark
 Command line: TMNCA
NOTE
Marks placed using this command are regarded as Main marks by, dependent marks, (refer
to Dependent mark page 120), placed on the same equipotential.
TIP!
If you want to retain mark consistency in project updated from ED2002 or previous, you
may employ the Update text marks command, (refer to page 193), to have all your text
marks updated to intelligent MARK blocks.
ED regards lines in your project drawings as being individual wires which are connected to
one another to form a single equipotential.
The Mark wires command, allows you to place marks on your wires, and to number them.
8.8.6.1 General Wire Mark information
Marking wires is not essential for the correct completion of your projects; however it does
dramatically increase the quality of your automatically generated report information.
Placing wire marks are the first step toward numbering your drawings equipotentials and
wires, as without a mark, your wires may not be numbered. The command itself provides
you with commands to position marks in precise locations, either manually or automatically.
The command itself has several different options that enable you to assign your preferred
values, set a specific angle, unrelated to that of the line the mark is placed on; you are also
able to place marks individually, in multiple selections, or automatically dependent upon
your preference.
- 115 -
Marks automatically cut wire they are placed on, (erasing a mark, whether it is numbered or
not, will automatically remake or heal the wire); if for any reason a mark is moved away
from the cut it has made in a wire then
ED will automatically make you aware
that the, wire mark is ignored, as
illustrated below.
In the example the wire has been

highlighted to show the line grips, and
the arrow indicates the wire break
where the mark should be placed.
NOTE
Should you choose to move the mark, use the STRETCH command of AutoCAD.
Alternatively, it is advisable to erase the marks and place them again. Erasing a wire mark
will automatically remake or heal the wire break
Compatibility Note
Users with projects containing standard ED2002 or previous wire mark text can use the
new ~MARK elements in existing projects without any project intelligence imbalance. It is
recommended however, that in such cases the With Names (refer to page 56) option is not
employed, if users want to use wire Name options, then Aceri recommends that all mark
text is updated to ~MARK blocks, so that drawings have consistent quality of wire
information.
TIP!
If the Wire Mark Ignored error message appears in a drawing, but you can see no reason
for it carryout the following steps.
1. If the message is located on a particular piece of text, which is not a wire mark,
check the texts layer. ED identifies wire marks by their layer, MCAN* being the layer for
wire marks, if the text is in the layer MCAN… Change the layer and the next time you end
the drawing the message will be automatically removed.
2. If the message appears in the drawing where no text appears, type QTEXT into
the AutoCAD command line, and select to turn this option ON. Next do a REGEN, this will
Box all text within the drawing. If you choose to place text in a drawing, select its insertion
point but do not enter any text, the actual text will remain. Likewise if you deleted the
content from a text the blank text will remain. If this empty text is in a MCAN* layer then ED
will analyse it as a wire mark. By using AutoCAD’s ERASE command and removing the
blank text boxes, you will reduce the size of your drawing, and have the superfluous error
message removed.
The above points should only apply to ED2002 drawings or previous, where text has been
used for wire marks rather than ~MARK blocks.
When marks are numbered, they will automatically assume the ANS system for the wire on
which they have been placed. Refer to the following section, Wire Mark applications, for
more information on the different numbering types that maybe applied to wires, and
equipotentials.
Each wire mark can have up to 30 characters assigned through the ANS or value.
8.8.6.2 Wire Mark applications
Every mark is an intelligent element, and contains attributes which allow you to number
wires in a manner that will reflect information about various aspects of an equipotential, as
follows.
- 116 -
 MARK attribute This attribute, when numbered, will display information
relating to an entire equipotential. This Numbering is user definable for every wire type in a
project, through the Automatic Numbering System for Wire Marks; refer to page 108 Wire
types main display for further information.
The value L1 is held in the MARK attribute &

reflects the equipotentials numbering
The dotted line is indicative of

an equipotential
 NAME attribute This attribute is only available to you when working

with the MAX module. You must have chosen to employ Schematic connections With
names, in order to number this attribute. The numbering will display information relating to
the number of the individual wires that make up a single equipotential. This Numbering is
user definable for every wire type in a project, through the Automatic Numbering System for
Wire Names; refer to page 108 Wire types main display for further information.
The value 1 is held in the NAME attribute &
reflects the wire numbering
The dotted line is indicative of

a single wire that makes up a
part of equipotential L1
In the above illustration you can see two wires that make up the equipotential L1, these
have their NAME attributes numbered 1, and 4.
For more information about information noted to Wire Marks refer to Cable types page 122.
- 117 -
8.8.6.2.1 Two Marks per wire
There is another level of information that can be obtained from ED2010, when working With
connections, you may choose to have 2 Names per wire, which allows you to place two
marks on each wire in an equipotential to conform to KKS numbering standards.
By placing two marks on a wire you can effectively define the numbering for the wires origin
and destiny, (From To). If you choose to employ this system then Main Marks should be
used as opposed to Dependent marks.
Illustrated is an example showing three fuses

connected to one another using PCP’s. The
equipotential that they are connected on is L1, which
in turn is made up of two wires. By employing the 2
Names per wire option you will add information to
your reports, so that ED will know from your
schematic that L1 is connected From –F3 pin 2 wire
2 To –F1 pin 2 wire 4.
Depending upon the actual placement of the Mark

ED will analyse your information differently.
The mark closest to each element denotes the

elements wire no. (or name). In the above example
you can see that L1 2 is closer to –F3 than L1 4, so
that your report will regard the wire name 2 as being
associated with –F3, and the mark at the other end of
the wire, as being associated to the destiny element which in this case is –F1.
When using two names per wire, the main marks must
only ever be placed in locations where a single wire is
drawn. In the following illustration, there are two single
wires, which combine above the connection node.
Two wires
If a mark is placed on the wire which is indicative of two
wires, then ED will not discern between which marks
you want associated to which wire, and will display an
error message.
It is also advisable to use PCP “V” connections as

opposed to “T” connections, when employing this
system, as a T connection will not define the exact
connection between two or more elements and as such
your report information, will not be exact.
- 118 -
8.8.6.3 Wire Mark command options
8.8.6.3.1 Wire Mark: Mark-Name

As previously described there are two forms of wire information these being:
 Marks This is the value of an equipotential

 Wire Name This is the value
assigned to a wire that makes up part of an
equipotential.
Due to this you are provided with two options

for assigning a value to either or both of these
prior to placement of your marks, and
independent of any particular wire types ANS
formula.
By typing the letter M in the AutoCAD

command line, you will be shown the following
dialogue:
The dialogue is divided into two halves, the left side displays the Wire Marks currently
assigned in your project drawings, and the right the Wire names.
If you have not selected to use Connections within your project then the Wire Names on the
right will be greyed out and you will not be able to select or alter this list.
If you have already assigned wire marks and/or names within your project, you can select
any of them from the list. Alternatively you can enter a new value in the Current Value field,
accepting and placing the mark will place it with the value assigned.
ED will retain the value that you specify until you change it; this is very useful where you
want to assign an equipotential mark to many wires that occur in different project drawings.
To set the value back to 00, you can simply press the 00 buttons located beside the Current
Value field, of Marks and/or Names.
Checking or unchecking either of the current value checkboxes will disable or enable either
the Wire Marks and/or Names lists. This option is provided to allow you to more quickly
access the interface where you do not wish to select or amend a either the marks or the
names of wires.
If you have deleted a number of mark and/or name values from your project, but find that
the old values are still shown on the lists of available wire values, pressing either of the
Refresh buttons at the top of the screen will remove them.
8.8.6.3.1.1 Default values

Default values for Wire marks, and wire names are stored in a simple txt files held in the
ED\M directory. There are default value txt files Wire marks, and wire names, these are
called:
 MARKS.TXT Default Wire mark values

 WIREMARKS.TXT Default Wire name values
- 119 -
You can open this file using Notepad or any similar text file editor, by entering Wire marks,
and wire names that your company uses on a regular basis you are able to access them
immediately in a new project, rather than having to re type the data.
When the checkbox is activated the Wire marks, and wire names, lists will be taken from
the text files, the values displayed in the Assign wire number value dialogue will be
automatically listed in alphabetical order.
8.8.6.3.2 Freeze Marks

This option allows you to freeze a wire mark prior to placing it in the scheme, this allows
you to define a static wire values such as N, L, PE etc and freeze them upon placement, so
that the value will not be effected by Resetting wires, Batch processes etc.
8.8.6.3.3 Wire Mark: Angle

This option allows you to assign an angle to your mark, the ED default is set to match the
angle of the wire that the mark is being placed on, however should you want the mark at
any other angle, you can change the default by entering A in the command line and then
type your preferred angle, in the AutoCAD command line.
8.8.6.3.4 Wire Mark: Selection

This gives you the option of automatically placing a number of marks at the same time.
When Selection is chosen ED will ask you for a selection window, by boxing round a
number of wires; ED draws an imaginary line across the short side of the window and
marks all perpendicular wires crossing this line.
NOTE
Wire marks are automatically placed in the MCAB layer; the name of the wire that they are
placed on is added as an extension to MCAB. So that a mark placed on a wire type called
CABLE will be in the layer MCABCABLE.
8.8.6.3.5 Wire Mark: auTomatic

This option allows you to automatically have wire marks placed on your schematic wires.
By choosing this option ED will automatically place wire marks across your schematic
drawing.
The placement of the marks is dependent upon the

Preference settings; this may be defined through the Mark
Wires option, described in the following section.
By typing T in the command line, ED will analyse your drawing and place marks on the
middle of wires, where multiphase wires are involved ED will take the shortest wire as being
the setting out point for the wires below, see the illustration below.
NOTE
If this is activated as a Fast command ED will automatically place your wire ~MARK blocks
on your scheme wires as if the auTomatic option had been chosen.
- 120 -
8.8.6.3.6 Wire Mark: Pref
This allows you to determine the orientation of automatically placed wire marks, the options
being either Horizontal or Vertical, the following illustrations highlight the results that can be
obtained when using either.
Vertical Horizontal
8.8.7 Dependent mark

This command allows you to place ~MARK blocks on wires making up equipotential trees,
and/or individual wires. These dependent marks will automatically adopt information from
main marks, (a main mark is any wire mark that has been placed using the Marking wires -
FAST command).
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Dependent Marks
 Command line: DEPMARKS
The information adopted from a main mark varies depending upon whether you are
employing PCP’s (Preferred Connection Paths) or not as follows.
8.8.7.1 Adopted data, Without Connections
If you are working Without connections, (refer to Without connections page 56), dependent
marks will adopt a main marks equipotential MARK value only. It is a requirement that a
main mark be numbered in order for a dependent mark to adopt its numbering. If a main
mark has not been numbered and has a value of 00, numbering the dependent marks will
cause the MARK attributes to be filled in with a ? as illustrated.
Main Marks
Dependent marks
- 121 -
8.8.7.2 Adopted data, With Connections (MARKS / NAME)
If you are working With connections, (refer to page 56), dependent marks will adopt a main
marks equipotential MARK value. In addition the NAME will be adopted from the main
mark, regardless of whether the dependent mark is placed on the same wire or not.
You can change a dependent marks NAME manually if you choose, (refer to Reset wires -
FAST page 147 for more details), however this information will be for display purposes only.
ED does not analyse dependent marks information as it is, dependent upon a main mark.
8.8.7.3 Adopted data, With Connections (Cable information)
You have the ability to associate a true cable type to wires through the Wire Types interface,
(refer to Cable types page 111), the information from which will be automatically noted, in
both main marks and dependent marks, upon placement.
To ensure design flexibility, you may amend any wires cable type during your design
process. This can be achieved through the application of the Section and colour edition
command, within your scheme’s. If you revise the cable information of a wire which has a
main and dependent mark placed on it, both the main and dependent marks will
automatically have their true cable type, colour, gauge, and length revised.
Any dependent marks not sharing the same wire as the main mark, will not adopt cable
changes. This is because the wire that they are on, maybe different.
8.8.7.4 Updating dependent marks
Where a main marks MARK or NAME value is changed, and you wish to update the
dependent marks, you should employ the Numbering toolbars, Number wires - FAST
command. By selecting the dependent marks you wish to update the dependent marks will
be renumbered with the main marks new value(s).
8.8.8 Section and colour edition (scheme wires)

This option is only available to users who have the MAX module. The command allows you
to assign or revise true cable information to your scheme wires.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Section & Colour edition
 Command line: SECEDIT
 Module required: Premium versions
NOTE
The icon command should not be confused with the command, of the same name, found on
the MAX toolbar which is employed within cabinet drawings, (refer to Section and colour
edition page 406).
This command can be used to assign data to wires within scheme drawings, by selecting
the icon and individual or multiple wires, where the wires are employing the ~MARK block,
you are able to apply user attribute data, true wire colour, lengths and gauge sizes to your
wires.
Upon accepting a selection the following interface will be displayed.
- 122 -
Through this interface you have a range of options for
assignment of wire information, as outlined in the
following sections.
8.8.8.1 User attributes (wires)

By selecting this icon you will enter the standard Set User attributes interface, refer to Set
user attributes page 143 for further details on this command. The only notable difference
between the standard Set User interface and the user attributes available within Section
and colour edition is that the information assigned here will be noted to the ~MARK blocks
WIREUSER1-10 attributes, the values entered here will be independent of the USER.Dbf
where information is stored for standard elements, however the description field will be the
same for both.
8.8.8.2 Cable Types
Selection of this button will allow you to enter the cable type’s dialogue, as outlined in Cable
types see page 403. Information assigned here will then be displayed in Preferred
Connection Path reports, and/or within the ~MARK blocks attributes. Furthermore ED
when used in conjunction with MAX cabinets, the cable type defined will be employed when
connecting your cabinet components.
8.8.8.3 Cable colour
The Cable colour option allows you to select a true colour from the available list for the
selected cable. Use the Insert button to add another colour to the list of those available,
this information will then be displayed in Preferred Connection Path reports.
8.8.8.4 Length
The length field allows you to assign an approximate or true wire length to any selected
wire(s) this information will then be displayed in Preferred Connection Reports, as well as in
~MARK blocks, CLONG attribute.
8.8.9 Equipot. Tree
Highlights the equipotential tree when a wire is selected.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Equipotential Tree
 Command line: TREES
This is very useful when there is a complex drawing and you want to track one of the wires
through its equipotential, for example.
8.8.10 Cut wires

This command cuts the wires beneath the schematic elements.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Cut Wires
- 123 -
 Command line: CUTWIRE
It is a useful command to employ if you choose to draw wires after having inserted the
elements.
8.8.11 Fix Lines
This command will re-make all line breaks within your drawings, however it will not
reconnect wires that are broken by either elements and/or wire marks. This is exceptionally
useful for cleaning up drawings, which have been badly modified or created in AutoCAD.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Fix Wires
 Command line: UNPCA
Although ED will analyse drawing data regardless of it containing multiple line breaks, or
not; it is always good policy to keep your drawings as clean as possible, to ensure ease for
future amendments, as well as keeping the drawing size down.
8.8.12 Nodes - FAST

This command allows you to automatically place and/or update connection nodes in your
schemes.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires Put Nodes
 Command line: APO
Upon selection of this command the AutoCAD command line will prompt you to, define a
preferred node size:
Diameter of nodes in millimetres <1.0000>:
You may change the node size by entering a new value or right mouse click / press Enter to
continue the command.
Upon confirming the execution of the command, ED will analyse the drawing, and will
automatically delete any nodes that are redundant and place nodes on connection points
where none already exist.
ED considers a node redundant where one is placed on a single wire, as

illustrated.
Or at any point within you’re drawing, where two wires do not connect to
one another. Moving or copying wires can produce this type of redundant node placement
where a connection has been previously made.
- 124 -
Before After
NOTE
If this is activated as a Fast command ED will automatically place your wire nodes, using
the default node size.
8.8.13 Automatic equipotential
This command automatically assigns functions to selected equipotential elements. It is
best employed when there is more than one equipotential element connected to a single
cable.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires
 Command line: EQUIPOT
When this happens, the cross-references of the equipotentials should show the different
destinies, however the destinies shown may not be those that you want, and so through the
use of this command you are able to specify, which equipotential goes where; through the
use of functions. The purpose of the Equipot command is to assign a different function to
each equipotential element, and so allow ED to differentiate between the equipotentials
various destinies when carrying out an analysis.
The function will include:
 Prefix of the index of the total of blocks (i.e. 1, 2…)

 The character @
 The equipotential name (i.e. L1, 24V,...)
Equipot automatically places an index, in the XR_FUNCTION attribute of the equipotential

element. This is Index + @ + Mark, assigned automatically by column, (columns as defined
in ANS), in the following examples these will be 1@L1, 2@L1, 3@L1 etc. This will mean
that two or more equipotentials with the same index assigned to them will cross-reference
to one another.
In the example below there are six equipotential elements all assigned to the cable L1,
when the Equipot command is not employed, the cross-referencing to assign destinies to
the six equipotentials may not be those that you want.
DRAWING 1 DRAWING 3
DRAWING 2
- 125 -
When the Equipot command has been employed, (as demonstrated in the examples below),
the equipotential cross-reference, will assign the destiny locations of the equipotentials in
any manner that you wish.
DRAWING 1 DRAWING 3
DRAWING 2
DRAWING 1 DRAWING 3
DRAWING 2
When assigning functions you may find that the

numbering will seem to reset, so that where there
are 10 equipotentials, the numberings will be, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2, 3, 4, this is due to the last four
equipotentials are located in another column
within the drawing, as illustrated.
By moving the equipotentials so that they all are

within the same drawing column, you will achieve
the illustrated results:
8.8.14 Preferred Connection Reports

This option is only available to users who have the MAX module. Preferred Connection
Path reports provide information relating to scheme elements true point to point
connections, cable colour, cable type etc.
 Toolbar: Wires
 ELECTRICAL menu: Wires PCP Report
 Command line: PCPREPORT
- 126 -
To obtain exact point to point data from scheme drawings it
is a requirement that you employ PCP’s within your
schemes.
An example of PCP connections and the report information

that maybe obtained is illustrated below.
When analysing your drawings to create these reports, ED

will always start from one end of an equipotential or
another, and work logically from left to right or right to left.
For more information on reports in ED refer to List items page 337.

8.8.15 Drawing connections
This command allows you to define the true point to point connection for elements within
your scheme drawings.
The connections defined using this command, will be automatically applied when carrying
out a Connect up command in a MAX cabinet, in addition to being displayed in the
Terminals and devices editor.
When activated you should select a scheme elements pin, ED will then analyse the
connections data and the following interface will be displayed
The dialogue itself displays all of the elements on an equipotential, regardless of the
number of drawings an equipotential occurs in.
You are able to filter the elements based upon the location, zone and/or group applied to
them, or by the drawings the elements are located in.
- 127 -
The right hand side of the dialogue lists the element data including the drawing that they
are in, the elements SNA and pin number.
You can simply drag and drop one element onto another line to form a connection.
The options available to you through this interface are outlined in the following sections.
8.8.15.1 Filters
You are able to check on the Location, Zone, and/or Group options to obtain a filtered list of
elements that you want to connect.
When one of the options is checked on you are able to access the pop down to select any
one of the values applied within your project. By using these filter options you are able to
easily identify the elements that are in a specific area of your assembly.
The lower half of the filters section lists all of the scheme drawings within the project, ED
will automatically check on all the drawings where connected elements occur. If an
equipotential spans multiple drawings you can check on or off drawings and use the arrow
button to update the list of elements available for connection.
8.8.15.2 Pins
This section displays the elements available for connection, the drawing that they are on,
the elements SNA and pin number followed by the element that they are connected to.
In order to connect elements to one another you need to left click on an element listed in
the From column, then drag and drop it onto the element you want it to connect To.
Once a connection is made the connected elements will both be highlighted in green, (this
is to indicate that a single connection has been made, but that the connection is open as
there are still free connections available).
The selected element will then be displayed in the To column.

An example of how the connections can be formed is as follows.
The following illustration shows three push buttons and two contacts, by activating
CONNECTDWG and selecting pin 13 of element –S2, the connections dialogue will be
displayed.
The selected element will be listed at the top of the dialogue.
- 128 -
By left clicking and dragging –S2/13 onto –K1M/13 a connection is then formed, the From
field is filled in and the elements data are highlighted in green to indicate that there is an
open connection being made.
Then repeat the process for –S/13 to –K2M/13, as illustrated below.
To close a connection, drag –S1/2 to –S2/13, as –S2/13 now has both its pin connections
used its is automatically highlighted in red as illustrated below.
By repeating this process for –S1/2 to –S3/13 another element has all its connections used.
This now effectively provides you with a From To list for a specific equipotential.
8.8.15.2.1 Deleting a connection

If you find you have made a mistake while connecting your elements and need to make a
revision, you can double click on the pertinent To field, and delete the element SNA and
PIN data.
- 129 -
8.8.15.3 Order connections
When this option is selected the From To list data will be re-ordered in a logical manner. In
the following illustrations you can see the original ordering, and then after the Connection
Order button has been selected:
BEFORE
AFTER
 Toolbar: Wires
 Command line: CONNECTDWG
8.9 E lem en t c at eg o rie s t o o lb ar

This toolbar allows direct access to the elements contained within your selected project
library.
 Toolbar: Element Categories
 ELECTRICAL menu: Insert Element…
 Command line: INSELE
Within ED elements are categorised by type, such as, Fuse, Push-button, Terminals etc.
This is done by assign an element to a category within the Element information card.
The categories relate to the Element Categories toolbar icons. By selecting the Fuse icon
you will have a list of all the fuse elements within your library displayed.
- 130 -
When you select one of the icons from the toolbar, the following dialogue interface will
appear:
Apply specific element filter Element type filter buttons
Name and
description,
double-click
to insert.
Select Nº. of
Check for Automatic Elements preview,
previews to
Numbering when inserting double-click to insert
be displayed
8.9.1 Insert elements interface options

There are numerous ways of finding a specific element within your library, as well as
numerous options for the insertion of them into your drawings, all of which are outlined
below.
8.9.1.1 Standard Filters
At
the top of the element families’ interface, you will find a number of buttons, most of which
have graphic representations of standard electrical symbols on them. The graphics can be
changed within the Appearance configuration options, refer to page 412 for further details.
By selecting one of these, a filter will automatically be applied to all of the elements
contained within the library and only the elements of the type corresponding to your
selection will be shown.
- 131 -
Example
Upon selecting the button , you will be shown a list of all the elements that have been
defined to the category type (refer to Categories page 227 for further details), Fuses.
Certain of these icons do not have electrical symbol graphics on them, and these will
provide the following information:
8.9.1.2 Families
When selected you will be able to view all elements contained within your library.
8.9.1.3 Groups
These are elements that are grouped, for example, it is possible to have an entire circuits
defined as a group of elements.
8.9.1.4 A–J
These buttons are for your own usage, every button applies a filter to the elements in the
library, and you may want to create your own specific filtered lists of elements, you can do
this in the following manner:
Select the Filter button.
Scroll to the end of the list of filters, where you will find,
the filter names A – J.
Select the appropriate button name filter, A, B, C, D, E,

or F, H, I, J that you want to define.
Select the Edit button.
Create a new filter, and provide a filter title, (to learn

more about creating filters refer to page 21).
Accepting will save your filter to the specified button, so that any time you want to access
your filtered list you can do so by pressing the appropriate button.
8.9.1.5 Filter
This button allows you access to the Filter dialogue, (to learn more about creating filters
refer to page 23).
8.9.1.6 Checkbox options
There are two checkboxes within the element families’
interface in the lower left hand side of the screen, which are
defined as Options, these provide you with the following
options when inserting your elements:
8.9.1.6.1 Automatic numbering

If checked, the elements will be automatically numbered upon placement within the drawing.
- 132 -
8.9.1.6.2 Function
If checked, ED will automatically bring up the Set Function dialogue upon placement of the
element within the drawing.
8.9.1.6.3 Info. PLC for sub slots

If checked, ED will automatically bring up the Info. PLC dialogue upon placement of a PLC
Sub Slot element within the drawing. This option is only available for sub slots.
8.9.1.6.4 Set Catalogue and Record

If checked ED will automatically bring up the Set Catalogue and Record interface upon
placement of any element, (that can have manufacturer data applied to it), in a scheme
8.9.1.7 Angle
This pop down allows you to assign an angle to an element that is to be
inserted into a drawing, the options being 0, (as is), 180, 270, or 90
degrees. This provides greater flexibility when placing elements within a
drawing.
8.9.1.8 Rows
By increasing or decreasing, (maximum 99, minimum 1), this figure you will
alter the number of element previews displayed in the centre of the screen at
any one time; this is especially useful for users who want to locate elements
by their preview rather than by their name.
Please note that interface speed will be reduced, where a large number of previews are
shown at once.
8.9.2 Features
There are certain features unique to element insertion that you should be aware of these
are as follows:
After inserting an element, the drag image will be retained, to allow you to place the same
element multiple times. If you wish to insert a different element, you must either press the
Esc. key once or right mouse click once; either of these operations will return you to the
element insertion table, where you can select another element to insert.
TIP
When you have an element drag image on screen it is not necessary to use the families’
toolbar to return to the element insertion table, simply press the Esc. key once or right
mouse click once. If the element toolbar is used to return to the element insertion table you
will have to quit out of the table twice, when you have finished placing your elements.
If the element inserted is a Relay or element with contacts, its contacts will be
also inserted under its XR_MAIN attribute.
If you press the right button of the mouse over a preview

image, the program will magnify the selected element.
If you type a letter, the command will move to an element that starts with it.
This also works with a sequence of letters, (try rel to find relays).
- 133 -
When inserting elements with a pre-defined
Catalogue and Reference, they, and any
associated technical data, will be also be
annotated into the elements, catalogue, record,
and technical data attributes.
When an element is placed onto wires, the

element will automatically cut the wires. When
erased, the wires will be automatically healed.
8 . 1 0 S e t to o l b a r
This provides you with commands for the assignment of various data to your elements,
such as functions, setting a catalogue and reference, assigning accessories to an element
etc.
8.10.1 Set function

This command allows you to create a cross-reference link between elements, for cross-
referencing or to provide extra information to an element inside a drawing, as well as
allowing you to create multi-deck terminals for Max enclosures.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Function
 Command line: EFU
Where you have two elements with the same function assigned to them cross-referencing
will occur, except in cases where incompatible elements are related to one another.
Although creating a cross-reference link between elements is the primary function of this
command, you can also use it to add data to an element, a brief description, for example.
Upon selection of this command you will be prompted to select either single or multiple
elements, after confirming your selection the following interface will be shown.
- 134 -
Select to view
functions
currently in use
Double click on
any of the used
functions to
select it
Type in a
new or
existing
function
There are various options available to you within this interface as follows.
 When the checkbox is unselected then there will be a list of all assigned functions.
This will include any functions that are not to cross-
reference, a terminal name for example.
 When only cross-referencing is selected, there will be a list of all the assigned
cross-reference functions only.
 When selected you will see a list of those functions that are assigned to elements
within your project.
The first time an existing project is loaded,
no used functions will be shown until the
Refresh button is selected.
 When checked, this option will automatically change the all elements in a project
that have the same function. So that if you had a relay on
drawing 2 with a function of START associated to 3
contacts in different drawings throughout the project, by changing any one of the contacts
or the relays function, all 4 elements would be automatically revised.
- 135 -
NOTE
This option will automatically be deselected everytime you enter the Set Function interface,
this is to avoid the potential for mistakenly changing correctly assigned functions, project
wide.
This checkbox option is only available when Change

all related elements is checked on. The option can be employed in order to avoid
potential errors occurring; when checked you cannot apply a function to all related elements
project wide, where the function which is already in use. Only the selected element(s) will
have the “used” function applied.
The used functions can be filtered by the employment of the Only functions options, as
previously stated.
When the checkbox is deselected, all those existing functions that are displayed will be
greyed out and cannot be selected from the list. A new or used function must then be
typed into the Current value field.
This last item, is a time saving feature, which allows you to speed up the process of
assigning functions, where you have large amounts of data in a project, and find the
function assignment to be slower than you would like.
When you assign a cross-reference to an element, the data is written into the elements
XR_FUNCTION attribute.
8.10.1.1 Default functions
Default functions are stored in a simple txt file held in the ED\M directory. The default
functions txt file is called FUNCTIONS.TXT, (you can open this file using Notepad or any
similar text file editor), by entering a function that your company uses on a regular basis
you are able to access them immediately in a new project, rather than having to re type the
function.
When the checkbox if activated the functions list will be taken from the FUNCTIONS.TXT
file, the functions displayed in the Set Functions dialogue will be automatically listed in
alphabetical order, as illustrated.
8.10.1.2 Cross-reference types

There are different types of functions that you can use within ED that will allow different
information to be annotated to your elements when they are cross-referenced, as well as
certain functions that need to be applied to elements where they reference one another
across projects; these different types of function are outlined below.
- 136 -
8.10.1.2.1 Functional/Sub-functional blocks
These elements can have extra data applied to their cross-reference by assigning a
function followed by the character #, and a description of the particular element, for
example, STARTER#SECURITY, K1#START, etc. This will produce results as illustrated
below:
As you can see the description added after the function + # is added to the functional
blocks cross-reference information.
If you would like more information relating to cross-referencing then you should refer to
page 314.
8.10.2 Set catalogue and reference
This command allows you to assign a catalogue and reference to single or multiple
elements
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Catalogue & Record
 Command line: ERE
Upon selecting this command, and choosing the element(s) that you want to apply
catalogue and reference information to, the following interface will be displayed.
- 137 -
Filters may be to the catalogues and/or
references lists
List of
available
catalogues
List of references
available in the
currently selected
catalogue
Edition fields, you may write your Display of the currently

information directly to these fields to selected references
select a catalogue and reference information
Through this dialogue window, you are able to select any of the available catalogues and
references contained within ED. When you select a specific reference, you will be shown
all of the information associated to it, on the right hand side of the interface.
This information includes accessory reference data, wiring time and the price, as well as
any technical data associated to the reference, and of course a preview of the references
physical representation.
You can employ any one of three systems to help locate suitable reference data, these
being.
 Filter– Refer to page 21
 Quick search – Refer to page 21
 Family, element - reference association – Refer to page 305
This is only one of six systems, to define parts within ED.
8.10.3 Set accessory

This command allows you to apply accessories to elements within your scheme drawings.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Accessories
 Command line: ADDACC
When you commence the definition of accessories you are provided with tools that allow
you to increase, decrease, and quickly paste the quantities of each item; as well as being
- 138 -
able to add, edit, and delete accessories to any particular elements, once again, either
individually or in multiple selections.
Through the employment of the Set Accessories

command, you are able to add accessories from any
catalogue reference that you have available in ED.
You are able to select single or multiple elements within

your drawing, all of which will be displayed in the Set
Accessories dialogue illustrated.
Within this interface you can use the Shift and/or Control
keys to select elements, which can then have various
accessories assigned to them.
To assign accessories to elements you need to use
the Add icon, , when selected the standard Set

catalogue and reference interface will be shown.
By scrolling through and selecting the appropriate

catalogue reference you will be able to add any of
the accessories associated to it, directly to the
element contained within your drawing. As each
reference has the potential for 999 accessories,
this provides you with a very flexible system for the
assignment of accessories to your various
elements.
When you have located the appropriate reference

that you wish to add to your element simply, press
Accept to return to the Set Accessories interface,
where you will find that the selected data has been
added to your project elements.
NOTE
If you have selected multiple elements within the
Set Accessories interface, any accessories shown
in the lower half of the screen will be those that are
common to the all the selected elements.
You are now able to manipulate information relating to the accessories and the quantities of
each, through the employment of the following commands:
8.10.3.1 Accessories
This section covers those commands, which allow for the manipulation of accessories that
you have assigned to an element, by editing, adding, or deleting the associations.
8.10.3.1.1 Quantity, Units/Pack, Unit of measurement

These three fields are available to you after an accessory has been assigned; the Quantity
value is user definable and can be employed within BOM’s for example to add an extra
level of information to your reports, the Units/pack, and Unit of measurement fields can only
- 139 -
be set/changed from within the reference information card, refer to page 301 for further
details.
8.10.3.1.2 Edit Accessories

When selected you will have the set Catalogue and Reference interface displayed, from
where you will be able to select a different catalogue and/or reference for the selected item.
This operation can only be carried out on one accessory at a time.
8.10.3.1.3 Delete Accessories

By picking this icon you will delete any selected accessories. You are able to select as
many accessories as you wish through the employment of the Shift and/or Control keys, to
erase multiple entities simultaneously.
NOTE
No warning message is given prior to the deletion of the selected accessories.
8.10.3.1.4 Add Accessories

By selecting this icon you are able to add a single accessory at a time, to either single or
multiple elements, the control and/or Shift keys can be used to select multiple elements. By
selecting a reference from the Catalogue and Reference interface and Accepting the
information will automatically be added to the element(s).
8.10.3.2 Quantity
Every accessory by definition must have a quantity assigned to it, (minimum of 1), there
follows explanations as to how you can increase and decrease, copy, and paste the
quantities for each accessory.
8.10.3.2.1 Increase Quantity

To the left of this icon is a prompt box, which allows you to define the quantity of each
accessory that you wish to add to an individual accessory.
By using the up/down buttons you are

able to increase or decrease this
number, you can also manually type
in any number that you choose.
By then selecting the Increase Quantity icon the

specified number will then be assigned to the
accessory.
This number is added each time the Increase Quantity icon is selected; so that if you
specified a number of 5 and pressed the Increase Quantity icon twice the selected
accessory will have its quantity increased to 10.
- 140 -
8.10.3.2.2 Decrease Quantity
This icon operates in exactly the same manner as the Increase Quantity command, except
that it incrementally decreases the quantity of the selected accessories.
8.10.3.2.3 Paste Quantity

This option allows you to quickly set the quantity of selected accessories, by defining a
quantity in the prompt box, you are able to select individual or multiple accessories and by
pressing the Paste icon the quantity of these will be set to the number you defined.
Example
If you have an accessory with a quantity of 56 defined to it, by changing the quantity prompt
box to 20 and selecting the Paste Quantity icon, you will automatically have the accessories
quantity set back to 20. This option can also be employed to increase the quantity of any
selected accessories.
NOTE
The Quantity commands can all be employed on individual or multiple accessories, with the
Shift and/or Control keys you are able to select any listed accessories that you wish to
amend.
8.10.3.3 Displaying accessories in schematics
Accessories that have been assigned to elements through the use of the Set accessory
command, only, can be displayed in your drawings if you choose.
Dependent on whether you have checked the Analysis and annotations, Annotate
Accessories options or not, upon Analysing technical data the accessories will be noted to
your element USER* attributes.
The accessories data is written into an

elements USER* attributes; as this is optional,
and you may choose not to display this
information by either excluding USER*
attributes from certain project elements, or by
changing your elements attribute visibility
settings. ED has example elements where
USER attributes have been added, however it
may be necessary for the user to manually add them to preferred elements.
8.10.4 Set terminal
Set Terminal permits you to assign a terminal strip names.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Set Terminal Strip
 Command line: SETSTRIP
This step is indispensable for the numbering of terminals and must be carried out before
numbering.
When terminals are selected a dialogue box, (illustrated below), will be seen. In the
example shown below the terminal strip name has already been stated.
- 141 -
Double-click
on one of the
used names to
select it.
Type in the
terminal
strip name
After setting the terminal strip name, the command
asks you whether you want to show or hide the
visibility of the terminal strip name (PREFIX). You
can click on any terminal to switch the PREFIX
attribute ON or OFF.
8.10.5 Set cables
This command allows you to automatically assign conductors to wires within schematic
drawings, where the wires are connected to either terminals, and/or elements.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Cable
 Command line: SETCABLE
 Module required: Professional / Premium versions
When selected you can choose individual or multiple wires inside a drawing, upon
confirming your selection the terminals and connections editor cables interface will be
displayed, (refer to page 351), from here you can copy cables into your project, or use any
that already exist. Upon confirming the cables that you wish to use, you will be returned to
your drawing where the cable and conductor data will be automatically annotated to your
terminals and/or elements.
This command not only saves time but ensures that the design process is not interrupted
by having to leave the drawing environment.
Should you assign the wrong conductors to wires, or select the wrong wires, you should not
employ the AutoCAD undo command. Simply reselect those wires where you have
assigned the incorrect information, and upon entering the cables interface select the Cancel
button, this will return you to your drawing where you will find that the data has been
removed; furthermore upon re-entering the cables interface you will find that the conductors
have been made available once again.
If you select more wires than there are cables available, ED will
automatically create a new cable and set of conductors based
upon those, which you were assigning. So that if you selected 5
wires in your schematic and copied a cable with 3 free conductors
into your project called W001, ED will use these three conductors,
and then automatically create a new cable called W002, also with 3
available conductors and assign 2 of these to ensure that all your
selected wires are cabled.
- 142 -
8.10.6 Set zone, location and group
This command is used to assign a zone / location and group, to elements.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Zone, location & group
 Command line: ELU
When an element or elements are selected, you will be shown the following dialogue:
De-select to turn off list
Add a new Select from the

value list of used
Location
names
If two or more elements are selected, the program will update the zone and location of all
the selected elements to reflect your specifications.
The Group attribute is to distinguish a group of elements.

Example
In a project that contains four belt driven motors, all the component parts could have the
same zone and location.
The component parts related to a single motor can now be labelled for example Group1,
thus you can distinguish between the elements associated to the four, belt motor, which
occur in the same project and are to all intents and purposes the same.
In the example, you can see that the Thermal, Fuse, and Motor are all in one group,
GROUP-1.
- 143 -
You can also number elements, terminals, and wires by their location and zone so that the
assembly, (location), sub assembly, (zone), will define how and when element counters are
created, refer to Different counters for… page 52
8.10.6.1 Default values
Default values for location, zone and group are stored in a simple txt files held in the ED\M
directory. There are default value txt files for Location, Zone and Group, these are called:
 LOCATIONS.TXT Default Locations

 ZONES.TXT Default Zones
 GROUPS.TXT Default Groups
You can open this file using Notepad or any similar text file editor, by entering a location,
zone, or group that your company uses on a regular basis you are able to access them
When the checkbox is activated the Location, Zone and Group, lists will be taken from the
text files, the values displayed in the Set Location, Zone and Group dialogue will be
automatically listed in alphabetical order
8.10.7 Set user attributes

There are 10 user definable attributes available within ED the attributes are called USER1,
USER2…USER10, and are generated in the layer USER.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… User Attributes
 Command line: USERATT
The data assigned to these attributes is stored in

databases contained in your various project folders.
This allows you to generate reports containing
information, which is not provided for in any of the other
available ED database files.
You can assign up to 10 of these attributes to an

individual element, and can apply any information to
them, within your schematic drawings, that you feel will
enhance the quality of your projects data.
Each attribute has a length of up to 40 characters.
- 144 -
Once you have assigned the attributes to an element, you can define information to them
with the set user attributes command.
You are able to select individual or multiple elements in your drawings and upon accepting
your selection can assign information to them through the following interface.
8.10.7.1 Set User attribute interface options
The options available to you and the data displayed through this interface are outlined
below.
8.10.7.1.1 Selected elements

This interface window displays the elements that you have selected in your drawings, their
SNA, location, zone, catalogue, and reference data. You can use the control and/or shift
keys to select multiple elements and are then able to change their user attribute values at
once.
If you selected an element that does not have any user attributes defined to it, then the
lower half of the dialogue will be greyed out and cannot be accessed. If you select multiple
elements with varying numbers of user attributes assigned to them, you will only be able to
access attributes equivalent to the element with the lowest number of assigned user
attributes.
Example
If you select two elements one of which has 5 user attributes and another with 10, then only
5 user attributes will be available for edition.
8.10.7.1.2 User attributes

This interface window displays the attribute, description, and value fields. The attribute field
cannot be changed and simply acts as a guide so that you are aware of how many
attributes have been assigned to an element and what description and value is associated
to each.
The description field can be changed, however only 10 descriptions can be given per
project. The reason for this is that you may want to use these attributes data for a fixed
purpose in a single project, and to obtain report information relating to one or two of the
attribute fields only. If you allow the descriptions to contain mixed information that does not
correspond to any structure, your report data will be similarly confused.
By stating in a description field exactly what you want an attribute to be used for, you can
ensure that a project being worked on by multiple users will have attribute data continuity.
The values can be up to 40 characters in length and can contain any information you
choose. The value data can be seen in your schematic elements, and as previously stated,
can be used in the creation of project specific reports, and employed in BOM if preferred.
8.10.8 Set cable description

This command enables you to automatically annotate terminal or element cable description
information to conductors connected to terminals and/or elements.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Cable Description
 Command line: CDESC
- 145 -
To employ this command you should first

select the terminal or element to which you
want the cable description to be noted. Then
select the cables that are part of the terminal
strip, or the wires connected to the element
where you wish to have marks placed.
Example
To have created the above cable description annotation, I first selected terminal –X1 6 to
indicate that I wanted the description annotated here. I then selected the six wires below
the terminals, so as to indicate which wires I wanted marks to be placed on, by then
confirming my selection, (by either right mouse clicking, pressing Enter etc.) the marks, and
description were automatically applied.
To ensure that this commands correct functioning, you must have CDESC1IN,
CDESC1OUT, CDESC2IN, and CDESC2OUT attributes, assigned to your terminals. In the
case of elements you will require CDESC_* attributes.
Also you should employ the attribute visibility command to ensure that these attributes are
invisible.
8.10.9 Set terminal types
This command allows you to assign preferred terminal types to terminals within your
schematics.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Terminal Type
 Command line: SETTTYPE
Upon selection of the command you should pick the

terminal(s) that you want to assign types to, confirming
your selection will then call up the following dialogue
window through which you can select your preferred
types such as partition, end stop type etc. Such data
being automatically incorporated and displayed in
terminal drawings.
This ensures a more flexible way of managing terminal

information, so that users can define terminal type data
either in the drawings while designing circuits or within
the terminal editions interface.
8.10.10 Harness
The Harness command allows you to select any connector element and associate it to a
harness’ plug pin.
 Toolbar: Set
 ELECTRICAL menu: Set… Harness
 Command line: HARNESS
- 146 -
Upon activating this command and selecting a

connector the following interface will be displayed.
The upper half of the interface allows you to specify

the harness to which the connector is associated; as
well as specifying information which may not already
be associated to the harness, either in the library or
the project.
8.10.10.1 SNA
Where a connector is associated to a harness that has not been inserted into a project
drawing; you are able to specify the SNA that you wish connectors to adopt. By associating
a connector to a harness and then assigning an SNA, all other connectors within a project,
(that are associated to that harness), will automatically adopt the numbering.
8.10.10.2 Harness
This option allows you to define the harness you
wish your connector associated to. By selecting
the Harness button the following interface will be
displayed:
Here you are able to select the harness either from

the library associated to your project, or from any
harnesses that has been inserted into your project
drawings. If a connector is associated to a library
harness, the harness will then be available for
selection within the project. You can erase any project harnesses from those available by
selecting the harness, and pressing the Delete icon illustrated here on the left.
Harness data will be displayed in one of three colours within this interface dependent upon
the state of the harness pin data, the colours and meaning are as follows:
 Green Indicates that no harness pin connections are currently in use.

 Red Indicates that all the harness pins have been assigned.
 Black Indicates that only some of the harness pin connections are in use.
8.10.10.3 Location; Zone
Selecting either of these options will open the standard ED location zone and group
interface, through which you can specify the harness connector's physical location.
8.10.10.4 Catalogue and Reference
This option works in much the same way as SNA, in as much as, when specified to a
connector, which has been associated to a specific harness; it will be applied to any other
connector on the same harness.
This data will be filled in automatically where you have assigned a catalogue and reference
to a harness either in a project drawing, and/or within the harnesses element information
card.
- 147 -
If the harness has not had a catalogue or reference assigned to it you can select the button
to assign one through the standard ED Set catalogue and reference interface, (refer to
page 136 for further details of this command).
8.10.10.5 Connector / Initial pin
These options are only active where you have selected a connector element that has been
associated to a harness, as previously outlined.
They enable you to select the harness plug you wish the pin to be
associated with, by selecting from the Connector pop down list data, as
illustrated.
Once this has been done you may select a free pin found on the plug by selecting the Initial
pin pop down and choosing one from the list of those available, any pins that are currently
in use have a restriction symbol displayed beside them.
This provides you with a quick association system, which ensures that pin
data cannot be over specified.
8 . 1 1 N u m b e r i n g to o l b a r
With this toolbar you are able to number wires, elements, and terminals, modify numbered
items counters, as well as a tool for the fast modification of terminals.
8.11.1 Number wires - FAST

This command permits you to automatically number those wires whose marks and/or
names are 00 substituting them for a new value, defined through the ANS formulas for wire
marks and wire names, (refer to ANS formula for wires page 48 and/or ANS formula for
wire names page 48, for more information).
 Toolbar: Numbering
 ELECTRICAL menu: Numbering Number Wires
 Command line: NCA
The wires are numbered according to type, (ED automatically

creates a new counter for each type of wire within a project),
each wire can have a unique Automatic Numbering System
based on the wire types equipotential, and/or the wires making
up an equipotential; refer to Wire types main display, page 108,
for further information.
- 148 -
You can repeat wire numbers in projects; however there will be a short circuit error when
two different equipotential, (MARK), values occur on the same wire or equipotential tree, as
illustrated.
As terminals are transparent on the equipotential ED assumes

that a numbered equipotential has the same value on either
side, so that placing a mark above and below a terminal, and
numbering the two marks differently from one another, will also
create a short circuit. Should you wish to differentiate between
wires on either side of a terminal then the employment of
schematic connections, With names is recommended.
Depending upon the type of mark that you are numbering with this command, and the
options that you have chosen to employ within your project, different results will be obtained.
The two types of Mark that you can number with this command are as follows:
 Main Marks – Marks placed using the Marking wires - FAST command
 Dependent marks – Marks placed using the Dependent mark command.
8.11.1.1 Numbering Main Marks With names
If you are employing wire Names within your project, (refer to With names page 56), ED will
number your marks based upon your projects Numbering configuration, (refer to page 60),
the MARK value from the first wire mark encountered will be adopted by all other main
marks that share an equipotential tree.
Example
In the illustration the Numbering configuration has been set to Top to
Bottom, Left to Right. This is reflected in the NAME values of the
marks, as the first mark encountered has a name 1, the next
encountered 2 etc.
The first mark to be numbered, will define the MARK value for all
other main marks that share the equipotential tree, so that in the
illustration L1 1 is the first numbered mark and all the other marks
will then assume the same mark value of L1.
8.11.2 Numbering elements - FAST

This command numbers the elements annotating the numbering to the elements SNA
attribute, (this attribute is automatically created in the layer SNA).
 ELECTRICAL menu: Numbering Number Elements
 Command line: RENUM
- 149 -
The numbering will be adjusted to the
type of numbering defined in the -NB.S$Z
project information card, (Automatic
Numbering System).
-NM
Example
For the formula -NM the result of numbering the first fusible of the project will be -F1. In the
case of the formula -NB.S$Z, the result will be -F1.5B for a fuse in column 5 and in row A.
Refer to page 47 for more details on ANS formula for elements.
NOTE
Any element that does not have a symbols assigned within the element information card
will be numbered –0. It is very important to assign a symbol to any parent element that you
wish to number, for example, a relay. Child elements such as contacts will adopt the
numbering from their parent element and thus a symbol need not be applied within the
element information card. For more details on this, please refer to Symbol page 227.
The command may also be employed in cabinets to apply a secondary numbering system,
to physical components, and trunking routes.
Numbering
applied to
trunking routes
SNA taken from

scheme element
numbering
SNA2 applied when Numbering

components in a layout drawing
The numbering applied to cabinet components can be defined through the ANS formula for
physic components.
8.11.3 Numbering terminals - FAST

This command is used to number terminals that have been associated to a terminal strip,
through the employment of the Set terminal command.
- 150 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Numbering Number Terminals
 Command line: NBO
The command itself will number terminals in two ways simultaneously, it will number into
the standard COUNTER attribute; and will also modify the SNA attribute by putting in the
terminal strip name and the counter value, (as shown below).
SNA
Prefix Counter
It will use the counter adapted to the terminal strip defined for each terminal (for instance -
X1, -X2, etc.). You can choose which numbering system to display with the Attribute
visibility command, (refer to page 178 for further details).
8.11.4 Super numbering - FAST

The command Super Numbering numerates all the elements, terminals, and wires through
a selection carried out within a drawing.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Numbering Super Numbering
 Command line: SUPERNUM
Selection of the items to be numbered can be achieved through either a window selection;
or by typing ALL in the command prompt. This provides a fast way on numbering
everything in side a drawing, without having to use three different numbering commands.
8.11.5 Super reset-numbering - FAST

The command Super Reset-Numbering, renumbers all elements, terminals, and wires
through a selection carried out within the plan.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Super Reset Numbering
 Command line: SUPERRESET
This can be either a window selection or ALL in the command prompt if required.
NOTE
The reset and renumbered elements and/or wires, will use the last counter for the
numbering, so that if you want to reset and number 9 already numbered wires in a drawing
and you have not reset the wire counter to 0, the wires will be numbered 10-19.
- 151 -
8.11.6 Super copy-numbering
The command Super Copy-Numbering, allows you to select any number of elements, and
copy them anywhere within the drawing, when activated you may specify through the
AutoCAD command line to create multiple copies.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Super Copy Numbering
 Command line: SUPERCOPY
Once this has been done, all the elements will be automatically renumbered.
Original Super copy
Furthermore, any element with a function assigned to it will, when copied, have the copied
elements XR_FUNCTION filled out with the new SNA, numeration in order to avoid any
cross-reference errors.
Original Super copy
Where contacts that have been assigned a function are super copied, the function will be
erased automatically. This is so that ED does not generate cross-reference errors, as the
main element to which the contacts are associated
has had its function regenerated as described Original Super copy
previously.
Another benefit of using Super copy numbering

over the standard AutoCAD copy command is
when you copy terminal or elements to which
conductors have been assigned.
In the example above you can see that not only have the terminals been renumbered, but
that the conductor W001 has been copied and renumbered too and a new conductor W002
automatically created. This information will of course be automatically added into the
terminal and/or connections editor cables; the cable information being a direct copy of the
original cable conductor data, so that where you have 4 conductors for cable W001, you
- 152 -
would have only one conductor now available. Likewise, the copied cable W002 will have
one free conductor.
Terminals that have an alphabetical numeration, such as PE assigned to them, will not
have their numeration reset.
Supercopy numbering will also copy any accessories assigned to copied elements. So that
if you have used Set Accessories within your schematics, to add information to an element,
Supercopy numbering this element will retain the assigned accessory information in the
new (copied) element.
8.11.7 Counters
Through this command, you are able to visualise and modify the state of the element or
wires counter numbering, as well as being able to insert or delete counters.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Edit Counters
 Command line: CANUM
Select the Edit button to change the counter value.
Counter name: Double click to edit.

The screen options are outlined in the following sections.
8.11.7.1.1 Edit
The selection of this button will allow you to alter the counter numbering, location and/or
zone, and where wires are concerned the preferred numerical increments, through the
following dialogue screen.
Counter actual
values and
previous values.
- 153 -
It should be noted that where you are using the Different counters for… option, (refer to
page 52 for further details on this command), you will be unable to edit either the location
and/or zone of terminals cables or elements.
The Increment field allows you to specify an incremental numbering increase that you wish
to apply to a particular wire type, (incremental numbering is available for wires, and
drawings). By specifying an increment of 3 for example, your wires will be numbered 3, 6,
9, 12 etc.
8.11.7.1.2 Insert counter

Allows you to add a new counter to the list available.
8.11.7.1.3 Delete counter

Allows you to remove a counter.
8.11.7.1.4 Elements counters

The counters for elements are created with the letters of the elements’ symbol field found in
the element information card.
E.g., F for element SICH3, a 3 phases fuse, from DIN library

NOTE
The elements counters will be used in the automatic numbering, if the elements ANS
formula includes the parameter N. For further information, refer to ANS formula for
elements, page 47.
8.11.7.1.5 Terminals counters

The counter for terminals will be provided by the terminal strip name assigned.
E.g. -X1: for terminals assigned to -X1 terminal strip.
8.11.7.1.6 Wire counters

The counters for wires MARKS start with the text #Ca followed by the name of the wire type.
The counters for wire NAMES start with the text #Wi, so that if you are employing wire
marks, With Names, you would have two counters for each wire type.
For example, #Ca A for MARKS on wires of type A, #Wi A for NAMES on wires of type A. ,
#Ca PE for MARKS on wires of type PE, #Wi PE for NAMES on wires of type PE.
Where you have chosen to the option Same counter for…Wires, (refer to page 52), the
counter(s) for wires will always be #Ca, #Wi.
8.11.7.1.7 Drawing counters

Drawing counters are automatically created whenever a drawing is created within a project,
the counters always start with the text #DWG. When a drawing is deleted from a project, it
is necessary to change the #DWG counter in order to continue drawing numbering from a
specific point.
8.11.8 Fast terminal modification

This command allows you to manipulate the information of specific terminals within your
schematic drawings.
- 154 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Modify terminals
 Command line: MODBOR
By selecting a individual and/or multiple terminals the terminals editor interface will be
loaded; here you will find displayed those terminals, which are on the same equipotential as
the selected terminal(s). You may employ all of the tools available within the terminals
editor, (with the exception of terminal drawing creation), for the manipulation of specific
projects terminals. Refer to page 342 for further details relating to the terminal editor
options and commands.
8.1 2 R es et t o o lb ar
With this toolbar, you are able to reset wires, elements and terminals, force the numbering
of elements, terminals, and pins, and quickly assign a function either to an SNA or an SNA
to an element function.
8.12.1 Reset wires – FAST

This command substitutes the value of the selected wires marks and/or names, to the 00
default value or another, user definable, value.
 Toolbar: Resetting
 ELECTRICAL menu: Reset Reset Wires
 Command line: ECA
You may choose the 00 option for the marks and/or the names of the equipotentials or
wires when you wish to number them again automatically.
- 155 -
Double-click on any previously used value to select it
Enter a value or select the 00 button to reset value to 00 defaults.

You can use a fixed value, (for instance PE), when you want to replace the selected marks
with a new value.
The Refresh buttons are not available when using EDSQL module 6 and are connected to
an SQL server; this is due to the mark data being automatically updated in the list without a
manual Refresh being required.
TIP!
If you want to change or assign values to Marks, or Names only you can deselect the
checkbox of the value you do not want to revise. By doing this, any previously applied
value will be retained, and only the active field will be revised.
NOTE
When this is activated as a fast command, ED will automatically reset the Marks and/or
Names to 00.
8.12.1.1 Effect Frozen Marks
This option allows you to freeze marks when changing their value, or thaw wire marks
If the option is unchecked, then the reset wires marks command will function as described
in the previous section, in that it will only change the value of wire marks that are not frozen.
When checked ED will apply a new value and freeze all selected wire marks, where the
value applied is other than 00. If the value entered is 00 then ED will automatically Thaw all
the selected marks and set their value to 00.
8.12.1.2 Default values
Default values for Wire marks, and wire names are stored in a simple txt files held in the
ED\M directory. There are default value txt files Wire marks, and wire names, these are
called:
 MARKS.TXT Default Wire mark values

 WIREMARKS.TXT Default Wire name values
- 156 -
You can open this file using Notepad or any similar text file editor, by entering Wire marks,
and wire names that your company uses on a regular basis you are able to access them
When the checkbox is activated the Wire marks, and wire names, lists will be taken from
the text files, the values displayed in the Assign wire number value dialogue will be
automatically listed in alphabetical order.
8.12.2 Reset element - FAST

This command erases the numbering of a selected elements SNA attribute.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Reset Reset Elements
 Command line: RESELE
 Module required: ED /
Professional / Premium versions
For instance -F1, -Q11, etc. will be reset

effectively blanking the attribute value.
Before After
8.12.3 Reset terminals - FAST

This command will reset the numbering of selected terminals.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Reset Reset Terminals
 Command line: RESTER
As previously mentioned in Numbering terminals - FAST, every terminal has its numbering
annotated into two attributes, these being the Counter and SNA.
By selecting terminals with this command you will have all the numbering data associated
to your terminals deleted, however the terminal strip prefix that has been copied to the SNA
attribute will remain.
So that where you had a terminal with a counter value of 1, and an SNA value of –X1 1,
both attributes will have the number 1 deleted, leaving the counter attribute blank, and the
SNA attribute with the value –X1.
The main use of employing the command lies with terminals to which you have assigned an
alphabetical value such as EARTH, (this can be achieved through the use of Force terminal,
covered later in this chapter). So that where you have a terminal strip of 4 terminals
numbered 1, 2, 3, EARTH, using this command will reset both the numerical as well as the
alphabetical values.
NOTE
In no instance will the Reset terminal command delete or blank the terminal strip
information, this can only be achieved through the use of the Set terminal command, refer
to page 140 for further details.
- 157 -
8.12.4 Reset numerical terminals - FAST
This option operates in exactly the same way as Reset terminals, with one major exception,
where you have selected a terminal strip with numerical and alphabetical numbering
applied to them, only those terminals with numerical numbering will be reset.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Reset Numerical Term.
 Command line: RESNTER
So that a terminal strip made up of 4 terminals numbered 1, 2, 3, EARTH, will only have the
terminals 1, 2, and 3 reset, the terminal EARTH retaining both its counter and SNA attribute
information.
8.12.5 Force Marks

This command allows you to “freeze” a wire marks value.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Force Marks
 Command line: FMARK
When this option is activated you are given the following command line options:
Select or [Freeze/Unfreeze]
By employing the Freeze option you can select any wire marks and they will be “fixed”, so
that they will be unaffected by a Reset Wire Marks command. You must use the Unfreeze
option before you will be able to change the frozen marks value.
8.12.6 Force element
This command is used to manually force an elements numbering, (SNA attribute data).
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Force Element
 Command line: FELE
You can select individual or multiple elements, however where multiple elements are
selected you will have to enter the numbering data for each individual element, (ED will
automatically cycle through each element, moving left to right, top to bottom highlighting
each in turn).
The numbering data is defined through the AutoCAD command line prompt, where you will
be asked:
Enter the numbers of the highlighted element:
If the numbering you enter is already used by another element, you will be asked:
- 158 -
This element number already exists. Do you want to accept it? <Yes>:
By selecting yes, you will effectively have two or more elements with the same numbering
applied to them in your project drawings.
You should be aware that you will not be asked the above prompt where you have selected
multiple elements and are assigning the same value to them, this is because ED realises
that you are forcing the elements and are thus aware of the action you are taking.
8.12.7 Force terminals
This command allows you to force either or both the selected terminals strip name and the
numbering.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Force Terminals
 Command line: FTER
This system is very useful where you want to provide an alphabetical numbering system,
such as PE to a terminal.
If several terminals are chosen in the same selection, each terminal will need to be
numbered individually to your specifications, (ED will cycle through each selected terminal
from left to right top to bottom), and you will be prompted first to:
Type the name of the terminal strip of highlighted terminal <-X1>:
The bracketed value being the terminal strip value already assigned. The second prompt
will ask you to:
Type the name of highlighted terminal:
Unlike forcing elements, terminals, which are assigned the same name, will not prompt ED
to inform you that a terminal with the same numbering already exists.
8.12.8 Force pins

This command permits you to force the value assigned to a pin, to freeze or unfreeze, the
pin numbering of selected elements.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Force Pins
 Command line: FPOL
Upon activation you should select an element(s), after confirming your selection the
following interface is displayed:
- 159 -
Freeze/Unfreeze Selected
all selected elements
element(s) pins.
Selected Frozen /
element pin Unfrozen
values, double Pins.
click to
change value
Listed in the upper half of the screen are the selected elements, and their associated
location, zone, catalogue and reference, by selecting any of these the elements pins will be
listed in the lower half of the screen, as illustrated.
You can quickly freeze or unfreeze all of an elements pins, by selecting either of the
following icons:
Select to automatically freeze all of the selected elements pins
Select to unfreeze all of the selected elements pins.
When a pin is frozen, the Frozen column in the lower half of the screen will display an [X]
you can selectively unfreeze pins by double clicking on the frozen column of the pin you
want to unfreeze, this will change the column to [ ]
You can change the value of any pin, by double clicking on a pins, Value this will highlight
the existing value, and you can enter a new value.
Before After
8.12.8.1 Force pins as a script
When this command option is run as a script you are provided with three options, as follows:
FPOL [One/Unfreeze all/Selection]:
Which allow you to carry out the following tasks:
8.12.8.1.1 Force pins: One

When this option is chosen you are able to select any one pin of an element, and not only
force it, but also change its value; you can assign any value you choose to the pin, and it
- 160 -
can be of up to 12 characters in length. Once you have changed a pin number, it will be
frozen.
8.12.8.1.2 Force pins: Unfreeze All:

This option simply allows you to unfreeze any element pins which have been forced, this is
very useful if you have created a new project from one which is existing, for example, and
many of the element pins have been forced, as you are able to run a batch process and
simply unfreeze them all.
8.12.8.1.3 Force pins: Select

This option allows you to select individual or multiple elements and freeze all their pins
numbers.
This is especially useful when you consider that ED will always automatically number pins
according to the, order and type of contact, as illustrated below with the example of two
make contacts, associated to a relay.
Specification Order
You can choose to add contacts to a drawing without altering the order, which has
previously been set. Using the example above, if another make contact were to be added
to the left of the contact with pins numbered 13/14, and a cross-reference analysis carried
out the pins numbered 13/14, 23/24 will be reordered
23/24, 33/34. By selecting force pins and the option
SELECT, in the command prompt, all of the existing
contacts will retain their order, the newly inserted
contact will then be placed at the end of that order,
regardless of its position within the drawing.
WARNING!
If a contact associated to a relay has it’s pins forced to values not available on the relay, ED
will automatically remove the erroneous pin numbering and an error message will be
displayed on the contact, as it cannot be related to the relay.
8.12.9 Copy function to SNA - FAST

This command copies the value of the Cross Reference Function to the SNA attribute of the
selected element.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force SNA to Function
 Command line: FUNSNA
- 161 -
8.12.10 Copy SNA to function - FAST
This command copies the value of the SNA to the Cross Reference Function attribute.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Force Function to SNA
 Command line: SNAFUN
NOTE
For both the ANS to Function and Function to ANS, if the ANS and/or Function are blank
the ANS/Function value will be effectively deleted, as it will be overwritten by blank
information.
8.13 La yer utilities toolbar

This toolbar provides you with commands for the management of your drawing layers, with
facilities to control which layers are viewed while working in a drawing, as well as plot layer
independently of one another. In addition, you are given tools for the deletion of specific
layers, and other time saving layer command options.
8.13.1 Printing layers

There are two sets of Printing Layers within ED2010.
 Toolbar: Layer Utilities

 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… Printing Layers
 Command line:
8.13.1.1 For Projects

This controls the plotting and working layers, printed and seen when working within project
drawings. You can control these on a project to project basis, or change and manage the
default applied to any New projects, this is done by checking the Project Printing Layers....
radial button or the General Layers radial button in the Project printing layers interface, as
described in the following sections.
8.13.1.2 For Libraries
These layers control the plotting and working layers printed and seen when working within
library elements. It also shows or hides attributes in the elements previews displayed in the
element browser screen, by turning OFF either the XVIEW or the XPLOT on any layer this
layer will be hidden in the element preview. You can control these on a library to library
basis, or change and manage the default applied to any New libraries, this is done by
checking the Library Printing Layers.... radial button or the General Layers radial button in
the Library printing layers interface.
- 162 -
NOTE
It is not possible to apply either an XVIEW or XPLOT setting to the CURRENT AutoCAD
layer, ED will not effect the CURRENT layer. Obviously the drawing layer for elements is
layer 0 and as such it is good policy to use this as your Current layer, as the elements
within your drawings and generally displayed both while plotting as well as when drawing.
8.13.1.3 Printing drawings / library elements
There is a checkbox in the printing interfaces that reads Execute XPLOT. This
automatically executes an XPLOT command, (this being the keyboard command to activate
the Plot layer OFF command), that turns on or off layers based upon the Xplot settings in
your Project or Library Printing Layer interfaces.
8.13.1.4 Layer command options
Through this function, you can control the options XPLOT and XVIEW, which allow you to
specify which layers are plotted in either a library or a project, as well as those layers which
are displayed when working.
Every time a project is created, the default layers database is copied to the project directory.
The default database is called CAPESP, and it can be found in directory \ED2010\M.
The asterisk * as attached to layers MCAB and PCAB, for example, are used to indicate all
of a set of layers that begin with the same denomination, so that all wire layers will begin
PCAB, followed by the wire name, for example, a wire named EARTH would have a layer
name PCABEARTH.
Due to the fact that the layer PCAB* will effect all of the wire layers in a project, should you
wish to turn on or off wires more selectively you should insert all of your wire layer names
into the Printing Layers interface and delete the layer PCAB*, this will then enable you to
turn on or off each individual wire type in a project.
When the icon Choose layers is selected, the screen illustrated below will be seen, by
double clicking in the XVIEW or XPLOT columns you can toggle the layers ON or OFF.
Selecting the column headers, shown above, will arrange the layers into alphabetical order,
dependant upon the selection made.
- 163 -
Select between general layers and
project specified layers
Select Insert to create a new layer or
Delete to remove selected layer
Double click to
turn the layer to
be viewed On or
Off
Double click to
turn the layer to
be plotted On or
Off
Layer name followed by description
8.13.1.5 General layer

This option is the group of default layers that will be copied automatically into new projects.
8.13.1.6 Project plot layers…
Option is the group of layers, stored within that specific project only.
8.13.1.6.1 Layers
If you want to alter a layer description, by double clicking on the layer that the user wishes
to change, the name will be highlighted, as below, ready for your alterations.
8.13.1.6.2 Description
If you want to alter a description, by double clicking on the description that you wish to
change, the name will be highlighted, as below, ready for your alterations.
8.13.1.6.3 Insert
This option allows the user to add layers to a
specified project, if the layer is added to the
General Layers instead of a specific project,
these layers will be stored in the printing layers of
each project and are kept in a database called
CAPESP.
When Insert is selected, the illustrated dialogue window will appear; here the user can
specify the name, and description to be assigned to the new layer.
- 164 -
By checking either one of the XVIEW and XPLOT options, you can define which are to be
incorporated into that layer.
8.13.1.6.4 Delete
This option allows you to remove a selected project, or General Layer, if deleted from the
General Layers the entire database will be effected.
8.13.2 Xview
This function is for viewing the working layers that you want to employ within a drawing.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… Viewing Layers OFF
 Command line: XVIEW
 Module required: 1
Example
If you do not want to see the Wires Numbering layer, (MCAB*), while amending a drawing
you should select the Choose layers icon and then, turn OFF the XVIEW in that layer.
By double clicking in the XVIEW column, the user can toggle the layer ON or OFF.
Upon selection of the Accept button, you will be returned to the drawing where you should
execute the XVIEW command via the keyboard, or by select the View Layers OFF icon until
this is done the layer turned OFF will remain visible.
The layer MCAB will no longer be visible; this will not affect the MCAB layer when the
drawing is plotted.
8.13.3 Xplot
This function is for viewing the layers that the user wishes to be plotted within a drawing.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… Printing Layers OFF
 Command line: XPLOT
If you want to turn off plot layers they should select OFF in the XPLOT column, this is
achieved by double clicking on the desired layer in the XPLOT column, which will toggle the
layer ON and OFF.
By selecting Accept, you will return to the drawing and have the deselected layers
immediately turned off.
The XPLOT option will work when:
 Plotting drawings
 Batch process of drawings
- 165 -
 Batch process of elements
8.13.4 Erase layer
Erases all the entities contained in the layer that is indicated by the user.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… Erase Layer
 Command line: ERASELAYER
ED will provide no warning prior to the deletion of the user specified layer.
WARNING!
This command erases all the contents of the layers that are specified, even if they are
frozen.
8.13.5 Current layer 0

This time saving option allows you to change the current drawing layer to 0 by selecting the
Current layer icon.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… Current Layer 0
 Command line:
8.13.6 All layers ON

This option, when selected will turn ON all the layers, in the Layer table, with the exception
of those that are Frozen.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Layers… All Layer ON
 Command line:
8 . 1 4 N a vi g a t e t o o l b a r
This toolbar allows you to move between drawings without the need to return to the ED
browser screens, by allowing the fluid movement between elements and their physical
representations, and elements cross-referenced to one another.
8.14.1 Navigator
By selection of various element data, the program analyses the cross references, and
automatically moves from one drawing to another, between schematics, layouts, and
terminal drawings.
 Toolbar: Navigate
- 166 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Drawing Navigator
 Command line: NAVIGATOR
versions
The navigator locates the element, physical component and/or

terminal and zooms into a user-specified height; this
magnification can be specified by the user through the Configure
option located in the Main Manager, (refer to page 420 for further
details).
8.14.1.1 Cross-reference navigation
The most common use of the navigator is to move between cross-referenced elements this
maybe done simply by selecting an elements cross-reference data; this will then take you to
the other element involved in the cross-reference.
The Navigator can be used to move between the following cross-referenced elements:
 Contacts related to a coil (relay)

 Cross-referenced coil, (relay), location of a contact
 Functional Blocks and Sub-block locations
 Push button locations
 Equipotential cross-referencing
 Terminals
 Harnesses and connectors
8.14.1.2 Element physical component navigation

If an element does not have a cross-reference, but does have a physical component, then
the navigator will take you from a schematic element to it’s associated physical component
and vice versa.
Schematic Layout
8.14.1.3 Terminal navigation

Beyond navigating between cross-referenced terminals, and their schematic and physical
component representations, ED also allows you to move between schematics and terminal
drawings in the following manner:
- 167 -
Schematic Term. Drwg.
8.14.1.3.1 Navigate from Schematic to Layout

To move, from a schematic to a layout, you should select a terminal within the scheme, this
will then automatically locate and magnify the cross-referenced, terminal block within the
relevant layout drawing.
Schematic Layout
8.14.1.3.2 Navigate from Layout to Schematic

To move, from a layout to a schematic, you should select a terminal block within the layout,
this will then automatically locate and magnify the cross-referenced, terminal within the
relevant schematic drawing.
Layout Schematic
8.14.1.3.3 Navigate from Schematic to Terminal Drawing

To achieve this, you should select a terminal Prefix. Once done, you will be given the
option to save the schematic layout that you are in, prior to the terminal drawing being
loaded.
- 168 -
Schematic Term.Drwg.
The Navigator will then magnify the relevant information in the terminal drawing as
illustrated.
8.14.1.3.4 Navigate from Terminal Drawing to Schematic

To achieve this, you should select a terminal Number. Once done, you will be given the
option to save the terminal drawing that you are in, prior to the schematic drawing being
loaded.
The Navigator will then magnify the relevant information in the schematic dependent upon
the terminal number selected, as illustrated below:
Term.Drwg. Schematic
8.14.1.3.5 Navigating Connectors

Although harness and connector elements
maybe navigated between normally, (e.g. by the
selection of the cross-reference information), you
are also able to use ED's Navigate feature to
move from connector to connector. By selecting
a connector element, the following interface will
be displayed:
Here you will see all of the harness connections, however only some of these will be
available for selection, dependent upon which connector pins have been assigned within a
projects drawings.
One line of information will be highlighted in green, this is to illustrate the connector which
has been selected, any other harness connections available will be highlighted in black,
- 169 -
and by selection of one of these, followed by pressing the Accept button, you will
automatically be taken to that connector.
8.14.2 Go to previous drawing
This option allows you to move, at the push of a button to move to the previous drawing,
relative to the drawing that you are currently working in.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Previous drawing <---
8.14.3 Go to drawing
By selecting this icon, you will be placed in the drawing browser screen, from where they
can select any drawing you want to load that is available within your project.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Go to drawing…
8.14.4 Go to next drawing

This option allows you to move, at the push of a button to move to the next drawing, relative
to the drawing that you are currently working in.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Next drawing 
Example
If you are in drawing number 3 and select drawing Previous, ED will automatically load and
place you in drawing number 2.
The reverse occurs when you select drawing Next, as you will be moved from drawing
number 3, to drawing number 4.
If any amendments have been made to the drawing that you are working in, when either
previous or next drawing options are selected, ED will automatically save the amended
drawing data.
8.14.5 Go to previous element
This option allows you to move, at the push of a button to move to the previous element,
relative to the element that you are currently working in.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Previous element <---
8.14.6 Go to element
By selecting this icon, you will be placed in the element browser screen, from where they
can select any element you want to load that is available within your library.
- 170 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Go to element…
8.14.7 Go to next element

This option allows you to move, at the push of a button to move to the next element,
relative to the element that you are currently working in.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Navigation Next element 
8.14.8 Navigate Analysing

The toolbar Navigate analysing, which includes all of the Go to and Navigate commands
described previously, carries out exactly the same processes as those found in the
Navigate toolbar, however the commands analyse the drawing/element prior to the loading
of the destination drawing and/or element.
8 . 1 5 V a r i o u s to o l b a r
The various toolbar contains commands that cannot be grouped into any one specific
category, but which provide you with extremely useful tools, as outlined below.
8.15.1 Erase element

This command permits you to erase elements, which have been inserted into your drawing,
restoring the cables that were cut upon their insertion.
 Toolbar: Various
 ELECTRICAL menu: ELECTRICAL Erase Element
 Command line: ERASE
In the example shown below, you can see the results of this function when the element
Group-1 is erased.
When this command is used, all information

related to the element is erased from the
database as well, with the exception of the
elements counter, where it has been
numbered.
- 171 -
This command can also be used to erase components inside cabinet layout drawings.
The command itself is simply the standard AutoCAD ERASE command, and should you
prefer to use the AutoCAD erase icon you may do so, to achieve the same results.
8.15.2 Swap elements
The use of this command is to replace one element with another.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Swap Element
 Command line: SWAP
When this command is used, an element(s) should be selected from within your schematic
and/or layout drawing. Upon confirming your selection, you have the option to retain the
pins of the original element and/or the reference data.
You can determine whether to retain or swap the pins and reference data by entering
options into the AutoCAD command line as follows.
Parameters: Copy References = Yes, Copy Pins = Yes

Choose an option: [Select/References/Pin]:
By entering the Reference option, you will be able to

check the Set Catalogue and Record option in the
element insertion screen as illustrated:
After the element is swapped the catalogue and record interface will be displayed
automatically and you can specify a new catalogue and record.
By entering the Pin option ED will use the original elements pin numbers or those of the
element that is being swapped in.
Elements that have their pins forced will have these values retained by the element, for
which it has been swapped.
Example
If you chose to swap a contact with forced pin numbers 23, 24, for a lamp whose pin
numbers were X1, X2, the newly inserted lamps pin numbers would be 23, 24.
8.15.3 Edit element

This command allows you to move directly from a scheme drawing to a selected element,
where you can make changes.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Edit Element
 Command line: EDITELEMENT
Once you have activated the command, you should select the element that you want to
modify.
- 172 -
Upon selecting the element, ED will automatically load the element, you can then modify
the element appearance, attributes, etc.
8.15.4 Update blocks
This is an extremely powerful tool for the updating of physical changes made to individual
and/or multiple elements in a drawing, and can also be employed to absorb attribute data
from elements created in other software packages. You are also able to automatically
integrate text data into a more intelligent, ED attribute format, update the physical location
of attributes relative to an element; and reset element pin numbers to their default values,
where they have been forced or changed.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Update Elements
 Command line: UPB
 Module required: ED / Professional /
Premium versions
Upon executing this command you will be presented with

the dialogue interface.
The various options available can be used individually or

in conjunction dependent upon the results you wish to
achieve, the various interface options are outlined as
follows.
8.15.4.1 Elements to update

You have two ways of carrying out an update of blocks; you can choose either of the
following:
8.15.4.1.1 All
By checking this and pressing Accept, you will update every element within the schematic
you are working on.
8.15.4.1.2 Select
Allows you to pick only those elements that you want to update within the drawing.
8.15.4.2 Pin values as in library element
By selecting this checkbox you will reset the pin values for all, or only a selection of your
drawings elements. So that if you have a drawing with elements whose pins have been
changed in anyway from their original default values, you are able to quickly reset them to
their original values with this option.
8.15.4.3 Update block attribute data
This option will check ED’s databases and update the information contained in any of the
selected elements attributes.
This command option is very useful where you have added attributes to a library element,
and choose to update the block inside a drawing, as an attribute added to an element may
- 173 -
have information stored in a database that needs to be noted to it; such notations are
normally carried out automatically by ED when entering a drawing. By employing this tool
however you are provided with a way of refreshing you drawing, with any database
information that is pending notation, without having to end and re-enter the drawing.
The data will be automatically added to any new or existing attributes without the need to
either End the drawing, or carryout any project analyses
8.15.4.4 Attribute positions as in library element
If you have changed the physical location of attributes relative to an element
inside the element drawing, you can choose to update the attributes position
within your drawings by employing this option.
This option is illustrated in the example previews on the right hand side of the
interface:
8.15.4.5 Absorb text
This option is specifically for updating elements from old releases of ED, or any other
program that contains elements/blocks whose attributes are made up of ‘dumb’ text; and
which have to be manually changed each time an amendment is made.
To successfully carry out this command, you will need to have an ED element with the
same name as the old block that you wish to update; you will also be required to have
placed attributes into the ED element.
If you have met these criteria then when you carry out absorb text, the blocks dumb text
attributes will be absorbed into the ED element.
Moreover if the dumb attribute and the ED attribute share a similar spatial location relative
to the element, then any data, which has been assigned to the text attribute, will be
associated to the nearest ED attribute, causing the attribute to assume the text data.
Example
A relay with a dumb text attribute called NUMBER, has been given the value–K5. The
attribute NUMBER is in the same position relative to the relay as the ED attribute SNA,
because of this the attribute NUMBER is changed to SNA, and the ED intelligent attribute
SNA automatically assumes the dumb attributes value, -K5, thus ensuring no loss of data
while updating.
8.15.4.5.1 From any layer

This option allows you to absorb dumb text attributes into an ED element no matter what
layer they have been created in.
8.15.4.6 Attribute value re-assignment
This option is very useful when dealing with data that has been introduced into ED from
other programs. When you first bring a drawing from another package into ED, you will
have a number of elements whose attributes do not correspond to those found in ED.
To retain this information and change the attributes into those used as standard in ED, all
you need do is ensure that your project library contains an element with the same name as
that of the element that you wish to update, the element should also have a graphic
representation of the element to be updated.
- 174 -
The new element does not require any attributes within it, and the only specification that
needs to be made is the location of the BASE POINT.
It is important to ensure that the element base points are in the same location relative to the
element, prior to carrying out the update. If the ED element base point is in a different
position to that of the imported elements then when you update the element position within
the drawing will change.
If you take the example of a relay represented by a square, which has three attributes
associated to it:
RES
TAG
SITE
These three attributes all have data assigned to them, which you wish to retain while
swapping the RES, TAG, and SITE attributes for ED attributes:
RES to RECORD
TAG to XR_FUNCTION
SITE to XR_MAIN
All you need do is check the Attribute value re-assignment check box and then double click
in the old attribute column, and fill in the data RES, next to RECORD, TAG next to
XR_FUNCTION, and SITE opposite XR_MAIN.
When this has been done you should select to update the elements ALL at once, or by
SELECTION, and Accept, for the attributes to be changed while retaining the data and re-
assigning them to the ED attributes, you specified.
8.15.4.6.1 Insert / Delete

The Insert and Delete icons allow you to add new attributes to the existing default list and to
delete any unwanted attributes.
NOTE
Attribute maps, i.e. RES to RECORD, will be stored in the UPB dialogue until you either
remove or change the Old attribute/ED attribute. Leaving the program will not affect those
Old attributes/ED attributes that you have specified.
8.15.4.7 UPB for scripts
UPB is a very useful command to be able to apply in scripts, and as such you will be able to
employ, any of the following UPB commands to obtain specific results:
POSITION VALUE
COMMAND Geometry CN & cables Rest of Att. CN & cables Rest of Att.
UPB YES YES YES NO NO
UPB2 YES NO NO NO NO
UPB3 YES NO NO YES NO
UPB23 YES YES YES YES YES
- 175 -
8.15.5 Import elements
This command allows you to import elements directly into your drawings, based upon
nothing more than a simple text file, you can define how the text data should be sorted by
ED through the employment of an FMT format file header.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Import Elements
 Command line: IMPELE
These text files can be created from an external program or from a parts report.
This system allows you to effectively reverse engineer a project, by using the Define Parts
table you are able to insert elements into a project, which does not contain any drawings.
From this inserted data, you are able to generate parts reports, these can then be exported
as text files, and you are able to import the elements into schematics once the client has
accepted your budget, for example.
When the command is selected, you have to define the format, and import files, as these
will provide the element data, (the interface is shown below). Once this is done you will see
a list of the elements with their related data, by double clicking, and/or selecting an element
from the list and pressing the Import button, the element will be available as a drag image
on screen, you can then place your element anywhere within your schematic.
Once you have placed an element, you will be automatically returned to the Import element
screen, the element that you placed will have been removed from the list of those available
and you will be able to continue placing elements.
Import and format files are located by selecting the open icon. When selected a standard
Windows browse screen will be displayed, through this interface you can look through your
computer to locate the desired files.
8.15.5.1 Import file
This text file contains the element data that you wish to
import. The minimum information that can be included in
this file is a CODI field. This is essential as it provides the
ED element type that you wish to import, and without it ED
will not be able to provide a graphic representation of the
element you are importing.
You can find Impele txt and fmt examples in the

ED2010\F folder.
As you import and place elements within your drawing, they will be automatically removed
from the list; if you wish to place imported elements across multiple drawings, you can
press the Save icon, and the list currently displayed, i.e minus those items already placed
will be saved, allowing you to move to another drawing and continue importing data until
the list is empty. This then ensures that it is impossible to over specify elements within your
project drawings, as only one element may be placed once.
- 176 -
You should be aware of the fact that as you save the list, and choose to overwrite your
original; you will loose the information related to any already placed elements, which will be
detrimental should you choose to use the same import list repeatedly in different projects.
8.15.5.2 Format file
Format files are simply text files that provide header information relating to the data that will
be contained within the file, an example of a format file is provided below:
[Format]
Attribute=SNA,DENOM1,CODI
;Length=9,50,8
Separator=";"
;Filter=1,3
[Data]
These may be created in any standard text editor, there follows a break down of the data
that can be employed to create a format file.
8.15.5.2.1 Format
All format files must have a header [FORMAT] this denotes that the information below it is
to be used for the format information.
8.15.5.2.2 Attribute
This line should read Attribute= followed by the attribute names that you wish to include,
information relating to database fields can be found in the ED Technical Guide. Each
attribute name should be separated by a comma.
8.15.5.2.3 Length
This data is optional; a separator can be used in place of length data. The line should read
Length= followed by the field length of the relevant field, in the above example SNA has a
length of 9, information relating to database field lengths can be found in the ED Technical
Guide. The order in which the lengths are noted should correspond to the attributes order.
8.15.5.2.4 Separator
This data is optional, length data can be employed in place of separators. This line should
read, Separator=”separator to be used” the separator can be defined by the user, it should
always be placed in speech marks.
8.15.5.2.5 Filter
This data is optional, it allows you to state any attribute data that you do not want to have
within the format file so that if you had 3 attributes and entered a filter line of Filter=2 then
the second attribute would not be employed.
Should you wish to exclude a specific format line from the format file the line should start
with a ; this will cause the line to be ignored, in the above example, lengths and filters are
not being used.
8.15.6 Update titlebox

The command UPS updates the attributes of the title-box according to the data contained in
the Project and current Drawing information cards.
- 177 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Update Title Box
 Command line: UPS
Through the configuration options within ED you can choose to have this command carried
out automatically when opening a drawing, refer to page 415 for further details.
The situation, or physical location, of the annotations will depend on the location of the
relevant attributes within your titlebox element.
To learn more about creating, titleboxes, and the attribute fields refer to the ED Technical
Guide.
8.15.7 Find and replace

This command searches for text inside attributes and replaces it.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Find & Replace Att.
 Command line: FARATT
You can select single or multiple elements to be included in your search, if for example, you
want to search every elements attribute in a drawing you can do so by simply typing All in
the AutoCAD command line prompt; this will then include every element inside a drawing in
your search.
After selecting your elements, you will be shown the following interface, which includes a
list of the selected elements attributes.
Select to
select and
deselect all
attributes.
Available Select to
attributes to locate and
be searched replace
attribute
The options available to you through this interface are as follows.

8.15.7.1 Find
This field should be filled out with the attribute text that you want to locate and replace.
8.15.7.2 Replace by
Whatever information you type in this field will be used to replace the text you want to Find.
For example, the above illustration shows that the attribute text GROUP-1 is to be replaced
by the text Enclosure-3.
- 178 -
8.15.7.3 Available attributes
All of the selected elements attributes will be shown here, you can employ the Shift and/or
Control keys to select those attributes that you want to be included in your search.
8.15.7.4 Find:
8.15.7.4.1 Complete words

This checkbox provides you with the ability to set advanced search criteria, by checking this
option for example, you will ensure that only complete words that match the data filled in
the Find field will be replaced.
8.15.7.4.2 Match case

This checkbox allows you to only replace those words that match the case you have used
in the Find field.
8.15.7.4.3 Select All

This button will simply select all of the available attributes.
8.15.7.4.4 Replace
This button will search the selected attributes for the text defined in the Find field and
replace it with the information you have filled in the Replace by field.
8.15.7.4.5 Exit
This button will close the command interface.
At the bottom of the interface screen, you will be provided with information relating to the
number of attributes that you have selected; and after carrying out the Replace, the number
of attribute texts replaced.
8.15.8 Attribute visibility

This command allows you to select an element or elements, and through a window,
dialogue to select which of the elements attributes shall be visible, without the need for the
turning On or Off of layers which will then effect all of your drawings element attributes.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Attribute visibility
 Command line: ONOFFATT
versions
This is an exceptionally useful command for the selective viewing of

element attribute data.
The command itself controls two main items, these being
 Within libraries It offers an easy way of selecting multiple

attributes and setting their visibility to visible or invisible.
- 179 -
When an elements attribute is made invisible it will not be shown when inserted into a
drawing.
 Within project drawings It allows you to show or hide element attributes in
drawings independently of AutoCAD layers, or of the project printing layers defined. This
means that you can have all the layers in AutoCAD's layer table ON, and just use the
attribute visibility to turn on or off the data that you want to show on each element. The
project printing layers will not effect elements that have had attributes turned on or off with
Attribute Visibility.
8.15.9 ED translator
The translator function allows you to selectively translate, element attribute information, as
well as single and multiple text objects.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities ED translator
 Command line: EDTRANS
You are provided with a choice of languages to translate from and to, and are provided with
a default database containing approximately 1700 words and phrases; this database can
be directly accessed within ED, and you are able to easily add, edit, and delete the
database information to suit your company requirements.
New text objects can be automatically created in different languages, from any already
existing text objects contained within your drawings.
When employed, you will be required to select either single or multiple groups of elements,
as well as any text objects that you want to include in the translation process.
Upon confirming your selections the following dialogue interface will be shown:
Check to
select which
information
types to
translate Selected
attributes, to
be translated
Direct / mapped
database
access
Language to
translate from
and to
Select to create
new translated
text object
- 180 -
The screen itself is divided into three main parts, which provide you with a range of
translation options, as follows:
8.15.9.1 Types
If you have not selected an element, a text or multiple text objects then the checkboxes will
not be enabled.
Example
If you select only one text object to translate then only
the Texts checkbox will be available, the Multiple text,
and Attributes checkboxes being greyed out and thus
disabled. This is to speed up the translation process by
ensuring you do not have superfluous options available.
8.15.9.1.1 Texts
If you have selected a single text object this checkbox will be enabled. When checked the
text selected will be included in the translation process. You can deselect the box to
exclude any selected text objects from your translation, if you have included a text object by
mistake.
This option is directly linked to the Creation of translated text, (see below for more details).
8.15.9.1.2 Multiple texts

This option operates in the same way as Texts, described above, except it allows
translation of multi line text objects.
8.15.9.1.3 Attributes
This option is only enabled when an element(s) are selected, selecting
or deselecting the checkbox allows elements to be included, or
excluded from the translation.
You are also provided with options for mapping data from one attribute
to another within any of the selected element(s).
In the case that you deselect the checkbox, or simply do not select any elements, the
attribute window, (illustrated), will be greyed out.
When you have selected elements and wish to translate attributes, you should select those
attributes that you want to translate, by checking the appropriate attribute boxes.
By selecting any attribute the To field will become active, displaying a

pop down window, as illustrated.
Only those attributes contained within the selected elements will be

available for translation / mapping.
To simply translate an attributes information you should have the From

and To fields displaying the same attribute name. To map an attribute
you should select an attribute from the list available in the To field.
By choosing to map an attribute the translation will be performed but the translated text will
be mapped to the selected location, while the From attributes information will retain its
- 181 -
integrity. So that if you chose to map the attribute XR_FUNCTION, which had the value
THERMAL assigned to it, to TECHDATA03, the XR_FUNCTION attribute would remain
THERMAL but TECHDATA03 would be assigned the value TÉRMICO where you are
choosing to translate from English to Spanish.
8.15.9.1.4 Maintenance
By selecting the button you will access the translation database where you can add, amend,
or delete words and/or phrases.
Select to Insert new word or phrase.
Selecting any
header will sort the
translation data in
alphabetical order.
By double clicking on a particular word or phrase in any of the available languages, you will
be able to edit the information. The interface window is resizable to allow ease of use, and
there is a User language available, so that you can add a new language to the translator if
you so wish.
8.15.9.1.5 Insert
By selecting the insert button you will have a new blank line created with an empty prompt
box available for every language. To add information into this you should double click in
the appropriate language columns, and type the word or phrase you want included.
8.15.9.1.6 Delete
Selecting the delete button will erase an entire line of translation texts, in every language.
The line to be deleted is chosen by your selection of a particular word or phrase.
WARNING!
No warning is provided prior to the deletion of a line of translation, so this command option
should be used with care.
8.15.9.1.7 Find
This option allows you to find and replace
words and/or phrases within the translations
database, through the following interface.
8.15.9.1.8 Import
This option allows you to import translation
data direct from an XLS spreadsheet. The
options available are outlined as follows.
- 182 -
8.15.9.1.8.1 Configuration
By selecting this button you are able to define the
import configuration settings; that allow you to map
the source files field information, to ED2010
translation database field, through the illustrated
interface.
The interface itself has two columns the first of these

will read XLS spreadsheets headers, you can double
click on a field in the New names column, and define
the name of the source files field header, that will be
mapped to an equivalent ED field.
8.15.9.1.8.2 Preview
By selecting this button you will be able to see a preview of the data that is to be imported
into ED.
The configuration settings will define the manner in which the preview information is
displayed. So that the data displayed in the SPANISH field will match the name of an XLS
heading you have defined as mapping to this field, through your configuration.
8.15.9.1.8.3 View File

This option will automatically launch Excel in which you will be able to view the data to be
imported.
8.15.9.1.9 Configure
This option allows you to define the language headers that will be used in the ED
translation database. When selected you will enter a dialogue with a list of the current field
names, you can double click and change any of the New name fields. When this is done it
will be available for selection, when translating from or to.
8.15.9.2 Languages
The second section of the translator is for setting the language that you wish to translate
from, and the language that you wish information to be translated too.
Here you can see that English text, and/or

attributes are to be translated to Spanish.
The checkbox option, Numbers and other characters as separators, allows you to include
or omit separator characters such as ; _ : - . etc. during the translation process. With the
checkbox ticked the separator characters will be omitted from the translation process, when
deselected the separators will be included.
- 183 -
8.15.9.3 Create translated text
This final section of the translator will only be available when text objects have been
selected.
The function itself allows you to automatically create a new piece of text, from a selected
text object(s). If you do not wish to utilise this option during the translation process,
deselecting the checkbox will disabled the command.
This option will only be available where text has been selected; it cannot be employed
where only element attributes have been chosen.
Prior to using this item, two parameters must be set, the first is the language that you wish
to translate From, and the language that you want your new text to be translated To.
The To language that you specify,

provides the Layer information, so that if
you are translating a text into English, the
layer field (illustrated above), will
automatically become English.
ED will automatically create this layer and will assign the newly created text to it. If you do
not want to use the ED default layer, you can change the layer name to anything you
choose, by simply overwriting it, with a preferred name.
NOTE
When Create new text to be translated is employed, the originally selected text object will
not be translated.
The second option that needs to be defined is the X Y fields; these allow you to specify the
location, (relative to the text being translated), that you wish your newly created translation
text to appear. By specifying -5.5 in the Y field, for example, your newly created text will
appear 5.5mm below your originally selected text.
Example
A
5.5mm
B
Above you can see two pieces of text, the text A is my origin text from which I created a
new text object, translated directly into Spanish.
The translated text B, has been created in the ED default layer Spanish and as I filled in the
Y field with the value –5.5, and left the X field value at 0, the new text B has been placed
5.5mm below the origin text, (A). The distance between texts being from Justification to
Justification point which in this instance is Left.
Calculating the distance you require between 2 texts is made easy, as the created text will
adopt all of the origin texts characteristics, so that if you are creating a translated text from
an origin text which has a height of 5mm, and has a justification of Top Right, you will need
a Y coordinate of at least +/ –10, or else the two text objects will overlap.
- 184 -
8.15.9.4 Add text to be translated
During the translation process of either attributes or text objects, you may find that a certain
word, or phrase cannot be located by ED in the database. Where this occurs the Add text
to be translated dialogue window, (illustrated below), will automatically be displayed.
This dialogue allows you to add words or phrases to your database during the translation
process, as well as allowing you to quickly skip or omit words and/or phrases from the
translation.
Display of closest
phrase matches
Omit sentence
from
translation
process
Unidentified
word or
phrase
Omit word from

translation process
The options available to you within this dialogue are as follows:
8.15.9.4.1 Closest matches

Where a word is not found in the database, the two closest origin language matches will be
displayed at the top of the dialogue window. Depending upon the language you are
translating to, the corresponding Translation of closest matches will also be displayed.
8.15.9.4.2 Retry
This button will only be available when the context field, (described below), is altered in
some way, and the displayed closest matches, (described previously), are no longer
applicable. Selecting the Retry button will update the closet match fields to suit the revised
context field information. Please read the context section, below, for further details.
8.15.9.4.3 Omit sentence

Where multiple objects have been selected inside a drawing, it maybe the case that you do
not want to include all of them in the translation process. The Omit sentence button allows
you to simply skip a sentence and thus not have it included in the translation.
WARNING!
If a word or phrase that you want to omit from the translation process exists in the database,
the Add text to be translated dialogue will not be shown, and the word or phrase will be
translated automatically.
8.15.9.4.4 Copy / Paste
- 185 -
By selecting this icon the highlighted Translation of closest matches (described previously
and illustrated below), will automatically be copied and pasted to the language field you are
translating To, in the illustration below, German.
This text can then easily be modified and added to the Trans database, by simply selecting
the Add button, to provide you with a fast and easy way of revising and increasing your
available languages data.
8.15.9.4.5 Context
This field displays the word or phrase you want to translate, so that if you were translating
the phrase THERMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS, this phrase would be displayed.
If you find that you have made a spelling mistake, for example, it can have the effect of
providing you with an incorrect translation match. ED has allowed for such an eventuality
by giving you the option of amending the Context field data.
This can be done by simply selecting the context information and amending it in a normal
manner, by deleting a word or letter and typing in any replacement you require. Cutting,
pasting, and copying with standard Windows keyboard shortcuts, or pop downs are
available to you, within this dialogue screen.
Of course by changing your context field data in any way, the Closest matches displayed at
the top of the screen, and described previously in this section, may no longer be relevant,
and the Retry button, (illustrated here on the left), will be enabled, by selecting this button
the Closest matches will be updated in accordance with the revision you have made.
Due to the ability to change the Context field you are provided with some interesting options
where functionalities are used in conjunction.
Example
If you have selected a piece of text and you are using the option Create translated text, you
may discover that you have selected the wrong text object, you can simply enter the text
that you wanted to translate into the Context field, overwriting the text you selected, and
translate this instead.
Thus you have an option for creating a newly translated text object from a piece of origin
text, which does not even exist inside your drawing.
This is just one example of a variant use for the translator other than simply translating a
text or attribute data from one language to another. Other examples of translator uses are
not provided, as they fall outside the developers originally perceived command
functionalities.
8.15.9.4.6 Translation
This field displays the word(s) found in the database in the language you are translating to.
So that if you are translating THERMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS, into Spanish, and your
database contains a word or phrase match for THERMAL and CONTROL, but not
SYSTEMS, the translation would display the following:
- 186 -
This enables you to see how much of your phrase exists in the database. Any word(s) not
located in the database will be displayed in the Add sentence or word fields, (described
below). It is not possible to change the Translation field directly, as it is only a display of
information contained in the database; you must use the Add sentence or word fields to
supply the missing translation data.
8.15.9.4.7 Add sentence or word

This section has fields for each of the available database languages that you can translate
to and from. By filling data in these fields you are able to achieve two results
simultaneously, these being:
The direct addition of a word or phrase to the database in any of the available languages,
without having to go through the Maintenance option.
Providing a word or phrase in the To language, enabling ED to complete your word / phrase
translation.
Due to the fact that you will only ever enter the Add text to be translated dialogue if ED is
unable to locate a word(s) in the translation database, one of the language fields will always
contain a word(s).
The language field that the word(s) appears in will be dictated by your previously selected
origin or from language.
Example
I have selected the phrase THERMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS, which I want to translate
from English to Spanish, the Translation field, (described previously), shows the words
TERMICO CONTROL, so that I know at least two of my three words exist in the database
and will be translated. The English field in the Add text to be translated section contains
the word SYSTEMS, thus informing me that the language I’ve chosen to translate from,
(English), does not have an equivalent Spanish word(s) in the database.
You can tell which language you have chosen to translate To due to the fact that the
checkbox to the left of the field will be ticked and greyed out, as illustrated below:
Although all the other language checkboxes will be ticked, only your To and From
languages, will:
Have their checkboxes ticked and greyed out simultaneously. The language field which
does not contain any word or phrase, but which does have a ticked, greyed out checkbox,
denotes your selected To language.
Have a field which contains a word or phrase, thus denoting the From language.
By typing the Spanish word for SYSTEMS in the Spanish Language field, the Add button,
(illustrated here on the left and described below), will become activate, by pressing this
button the Spanish word will be added to the database and your translation will be carried
out.
- 187 -
You can also add the translation for a word or phrase in any, or all, of the other language
fields at the same time, simply by typing the word(s) in the various languages into the
appropriate fields.
Example
I am translating a phrase and find that the word SYMBOL does not exist in any languages
other than my selected From language. Although it is only necessary to add the translation
for this in the To language field, I would like to keep my database as comprehensive as
possible, and thus decide to translate SYMBOL in all of the languages at the same time.
I then fill out the fields as illustrated below:
By then pressing the Add button, my database is updated with the word SYMBOL being
added to the various language database fields as I have specified.
The checkboxes beside each language field are provided for your ease of use, if you never
translate to Dutch, for example, you can uncheck the box, and so deactivate that field; by
doing so you are able to use the keyboard Tabs to move between only those fields you
require.
8.15.9.4.8 Add
This button will add any data filled out in the language fields directly into the database.
Refer to the previous section for more details.
8.15.9.4.9 Omit word

This option allows you to omit a single word from the translation process, thus any word
that is not in the translation database and appears in one of the Add sentence or word
language fields can be omitted from the translation. This option can be very useful where a
client’s company name has been included into the translation process.
8.15.9.4.10 End
Select this button to exit the Add text to be translated dialogue window.
8.15.10 Reports into drawings

This option allows you to create any of the available ED reports in a dwg format.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Reports into drawings
 Command line: DWGREPORT
To create a dwg report you must first create a Data drawing type, by entering this drawing,
you are then able to use this command to create any ED report you choose, applying any
one of a choice of report matrix formats.
- 188 -
ED will automatically create as many new drawings as are required to complete the report.
So that if a report requires four pages, ED will list the information into the first drawing, and
will then automatically create the next three drawings.
To generate your own report content it is a requirement

that you have Crystal Reports. The information noted into
Dwg reports will be based upon these reports, so that
where you have a report that displays, Symbol, and
Description the first two columns of the report will have
symbol and description data annotated into them.
When the command is selected, the following interface

with will be displayed, through this display you are able to
define a number of parameters relating to the report that
you wish to create.
8.15.10.1 DWG Report Interface options
8.15.10.1.1 Matrix type

There are choices of matrices within the MONTA library of
ED that allow you to present your reports in different ways.
By selecting the Change button you will enter a standard
prototype selection interface as illustrated.
All report matrices are named RPT, for ease of location

and selection, and no other prototype should be used for
the generation of your reports.
8.15.10.1.2 Report type

Any of the report type categories in ED can be selected from a pop down list, the selection
of the actual report you wish to create, being carried out after you have set your reports
various parameters and moved onto the Next-> interface.
8.15.10.1.3 Nº of headers
Every report has a number of headers, as defined during their creation within Seagate’s
Crystal Reports. All ED reports have a standard number of headers, (5), the field has been
provided for any users who wish to create their own reports.
8.15.10.1.4 Lines per page

You are to specify in this field how many lines you wish to have displayed in a single
drawing; this should be changed to suit the paper size that you prefer to work with.
8.15.10.1.5 Print page number

As any report can have multiple pages, you can specify which page number you want to
have printed.
8.15.10.1.6 Page per drawing
- 189 -
You are able to define the number of pages that you want to have displayed in each
drawing; this should be defined dependent upon the paper size that you are using for your
projects.
8.15.10.1.7 Next->
Once you have set up your preferred parameters for the generation of your report, selection
of the next button will open a standard ED report interface, through which you can specify
the language that you want to create your report in, as well as the report itself. Selecting
Accept will then insert the report into your data drawing.
Once your report drawing has been created the AutoCAD command line prompt will display
information relating to the number of lines in the report, the page number(s) generated, and
the total number of pages that go to make up the full report, as illustrated below.
Initial line:1 End line:31 Page:1 to 2 of 1
If you choose to only create one report per page, with a low number of lines, you must
create a blank Data drawing for each further report page that you want to have; so that a
report of 5 pages, will require 5 data drawings, to display all of the information in; where you
are generating only one report per page.
8.15.10.2 Regenerating DWG reports
To automatically update your projects Dwg reports after having made revisions to your
drawings, you should employ a, Process drawings (Batch process), script (refer to page 84).
Supplied as standard with ED is a script called DWGREP.SCR, by running this script ED
will automatically recreate your Dwg reports to the same format, (and with the same filters
applied to each of them), for your entire project. To provide a quick and easy way of
ensuring your project reports are up to date.
8.15.11 Auto-new element

This command is a very powerful way to create new elements within schematic drawings.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Auto-new element
 Command line: NEWELEM
This command creates a new element from what is drawn in a schematic. It is similar to
AutoCAD WBLOCK, but it also creates the element within the projects associated library.
The elements' attributes can also be placed in the schematic drawing before using Auto
new element. In this case, they will be copied to the new element. Alternatively a graphic
representation of the element can be drawn and the attributes later added to the new
element with Definition wizard.
To employ the command you should have an exploded element, i.e an element
representation, (or anything that is not already an AutoCAD block), with or without attributes
associated to it within your schematic drawing.
By then selecting the command the Element Definition Window will be displayed, refer to
page 236, where you define the type of element you want to create. Upon selection of your
- 190 -
preferred element, an Element Information Card will be displayed, refer to page 227, where
you can fill in information pertaining to your element. If you are creating a Relay or element
with contacts you may specify the number of contact and their types at this stage.
Upon pressing the Accept button in the element information card you will be automatically
returned to your schematic drawing, the AutoCAD command line will prompt you to:
Specify base point or displacement:
Left mouse click on the point you want the employ as the elements insertion point. You will
then be prompted to:
Select objects:
You should then select the element you want to create and its attributes, if any. You can
use standard AutoCAD options such as Shift and Control keys with mouse clicks to select
or deselect items, once you are satisfied with your element selection you should right
mouse click, press Enter etc. to confirm your selection.
The element will then effectively vanish from the schematic drawing; this is because the
information has been moved to the element. By selecting to now Insert Element you will
find your element has been created within your projects associated library and is ready for
insertion into your drawing.
8.16 M iscellaneous ke yboard commands

The following commands are only available thorough the AutoCAD command line.
8.16.1 Align drawings

This command allows you to define the way in which ED sorts and displays your project
drawings within the Drawing Browser screen, as well as allowing for the addition or removal
of leading zero’s from or to drawings. It should be noted that by employing this command it
may effect certain performances within ED.
 Command line: ALIGNDWG

When activated the following interface will be displayed.
The interface can be broken down as follows.

8.16.1.1 Alignment
By selecting either of the check boxes for Numerical, drawings With zeros and/or
Alphanumerical drawings you are able to align the project drawings either to the left or the
right. By doing this you will change the way in which ED sorts the drawings, within the
browser. Any changes that you make will automatically be displayed on the right hand side
of the dialogue window, in the Project Drawings.
To change your sorting method back to the ED defaults simply select the Default Values
button.
- 191 -
8.16.1.2 Leading zeros
These options allow you to determine whether to add or remove leading zeros to drawings,
be they for Numerical, drawings With zeros and/or Alphanumerical. You are able to define
the number of zero’s that you wish to have before your drawing name or number by
increasing and/or decreasing the Minimum number of digits field. By selecting the Apply
button your changes will be applied to the drawings.
8.16.2 Capture drawing/element
This command permits you to capture an element or drawing either from the current project
or library or from another project or library, of your choice.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Utilities Capture Drawing

 Command line: CAP
When activated the following dialogue will be

displayed:
Upon selecting an element or drawing the

drawing/element that you are in will be ERASED
and the captured element/drawing will be inserted,
in it’s place.
8.16.3 Changemark
This command provides a fast way to revise specific
wire mark values within a drawing or project.
 Command line: CHANGEMARK

 Module required: ED / Professional
/ Premium versions
In order to correctly run this command it is a

requirement that you have a CSV file called
CHANGEMARK saved in the project sub directory.
Example
I want to run the changemark command in the project PROANSI, this requires that I create
and save a changemark.csv to the ED2010\Pr\Proansi folder.
The changemark.csv needs to contain the mark value

that you want to replace and the value you want to
replace it with, separated by a comma. There is no
limitation to the number of marks that maybe listed in
the CSV file.
8.16.4 Check catalogue
To correctly use this command you must have selected a catalogue, ED will then analyse
the reference data. Where ED locates an accessory that has not been assigned a quantity,
ED will automatically update this to 1, (the minimum number of accessories that can be
assigned).
- 192 -
 Command line: CHECKCATALOGUE
ED will also look for any accessories, which match the reference to which they are
assigned. Where this situation occurs ED will automatically delete the spurious information
from the accessories.
Example
A fuse reference 0003, would not logically have an accessory assigned to it of a fuse 0003,
as this would imply that the reference is in fact two fuses.
8.16.5 Change text

This command allows you to modify any selected texts content, style, layer, height, factor,
rotation, or inclination of a selected text, within a drawing, the text must be live and cannot
take the form of attribute text information.
 Command line: CT1

8.16.6 Edit attributes

This command allows you to edit the value assigned to an elements attribute. When this
command is used you will be prompted to select an element(s), after having selected these
and accepting your choice; the AutoCAD command line prompt will ask you to enter the
name of the attribute that you wish to change/replace; by typing in the attributes name,
SNA, XR_FUNCTION, CATALOGUE, etc. and accepting you will be able to enter a new
value.
 Command line: EDATT

Where multiple elements have been selected all those elements attributes will be replaced
with the new value that you assign.
8.16.7 Copy elem./terminal info. to wire/element
This command does in fact have an icon, however the command itself has multiple uses,
the first and foremost is outlined in the PLC’s chapter 17, the second use of this command
is to allow you to copy any elements pin, SNA, or Counter numbering directly to your
equipotential wire marks, an individual wires name, or another connected element.
 Command line: PLC2WIRE / COPYATT

The only criterion that must be met is that no value is assigned to your
wire marks prior to using the command, (e.g. the wire mark value is set to
00); and that the element is not numbered. You can choose to number
wire marks or elements by selecting one of the options displayed.
- 193 -
ED will automatically bypass terminals when copying data, for example, in the following
illustration the pin data will be copied from the motor to the 00 wire marks.
Before
After
8.16.8 Apply unique contacts to scheme elements

This command allows you to apply unique contact data to elements within scheme
drawings.
The command can only be used on elements defined in the associated project library as
Relays or elements with contacts, (refer to page 240).
When the command is activated you should select the scheme element, this will display the
Contacts Definition screen, (refer to page 231), where you can define the contact types and
their pin numbers. After applying the contacts they will automatically be displayed below
the element.
 Command line: PINLIST

8.16.9 Update attribute text styles
Where you have changed attribute text heights, and/or styles you are able to automatically
update these style changes within your drawings simply by using this command; all of your
elements will be automatically selected and the changes that you have made to the your
attribute text style will be applied within your drawing.
 Command line: UPDSTYLE

8.16.10 Update text marks

This command will automatically convert all ED2002, (or previous), wire marks text,
contained in the layer MCAB*, to intelligent ~MARK blocks. ED will automatically absorb
the existing wire mark information into the ~MARK blocks MARK attribute.
 Command line: UPDTEXTMARK

After running this command it is advisable to check your layers to ensure that the Mark data
you want to display is turned on, and/or off.
8.16.11 Find and convert text to marks
This command will search for text, close to, or on wires, that are drawn in the layer PCAB.
- 194 -
 Command line: SEARCHMARKS
Where text is found ED will cut the wire and change the text to the layer MCAB, this makes
the text into a wire text mark. This process can be followed by an Update text marks
command, to provide the wires with their full intelligence potential within ED2010.
8.16.12 Trim block names

This command allows you to trim the name from all blocks inside a drawing.
 Command line: CUTNAMES

Upon activating the command, the command line will prompt you to enter the:
Block name prefix to remove:
By entering the prefix that you wish to remove, ED will rename all the blocks in your current
drawing, by deleting the prefix.
Example
If my current drawing contains terminal elements KLEMMO1, and I enter a prefix to trim of
KL upon accepting my choice, all the KLEMMO1 elements will be renamed to EMMO1.
This command is especially useful when converting drawings from other electrical software
packages.
8.16.13 Move
This command is the standard AutoCAD move command, but with improvements to help
speed up drawing modifications.
 AutoCAD menu: Modify Move

 Command line: MOVE
There are two ways to move elements, either activate the command and select an element,
or simply drag and drop the element to a preferred location.
When moving an element ED will automatically heal the wires where the elements are
moved from, and break the wires where the element is moved too.
Dragging and dropping elements will also automatically heal and break wires; however it is
strongly recommended that the AutoCAD Snaps are activated in the AutoCAD Tray settings.
- 195 -
9 L AYOUT TOOLS
electrical designer has specific commands for the edition and creation of cabinet layout
drawings. This chapter contains information relating to some of those toolbars which are
most commonly used, and which provide commands vital to the generation and
maintenance of layouts, and basic cabinet drawings.
9.1 La yout toolbar commands

These commands are essential for the generation of the cabinet layouts.
9.1.1 Insert component

This command is used to insert components into the layout drawings.
 Toolbar: Physical Layout

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Insert Component
 Command line: EDLAYOUT
This commands dialogue interface

includes a full list of all the elements
contained in your project schematics,
which have not already been inserted
into the cabinet, and/or wiring diagrams.
As components are inserted into your

cabinet or wiring diagram they will be
deleted from the list of those available;
this ensures that you cannot insert the
same component twice.
It should be noted that wiring diagram

and cabinet components are
independent of one another, so that if
you have 3 fuses that are inserted into
your cabinet, upon entering your wiring
diagram they will be available for
insertion.
Should you wish to insert multiple

components at the same time you can
do so by using the Control and/or Shift
keys.
- 196 -
If you attempt to insert a component into the
layout drawing or wiring diagram, which has
not had a catalogue and reference assigned,
an error message will appear allowing you
the option to Define Parts.
A catalogue and reference must be assigned for every component as this defines how the
element will be graphically represented in the cabinet and wiring diagram.
9.1.1.1 Insert Component interface options
Other features and commands available through this interface are outlined below.
9.1.1.1.1 Mirrored
This check box allows you to mirror a component(s) during insertion; this can be very useful
in wiring diagrams where you wish to display internal/external pin information on either side
of a drawing, as the same component may be used to display external information to the
left and right of the drawing, for example.
9.1.1.1.2 Filter by…

This enables you to create filtered lists of your components for insertion. The location and
zone options have drop down lists that show all of the Location and Zones applied within
your project. You may select these in any combination to obtain filtered lists of the
components for insertion.
9.1.1.1.3 Angle
This pop down allows you to define a preferred angle at which to place your components
within your enclosure.
9.1.1.1.4 Shade options

By checking one of these options you are able to insert your selected component into the
cabinet with that shade type applied to it. The options directly correspond to the standard
shade options available within AutoCAD. These options can prove to be extremely useful
where you are mounting components into a cabinet, which you want, displayed in 3D.
9.1.1.1.5 Co-ordinate
When inserting components you are able to select the co-
ordinate location that the element will be placed in.
By selecting one of these co-ordinates and pressing the Layout

button, a particular cabinet view will be loaded, (dependent
upon the UCS view that you have defined). You can create as
many co-ordinate views as you wish, beyond those supplied by
ED as a default.
Wiring Diagrams, unlike cabinet layouts, do not require Co—ordinate views beyond
AutoCAD’s default WORLD ucs view, and may be inserted in any place within a WD.
- 197 -
9.1.1.1.6 Element spacing
If you have selected multiple components for placement you can specify an offset distance
between each of the components by entering a value into the Element Spacing field.
ED will then auto space the elements when they are placed in the cabinet.
NOTE
It is a requirement that the base point of the physical components is in the centre of the
element footprint.
9.1.1.1.7 Component Information

This window provides you information related to your components as follows:
9.1.1.1.8 Component
Name of the element as defined in the schematic drawings.
Element symbols library description of the component.
9.1.1.1.10 Surface, Width, Height, Depth, Diameter

Sizes defined in the manufacturer catalogue reference card.
9.1.1.1.11 Physic library

Physical library assigned to the component.
9.1.1.1.12 Physic element

Physical elements assigned to the component.
The listed elements are sorted by the component name.
The size and physical element information is extracted from the manufacturer (catalogue)
and reference, which is assigned to the components. So that, only components assigned a
manufacturers reference will include sizes and a physic element. Use any one of the
systems of definition to assign a catalogue and reference before placing an element into
the layout.
9.1.1.1.13 Adopt
The adopt button is useful for inserting components into a location, which is occupied by an
orphaned element. An orphan component has no actual relation with a schematic element;
this situation can occur when a cabinet or wiring diagram is copied, or when an already
inserted cabinet or wiring diagram component has its element erased from a schematic
drawing, or when a Batch Process, Reset Con_Pro / Cnx_Pro is run.
ED carries out automatic consistency checks on layout drawings and wiring diagrams to
ensure that the information that they contain is correct in relation to the schematics. So that
if an element contained in your cabinet or wiring diagram, is not found in your projects
schematics, ED will assume that the element has been deleted and you therefore have
incorrect information inside your cabinet drawing or wiring diagram.
- 198 -
As elements are inserted into cabinets or wiring diagrams they adopt the layer
corresponding to the co-ordinate you specify for them, i.e. World, End, Plan, Front, etc.
If you should re-insert an element, which has been deleted from a scheme, it will appear on
your list of components that may be inserted into your cabinets and wiring diagrams. If this
element already occurs in the cabinet drawing or wiring diagram but is shown as being
orphaned, you are able to Adopt the item, by pressing the Adopt button and selecting the
component. This will then cause the selected element to be changed to a standard layer
and for the component to be removed from the list of items available for insertion into your
cabinet or wiring diagram.
9.1.1.1.14 Adopt all

This command functions in the same manner as adopt, except it will analyse the entire
cabinet drawing and adopt all orphaned blocks, for which there are elements available.
9.1.1.2 Defining the size of the component
Not all manufacturers references have dimension data applied to them, ED creates all the
components placed in the cabinet in 3D, (so that you can carryout clash detection),
because of this applying a size to a part is a requirement before it can be inserted into the
cabinet.
If you have selected to insert a component that does not have size information applied to
the reference then the following dialogue will be displayed automatically.
By filling in a height, width, and depth a 3D cube or rectangle will be created, by applying a
depth and diameter a 3D cylinder will be created.
- 199 -
Once the dimensions have been entered and you press accept the information will
automatically be written into the manufacturer’s reference. So anytime you use this part
number again in future AEX will automatically know the sizes of the part.
9.1.2 Insert terminal strip

This command is used to insert terminal strips into cabinet layouts and wiring diagrams.
The dialogue of this command includes all terminal strips from schematics that have not
already been placed in the current layout drawing. It should be noted that wiring diagram
and cabinet terminals are independent of one another, so that if you have 3 terminals strips
that are inserted into your cabinet, upon entering your wiring diagram they will also be
available for insertion.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Insert Term. Strip
 Command line: LAYTERM
4.1.2.1.1 Mirrored
This check box allows you to mirror a terminal during insertion; this can be very useful in
wiring diagrams where you wish to display internal/external pin information on either side of
a drawing, as the same component may be used to display external information to the left
and right of the drawing, for example.
9.1.2.1.1 Angle
This pop down allows you to define a preferred angle at which to place your terminal strip
within your enclosure.
The dialogue information window displays the following information:
9.1.2.1.2 # Terminals
Quantity of terminals in this terminal strip.
9.1.2.1.3 Terminal Strip

Name of the terminal strip.
Library element description of the component.
9.1.2.1.5 Width, Height, Depth, & Diameter

Sizes defined in the manufacturer catalogue.
9.1.2.1.6 Physical library

Physical library assigned to the terminal.
9.1.2.1.7 Physic element

Physical element assigned to the terminal. Terminal strips are sorted by name.
- 200 -
The size and physical element information is extracted from the manufacturer reference,
and assigned to the terminals. Only terminals assigned a manufacturer catalogue and
reference will include sizes and a physical component representation; as with elements
terminals must have a catalogue and reference assigned to them for you to be able to
insert them into a cabinet.
NOTE
If you attempt insert a terminal strip and/or an element into a cabinet where catalogue and
reference information has not been assigned, ED will supply the following prompt:
Checking the Yes option will take you to the Define Parts table where you can define the
required information
9.1.3 Erase component
This command permits you to erase components, which have been inserted into your
cabinet. Where components have been cabled all connections will automatically be broken
upon deletion of the component.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Erase Component
 Command line: ERASE
When a component is deleted from a cabinet, and where it exists within the schematic
drawings, it will be made available in the list of components to be inserted.
The command itself is simply the standard AutoCAD ERASE command, and should you
prefer to use the AutoCAD erase icon you may do so, to achieve the same results.
9.1.4 Scaling the cabinet

This command allows you to changes the current scale of the cabinet. It scales the cabinet,
components, trunking and wires. In addition, it scales the components ANS attributes to
the values fixed in the configuration, in order that component numbering can be read.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Scale cabinet
 Command line: LAYSCALE
The command shows the current scale and asks for a new one. The new drawing scale is
at your discretion (1:2, 1:2.5, 1:0.1, etc.).
9.1.5 Test layout

This command can be used in either schematic, layout drawings and/or wiring diagrams, to
test whether elements exist in cabinets and/or schematics, and schematics and wiring
diagrams.
- 201 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Test Layout
 Command line: TESTLAYOUT
If the command is used in a schematic drawing, it will check the layout drawing to see if the
components are already inserted in the cabinet. Likewise if used in a layout drawing it will
check the schematic drawings, to ensure that the components have equivalent elements
contained within them. If used in the wiring diagram ED will analyse the schematic
drawings to find out if the elements exist.
The components of a layout drawing will be considered absent, (orphaned), where:

 The elements in the schematics no longer exist.
 The components are copied manually in the layout drawings.
 The current layout drawing was copied from another project.
 A Batch Process – Reset Con_Pro / Cnx_Pro has been run.
The components of a wiring diagram will be considered absent, (orphaned), where:

 The elements in the schematics no longer exist.
 The components are copied manually in the wiring diagram.
 The current wiring diagram was copied from another project.
In any of the above cases, components will be placed on one of the ABSENTIN… layers.
The elements of a schematic drawing will be considered absent, (orphaned), where:

 No layout drawing exists.
 The layout drawing contains no components.
 The components in the layout drawings have been erased.
 The components are copied manually in the layout drawings.
 The current layout drawing was copied from another project.
In any of the above cases, elements will be placed on one of the ABSENTIN… layers.
NOTE
The Undo option in this command changes all elements in the ABSENTIN… layers back to
layer 0.
9.1.6 Trunking
The trunking command within ED serves two purposes within ED, the first is to allow you to
indicate a router within your cabinet drawings. This is available with ED’s module 2, when
placed in a Max cabinet however the trunking itself is intelligent and will provide you with
information pertinent to your cabinet design such as, fill factors, no of wires passing through
the trunk, total area used etc.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Trunking
 Command line: TRUNKING
- 202 -
When selected the following dialogue will appear:
The trunking command allows you to place

trunking within your cabinet layout, you can
choose to select a trunk from a list of default
sizes, or you can create your own by specifying a
width and height, which is not already specified.
9.1.7 Intelligent trunking (MAX Module only)

All trunking types, are intelligent and provide you with useful information relating to the
length height and width of a trunk, the trunking fill factor, the number of wires contained
within a specific piece of trunking, the total area currently being used within your trunk, as
well as providing you with the ability to segregate wires, by specifying that certain
equipotentials cannot pass along specific trunks.
9.1.7.1 Trunking attributes
Trunking created in ED2010, is intelligent, in that it contains attributes, which will provide
you with useful information relating to your cabinet layout.
TOTAL AREA WIRES DENSITY

SIZE
ALLOWED SNA2 CATALOGUE RECORD
The trunking command allows you to place trunking within your cabinet layout, you can
choose to select a trunk from a list of default sizes, or you can create your own by
specifying a width and height, which is not already specified.
9.1.7.1.1 Total Area

The total area taken up by wire bundles within the trunking.
9.1.7.1.2 Wires
The number of wires within the trunking, this number will adjust as wires are added and/or
deleted.
9.1.7.1.3 Density
The percentage fill of wires within the trunking, ED assumes the worst scenario when
working out this calculation. The percentage area used by a wire bundle within the trunking,
this is based upon worst-case scenario calculation, (i.e. all the wires within the trunking are
side by side), and takes into account the cross sectional area of your cables.
9.1.7.1.4 Size
The length, height and width of a piece of trunking.
- 203 -
9.1.7.1.5 Allowed
Allows you to define which wire type cannot be routed through a specific piece of trunking,
this allows trunking segregation.
NOTE
All of the above attributes automatically adjust to suit changes that are made to wiring that
they contain, for example, a trunking fill percentage will reset to 0% when all wires within it
are disconnected or deleted.
9.1.8 Trunking sizes

Trunking is available in either Inches and/or mm, dependent upon the type of router that
you want to use in the creation of your cabinet drawing. By selecting the mm or Inches
radial checkboxes you will toggle between routers available in Standard English or Imperial
units of measurement, or metric trunking.
You can choose to create your own size trunking, in either mm and/or inches and are
provided with two methods for achieving, the first is to amend the size of a piece of trunking
from the available list, the second option allows you to insert a new trunk and specify the
size you want this to be.
To change the size of an existing trunk, you should simply double click in either the Height
or Width column, (dependent upon which you want to change), this will allow you to type in
your new trunk sizes.
To create your own sized trunking you will need to press

the Insert icon, illustrated here on the left. This will create
a new line in the height / width columns, here you can fill
out the desired size for your new trunking; if a trunk size is
repeated you will be unable to end the command, and will
be required to fill in another size.
When a new trunk is inserted it will automatically be

placed at the end of the default list, you are able to sort
the list by height or width sizes by selecting the column
headers Height / Width.
You can edit your list of available routers at any time by

selecting the one you wish to remove from the list and
pressing the Delete button, located to the right of the
Insert button.
9.1.8.1 Trunking types

There are three types of trunking that you can choose to employ within
your cabinet; these are Trunking, Virtual, and Connectors.
9.1.8.1.1 Trunking
This is the real router that will contain your component wiring, and which
will be purchased and installed in your cabinet; it will be automatically
created in 3D, and will be shown in your printed drawing.
- 204 -
9.1.8.1.2 Virtual
This type of trunking enables you to indicate the route that you want single or bundles of
wires to follow within the cabinet, but which you do not want placed within a real piece of
trunking.
So that, virtual routing provides you with a perfect tool for locating wire bundles, in your
cabinet, that you want to be contained within a conduit, or held with Spiro banding, or ty-
raps.
As you obtain all the benefits associated with max trunking you are able to access cross
sectional areas of wire bundles within your cabinet, and so obtain automatically calculated
aperture sizes. This feature also ensures that you are able to make allowances, for the
space that will have to be made available for your true wire bundles, not contained in the
cabinet trunking.
All virtual trunking is automatically placed on a hidden layer, and thus will not be seen in
your printed drawings, due to this and the fact that it is not possible to connect components
in standard module 2 cabinets within ED, virtual trunking is only recommended for users
who have the Max module.
9.1.8.1.3 Connectors
These are used to connect wires from components placed on the cabinet chassis with
those mounted onto the door, for example. In ED, the cabinet drawings show the chassis
and door next to one another, due to this you will always be obliged to place two
connectors, the first defines where the connector will start and the second where the
connector will end. It is not a requirement to use connectors in standard ED module 2
cabinet layouts.
The Distance field is directly linked to the connectors option, it allow you to fill in the true
length or depth that you want the connector to be, this information is essential to ED as it
goes into calculations made on the length that your wires will need to be to connect to one
another.
To ensure that your connectors are placed within the trunking on the door and chassis of
your cabinet, it is prudent to view the cabinet in 3D, as this will provide you with a better
idea of where the connectors are really located relative to your trunking.
9.1.8.1.4 Equipotentials not permitted

This tool allows you to specify which wire types are not allowed to pass through a specific
piece of trunking. You can specify as many types of wire as you require for omission from
any piece of trunk.
To ensure that a certain wire type is not allowed to pass through a piece of trunking you
should simply fill in the name of the wire type wire, BUSS, for example, if you want to
exclude multiple wiretypes you can do so by putting a comma , after a name, so that if I
wanted to exclude BUSS, and wire 220V I would fill in BUSS,220V in the equipotentials not
allowed field. Of course this can be a time consuming business where there are a large
number of wire types which you want to exclude; so you are also able to employ wild card
variables. So that if I wanted to exclude all wire types in the 400V range I could simply fill in
4*V and this would stop any wires beginning with the number 4 and ending with the letter V
- 205 -
from being allowed to pass through the trunk, as with individual wires you are able to use
the wild card variable multiple times, by employing a comma separator.
9.1.8.1.5 Upside down

This checkbox, allows you to specify which way up a trunk will be, as all trunking is
automatically drawn in 3D. By checking the upside down box, you will be able to place a
piece of trunking on a door and it will be drawn so that its front face is toward the chassis.
When the upside down box is not checked the default for trunking is for the front face to be
toward the back of the cabinet door.
9.1.8.1.6 Place trunking on…

After having selected the size and the type of your trunking you will need to specify the
location in the cabinet that you wish the trunking to be placed.
The standard co-ordinates that you can choose from are as follows:
All of these views are standard AutoCAD UCS views, but which, (with the
employment of the Panels toolbar), you are able to define and locate
quickly.
The number of views that you can have is unlimited, you can create as
many UCS AutoCAD views for your cabinet as you require, for placement
of components within your cabinet. Any UCS views you create will
automatically be added to the Co-ordinates list within the Place trunking
on…dialogue.
9.1.9 Edit trunking
This command allows you change individual or multiple pieces of trunking.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Edit Trunking
 Command line: TRUNKEDIT
When the command is activated and a

piece(s) of trunking are selected the
following dialogue window will appear:
This allows you to change any of the

standard items relating to trunking, such as
the trunking units of measurement, the size,
it’s segregation wire types, (where you are
using the MAX module), if it should be
regarded as being upside down or not, and
whether it is real trunking or virtual. The
only items, which cannot be changed, are the actual location of the trunking, its overall
length, and that it cannot be changed from a piece of trunk into a connector.
Once you have made your changes in the interface selecting the Accept button will return
you to the cabinet drawing where the trunking will be updated. Trunking fill factors will be
automatically updated where the size of a piece of trunk has been enlarged or reduced. If
- 206 -
you have specified that you wish to employ segregation to a trunk(s), then you must
reconnect your wires for the cables to follow a different trunking path to form the component
connection.
If you wish to change a connector then this should be selected separately from trunking
routes.
9.1.10 Insert rails
This command allows you too quickly and easily place DIN rail within your enclosures.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Physical Layout Insert Rails
 Command line: DRAIL
 Module required: Professional / Premium
versions
Upon selecting this command the following interface will be

displayed.
Here you are able to choose the rail type that you wish to
employ; from either your projects associated library and/or
the MONTA library. Where the Max module is employed,
you can use the co-ordinate options to determine a preferred
cabinet location for placement of the rail.
To place you rail you need only select the start and end
point, ED will then draw and dimension a piece of rail in
3D, as illustrated.
9 . 2 P a n e l s to o l b a r
The toolbar, (illustrated below), is used to load default UCS views that have been applied to
cabinets found in ED.
Commands for the

loading of cabinet co-
ordinate views
 Command line: EDPANEL
- 207 -
These views correspond to your cabinet’s co-ordinates, and are specifically to help you
move from one cabinet view to another quickly, and fluidly. By selecting one of the co-
ordinate views, all other UCS view data will be turned off; so that by loading the door view
those components and trunks on the chassis, top, left, right, etc. views will have their layers
automatically frozen in order to speed up processes.
All the commands on the toolbar Panels, with the exception of the last two, are also to help
in the creation of AutoCAD type, UCS views. When selected, (unless a view has already
been created, or already exists), the following prompt will appear:
The view DOOR does not exist. Do you want to create it? (No / <Yes>) :
By selecting, Yes, to create the door view, you will find that ED carries out a zoom extents,
and prompts you to select the first corner of your view. By selecting the door of your
cabinet, you will have effectively created a view. Once this has been achieved anytime that
you select the door icon, your defined view will be automatically loaded.
Likewise when inserting components, into your cabinet, by selecting a specific co-ordinate,
(door, chassis, etc.), that view will be loaded for you to insert your component into.
The last two icons in the toolbar, Panels On, Panels Off, allow you to toggle the information
displayed in your cabinet drawing. By selecting Panel Off, all of your cabinet’s components
and trunking will be hidden, leaving a cabinet, which displays only the wiring, between the
components. By selecting the Panels On command all of the information contained within
your cabinet will be displayed.
As your cabinet components adopt the co-ordinate layer that you specify when inserting
them, it is not possible to define which layers will be turned off when using panel on/off.
However you are able to employ the standard Xview, and Xplot commands to obtain more
selective filtering systems, refer to the section, Printing layers page 62 for more details.
NOTE
This command can also be used when creating or editing 3D cabinet elements, by selecting
a view; ED will automatically activate the AutoCAD options to create new UCS views where
they currently do not exist. Refer to the AutoCAD manual / help for more information on
UCS views.
9.2.1 Creating UCS views
To create more UCS views simply zoom or pan to the part of your drawing, which you wish
to save as a specific view, and type UCS into the command line prompt, this will call up the
following line of dialogue.
Enter an option [New/Move/orthoGraphic/Prev/Restore/Save/Del/Apply/?/World]<World>:
By type S, for Save you will then be prompted.
Enter name to save current UCS or [?]:
Enter the name that you want applied to the view, WORKSHOP, for example, and press
enter; this will have stored the UCS view for you.
To create a view which will be automatically loaded when you insert components, you need
to use the AutoCAD command DDVIEW, this will call up a small interface, on the right hand
- 208 -
side are three buttons, the one in the middle is labelled New, select this button a second
interface will appear called New View, and your cursor will be flashing in the View name
field, fill in the same name as your UCS, (WORKSHOP), press OK, to return to the previous
interface and then press OK again.
Your view has now been saved and will be loaded anytime you select to place an element
in that co-ordinate view.
9.3 M iscellaneous la yout commands

Although the main commands available for cabinet design and modification are to be found
in the Layout toolbar commands, (refer to page 195), and the Panels toolbar, (refer to page
206); there are other commands that can be of use, as follows.
9.3.1 Swap elements

Refer to page 171
The basic Swap feature is the same as for scheme drawings; however you may only swap
cabinets, not physical components.
By selecting your cabinet you will be shown a filtered list of the available cabinet libraries,
selecting one of these allows you to choose a cabinet from the list of those available.
The newly selected cabinet will then replace your existing cabinet. The new library and
cabinet associated to your layout drawing will automatically feedback to your drawing
information card upon ending your drawing.
9.3.2 Force element

Refer to page 157
This basic command options do not differ between scheme and layout drawing. When
employed in a layout drawing you may select a physical component and force / change its
SNA2 attribute information, as opposed to a scheme elements SNA attribute. If your
scheme element has an SNA2 attribute associated to it, the information applied to the
components SNA2 will automatically feedback to it. Likewise if you force a scheme
elements SNA attribute, it will automatically update the physical components SNA attribute.
9.3.3 Numbering elements - FAST

Refer to page 148
This command operates in exactly the same way as when working within scheme drawings,
except that it will only number the layout components SNA2 attribute data.
9.3.4 Reset element - FAST

Refer to page 156
This command operates in exactly the same way as when working within scheme drawings,
except that it will only reset the numbering of the layout components SNA2 attribute data.
9.3.5 Update components

Refer to page 409
- 209 -
This command operates in exactly the same way as when working with the Max module.
Refer to page 178
This command operates in exactly the same way as when working within scheme drawings.
9.3.7 Insert Cabinet

If you erase or delete your layout drawings cabinet mistakenly, you can automatically have
the cabinet re-inserted through the employment of the Insert Cabinet keyboard command.
 Command line: INSCAB

- 210 -
10 H ARNESS TOOLS
electrical designer has specific commands for the edition and creation of harness drawings.
This chapter contains information relating to commands which are vital to the generation
and maintenance harnesses.
1 0 . 1 H a r n e s s to o l b a r c o m m a n d s
These commands are essential for the generation of the Harness drawings.
10.1.1 Cables
This command is used to draw cables between connectors; the cables enable the
connection of wires between the various connector pins.
 Toolbar: Cables
 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Cables
 Command line: CABLES
On activation you will be prompted for the start point of the cable. By left clicking on a
connector element ED will automatically snap the cable to the connectors insertion point.
Cables may be drawn using AutoCAD’s Ortho trap to obtain perpendicular connections, or
without the Ortho trap to draw angled cables.
Cables drawn with Ortho Trap OFF
Cables drawn with Ortho Trap ON
- 211 -
10.1.2 Edit Cable
Through the employment of this tool you are able to apply information to the cables that
make up a harness assembly, in addition you can create/edit the wires that will be used that
will be used to connect harness pins.
 Toolbar: Edit Cable

 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Edit Cable
 Command line: EDITCABLE
On activation you should select individual or multiple cables that you want to apply
information to. After confirming you selection the Edit Cables interface will be displayed, on
the Cables tab.
10.1.2.1 Cables
The cables tab has fields that let you apply a cable type, size/gauge, description,
manufacturer and part number.
The information can be typed into the fields manually or you can select the icon to
access appropriate interfaces from which to select data already available within ED.
10.1.2.1.1 Cable Type / Section

This field is linked to the Section field, you can directly enter a cable type or may select the
next icon in order to access the Cable Types interface, refer to page 403 for further details.
This field allows you to apply a unique description to a particular cable, you can also access
a default values list by selecting the icon, this will open the default descriptions
dialogue.
- 212 -
The dialogue lists any descriptions held in the DESCRIPTIONS.TXT file held in
the ..\ED2010\M directory. This allows you to store and access any commonly used cable
descriptions.
10.1.2.1.3 Catalogue/Reference
These fields are used to apply manufacturer and part data to the selected cable, by
selecting the next icon you can access the standard ED Catalogue and Record interface,
refer to page 136 for further details on this command.
10.1.2.2 Wires
The Wires tab, allows you to create, edit and/or delete wires that will be employed when
forming connector to connector pin connections.
10.1.2.2.1 Deleting Wires

You can delete individual or multiple wires by selecting them on the list and pressing the
delete icon .
10.1.2.2.2 Inserting Wires
You can create as many wires are required by selecting the Insert icon this will display
the New Wires interface, illustrated below.
- 213 -
Through this interface you can enter the quantity of wires you want to create, by entering a
numeric value into the Quantity field .
You can also enter information such as signal, size, colour, catalogue and/or reference
within this interface, on Accepting to create the wire(s) ED will automatically populate the
Wires dialogue with a number of wires equivalent to the quantity value, in addition these
wires will automatically have any information defined in the New Wires dialogue applied to
them.
10.1.2.2.3 Editing Wires

You can edit individual or multiple wire information at anytime by selecting the wire and
double clicking, the Edit Wires interface will be displayed as described in the previous
section.
10.1.3 Connections
This command allows you define wire connections between selected connector pins,
additionally you are able to create wires, assign size, colour, signal, manufacturer and part
data.
 Toolbar: Connections
 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Connections
 Command line: CONNECTIONS
On activation your will be prompted in the AutoCAD command line as follows:
Please pick up connector(s):
You can select individual or multiple connectors, these will then be displayed in the
connections dialogue where you can define the connector pin connections.
- 214 -
In addition to being able to define connections, you may create wires that will be used to
connect the pins.
10.1.3.1 Pins
The main display window shows the selected connectors number followed by their pin
numbers, by double clicking on s specific pin the Pin edition interface will be displayed.
The dialogue displays the selected connector number, and the pin. You can apply a unique
description to the pin, by entering data into the description field.
To form connections select a connector pin from the scroll down lists in the lower half of the
dialogue.
The TOA indicates the pins first connection, the TOB indicates the second available
connection.
You are able to define the wire that will be used to form the connection at this point by
entering the wire number into the ConductorA / ConductorB fields, alternatively it is possible
- 215 -
to have ED automatically assign the available wires to the connector pins in the Harness
Connections dialogue.
10.1.3.2 Assign Wires
The Assign Wires button lets you automatically associate wires to pins that have
connections defined.
When activated a dialogue will be displayed providing you with two options.
Yes – Will automatically reset any wires that are currently connected between pins and
reapply the wires to all connections.
No – Will retain any wires already applied between pin connections, and will simply apply
any spare or unused wires to those connections which have no wires applied to them.
10.1.3.3 Show Legend
This checkbox option allows you to automatically display legends relative to your connector
elements. The legends will be inserted relative to the connector element KEY attribute, ED
will use the KEY_CON element located in the MONTA library.
Connector legends include information such as connector pin, wire signal, colour, to
information and wire number.
10.1.4 Analysis
This command analyses your drawing cables and highlights those cables that are currently
in use, this is based on which cables have wires passing through them to form pin to pin
connections.
 Toolbar: Analysis
 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Analysis
 Command line: ANALYSIS
Below you can see that the three cables forming the harness all have been highlighted and
so have wires passing through them to create the connector pin connections.
10.1.5 Show Info.

This command is used to display legend data for cables.
 Toolbar: Show Info

 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Show Info.
 Command line: SHOWINFO
- 216 -
It is a requirement that you run an Analysis before using the Show Info command. On
activation you should select a cable in the harness drawing, ED will then automatically
insert a legend displaying information relating to the wires passing through the selected
cable.
The cable legend will be inserted relative to the cable elements KEY attribute location.
10.1.6 Import Connectors

This option allows you to import connector DWG’s directly to AE project drawings.
 Toolbar: Import Harness

 ELECTRICAL menu: Harness Import Connectors
 Command line: IMPH
Prior to using this command, there is a requirement that must be met; the block named in
the import file has to exist in the project or Monta library folder.
On activation of the command the Import Elements dialogue will displayed through which
you may select a format and import file.
- 217 -
10.1.6.1 Import file
This text file contains the element data that you wish to import. This is essential as it
provides the block and connection information that you wish to import, without this data it
will not be able to provide a graphic representation of the element you are importing.
As you import and place connectors within your drawing, they will be automatically removed
from the list; if you wish to place imported elements across multiple drawings, you can
press the Save icon, and the list currently displayed, i.e minus those items already placed
will be saved, allowing you to move to another drawing and continue importing data until
the list is empty. This then ensures that it is impossible to over specify connectors within
your project drawings, as only one element may be placed once.
You should be aware of the fact that as you save the list, and choose to overwrite your
original; you will loose the information related to any already placed elements, which will be
detrimental should you choose to use the same import list repeatedly in different projects.
Only one entry should be made for the connector block name per connector, as this
differentiates one connector from another, as illustrated below.
10.1.6.2 Format file

Format files are simply text files that provide header information relating to the data that will
be contained within the file, an example of a format file is provided below:
[Format]
Attribute=TAG1,DESC,MFG,CAT,LOC,INST,ELEMNAME,PINVALUE,TOA,WIREA,SECT
ION1,SIGNAL1,COLOR1,CATALOGUE1,REFERENCE1,TOB,WIREB,SECTION2,SIGNA
L2,COLOR2,CATALOGUE2,REFERENCE2
Separator=","
[Data]
- 218 -
These may be created in any standard text editor, there follows a break down of the data
that can be employed to create a format file.
10.1.6.2.1 Format
All format files must have a header [FORMAT] this denotes that the information below it is
to be used for the format information.
10.1.6.2.2 Attribute
This line should read Attribute= followed by the attribute names that you wish to include,
the following list provides information about the attribute data that can be imported/included
in the import file.
ELEMNAME,NAME,PINVALUE,WIREA,TOA,SIGNAL1,COLOR1,SECTION1,CATALOGUE
1,REFERENCE1,WIREB,TOB,SIGNAL2,COLOR2,SECTION2,CATALOGUE2,REFERENC
E2
Field Name Description

TAG1 Connector name/number
DESC Connector pin description
MFG Connector manufacturer name
CAT Manufacturers part number
LOC Location
INST Installation
ELEMENAME Name of the connector block located in the project/monta library folder
PINVALUE Connector pin value
TOA Primary pin connection (destiny connector number : pin)
WIREA Primary wire number
SECTION1 Primary wire size
SIGNAL1 Primary wire signal
COLOR1 Primary wire colour
CATALOGUE1 Primary wire manufacturer name
REFERENCE1 Primary wire reference name
TOB Secondary pin connection (destiny connector number : pin)
WIREB Secondary wire number
SECTION2 Secondary wire size
SIGNAL2 Secondary wire signal
COLOR2 Secondary wire colour
CATALOGUE2 Secondary wire manufacturer name
REFERENCE2 Secondary wire reference name
NAME Connector number
10.1.6.2.3 Length
This data is optional; a separator can be used in place of length data. The line should read
Length= followed by the field length of the relevant field. The order in which the lengths are
noted should correspond to the attributes order.
10.1.6.2.4 Separator
This data is optional, length data can be employed in place of separators. This line should
read, Separator=”separator to be used” the separator can be defined by the user, it should
always be placed in speech marks.
- 219 -
10.1.6.2.5 Filter
This data is optional, it allows you to state any attribute data that you do not want to have
within the format file so that if you had 3 attributes and entered a filter line of Filter=2 then
the second attribute would not be employed.
Should you wish to exclude a specific format line from the format file the line should start
with a ; this will cause the line to be ignored, in the above example, lengths and filters are
not being used.
- 220 -
11 LIBRARIES
Libraries contain elements that are used to create electrical projects. There are 4 main
library types:
 Schematic
 Cabinet
 Physical
 System
Each of these library types holds a different type of element, that provide varied
representations of project elements; for example, a fuse inserted into a scheme drawing,
will have a different representation when inserted into a cabinet, when displayed in a
terminal drawing, and/or when shown in a wiring diagram. In ED one element can have
multiple representations, refer to page 257 for more information on the various element
representations available in ED.
The following sections cover the different library types available within ED.
1 1 . 1 S c h e m a ti c l i b r a r i e s
These libraries include the schematic representations of
electrical components (DIN, BS, UNE, etc.). ED comes
complete with a number library standards, you should be
aware that any libraries in ED which have their status defined
as back-up are stored in the data directory contained on the
ED install cd.
11.1.1 Graphic library

ED has two libraries, GRAPH, GRAPH_ (by default), these are used for the symbols
inserted into terminal drawings, although the library is used purely for storing terminal
graphics, the library type is Schematic.
11. 2 C ab in e t lib rarie s

The elements of these libraries are the
manufacture representation of cabinet
enclosures. ED comes with standard
ELDON and RITTAL libraries etc.
- 221 -
11.3 Physical libraries
Contain the physical representation of manufacturer’s components.
These representations can be assigned to references, which in turn
are used when creating cabinets, and/or wiring diagrams.
11.3.1 Wiring diagram libraries

ED has two libraries, WD, WD_IN (by default), these are used for
the symbols inserted into wiring diagrams, although the library is
used purely for storing wiring diagram elements, the library type is
Physical.
11.4 S ystem librar y

The system library is called MONTA, this holds indispensable information such as
titleboxes, contact representations, terminal types, prototypes etc. Although any of these
can be stored in scheme libraries, the system library is available throughout ED, regardless
of the symbols standard you are working with, and as such can be useful for storage of
titleboxes, etc where you employ many different libraries for the creation of your projects.
WARNING!
Deleting the MONTA library can cause ED to not work correctly.
1 1 . 5 L i b r a r i e s f r o m o t h e r s /w
ED2010 allows you to use to automatically absorb any DWG files directly into a library. If
the DWG file names conform to the AutoCAD Electrical block naming convention, then ED
will automatically realise the element type, (relay, fuse, push button etc), and include the
elements symbol, K for relay, F for fuse, S for pushbutton.
AutoCAD Electrical libraries in your scheme design. This is possible as ED will realise AE
block types, read and write to many of the attributes used in AE blocks.
In order to link to and use an existing library in ED, you need only create a library, (refer to
the following section), with a name corresponding to the library folder you want to use, in
the case of AutoCAD Electrical some examples would be IEC2, IEC4, JIC125 etc.
You should then select the Directories option in the library information card, (refer to page
223), chose the Other directory option, and either type of browse to the library folder, using
the AutoCAD Electrical example a standard default installation library path would be
C:\PROGRAM FILES\AUTODESK\ACADE 2009\LIBS\IEC2
Upon accepting out of the library information card ED absorbs the elements contained in
the folder, a preview of each displayed and, (depending upon the DWG naming
convention), the type of element will automatically associated to them, and the
symbol field filled in. These can then be used in your ED project drawings.
- 222 -
1 1 . 6 C r e a ti n g l i b r a r i e s
The first step when creating a new library is to define the type library you wish to create,
Physical, Cabinet, or Schematic.
Once this is done a Library Information card must be

filled out.
1 1 . 7 L i b r a r y i n fo r m a ti o n c a r d
When a new library is created, you have to
fill in a reference card. The reference card
holds data about the library.
The fields are described as follows:

Field Description
The name of the library corresponds to a sub-directory where all
Name of library
symbol drawings and data will be located. The library name is
Sheet number
limited to a maximum of six characters.
This field cannot be altered except through the addition and/or
Number of elements deletion of elements through the library browser page, the field
itself shows the number of elements within the library.
The libraries can be either AVAILABLE or in a BACKUP status.
Status The AVAILABLE libraries are libraries that are accessible to
work with and may be found in your ED2010\Li directory.
These checkboxes are set dependent upon the type of library
Type of library that you have chosen during the creation process, refer to
previous section.
Creation The date the library was created.
Modification The date the library was last modified.
This field is of free usage and can be used to provide a
Description
description of the library.
The National/Company graphical standard symbols the library
Standard
represents, (e.g. BS3939), if any.
Remarks Of free usage. It may be used to note any aspect of the library.
This option allows you to define your preferred prototype for the
Library Prototype creation of new elements, this is of great benefit where you are
creating elements from scratch in either mm or inches as you
- 223 -
are able to have measurements etc. set up prior to element
generation.
11.7.1 Measurement units

This pop down allows you define whether you wish to create your library elements in either
metric or imperial measurements.
ED will automatically scale any elements inserted into drawings, which have a different
measurement system applied to them. Due to this you could create an entire library in mm,
insert, and use these library elements in a project that was in inches. This system does
apply one restriction to users, in that, library elements must be in one set of units or the
other, mm or inches, not a mixture of the two and the units of the library elements must be
those defined in the library card.
To ensure project consistency Aceri strongly recommends that projects, be in either inches
or in mm, and not a mixture of both systems, this likewise applies to library elements as
stated previously.
11.7.2 Directory
This option allows you to specify the directory location of your library. Existing users can
change their library locations, simply by copying one or more of their library sub directory
folders to a location other then the ED default. By then using the Directory option you can
specify the library path.
You may also use this option to locate any folders that contain AutoCAD dwg blocks, ED
will automatically absorb these DWG files into your library. Depending upon the DWG
naming convention used ED will automatically recognise the element type, and the prefix
for the element, (refer to 221, Libraries from other s/w)
11.7.3 Title-box co-ordinates

This option is only available for schematic libraries, and is only required where old
prototype titleboxes are employed, such as PRPRO. Where elements defined as
Titleboxes are being employed, this option is no longer necessary.
The co-ordinates allow ED2010 to calculate the position of the titlebox element in the
drawings. The default co-ordinates coincide with the prototype PRPRO co-ordinates.
However, if different co-ordinates or different sized titleboxes are required, the co-ordinates
in the drawing reference card may be altered.
 Column 1: The distance from the origin point of the drawing to the
beginning of the first column in the X co-ordinate of the title box.
 Column 2: The distance from the origin point of the drawing to the
beginning of the second column in the X co-ordinate of the title box.
(E.g. the end of the first column).
 Row A: The distance from the origin point of the drawing to the beginning of the
first row from the top in the Y co-ordinate of the title box, (indicated by an A).
 Row B: The distance from the first row A to the beginning of the second row B.
- 224 -
These co-ordinates will be copied into the NEW drawings of all projects associated to the
edited library. These parameters can be edited later for each project drawing, where a
titlebox is not employed.
11.7.4 Library password

The password of a library allows you to define an entrance password to limit it to allowed
accesses.
NOTE
The first user through the Control command in ED configuration can change the password
for any library.
11.7.5 Graphical library
This defines the graphical library from which all of your terminal graphics will be taken,
where they are defined to your elements.
11. 8 L ib rar y b ro w ser co m m an d s
11.8.1 Printing layers
This command allows access to Xplot and Xview layer options refer to page 164 for further
details.
11.8.2 Update menu
The command itself updates all of ED’s menus, pop ups’ and toolbar messages / prompts,
so that you have only the most up to date toolbar icons, ED prompts etc, when working in
the program. ED carries out this command automatically every time a Reorganise All
command is carried out. The command icon will only be active where users have chosen
to work with a digitiser.
11.9 Create your ow n libraries

You can incorporate drawings of elements previously drawn in AutoCAD into a new or
existing ED library. The steps to achieve this are outlined below:
Description Page
Step 1 Create a library 221
Step 2 Import the Dwg/Dxf files using Import Elements 90
Edit the elements information cards and correctly set the element 227 /
definition, Final Consumption, Fuse, Relay etc. Fill in the Symbol 236 /
Step 3 field and any other information you want associated to the 231 /
elements. In the case that a relay or element with contacts is 296
defined, you should also apply Contacts to the element
Step 4 Open the elements with AutoCAD Element 296
Step 5 Assign the required attributes to the element by using Definition 279
- 225 -
Wizard
In addition to this you can create a new library and add symbols from other existing libraries
to it, to create a new symbols library.
Description Page
Step 1 Create a library 221
Step 2 Import the Dwg/Dxf files or an elems.dbf using Import Elements 90
Handle individual or multiple elements to the new library using 296
Step 2a
Handle Elements
- 226 -
1 2 E L EM E N T S
The three types of libraries, outlined in the previous chapter, each contain a certain element
type unique to them. It is important to understand the differences between the library types,
as each contains different elements, which play a vital role in the creation of any project.
1 2 . 1 S c h e m a ti c l i b r a r y e l e m e n t s
These elements are used within all the schematic
drawings and are a symbolic representation of an
element type, usually corresponding to a specific
symbols standard. Almost all elements contained
in schematic libraries are intelligent, and thus have
specific attributes associated to them, to reflect
their uses and functionalities. The various types of
schematic element are outlined in detail during the
course of this chapter. A typical schematic element
is illustrated below; with it’s associated attributes.
All elements contained within this library type must be defined to a specific element type,
before you are able to assign Element Information Card data. This is because the element
type defines the attributes required, and more importantly, the way in which ED treats the
element.
1 2 . 2 C a b i n e t l i b r a r y e l e m e n ts
Elements in these libraries are enclosure representations; these are used only for the
generation of layout drawings and have different information card data available when
compared to schematic library elements.
Example
Enclosures have a Sizes… option to allow data relating to the height, width, and depth of
both the door and back plate of the enclosures; where as standard schematic elements
have their physical size defined by the manufacturer catalogue and reference data
assigned to them.
These elements should be drawn 1:1 scale; and are

automatically defined as Layout type elements. Where the
Max module is employed, it is advisable to ensure that these
elements are created in 3D, to ensure the modules maximum
potential is utilised.
12.3 Physical librar y elements

The physical libraries contain the physical representation of manufacturer’s components.
These representations can be defined to references, which in turn are assigned to
schematic elements; these are then used as the true physical representations of schematic
elements when inserted into cabinet layouts. In addition to this another graphic maybe
used to represent scheme elements within Wiring Diagrams.
- 227 -
These elements should be drawn 1:1 scale, and need to include certain attributes such as
PIN, SNA, and SNA2, the number of attributes increases where the Max module and/or
they are to be used in Wiring Diagrams, (refer to page 252 for further details on physical
elements).
All elements contained within this library type are automatically defined as AUXILIARY type
elements.
1 2 . 4 C r e a ti n g e l e m e n t s
When you select the New element icon, the option is given
to Create empty or from another pre-selected element, as
illustrated.
You can create new elements from any existing element or

from scratch, in exactly the same manner as with projects,
drawings, libraries, catalogues and references.
NOTE
If you are creating a schematic library element, your next step will be to define the type of
element that you are creating; unless you have chosen to create your new element from
another; in which case your new element will automatically adopt the definition assigned to
the element you are creating from. Refer to page 236 for further details on defining
element types
1 2 . 5 E l e m e n t i n fo r m a ti o n c a r d
The element information card holds data about the element. The data associated to each
element is different depending on what type of library the element belongs to, schematic,
cabinets, or physical; this in turn will restrict or enable the following information card options:
 Phases
 Size
 Catalogue
 Def. Contacts…
 Term. Graphic
The restrictions on what information can be applied to elements acts as an aid for the
creation of elements, as superfluous information cannot be applied to elements that do not
require it.
Example
The Def. Contacts button will only be available when you are creating an element defined
as a relay or element with contacts, because no other type of element requires contact data.
- 228 -
Illustrated below is the standard element information card:
Select to
Type in the update family
name group
Set size if it is
a cabinet
Select to
change an
element Select to specify the
definition contacts if the
element has them
Select to set
default Catalogue
and Reference
The various fields and options available within this card are as follows:
Field Description
The name of the element corresponds to an AutoCAD file or block
Name of the
name held in the library sub-directory. The name of the element is
element
limited to a maximum of eight characters.
This field defines how ED will filter the element within the element
insertion table, (refer to page 129), the categories available directly
correspond to the element insertion table filter icons. The element’s
definition dictates the category that will be automatically assigned by
ED, however this may be changed manually at any time.
Category
NOTE
If you change the definition of an element after it has been created,
the family filter in the Element insertion table will not be redefined and
must be changed manually, for the element to be correctly filtered in
the element insertion table.
Creation date The date the element was created.
Modification The date the element was last modified.
Verification The date the element was verified.
The default numbering prefix, (suffix), assigned to the element
Example
A motor may be identified by the prefix, (suffix), M. This field is
essential for the correct numbering of parent elements, such as
Symbol
relays, motors, fuses etc.
NOTE
If it is a requirement to have a prefix in addition to a suffix in the
automatic numbering of your element, for example -K1M, -K2M etc.,
- 229 -
a comma should be placed between the two characters (K,M). In
addition, when defining the ANS for elements, an ANS with a suffix
should be chosen, or created.
These fields are of free usage. They can be used for material
classification, which can be extremely useful when filtering elements.
Control / Type
/ Use - Order Where a free relay has been created you are able to define the order
in which contacts will be displayed below the relay in the schemes.
Ordering them either by Pin number or Drawing +X + Y co-ordinates.
Description of the element, information added to this field will be
Description
displayed in the element insertion table.
Remarks Of free usage. It may be used for noting any aspect of the element.
Provides a fast reference association when assigning catalogue and
Family reference information to elements, for more information on the uses
of this field refer to Family, element - reference association page 305.
Draughtsman
Details of who has created and modified the element.
1-4
This defines the element type being created. ED will automatically fill
out this data where elements for physical and/or cabinet library types
are being created. This field can be edited at any time, however
Definition changing the definition of an element has far reaching effects and
should only be carried out by users who are fully aware of the various
requirements of the different ED elements. (Refer to page 236
Element definitions).
This button will only ever be available when:
 Elements have been created from scratch.

 The first time the element information card is opened.
When selected the element prototype interface will be displayed:
On the left side of this screen

are all of the elements in the
library you are currently
working in. The right side
Prototype -
has all elements defined as
Change
prototypes within the MONTA
library.
By selecting one of the

elements from the Selected
library list, you will have all the data, (including the graphic
representation, and attributes), that is associated to that element
automatically assigned to your new element. So that you are in effect
are provided with a second option for creating a new element from
one, which already exists. (Refer to page 249 for more information
on prototypes).
- 230 -
12.5.1 Associated data
12.5.1.1 Phase…
This is only for compatibility with very old versions of ED where LBRK break lines have not
been used in elements. The option can be used in ED2010; where the configuration
Cutting parameters option has been checked, (refer to page 420).
When selected the following interface will be

displayed:
By defining the number of phases your element has,

the distance between them, and the height of the
phase cut, ED will cut wires where elements are
inserted on them, in exactly the same manner as
LBRK line breaks.
This option is only available for certain types of schematic library type elements.
12.5.1.2 Sizes…
This option allows you to provide size data for
elements in cabinet library types. As you can see in
the illustration below, you are able to provide data
relating to the height, width, and depth of cabinets
base plates and doors.
By selecting the Inches option at the top of the

interface, any sizes defined in mm will be
automatically revised. The same applies if you enter
sizes in inches and change the measurement units to
mm.
12.5.1.3 Catalogue…
This option is available for all elements except those in physical library types. By selecting
this option, you can assign a default manufacturer and reference to an element. This data
will be automatically applied to elements, and will provide BOM report data, etc.
The Catalogue checkbox will only be enabled where an element is defined as a Relay or
element with contacts. The option when checked on allows you to copy the elements
contact information, (as defined through the Def. Contacts option), directly to the catalogue
reference that has been associated to the element.
This option has been added to ED to allow existing users, that wish to use the Reference
contacts option, (refer to page 55), within their projects, to re-use their existing contact
information rather than having to manually re-enter the data on catalogue references.
You can also employ the Handle Elements to copy element contact data to references,
refer to page 296.
- 231 -
12.5.1.4 Def. Contacts… / Connections…
Dependent upon the element type that you have created this button will allow you to either
Define Contacts, or Connections to your element. The specific element types that will
activate these buttons are as follows:
 Define Contacts will only be available for elements that are defined as Relays or
elements with contacts.
 Define Connections will only be available for Harness elements.

12.5.1.5 Def. Contacts…
This option is only available for elements defined as relays or elements with contacts. The
interface itself can also be accessed through reference information cards, refer to page 304
or from within the scheme drawings using the PINLIST keyboard command, refer to page
193 when selected you are able to define the type and number of contacts that can be
assigned to the element through the following interface:
NOTE
The following interface can be accessed through the Element information card, the
Refrence information card and/or the PINLIST keyboard command. Depending upon the
project settings ED will use the contact data from the Elements only, or the References and
PINLIST, (where the keyboard command is employed). Refer to page 55.
Double-click to edit pins numbering Double-click to add a

or to select and write contact of this type
Representation of
the currently
selected contact type
You can assign up to 999 contacts to any one relay or element with contacts, all of which
can be viewed in the Contacts defined window, on the left hand side of the dialogue.
On the right hand side of the dialogue is the Specification of contacts window, where you
will find 69 different types of contacts that can be assigned to your element. Selecting any
one of these will provide a preview of the contact graphic at the bottom of the screen
- 232 -
There are two ways to associate contacts to your element you can either select the contact
type that you want to be associated from the Specification of contacts list on the right hand
side of the dialogue, and press the Insert button; or you can simply double click on the
desired contact type that you want to have assigned.
When either of the above procedures is carried out a new

contact group will be added to the list of contacts defined.
Each contact needs to have the pin numbers added to them, this can be done by double
clicking in either the Pin1 or Pin2 field, and typing in a value, either numerical, alphabetical,
or alphanumerical of up to 5 characters in length.
The pin numbering you assign will be automatically adopted by the contact, when it is
associated to the relay.
If you associate a changeover contact to a relay, you will

find that two lines of pins are made available to you; this
is because a changeover contact has three or more pins.
To know where you should enter the pin values simply
look at the preview.
As you can see you need to assign 3 pin numbers, and by

filling in the data as illustrated.
You will be provided with relay contact pin numbering, as shown below.
If you miss a pin number while assigning contacts, ED will make you
aware of the fact through a prompt dialogue, telling you the row number
and pin column, which has not had a value, assigned.
If you want to insert a contact between already defined contacts, you should be aware that
ED will automatically insert the new contact below whichever contact you have currently
selected. So that you are able to insert contacts anywhere within the list of contacts
defined except above the first contact on the list.
You are able to drag and drop any contact that you have assigned to a relay, by left clicking
and holding down the mouse button, you can move the contact to any location in the
contacts order, and drop it into the desired location.
NOTE
If you are creating a Harness element the Def.Contacts button will read Def.Connections,
refer to the following section for further details of this option. Refer to page 236 Element
definitions for more information on defining element types.
12.5.1.6 Def. Connections…
This option is only available for harness elements;
when selected you are able to assign your pin
information to a harness by selecting the Def.
Connections button, when this is done the Harness
connections interface, illustrated, will be displayed.
- 233 -
Here you are provided with various ways of managing the harness pin connection
information. The options available through this interface are as follows.
12.5.1.7 Import / Export harness data
These options allow you to import and/or export pin data.
12.5.1.7.1 Import
This option allows you to save time when forming pin connections,
and assigning signals and connection information to them, by
allowing you to import data from a txt file direct to your harness.
When selected the following interface will be displayed.
Here you are able to browse through your computer or network to

locate a preferred format, (*.fmt), file, as well as locating an import,
(*.txt), file from which your harness pin data is to be taken.
By selecting an appropriate format file you are able to define the

amount of information that is imported to your harness, so that if you
did not want to include the pins Signal data you should select an fmt
file from which this information has been omitted.
The interface will provide you with a preview of the data that will be imported to your
harness. You are able to employ Cntrl and/or Shift keys to select your preferred pin data,
which will be imported and applied to your harness pins upon selection of the Import button.
12.5.1.7.2 Export
If you have assigned harness pin information
manually; or have modified data that has been
imported to a harness, you are able to easily
export the data for modification, by another
company, for example, or save the information
for future use, by employing the Export
command.
When selected the interface will be displayed,

through which you are able to save the export
file to a preferred format through the following
options.
12.5.1.8 Format
To save a format you should define the
separator type that you want to employ in the
file itself, (if any), by checking one of the format
checkboxes you can specify any separator
type that you wish.
- 234 -
By selecting the folder icon, the browse interface will
open, you can then move to the folder you wish to store
the file in, and are able to assign a File name to it;
pressing the open button in this interface will then save
the FMT file for future usage.
All format files are stored in an ASCII format by ED.
If you are creating multiple format files, you should press

the X icon, every time you wish to create a new FMT file,
this will clear the format files directory location and name,
if you do not do this, pressing the Save button will cause
your previously created FMT file to be overwritten with
any changes that you have carried out.
12.5.1.9 Export file
After having set up your format you can save the file data to any location within your
computer by selecting the folder icon, and using the browse option to locate the appropriate
folder location, you can then apply a name to the file; pressing the open button in the
browse window will the save the data as a text (TXT) file.
Once you have done this the files directory

location and name will be displayed, as illustrated.
Due to export files being in a text format, they
can be opened with any basic text, Notepad, WordPad program and edited to your
requirements.
Harness elements do require that they have all of the relevant connection data assigned to
them within the library so that connectors maybe associated to them within schematics, to
indicate which pin is connected to which; within the harness assembly.
The HARNESS elements are considered by ED to be the parent element of

CONNECTORS, however unlike any other element types in ED it is not necessary to draw
a harness element, or assign any attributes to it.
The harness act as and can represent single and/or multiple plugs. This element will
display a resume of all the connectors, including connectors used, their pin numbering, and
which pins are sending and receiving data.
The harness element allows you to manipulate all connector/pin data relating to the entire
harness, which is then available when assigning connectors to a specific harness pin.
Harness elements do not have to display all available pins where only a few of those
available are to be employed, for example, displayed below is an Rs-232 modem cable with
two plugs one of 9 pins the other of 25 pins.
Despite the fact that there are a total of 34 pins on the two
plugs only 8 of the pins from the 9 pin plug are in use, which
in turn means that only 8 of the 25 pin plug are being used.
- 235 -
So that unless you plan on increasing the number of connections being used within the
harness it is not a requirement that you create a harness element with 34 pins, but rather
one with 16 to allow you to show the connections only.
Another benefit of this system is that you are able to show screens, as you are not obliged
to form any connections should you do not wish to.
This does not restrict you when ordering parts as the manufacturer’s reference can have all
the required information associated to it via accessories as regards the size of plugs, cable
type being employed etc.
12.5.1.10 Insert / Delete harness pins
These options allow you to quickly add and/or remove multiple pins, while automatically
assigning them to a harness plug.
By filling out the connector field, (COM1 in the above example), you effectively specify the
harness plug to which the pin will be associated. You are able to enter the number of pins
that you wish to have on this plug by entering a numerical value into the pins field, (9 in the
example above), this number maybe increased or decreased either manually of by using
the up / down arrow options.
When you have specified the number of pins that you want you should select the Add icon,
to have the pins assigned to the connector.
Plug pin information will be grouped by Connector

name, each plug’s data being inserted below the next.
Thus the last inserted plug pins will always be
inserted at the end of the list, regardless of
alphanumerical considerations. So that if another 25
pins were added, associated to plug ADD22, the 25
pins would be inserted beneath COM1, and so on.
It is possible to delete individual or multiple pins by selecting a pin and pressing the Delete
icon, (illustrated here on the left). By employing the Shift and/or Control keys you are able
to select multiple pins for deletion.
12.5.1.11 Pins
The lower half of the screen displays the harnesses available plugs and their pin
connections.
You are able to define and change information that will be associated to the harness pins,
this can be done by double clicking on any field,
and entering the required information such as
Connector, Pin number and Signal as illustrated.
The data fields displayed here are outlined as follows:
 Connector: The name of the harness plug, where you have a composite
harness with 3 plug terminators, for example, you can differentiate between the plug pins
- 236 -
by assigning names to them in these fields such as COM1, PRIN, and MOD. Connector
names can have a maximum length of 20 characters.
 Pin: This field allows you to assign a pin values to your plugs,
as illustrated below. Each pin can have a maximum of 12 characters
assigned to it.
 Signal: This can be employed to note the signal that will be sent from the pin, a
maximum of 12 characters can be used to define a pins signal.
 Colour A: This field displays the information relating to the first pins
connected wire colour.
 Connection A: This field displays the

information relating to the first pin connection.
Connections can be formed by holding down the left
mouse button on the line of a pins data, and dragging it
to the location where you wish a connection to be
formed
When this is done the Connection A field will

automatically annotate the connection information to
both the origin and destiny pins, as illustrated below.
 Connection B: This option operates in the

same manner as connection A but allows you to form a
second connection to a pin, as illustrated below.
 Signal A / B: This information is taken

from the connected pin.
 Colour B: This field displays the

information relating to the second pins connected wire colour.
NOTE
If you are creating a Relay or element with contacts the Def. Connections button will read
Def. Contacts, refer to the previous section for further details of this option. Refer to page
236 Element definitions for more information on defining element types.
12.5.1.12 Term. Graphic
This option is available for schematic library type elements, by assigning a specific terminal
graphic to an element, when that element is connected to a terminal, the graphic will be
displayed in the terminal drawing. (Refer to page 363 for further details).
1 2 . 6 E l e m e n t d e fi n i ti o n s
All elements in ED require a classification; elements created in physical and/or layout
libraries are automatically classified by ED, due to the fact that elements contained in these
two libraries are used for very specific purposes; and as such must be defined in a certain
way.
- 237 -
Schematic libraries contain a variety of electrical symbols, and due to this they must be
defined as a specific element type, before you are able to fill out the element information
card data, draw the element etc.
The assignment of an element type is carried out through an automatically displayed

dialogue window, Definition of the elements, (illustrated below), the screen is divided into
two parts, the left side displays the various element types available, selecting any of these
will display the minimum required attributes for that element type on the right side of the
screen.
Single click
to select
element
definition. Attributes
associated to
the selected
element
Each attribute carries out a particular function and the attributes shown when an element
type is selected are essential for that element type.
You do have the ability to assign extra attributes to elements where you wish them to have
increased functionalities, before doing this however, it is important that you are familiar with
the various properties of the attributes found in ED, otherwise you may end up adding
superfluous attribute data. The assignment of attributes in ED can be achieved with the
Definition wizard command, (refer to page 279).
There now follows information relating to the different element types available within ED.
12.6.1 Element Browser list icons
The following displays the various icon types associated with the element types available in
ED, as they are listed in the Element Browser screen.
Icon Element type
Auxiliary, Equipotential, Prototype, Titlebox, Power Source,
Functional block, sub functional block, PLC slot, CPU, PLC sub slot
Group of elements
Final consumption
Relays or elements with contacts, Free relays
- 238 -
Fuse or protection element
Terminals, Fused terminals
Harness
Passive elements
Pushbuttons
Contacts
12. 7 P aren t an d ch ild el e m en t s

During the course of this chapter, you will find references to elements being regarded as
either parent or child to other element types.
The term parent and/or child is used to provide a differentiation between two different
element types, which, when assigned the same function will not only cross-reference to one
another, but which will adopt information from each other.
The adoption of information takes the form of child elements taking data from their
associated parent element.
Example
A contact, (child element), when assigned the same function as a relay, (parent element);
will take its pin numberings from the relay.
To allow you to understand more readily which elements are considered as child to which
parent element the following table has been compiled.
PARENT ELEMENTS CHILD ELEMENTS
Relays Contacts
Functional blocks Functional sub-blocks
Plc CPU’s Plc slots
Numerable pushbuttons Non numerable pushbuttons
Harnesses Connectors
12.7.1.1 Special Parent

Beyond the above elements there are three further element types, two of which are
regarded as special parents, these are elements which will cross-reference to one another,
but which do not adopt any information from each other. The third is a sub element and not
only adopts information but also provides feedback, and can only be related to plc slots.
These element types are:

 Pushbuttons, these elements will cross-reference to one another only.
12.7.1.2 Sub Elements
Plc sub slots, these elements will cross-reference to plc slots only, the cross-reference link
being formed by providing the same data to three specific attributes. The sub slot will then
the element and pin number data to which it is connected. It will adopt the cross-reference
location of the slot it is associated to as well as the associated plc slots pin numeration, in
the case that the slot is associated to a CPU the sub slot will also adopt the slots SNA.
(For more information, refer to page 391).
- 239 -
1 2 . 8 D e fi n i n g a s c h e m e e l e m e n t
There are a range of element types available within ED, each of these is treated differently
within the program; as such it is important that you correctly define the element during the
creation process.
The following diagram has questions on the left hand side to help you determine the type of
element that you want; to the right of these questions are answers in the form of element
types. Between the question and the element type are Yes, or No arrows, these provide
you with information about whether a certain element type is compatible or not. For
example, Do you want to create a Titlebox? Then the element type Titlebox is the definition
you should apply as there is a Yes indicator. The arrows between the questions are to
provide you with more information, for example a Titlebox, cannot be displayed in a BOM.
PARENT ELEMENT CHILD ELEMENT
Do you want to create a Titlebox? Yes Titlebox
No
Do you want the element to
appear in the BOM? No Power source
Yes
Do you want cabinet
accessories?
Yes Accessory
No
Do you want to create a
terminal? Yes Terminal
No
Do you want to create a PLC?
Yes CPU/PLC Slot/PLC Sub Slot
No
Do you want the possibility for Fuse or Protection element
cross-referencing? No Final Consumption
Passive element
Yes
Relay or element with contacts Contacts

Numerable pushbutton Push button numerable/non numerable
Functional block Sub functional block
Harness Connectors
Equipotential Equipotential
Pushbutton or switch Pushbutton or switch
Once you have identified the element that most closely matches your needs you can then
create and define the element.
- 240 -
The following sections provide more detailed information about all of the element types
available in ED.
The definitions themselves are generic, so that if you cannot locate a definition that exactly
matches the element type you want to create, simply locate an element that most closely
matches the properties of the element you want to create and apply that definition.
12.8.1 Relays or elements with contacts
These elements are considered as parents to contacts, in as much as they have child
elements related to them through a shared function, defined to the elements with the Set
function command, (refer to page 133).
Any child elements associated to a parent will automatically adopt the following information
from the parent:
 Numbering.
 Pin numbers.
 Cross-reference location of the parent element.
 Location, zone and group data.
You are only able to associate contacts that you have defined to the relay, so that if a relay
has 2 make contacts, and 2 break contacts assigned to it, and you attempt to associate 3
make contacts, and/or a changeover contact, a cross-reference error message will given.
You are able to edit the number of contacts defined to a relay or element with contacts,
and/or their pin numberings at any time.
Contacts that you assign to a relay, and their pin numberings will be automatically
annotated into the elements XR_MAIN attribute, you are able to define the location, number
of contacts displayed in one column etc. through Cross-reference parameters, (refer to
page 321).
You are able to have a maximum of 999 child elements associated to any one relay or
element with contacts.
12.8.1.1 Relays required attributes
Page Attributes Description
262 CN# Pin values
272 SNA Element number
274 XR_FUNCTION Element function
262 CATALOGUE Catalogue
271 RECORD Reference
273 TECHDATA0# Reference technical characteristics
270 LOCATION Location
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
274 XR_MAIN Cross-reference information
275 XR_MAIN# Multiple cross-reference information
261 CABLE_A# First cable connection
262 CABLE_B# Second cable connection
273 USER# User information
- 241 -
NOTE
You cannot have both an XR_MAIN and XR_MAIN# attributes in the same element, you
should use one or the other.
12.8.1.2 Contacts associated to a relay
All relays in ED should have contacts associated to them, however there are two ways of
assigning the pin values to them; the first is to assign a value to the pins in the Contacts
Definition screen, using this method any contacts associated to the relay will automatically
adopt their pin numbering from the relay. A second option is to apply a pin value of * in
which case the relay’s contacts will adopt their pin numbering from the associated contacts.
Refer to the following sections to learn more about associating contacts to a relay, and the
two methods of pin assignment.
12.8.1.2.1 Assigning contacts to a relay

In order to associate contacts to a relay in a scheme drawing, you must assign contacts to
the relay element within the element information card as follows:
To associate contacts to the relay carryout the following steps:
Select the contact you want to

associate to the relay
Select the Insert icon
12.8.1.2.2 Assigning contacts to a relay with defined pin numbers
- 242 -
In order to have contacts adopt their pin numbering from the relay, carryout the steps
outlined in the previous section, after having inserted a contact or contacts, you should then
Double click on the pin fields and enter the preferred pin numbers
The following example shows how a contact will adopt its pin numbering from the relay,
when the associated to the relay by the application of a function.
Depending upon whether the XR_MAIN

attribute is at 0º, 90º, 270º etc the contact
will be placed accordingly.
12.8.1.2.3 Assigning contacts to a relay with variable pin numbers

In order to have the relays contacts adopt their pin numbering from the contacts, carryout
the steps outlined in the section Assigning contacts to a relay, after having inserted a
contact or contacts, you should then Double click on the pin fields and enter *
The following example shows how the relay will adopt its contacts pin numbering from the
contact, when they are associated to each other by the application of a function.
- 243 -
Depending upon whether the XR_MAIN attribute is
at 0º, 90º, 270º etc the contact will be placed
accordingly.
12.8.2 Contacts
There are approximately 70 different types of contacts, available within ED, all of which are
regarded as child elements to relays or elements with contacts, their information being
taken from the parent element to which they are associated, this information includes:
 Element numbering.
 Pin numbering.
 Cross-reference location of the parent element to which they are associated.
All contacts have the same essential attribute requirements, and only differ from one
another in graphic representation.
12.8.2.1 Contacts required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.3 Push-button or switch

These types of element are regarded as special parents, in as much as pushbuttons or
switches can be cross-referenced to one another.
Example
If you wished to indicate a group of switches, which are mechanically interlocked, it is
useful to have cross-reference data indicating the location and association that they share.
All pushbuttons or switches with a shared association retain their individual numbering, pin
numbers, catalogue and reference data etc. Moreover, do not adopt any information from
one another, as with relay and contact elements.
To learn more about cross-referencing pushbuttons or switches refer to page 320.
- 244 -
12.8.3.1 Push button or switches required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.4 Functional block

These elements are considered as parents to functional sub-blocks. A functional block can
be employed to indicate an assembly of parts where signals or elements may appear in
different drawings of the project.
The elements themselves have a unique and extremely flexible cross-reference facility,
(refer to page 319). Unlike relays or elements with contacts, you are not required to define
contact types or their pin numberings to functional blocks to enable cross-referencing.
Another difference between functional blocks and other parent elements is that certain data
from the child element is annotated to functional blocks where an association in the form of
a common function occurs.
12.8.4.1 Functional blocks required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.5 Functional sub block

These elements are considered child to functional blocks. Unlike contacts, these elements
do not adopt their pin numbering from their parent element, and thus require their pin
numbering to be assigned during the placement of their attributes.
- 245 -
Functional sub-blocks can be given any graphic representation you choose, as they can
represent any assembly part.
When assigning a function to a sub-block you are able to add descriptive information, which
will be, annotated to the parent elements cross-reference data. Refer to page 319 for
further information on this.
12.8.5.1 Functional sub blocks required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
12.8.6 Numerable push-button

Numerable push-buttons act as parents for not numerable pushbuttons.
Only element types defined as not numerable pushbuttons can be associated and thus
cross-referenced to these elements.
It is not a requirement to define pin numberings to these elements to enable cross-

referencing.
12.8.6.1 Numerable push-buttons required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.7 Non numerable push-button

Non numerable push buttons are considered as child to numerable pushbuttons. They will
adopt the Numerable pushbuttons SNA data and will cross-reference to one another upon
assignment of a function.
- 246 -
12.8.7.1 Non Numerable push-buttons required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.8 Equipotential cross reference

These elements are used to provide intelligence to wires that occur in multiple locations
within a project. They do not require a function, as they realise the wire mark value of the
wire they are connected to; and will cross-reference to the next equipotential element they
find which has the same wire value.
You have a second method for cross-referencing equipotentials to one another, which can
be achieved through the assignment of a similar function. It is not a requirement to place
the same wire mark value to cross-reference when employing this method.
Equipotentials only require 6 attributes to be fully intelligent within ED, and have a particular
cross-reference abilities, (refer to page 246), they can also be positioned horizontally or
vertically dependent upon your working methods.
The only care that should be taken when generating equipotential elements is that the
XR_NEXT / XR_PREV / DWGPREV / DWGNEXT etc. attributes be located correctly
relative to the element graphic.
12.8.8.1 Equipotentials required attributes

- CN1 Pin value must be set to 1
267 DWGPREV Next drawing
267 DWGNEXT Previous drawing
276 XR_PREV Previous occurrence
275 XR_NEXT Next occurrence
270 PROJECTPREV Previous project occurrence
270 PROJECTNEXT Next project occurrence
12.8.9 Fuse or protection element

These elements will be included in parts list reports and can be associated a catalogue and
reference, these elements cannot be cross-referenced.
- 247 -
12.8.9.1 Fuse or protection elements required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.10 Final consumption (motors, resistors)

12.8.10.1 Final consumptions required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
12.8.11 Passive element (condensing unit)

12.8.11.1 Passive elements (condensing unit) required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
- 248 -
12.8.12 Terminal
A terminal in reality needs to be transparent as regards the equipotential it is on. However
within ED the terminal also needs to break an equipotential to provide the necessary
information for pin connections and internal / external element wiring, to the terminal.
Therefore, although you can see in ED an inserted terminal break an equipotential, ED

does not recognise that any break has occurred, and thus considers the terminal
transparent. Therefore, if you place two different equipotential numbers on either side of a
terminal, ED will think that you have effectively placed two marks on one equipotential wire
and will give a short circuit error message.
Through the terminal editor you are able to automatically annotate internal and external
cable / harness information, to your schematics.
Terminals have an internal connection, pin 1, and an external connection, pin 2. This
distinction is used while creating the terminal drawings.
12.8.12.1 Terminal elements required attributes

- CN1 Pin value must equal 1, Internal connection
- CN2 Pin value must equal 2, External connection
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
261 CABLE*IN Internally connected cables
261 CABLE*OUT Externally connected cables
264 CDESC*IN Internally connected cable description
264 CDESC*OUT Externally connected cable description
12.8.13 Power source (power outlet)

These elements many similarities with terminals as they represent the power source /
circuit link, plug sockets, etc. they are not transparent however and cannot have cable in
out information assigned to them, as with terminals.
12.8.13.1 Power source (power outlet) required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
- 249 -
12.8.14 Auxiliary graphics

When created in Schematic libraries they are essentially dumb graphics, and do not require
any attributes, due to this they are unintelligent, and are not analysed by ED.
Auxiliary elements also happen to be the default element types for Physical libraries, and,
(where the Max module is employed), contain a large number of specific attributes for pin
data which includes to and from information, connected equipotential data, the element pin
number, a secondary SNA attribute and other information required to obtain the optimum
from the Max module, (refer to page 255).
12.8.15 Groups of elements

A group of elements is any group of elements and separate entities. They can be made of
entire circuits, groups of equipotentials, etc. The benefit of using groups of elements is that
you are able to insert multiple elements at the same time. If you use a specific circuit
regularly, it can be created as a group of elements, and as such provides great time
savings.
For instance in the Din library, an element called L shows three phase lines numbered L1-
L2-L3 running from top-left to top-right with equipotential references at both ends.
12.8.16 PLC CPU – PLC slot – PLC sub slot
To learn about these element types please refer to page 382.
12.8.17 Prototype
Prototype elements are essentially blank dwg files; their purpose is to store all of your layer
table information, as well as any particular AutoCAD line styles that you may want to use
your drawing and plot configurations, and any other standard AutoCAD information that can
be assigned to a blank drawing.
They offer considerable time savings in as much as, the selection of a specific prototype
will effectively provide you with all of a drawings set up, leaving you free to commence
design of your drawing / element.
An example of a prototype element is PROTO from library the Monta, this being the ED
default prototype for drawings. Prototypes are available every time you create a new
drawing, and can be taken from either the Monta library or the schematic library you have
defined to your project. Due to the fact that the Monta library is always accessible, it is
advisable to create prototypes here.
The PRLIB prototype also found in the Monta library is the default prototype for new
elements and contains all standard attribute layers, a selection of line types, line weights,
AutoCAD page set-up, and plot configurations. Due to the amount of predefined
information that can be obtained from a prototype it is extremely important that the correct
type be assigned to an element or drawing. Due to the nature of prototypes, once they
- 250 -
defined to an element or drawing and accepted they cannot be changed, and associated
data can only be edited within the drawing itself.
Refer also to page 249 for further details on data that can be associated to prototypes.
12.8.17.1 Prototypes for DWG reports
These prototypes have specific attributes, more information on these attributes can be
found in the ED2010 Technical Guide.
ED comes as standard with a number of RPT matrix types as standard for use with DWG
reports, these are located in the MONTA library and are all prefixed RPT followed by the
report name that they are for use with, for example RPTCOP4 is for use with the COP4
report.
12.8.17.2 Prototypes for Terminal drawings
These prototypes have specific attributes, more information on these attributes can be
found in the ED2010 Technical Guide.
ED comes as standard with a number of terminal drawing matrix types, these are located in
the MONTA library, and are all prefixed by MATRIX.
12.8.18 Layout
These are the default drawings for Cabinet type libraries and are usually made up of 3D
representations of cabinet enclosures. They can have attributes such as catalogue and
reference and thus are included in BOM.
12.8.19 Title box

These elements are employed for the creation of new drawings, and provide the title box for
any new drawings created. They can include your company logo and be edited to suit your
standard company titlebox, refer to the ED Technical Guide for more information on titlebox
attributes.
12.8.19.1 Titlebox required attributes
271 ROW# Row value
265 COL# Column value
268 LIMIT1 Upper left - usable area
268 LIMIT2 Lower right - usable area
12.8.20 Harness
Harness elements are elements that represent the internal wiring of a single cable.
Harnesses have connectors associated to them, which represent the individual pins of a
harnesses plug connectors.
It is not necessary to insert a harness element into your drawings, or even design harness
elements within your library. This is optional, and depends upon the results that you want
to achieve with your harness and connectors, there are 9 attributes available per pin of a
harness element, so you can graphically display a great deal of information relating to your
harnesses in the form of pin out charts if you choose.
- 251 -
Although it is not a requirement that you draw a harness representation, of your library
element it is essential that you define all the internal harness connection information
required within a harness’ Element information card, refer to page 232 for further details on
defining harness pin information.
12.8.20.1 Harness required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
USER# User information
266 CON_NAME# Connector name
263 CONNEX_A# Pin primary connection
264 CONNEX_B# Pin secondary connection
265 COLORA# Colour of the primary connection
266 COLORB# Colour of the secondary connection
272 SIGNAL# Pins signal value
Cross-reference information related to the location of the
275 XR_MAIN#
associated pin
268 EQUIPOT# Equipotential value connected to the pin
12.8.21 Connectors
Connectors are representations of the plugs connector pins, and can be externally wired to
standard ED elements, they are child to harness elements and are associated to a harness
through the employment of the Harness command, located in the Set toolbar, they will then
adopt a specific plugs pin data from the associated Harness element.
12.8.21.1 Connector required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
266 CON_NAME# Connector name
263 CONNEX_A# Pin primary connection
264 CONNEX_B# Pin secondary connection
265 COLORA# Colour of the primary connection
266 COLORB# Colour of the secondary connection
272 SIGNAL# Pins signal value
Cross-reference information related to the location of the
274 XR_MAIN
associated harness
12.8.22 Router
This element type is located in the MONTA library by default, and is employed in the
generation of Max cabinets. ED will use the element ROUTER from the MONTA library as
the default when drawing cabinet trunking. Routers have a range of unique attributes
- 252 -
associated to them, such as SNA2, SIZE, ALLOWED, DENSITY, TOTAL AREA, and this
Router only exists in the MONTA library. The elements themselves provide you with full
intelligence for trunking routes, and provide information such as trunking fill, number of
wires, total area used, etc.
12.8.23 DIN rail
DIN rail can be employed to indicate the location of rail within your enclosure to which
components will be attached.
12.8.23.1 DIN rail required attributes
12.8.24 Accessories
The element has been created to provide a solution for any part that you want to have in
your enclosure drawing, which may not appear in your schematic drawings.
Example
If you wanted to include a handle within a cabinet drawing, you would not show it in your
schematics, however you would want the handle illustrated in your enclosure. By using the
Define Parts table, refer to page Error! Bookmark not defined., you could insert an
accessory element into your parts definition table without having to physically insert a
schematic element, and associate a reference to it, which has a physical representation of
a handle, assigned to it. This would then allow you to insert the handle into the cabinet.
12.8.25 Free relay

These elements are considered as parents to contacts, in as much as they have child
elements related to them through a shared function, defined to the elements with the Set
function command, (refer to page 133).
Any child elements associated to a parent will automatically adopt the following information
from the parent:
 Numbering.
 Cross-reference location of the parent element.
Unlike normal relays you are not required to assign any contacts. Any contact placed in a
scheme and associated to the relay by application of the same function will automatically
cross reference. The contacts noted below the relay will be displayed in the order in which
they are found in the scheme's. In order to have pin numbers noted to the contacts, it is a
requirement that the contact elements have a value applied to the CN pin attributes as
illustrated below.
Contacts that you assign to a relay, and their pin numberings will be automatically
annotated into the elements XR_MAIN attribute, you are able to define the location, number
- 253 -
of contacts displayed in one column etc. through Cross-reference parameters, (refer to
page 321). Furthermore you have an option in the element information card that lets you
define the contact ordering, either by pin number, or by the X Y co-ordinate location within
the schemes.
12.8.25.1 Relays required attributes

262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
NOTE
You cannot have both an XR_MAIN and XR_MAIN# attributes in the same element, you
should use one or the other.
12.8.26 Fused Terminal

A fused terminal has all the attributes of standard terminals with one main difference, this is
that they are not transparent on equipotentials, and can therefore have different
equipotential values internally & externally.
Through the terminal editor you are able to automatically annotate internal and external
cable / harness information, to your schematics.
Terminals have an internal connection, pin 1, and an external connection, pin 2. This
distinction is used while creating the terminal drawings.
12.8.26.1 Fused Terminal elements required attributes

- CN1 Pin value must equal 1, Internal connection
- CN2 Pin value must equal 2, External connection
276 ZONE Zone
- 254 -
268 GROUP Group
261 CABLE*IN Internally connected cables
261 CABLE*OUT Externally connected cables
264 CDESC*IN Internally connected cable description
264 CDESC*OUT Externally connected cable description
12.8.27 Connector-Def
Connector elements are for use in Harness drawing types only, which requires module 7 be
enabled. The elements are used to indicate the connectors required in the harness
assembly.
12.8.27.1 Connector elements required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
NAME Connector element number
KEY Legend insertion point
12.8.28 AE Elements
There are four AE element types which do not correspond to any of the standard ED
element types, in order to realise full intelligence when working with AE projects, ED will
apply the following element definitions to certain block types:
 Parent_E
 Child_E
 Terminal Acad_E
 Transparent Element
The element type will be automatically associated to the AE dwg based upon the AE dwg
naming convention.
Should you want to create one of these element types in ED rather than AE, you can use
the Definition Wizard, ED will allow you to place the appropriate AE attributes.
12.8.29 Physical components

Physical components are contained in Physical libraries and are always defined as auxiliary
graphic element types.
Physical components are generally used in enclosure drawings, and wiring diagrams, and
as such are directly related to your schematic elements, these can then be grouped into
categories, dependent upon whether you employ the Max module, standard ED enclosure
module or wiring diagrams.
12.8.29.1 Standard physical components
These require only a 2D or 3D representation of your schematic elements, and three
attributes, SNA, SNA2, and XR_FUNCTION.
- 255 -
12.8.29.2 Max physical components
To fully utilise this module your components should be in 3D, they require SNA and SNA2
attributes but also another four attributes per pin of the element / component. The definition
wizard will place these four pin attributes automatically for you in the location of your
choosing; however it is important that the CN value assigned before placing the attributes
be the same as the pin numbering of the element that the component is to represent.
Example
If you have a component representing a 3-phase fuse whose pin numbers are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, you will require 6 sets of pin attributes, each being made up of the following attributes:
 CN* Indicates element pin number, and is used for the connecting of
wires/cables between components.
 EQUIPOT* Annotates the wire name/number that is connected to the pin as
defined in your schematic.
 WIRE*A Annotates the element number and the pin to which the first wire
connection is made, i.e. A wires destiny information.
 WIRE*B Annotates the element number and the pin to which the second wire
connection is made, i.e. A wires destiny information.
The CN attribute must correspond to the pin number of the schematic element that it
represents to ensure that wire connections can be made, so that an element with a pin
number 87 must have a component with a CN value of 87 also.
CN attributes should also be correctly placed not only in AutoCAD’s X and Y co-ordinates
but also in the Z, this is to ensure that ED takes into account the height of the pin relative to
the element when calculating a cable/ wires true length within the cabinet.
12.8.29.3 Wiring Diagram physical components
Wiring diagram components require the same attributes that are applied to Max Module
physical components. Unlike components created for cabinets wiring diagrams are 2D
drawings, and as such they do not require you to create 3D representations of components,
due to this you do not have to take into account placement of attributes in AutoCAD Z co-
ordinates.
12.8.30 ~MARK
This element, is in fact defined as being an Auxiliary graphic, however due to its uses within
schematic drawings and its unique relationship with other ~MARK elements a description of
it is included here. ~MARK elements can either be parent or child to one another,
dependent upon the layer that they are in, (this is automatically determined by ED based
upon whether they are placed using Mark wires, or the Dependent mark command).
The elements themselves contain a number of attributes which allow you to differentiate
between equipotential trees, as well as the wires that make up a single equipotential.
There are also attributes for the assignment of true wire colour, true wire length, and the
wire size, plus an additional 10 optional wire specific user attributes.
12.8.31 SQ / CI elements
These elements are located in the MONTA library, they are used by ED as cabinet
footprints. If you are inserting a component into a cabinet layout, but have not applied
Physical Element to the manufacturers reference, then ED will read the reference
- 256 -
dimension information and will automatically create a 3D block or cylinder from the SQ,
(block), or CI, (cylinder), elements.
There are multiple SQ and CI elements in the MONTA library, each having a certain
number of pins, for example SQ4 would have 4 pins associated to it, CI8 would have 8 pins.
When ED uses an SQ or a CI element as a cabinet footprint, the scheme element will be

analysed and the appropriate SQ or CI element will be used based on the number of pins
required. For example, if you were to insert a 3 phase fuse with 6 pins, ED would
automatically use SQ6. In addition to this the pin information applied to your scheme
element will be adopted by the inserted SQ or CI element automatically. This provides you
with a quick and easy way to carryout clash detection, and connect up the components with
the tools available to you in the MAX module, without having to create unique footprints for
each reference.
12.8.32 CABLE
This element is required by ED for the creation of Harness drawings with module 7. The
element is used by the Cables command to denote cables in the harness drawings, cable
elements must be 10 units in length.

SNA Cable number
LENGTH Length of cable
KEY Legend insertion point
12.8.33 KEY_CON
This element is located in the MONTA library, is used by ED to note harness drawing
connector legend data, the elements Base point will be used when inserting in the harness
drawing, the actual location in the drawing will be relative to the connector elements KEY
attribute.
PIN_CON Connector pin values
SIGNAL_PIN Connected wire signal
COLOR_PIN Connected wire colour
TO_CON Pin TO connection information
CONDUCTOR_PIN Wire number
12.8.34 KEY_WIRE
This element is located in the MONTA library, is used by ED to note harness drawing cable
legend data, the elements Base point will be used when inserting in the harness drawing,
the actual location in the drawing will be relative to the cable elements KEY attribute.

H_CONDUCTOR Wire number
SIGNAL_CONDUCTOR Wire signal
COLOR_CONDUCTOR Wire colour
FROM Wire FROM information
TO Wire TO information
- 257 -
1 2 . 9 E l e m e n t r e p r e s e n ta ti o n s
During the development of an electrical project a single electrical component will be
displayed in different ways; for example, a fuse inserted into a scheme drawing, will have a
different representation when inserted into a cabinet, when displayed in a terminal drawing,
and/or when shown in a wiring diagram. In ED one element can have multiple
representations; depending upon the drawing type created the pertinent representation will
be inserted. The following diagram shows the differing forms that a single element can take
in an ED project.
- 258 -
Cabinet element
Associated to the scheme

element through the reference Physical library
assigned element
Wiring diagram
Scheme element element
Associated to the
scheme element
through the element
information card
Schematic library
element Physical library
element
Terminal Graphic
Associated to the scheme

element through the element
information card
Drawing type
Library type
Schematic Association
library element
As illustrated in the above diagram, there are four basic representations for a single
element, each of these are linked to one another through associations formed within
element information cards, and through the application of a catalogue and reference to an
element in a scheme drawing, for example.
The following provides information on how you may form these associations, the library and
element types used and the drawings that they will be employed in.
Symbol type Description Drawing type

Element taken from the schematic Library Scheme drawings.
Scheme
associated to a project. Refer to page 38 Refer to page 71
Element taken from a physical library associated to
a scheme element through the application of a Layout drawings.
Physical
catalogue and reference. Refer to page 307 Define Refer to page 71
Components and page 227 Dimensions…
Wiring Element taken from a physical library associated to Wiring Diagrams.
Diagram a scheme element through the reference Refer to page 73
- 259 -
information card. Refer to page 227 Dimensions…
and page 307 Define Components
Element taken from a schematic library associated
Terminal to a scheme element through the library and Terminal drawings.
graphic elements information card. Refer to page 224 Refer to page 71
Graphical library and page 236 Term Graphic
12. 10 E l e m e n t a ttr i b u t e s
The following section explains the functions and properties of attributes available within ED,
and the elements that these attributes should be applied to.
The following legend is employed in order to graphically explain which command should be
used to place attributes, and the commands that can be employed to place and edit the
attributes.
Attribute properties
Toolbar / command employed to create / place the attribute
Toolbar / command employed to modify the attribute content
12.10.1 General attribute guidelines

The TAG for each of the attributes used in ED is obligatory, and must not vary from that
outlined in the following sections.
The majority of attributes in ED can be placed anywhere in relation to an element, to

provide greater flexibility in element design.
The majority of attributes in ED should only be applied once to each element, to avoid
errors ED will automatically delete duplicated attributes when Ending an element. There
are certain elements, such as titleboxes, where attribute duplication can be beneficial, if an
attribute can be duplicated, it is noted in the section describing the attribute.
ED will automatically place attributes in a certain layer that will be automatically created
upon placement. These layers should not be changed.
The attributes Text Style, and on screen colour can be managed through the Configure,
Text Style options, refer to page 412 for more information.
Certain attributes will be described with a # suffix in the majority of cases, this is indicative
of an attribute with a variable suffix number, for example, CN#. Where the # is not
indicative of a numerical value, it will be noted in the relevant attribute section.
12.10.2 Multi-line attribute data

It is possible to have any attribute, (with the exception of the titlebox revisions, and terminal
element SNA attributes), within ED produce multi-line data by adding an underscore
followed by an incremental number to an attribute. So that you could break down a
Thermal protection function description into 2 or more lines by having 2 XR_FUNCTION
attributes called, XR_FUNCTION_1, XR_FUNCTION_2, instead of just one.
- 260 -
ED will then analyse the function assigned to the thermal and will divide the data as equally
as possible by 2, using spaces between words as the break, or new line point.
12.10.3 Titlebox attribute trim option

All the attributes that are available for titlebox elements can be modified in order to allow
you to trim the data that is noted to them. This is achieved by altering the titlebox attributes
themselves, in much the same way as when applying trim options to ANS formulas’, refer to
page 44 for more details on left and right trim options. By changing the attributes Tag’s to
include a trim option at its end the information noted to the attribute will be abbreviated.
Example
To Left Trim the Drawing Name in the titlebox:
Enter the titlebox double click on the PLANOS->PLANO attribute, or type DDEDIT into the
AutoCAD command line and select the PLANOS->PLANO attribute this will display the
following interface
By adding [1-5] to the end of the attribute Tag, only the first 5 characters of the drawing
name will be displayed.
To Right Trim the Drawing Name in the titlebox:

Enter the titlebox double click on the PLANOS->PLANO attribute, or type DDEDIT into the
AutoCAD command line and select the PLANOS->PLANO attribute. By adding [-1-5] to the
end of the attribute Tag, only the last 5 characters of the drawing name will be displayed.
12. 11 A t tr i b u t e s fo r s c h e m e e l e m e n t s
12.11.1 ADD# PLC Slot address attribute

This attribute is used to note the address of each of a PLC slots pins.
Text Style PINS
Layer ADD
Make Elements Definition Wizard DEFWIZARD
- 261 -
Number PLC NUMPLC
PLC toolbar Info PLC INFOELE
Import PLC IMPLC
NOTE
Address attributes must have the same numbering as the pin to which they are associated.
Sub Slot elements can only ever have one address attribute ADD1 as they may only have
one pin attribute.
12.11.2 CABLE#IN terminal cable attributes
These attributes are only available for terminals, and are used to note the two cables that
can be connected internally to a terminal.
Text Style CABLES
Layers CABLE1IN and CABLE2IN
Definition Wizard DEFWIZARD

Make Elements
Cables Attribute DEF CB
Set toolbar Set Cable SETCABLE

Analysis / Lists Edit Terminals & Connections
There are two CABLE#IN attributes, CABLE1IN, and CABLE2IN these will be filled in
based upon whether the first or second pin connection is cabled.
NOTE
If these attributes are not associated to terminals it will not be possible to cable up the
terminals.
12.11.3 CABLE#OUT terminal cable attributes

These attributes are only available for terminals, and are used to note the two cables that
can be connected externally to a terminal.
Text Style CABLES
Layers CABLE1OUT and CABLE2OUT

Make Elements
Cables Attribute DEF CB

There are two CABLE#OUT attributes, CABLE1OUT, and CABLE2OUT these will be filled
in based upon whether the first or second pin connection is cabled.
NOTE
If these attributes are not associated to terminals it will not be possible to cable up the
terminals.
12.11.4 CABLE_A# element cable attribute

These attributes are available for elements, and are used to note a pins first cable
connection.
Text Style CABLESE
Layers CABLE
- 262 -

The attribute suffix corresponds to the pin to which it is associated so that an elements pin
number CN6 would have a CABLE_A# attribute CABLE_A6.
NOTE
If this attribute is not associated to an elements pin it will not be possible to see any
connected cable information in the drawing.
12.11.5 CABLE_B# element cable attribute
These attributes are available for elements, and are used to note a pins second cable
connection.
Text Style CABLESE
Layers CABLE

Make Elements
Cables Attribute DEF CA

NOTE
If this attribute is not associated to an elements pin it will not be possible to see any
connected cable information in the drawing.
12.11.6 CATALOGUE manufacturers name attribute

This attribute is used to note the manufacturers name to an element.
Text Style CATALOGU
Layers CATALOGUE

Make Elements
Catalogue and Record Att. DEF CA
Set Set Catalogue & Record ECAT

Analysis / Lists Define Parts
PLC Toolbar Info PLC INFOELE
NOTE
If this attribute is not associated to an element you will not be able to associate materials to
it.
12.11.7 CN# pin connection attribute
The CN# pin attributes are essential to form connections between elements. The attribute
values can be numerical, alphabetical or alphanumerical, for example, when placing a pin,
you can assign a pin value of A1 with a pin order of 1 with the following results:
- 263 -
Text Style PINS
Layers TPOL and FPOL (when pin is forced)

Make Elements
Pins DPOL
Resetting Force Pins FPOL

Basepoint
NOTE Connected
The CN attributes must not be further than
wire2.25mm from the element connection point
Basepoint
1.5mm Connected
wire
1.5mm
Connected CORRECT
wire
3mm
Connected
wire
3mm
Basepoint
Basepoint
INCORRECT
12.11.8 CONNEX_A# first connection for connector/harness

elements
This attribute is used to note the connector and pin which makes the first connection.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers CONNEX_A
Set toolbar Set Harness HARNESS

number CN6 would have a CONNEX_A# attribute CONNEX_A6.
NOTE
This attribute is only available for Connector and Harness elements. Connector elements
always require a pin numbering of 1 so that the attribute will always be CONNEX_A1
- 264 -
12.11.9 CONNEX_B# second connection for connector/harness
elements
This attribute is used to note the connector and pin which makes the first connection.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers CONNEX_B

number CN6 would have a CONNEX_B# attribute CONNEX_B6.
NOTE
always require a pin numbering of 1 so that the attribute will always be CONNEX_B1
12.11.10 CDESC#IN terminal cable attributes

These attributes are only available for terminals, and are used to note the two cables
descriptions that can be connected internally to a terminal.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers CDESC1IN and CDESC2IN
Set toolbar Set Cable Description CDESC

There are two CDESC#IN attributes, CDESC1IN, and CDESC2IN these will be filled in
based upon whether the first or second pin connection is cabled, and the cables description.
NOTE
If these attributes are not associated to terminals it will not be possible to visualise the
cables description.
12.11.11 CDESC#OUT terminal cable attributes
These attributes are only available for terminals, and are used to note the two cables
descriptions that can be connected externally to a terminal.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers CDESC1OUT and CDESC2OUT

There are two CDESC#OUT attributes, CDESC1OUT, and CDESC2OUT these will be filled
in based upon whether the first or second pin connection is cabled, and the cables
description.
NOTE
If these attributes are not associated to terminals it will not be possible to visualise the
cables description.
- 265 -
12.11.12 CDESC_A# element cable attribute description
These attributes are used to note the cable description that is connected to an elements
primary pin connection.
Text Style CDESCE
Layers CDESC

The CDESC_A# attribute, should have a suffix that matches the element pin number, for
example, CDESC_A4 would be associated to an elements pin CN4.
12.11.13 CDESC_B# element cable attribute description

These attributes are used to note the cable description that can be connected to an
elements secondary pin connection.
Text Style CDESCE
Layers CDESC

The CDESC_B# attribute, should have a suffix that matches the element pin number, for
example, CDESC_B4 would be associated to an elements pin CN4.
12.11.14 COL# titlebox column attribute

These attributes are used to note the column information to your drawing titlebox elements.
Text Style COL
Layers COL
Various toolbar Update Titlebox UPS

NOTE
You require a minimum of 1 COL attribute, there is no limit to the number of col attributes
you can place in any titlebox element.
12.11.15 COLORA# connector colour attribute

This attribute is used to note the primary connection colour.
Text Style COLOR
Layers COLORA
Analysis/Lists Analyse Harness
- 266 -
NOTE
always require a pin numbering of 1 so that the attribute will always be COLORA1
12.11.16 COLORB# connector colour attribute

This attribute is used to note the secondary connection colour.
Text Style COLOR
Layers COLORB

NOTE
always require a pin numbering of 1 so that the attribute will always be COLORB1
12.11.17 COM# PLC Slot comments attribute

This attribute is used to note the address of each of a PLC slots pins.
Text Style PINS
Layer COM

Make Elements
Pins DPOL
Number PLC NUMPLC

Import PLC IMPLC
NOTE
Comment attributes must have the same numbering as the pin to which they are associated.
Sub Slot elements can only ever have one Comment attribute COM1 as they may only
have one pin attribute.
12.11.18 CON_NAME connector name attribute

This attribute notes the connector’s name.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers CON_NAME

NOTE
This attribute is only available for Connector and Harness elements.
12.11.19 COUNTER terminal attribute

This attribute is used for terminal numbering.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layer COUNTER
- 267 -
Make Elements
Counter Attribute DEF CO
Define Parts
Analysis/Lists
Edit Terminals & Connections
Numbering Number Terminals NBO
Reset Terminals RBO
Resetting Reset Numerical Terminals RBON
Force Terminals FTERM
NOTE
Even if this attribute is not in a terminal element, ED will still note the counter data to the
terminals SNA attribute.
12.11.20 DES# PLC Slot description attribute

This attribute is used to note the description of each of a PLC slots pins.
Text Style PINS
Layer DES

Make Elements
Pins DPOL
Info PLC INFOELE

PLC toolbar
Import PLC IMPLC
NOTE
Description attributes must have the same numbering as the pin to which they are
associated. Sub Slot elements can only ever have one Description attribute DES1 as they
may only have one pin attribute.
12.11.21 DWGNEXT equipotential cross-reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the Next drawing in which an equipotential occurs.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_NEXT
Analysis/Lists Analyse Equipotentials
12.11.22 DWGPREV equipotential cross-reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the Previous drawing in which an equipotential occurs.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_PREV
- 268 -
12.11.23 EQUIPOT# equipotential harness attribute
This attribute is used to note the equipotential to a Harness element; the equipotential data
is taken from the Connector element associated to the harness.
Text Style EQUIPOTE
Layers EQUIPOT

The EQUIPOT# attribute, should have a suffix that matches the element pin number, for
example, EQUIPOT8 would be associated to the harness elements pin CN8.
NOTE
This attribute is only available for Harness elements.
12.11.24 GROUP circuit grouping attribute

This attribute is used to group elements to a specific circuit.
Text Style GROUP
Layers GROUP

Make Elements
Zone, Location & Group Att. DEF GR
Set Set Zone, Location & Group EST

12.11.25 LAB# PLC Slot label attribute

This attribute is used to note the label of each of a PLC slots pins.
Text Style PINS
Layer LAB

Make Elements
Pins DPOL
Info PLC INFOELE

PLC toolbar
Import PLC IMPLC
NOTE
Label attributes must have the same numbering as the pin to which they are associated.
Sub Slot elements can only ever have one Label attribute LAB1 as they may only have one
pin attribute.
12.11.26 LIMIT1 and LIMIT2 titlebox usable area attributes

These attributes are used to define the area of a titlebox that maybe be used by ED when
carrying out certain automated processes, specifically XLS Automation, and Project/Library
Shows.
- 269 -
This is achieved by adding LIMIT attributes to your preferred titleboxes. By placing LIMIT1
and a LIMIT2 attributes you define the area in which the slot / sub slot, device, wire, and
terminals will be placed, the main options that you have available are illustrated below.
These are of course, flexible dependent upon the number of rows you have within your
titleboxes, and the standard you are working to DIN or ANSI for example.
ED will recognise the location of rows where the area defined, covers multiple rows as in
the first example illustrated above.
To assign the LIMIT attributes you should employ the AutoCAD command ATTDEF this
command allows you to enter an attribute name and define its location within the titlebox
element drawings, this is most easily achieved by entering the name as LIMIT1 and
selecting the Pick point option. You can then place the attribute repeat the process for
LIMIT2.
IEC DIN
standard standard
The attributes themselves can be any size you prefer, and there are no restrictions on
layers used, so that you can choose to have them hidden within your drawings.
The illustrations show the different limit settings required for an ANSI and a DIN standard
titlebox. It is a requirement that ANSI titleboxes, (those with multiple rows) have the LIMIT1
setting to the left of the first row attributes, so that ED reads the first row. LIMIT2 should be
to the right of any row set that you do not wish to include in the usable are.
As DIN titleboxes, (those with a single row and column attribute sets), will not have the
same constraints as ANSI titleboxes, you need only specify the limits within the titlebox, so
- 270 -
that the area does not include either Row or Column attributes. The area that you define
can be as large or as small as you wish.
Text Style COLUMN
Layers UPS
12.11.27 LOCATION element assembly attribute

This attribute is used to define the physical location of elements.
Text Style LOCATION
Layers LOCATION

Make Elements
Zone, Location & Group Att. DEF ST

12.11.28 PREFIX terminal strip name attribute

This attribute is used for defining a terminal strip.
Text Style TERMINAL
Layer PREFIX

Make Elements
Terminal Prefix DEF PR
Define Parts
Analysis/Lists
Edit Terminals & Connections
Set Set Terminal IBO
PLC Info PLC INFOELE
Resetting Force Terminals FTERM
NOTE
If this attribute is not associated to a terminal element, you cannot number the terminal.
12.11.29 PROJECTNEXT equipotential cross-reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the Next project in which an equipotential occurs.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers PROJECTNEXT
12.11.30 PROJECTPREV equipotential cross-reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the Previous project in which an equipotential occurs.
- 271 -
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers PROJECTPREV
12.11.31 RACK PLC Slot rack attribute

This attribute is used to note the rack to a PLC slot, and/or sub slot.
Text Style RACK
Layer RACK

Make Elements
Rack & Slot attributes DEF RA
Info PLC INFOELE

PLC toolbar
Set Rack & Slot SETRACK
NOTE
This attribute is essential for PLC slots and sub slots as the Rack is used to form an
association between Slots and sub slots.
12.11.32 RECORD manufacturers reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the manufacturer’s reference to an element.
Text Style REFERENC
Layers RECORD

Make Elements
Catalogue and Record Att. DEF RE
Set Set Catalogue & Record ECAT

NOTE
If this attribute is not associated to an element you will not be able to associate materials to
it.
12.11.33 ROW# titlebox row attribute

These attributes are used to note the row information to your drawing titlebox elements.
Text Style ROW
Layers ROW
Various toolbar Update Titlebox UPS

NOTE
You require a minimum of 1 ROW attribute, there is no limit to the number of col attributes
you can place in any titlebox element.
- 272 -
12.11.34 SIGNAL# first connection for connector/harness
elements
This attribute is used to note the harnesses connector pin signal.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers SIGNAL
Analysis/Lists Analyse Harness HARNESS

number CN6 would have a SIGNAL# attribute SIGNAL6.
NOTE
always require a pin numbering of 1 so that the attribute will always be SIGNAL1
12.11.35 SLOT PLC Slot attribute

This attribute is used to note the slot to a PLC slot, and/or sub slot.
Text Style SLOT
Layer SLOT

Make Elements
Rack & Slot attributes DEF SL
Info PLC INFOELE

PLC toolbar
Set Rack & Slot SETRACK
NOTE
This attribute is essential for PLC slots and sub slots as the Slot is used to form an
association between Slots and sub slots.
12.11.36 SNA2 physical component numbering attribute
This attribute is employed for numbering of physical components it may also be applied to
scheme elements; in the case of physical components it provides you with a way to apply a
secondary numbering system for you cabinet components. SNA2 will only be filled in on
scheme elements if a physical component has been numbered.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers SNA2

Make Elements
Rack & Slot attributes DEF S2
Numbering Number Elements RENUM
12.11.37 SNA scheme element numbering attribute

This attribute is used to note scheme elements numbering.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layers SNA
- 273 -
Make Elements
Rack & Slot attributes DEF SI
Analysis/Lists Define Parts

Numbering Number Elements RENUM
PLC Info PLC INFOELE
Reset Element RESELE
Resetting
Force Element FELE
NOTE
In the case of terminals this attribute to note both the PREFIX and COUNTER.
12.11.38 SYM# PLC Slot/Sub slot connection attribute
This attribute is assigned to a PLC Slot and is used to note information about the element
and equipotential connected to a PLC Sub slot of each of a PLC slots pins.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layer SYM
Analysis/Lists Cross-Reference Analysis

NOTE
The SYM# attribute, should have a suffix that matches the element pin number, for
example, SYM8 would be associated to the harness elements pin CN8.
12.11.39 USER# element user data attributes

These attributes have two uses within ED, the first allows you to apply any information to
elements; the second use allows you to note accessory data to scheme elements.
Text Style USER
Layers USER
Set toolbar Set User Attribute USERATT

12.11.40 TECHDATA0# element technical data attribute

These attributes are employed to note a manufacturer’s reference technical data. There
are 5 Techdata attributes numbered TECHDATA01, TECHDATA02,
TECHDATA03…TECHDATA05.
Text Style SYMBOL
Layer SYM

Make Elements
Tech. Data attribute DEF TR
Analysis/Lists Technical Data Analysis
- 274 -
12.11.41 XR_FUNCTION element function attribute
This attribute can be used simply to not information to an element, or to form an association
between parent and child elements to cross-reference them to one another, for example a
relay and contacts.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_FUNCTION

Make Elements
Function Attribute DEF FU
Set Set Function EFU

Numbering SNA to Function SNAFUN
NOTE
This attribute is required for any element that can cross-reference. It may also be applied
to terminals, when applied to terminals it may be used for the creation of multi-level
terminals.
12.11.42 XR_MAIN element cross-reference data attribute
This attribute notes elements cross-reference information, depending upon the element
type the layer and cross-reference data will differ as follows.
Type 1
Relays or elements with contacts
Push buttons numerable and non numerable
NOTE
This will note the contact information, and cross-
reference information, in the case of relays or
elements with contacts, and the cross-reference
information of associated pushbuttons.
Type 2
Child elements, e.g. Contacts
PLC Slots, and PLC Sub slots
NOTE
This will note the cross-reference information of the
parent element
Type 3
CPU’s
NOTE
This will note the cross-reference location rack and spot data of the associated PLC slots
- 275 -
Text Style CROSSREF
CROSSREF Types 1 and 3 in projects
Layers
XR_MAIN Type 2

Make Elements
Cross. Ref. Attribute DEF RC

NOTE
The XR_MAIN attribute will be automatically filled in when a Cross-Reference Analysis is
carried out.
WARNING!
If you choose to place XR_MAIN# attributes, any XR_MAIN attribute will be automatically
deleted.
12.11.43 XR_MAIN# element cross-reference data attribute

This attribute can be used to note multiple cross-reference data insertion points to provide
more flexibility in the display of cross-reference information.
Text Style CROSSREF
Layers XR_MAIN

Make Elements
Multi. Cross. Ref. Attribute DEFXR_MAIN

NOTE
When employing XR_MAIN# attributes no XR_MAIN attribute should be present in the
element.
WARNING!
Upon placement of an XR_MAIN# attribute, any existing XR_MAIN attribute will be
automatically deleted.
12.11.44 XR_NEXT equipotential cross-reference attribute

This attribute is used to note the Next occurrence of an equipotential in a projects drawings.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_NEXT
- 276 -
12.11.45 XR_PREV equipotential cross-reference attribute
This attribute is used to note the Previous occurrence of an equipotential in a projects
drawings.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_PREV
12.11.46 ZONE element sub-assembly attribute

This attribute is used to define the physical location of elements.
Text Style ZONE
Layers ZONE

Make Elements
Zone, Location & Group Att. DEF OR

12. 12 A t t r i b u t e s f o r p h ys i c a l e l e m e n t s

The CN# attributes have the same properties as described on page 262 CN# pin
connection attribute. The CN value of the physical element must match that of the scheme
element it is associated to.
12.12.2 COUNTER terminal attribute
The COUNTER attributes have the same properties as described on page 266 COUNTER
terminal attribute. The physical component element will adopt the value from the scheme
element that it represents
12.12.3 EQUIPOT# equipotential attribute

The EQUIPOT# attributes have the same properties as described on page 268 EQUIPOT#
equipotential harness attribute except that the attribute will note the equipotential value
connected to the physical element, (this is based on the scheme connection information).
Commands that can alter this attribute information in cabinets are as follows:
Connect CONNECT
MAX toolbar
Conedit CONEDIT
- 277 -
12.12.4 PREFIX terminal strip name attribute
The PREFIX attributes have the same properties as described on page 270 PREFIX
terminal strip name attribute. The physical component element will adopt the value from
the scheme element that it represents.
The SNA attributes have the same properties as described on page 272 SNA scheme
element numbering attribute. The physical component element will adopt the value from
the scheme element that it represents.
12.12.6 SNA2 physical component numbering attribute
The SNA2 attributes have the same properties as described on page 272 SNA2 physical
component numbering attribute.
12.12.7 WIRE#A connection attribute
This attribute is employed in physical elements only, to allow ED to connect wires to the
cabinet elements first pin connection.
This attribute is also employed in wiring diagram elements, and notes the elements first pin
connection data.
Text Style FUNCTION
Layers XR_PREV
Connect CONNECT
MAX toolbar Conedit CONEDIT
Number Wires NWIRE
NOTE
The WIRE#A attribute should be numbered in accordance with the pin to which it is
associated, so that pin CN5 would have a WIRE5A attribute associated to it.
Physical Component Wiring Diagram

12.12.8 WIRE#B connection attribute
This attribute is employed in physical elements only, to allow ED to connect wires to the
cabinet elements second pin connection.
This attribute is also employed in wiring diagram elements, and notes the elements second
pin connection data.
Text Style FUNCTION
- 278 -
Layers XR_PREV
Connect CONNECT
MAX toolbar Conedit CONEDIT
Number Wires NWIRE
NOTE
The WIRE#B attribute should be numbered in accordance with the pin to which it is
associated, so that pin CN5 would have a WIRE5B attribute associated to it.
Physical Component Wiring Diagram
12.12.9 XR_FUNCTION element function attribute

The XR_FUNCTION attributes have the same properties as described on page 274
XR_FUNCTION element function attribute. The XR_FUNCTION attribute in physical
elements will only note the data applied to the linked scheme element.
12. 13 A t tr i b u t e s fo r t e r m i n a l g r a p h i c e l e m e n ts
12.13.1 CABLE attribute

These attributes note the name of the cable connected between a terminal and element
Text Style PINS
Layers CABLE

The CN# attributes have the same properties as described on page 262 CN# pin
connection attribute. The CN value of the terminal graphic element does not require any
value be assigned to it as it will adopt this from the scheme element it represents.
12.13.3 SNA element numbering attribute

element numbering attribute. The terminal graphic element will adopt the value from the
scheme element that it represents.
- 279 -
12.13.4 WIRE#A cable conductor attribute
The WIRE#A attributes have the same properties as described on page 277 WIRE#A
connection attribute. The terminal graphic element will use this attribute to note the cable
conductor connected to the element pins first connection.
The variable should match the numbering of the CN attribute to which it is associated, so
that CN2 would have a WIRE2A attribute.
12.13.5 WIRE#B cable conductor attribute

The WIRE#B attributes have the same properties as described on page 277 WIRE#B
connection attribute. The terminal graphic element will use this attribute to note the cable
conductor connected to the element pins second connection.
The variable should match the numbering of the CN attribute to which it is associated, so
that CN2 would have a WIRE2B attribute.
12. 14 A t tr i b u t e s fo r c a b i n e t e l e m e n ts
12.14.1 CATALOGUE manufacturers name attribute

The CATALOGUE attributes have the same properties as described on page 262
CATALOGUE manufacturers name attribute.
12.14.2 RECORD manufacturers reference attribute

The RECORD attributes have the same properties as described on page 271 RECORD
manufacturers reference attribute.

element numbering attribute.
12. 15 M a k i n g e l e m e n t s i n te l l i g e n t
The following sections outline the attributes required to make elements intelligent, and
commands found in the largest of ED’s available toolbars, (Make Elements). Nearly every
command in this toolbar is for the placement of the attributes required by various elements,
to allow optimum performance. Every attribute serves a specific purpose, and the addition
of these attributes is what provides ED elements with their intelligence. To learn more
about the attributes available within ED, please refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide.
NOTE
When creating elements you should be aware that any attribute appearing twice, or more,
inside an element will be deleted, so that only one of each attribute type will remain inside
the element.
12.15.1 Definition wizard

This command enables you to quickly place attributes that relate to specific elements, the
command will automatically realise the type element you are creating and provides you with
the minimum required attributes for the creation of that element. The command itself
- 280 -
differentiates between Titleboxes and all other element types, so that where you are
creating a titlebox element a unique interface will be displayed, refer to page 282.
 Toolbar: Make Elements

 ELECTRICAL menu: Library Elements Definition Wizard
 Command line: DEFWIZARD
This is by far the most useful tool for the creation of elements and provides you with a one
stop attribute solution.
After having created a new element and having filled out the element information card and
drawn the elements graphic, you can employ the Definition wizard, which will provide a list
of the required attributes for your element.
The top of the dialogue interface provides information relating to the type of element that
you are defining attributes to, the library that the element is contained within, along with X,
Y, Z co-ordinates which locate the position of the user defined base point. ED will fill these
fields automatically, upon entering the dialogue window.
Necessary attributes
already placed in the
element
Optional attributes,
check to add to
element
Necessary attribute,
not contained in the
element
12.15.1.1 All attributes

Allows you to view all the attributes available within ED.
12.15.1.2 Required attributes
Allows you to view all the attributes, which are required for the type of element being
created.
- 281 -
Depending upon the element type you are creating certain attribute names will be in grey
with their checkboxes ticked. Those attribute names, which are in grey, are necessary for
the generation of your element, and should always be added into the element for it to
function correctly, within ED.
When a checkbox is ticked and shown in grey, (as illustrated), it indicates

that the attribute is already contained within the element.
Any attributes names shown in black without the checkboxes ticked, indicate those
attributes, which are not necessary for the element. However, if you want the element to
contain any of these, you can incorporate them by checking the box to the left of the
attribute name by double clicking on the check box.
Optional attribute Optional attribute
Not to be included To be included
12.15.1.2.2 Attribute offset

The Attribute offset field allows you to specify the distance that you want your attributes to
be separated by; this option is only applicable when you choose to let ED place your
attributes automatically within the element.
12.15.1.2.3 Placing the attributes

After having selected those attributes that you are going to assign to your element and
accepting, the dialogue will vanish and you will be provided with a cursor that asks you to
indicate the new position of the base point within your element drawing. By selecting a
point and left mouse clicking you will have defined the elements BASE POINT.
The AutoCAD command line will then ask you for the:
First number of attribute CN <1>
Right mouse clicking will define the first CN number as one, you will then be asked to
position CN1 within the element. This process will continue with the CN numbers
increasing until you have placed all of the required pin attributes, when you have done this,
right mouse click, this will then prompt you to place your second attribute SNA, for example.
All attributes placed using the Definition wizard will automatically have their Tag and
Prompt fields filled in with the appropriate data.
You have two options for the placement of the rest of your attributes, by pressing Enter on
your keyboard all of the remaining attributes will be automatically placed one beneath the
other, each being offset from the other by the amount set in the Definition wizard dialogue
interface.
Alternatively, you can place each attribute individually, until all of them have been
positioned.
- 282 -
12.15.1.3 Defining PLC attributes
Where you are employing the Definition Wizard to a PLC, which has multiple pins, you are
provided with the facilities to automatically place as many sets, of PLC pin attributes as
required as follows.
When the Definition Wizard is selected in an element, which has been defined as a PLC
slot you will first be prompted for the preferred numbering of the pin CN1.
First number for attribute CN <1>:
Which you can either accept by entering, or right mouse clicking, or can change by entering
a new number. Once this is done ED will prompt for the position of the first pin
Pick the insertion point of CN1 attribute:
You will then be asked how many pins you would like to have associated to the PLC.
Indicate the number of CN attributes you wish to insert
By entering a preferred number such as 8 or 16 etc. and pressing Enter ED will ask you for
the position of the second pin number.
Indicate the next insertion point of the attribute CN2:
When this is defined by left mouse clicking in your preferred location, ED will automatically
place element groups at distances equal to the spacing you defined when positioning CN1
and CN2. The element groups will be:
 Pin CN1, 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.

 Address ADD1, 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.
 Description DES1, 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.
 Label LAB1, 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.
 Comments COM1, 2, 3, 4, 5 etc.
After the automatic placement of these attributes, ED will prompt for the placement of an
SNA attribute, etc. as normal.
12.15.1.4 Creating titleboxes
Titleboxes are a very unique type of element that
contain far more attributes than are found in any
other ED element type; to help you more quickly
produce a titlebox, the definition wizard has a
unique interface for dealing with the generation
of titleboxes.
Upon entering an element defined as a titlebox,

and selecting the Def. Wizard icon the following
The interface itself may be broken down into

various parts, each of which relates to a different area of titlebox information.
- 283 -
12.15.1.4.1 Keep previous titlebox
This option allows you to use an existing titlebox outline, and populate it with attributes, so
that you can make your existing company titlebox ED intelligent quickly and easily.
12.15.1.4.2 Delete previous titlebox

When selected any titlebox in the element drawing will be automatically changed into the
layer ED_OLD which will be frozen. This allows you to use the ED tools to create a new
titlebox outline, and populate it with attributes, to create a new ED intelligent titlebox quickly
and easily.
TIP!
If you do not want to retain an old titlebox outline that has been changed to the layer
ED_OLD, you can use the ED Erase Layer command, found on the Layers toolbar. Refer to
page 165 Erase layer for more information on this command.
12.15.1.4.3 Paper size

Through these options you may define the paper size that your titlebox will be. You may
select the pop down and pick any one of the standard sizes
available. If you do not find a suitable paper size you can select
the <Custom> option, you may then enter not only your
preferred X Y values but also define whether you want the units
to be in inches or mm.
These values in conjunction with the margins will then determine the size of the titlebox ED
will draw automatically upon accepting your settings.
12.15.1.4.4 Margins
These fields allow you to define the margins for your
titlebox, so that if you were to specify a custom titlebox of
100 X, 100 Y with margins of 5, then the titlebox lines
would be set at XY co-ordinates of 5, 5 and 95,95.
Lower left of titlebox Upper right of titlebox
The Margins and Paper size units will define exactly the size and placement of the titlebox
outline that will be drawn automatically upon Accepting your settings.
12.15.1.4.5 Columns and rows

These checkboxes and fields allow you to define the way in which ED will place your
column and row attributes within your titlebox. The options available to you are as follows.
- 284 -
 Column row attribute relative location: This check box will when selected ensure
you’re column and row attributes are placed above, or outside the titlebox drawing. When
not checked the attributes will be placed within the titlebox border.
 ANSI columns: This will place up to three columns of row attributes automatically.
You can alter the number of row attributes and the number of columns of them by revising
the Row and Column field values.
When this option is selected the last three checkbox options will be disabled automatically.
 Row attributes left: By checking this option row attributes will be included on the
left hand side of you titlebox border.
 Row attributes right: This will place attributes to the right hand side of your titlebox
enclosure, this option is not available where you have selected to automatically place ANSI
rows.
 Column attributes above: This will automatically place column attributes at the top
of your titlebox border, this option is not available where you have selected to automatically
place ANSI rows.
 Column attributes below: This will automatically place column attributes at the
bottom of your titlebox border, this option is not available where you have selected to
automatically place ANSI rows.
 Rows: By entering a number in this field you define

the number of row attributes ED will automatically place in your
drawing. The physical placement will be determined by the
checkbox settings, either top to bottom, or from bottom to top,
dependent upon your preference.
 Columns: By entering a number in this field you

define the number of column attributes ED will automatically
place in your drawing. The physical placement will be
determined by the checkbox settings, either left to right, or
from right to left, dependent upon your preference.
Where you have chosen to employ ANSI columns, the maximum number of columns that
you are able to have are 3, this will not place any column attributes however, but will
determine the number of columns of Rows within your titlebox.
The bottom of the interface has buttons that allow you to choose the attributes that you
would like to place within your titlebox. You are also able to define the distance between
automatically placed attributes, the height of them,
and the angle at which they are inserted.
- 285 -
By selecting one of the buttons, Project/Drawing
Information card or Other attributes, an equivalent
information card will be displayed as illustrated.
By double clicking on any of the fields within the

card the attribute for that field will be displayed.
Here you can see that by selecting the Name of

project field, that the attribute information PROJS->NOMPRO is displayed. This attribute
will then be available for placement within you titlebox.
The same process is available for the inclusion of drawing information card attributes.
By selecting the Other attributes button the

following interface will be displayed.
This interface contains other attributes that you

may wish to include in your titlebox, such as
Drawing Previous, but which do not appear in
either the Project or drawing information cards.
You should check the boxes of any of these you
want included in your titlebox.
12.15.1.4.7 Titlebox generation

Upon pressing the Accept button, you will be returned to your titlebox element drawing. Ed
will then carryout the following processes:
 Any existing titlebox outline will be automatically changed to the layer ED_OLD,
which will be frozen.
 A new titlebox border outline will be drawn to match your Paper size and Margin
settings.
 Column and/or Row attributes will automatically be placed relative to the new
titlebox border, the placement being dependent upon your Column and row settings.
Once the above automatic processes are complete the AutoCAD command line will prompt
you to:
Indicate the insertion point of the attributes
These being the Information card and Other attributes you have selected for inclusion.
Each attribute will have a brief description, followed by the attribute name you are to place,
for example.
Drawing number 1 (PLANOS->NR1)

Type (PLANOS->TIPUS)
Drawing number 2 (PLANOS->NR2)
Title line 1 (PLANOS->OBS1)
Project number (PLANOS->PROJNR)
- 286 -
If you do not want to place each attribute exactly, but would prefer to have all the attributes
in your titlebox, and then position them later, by right mouse clicking all of the selected
attributes will be inserted one below the other.
12.15.1.5 Creating Physical Elements
The following Definition Wizard options will only be available when the command is
activated in a physical element. The command allows you to define the size of the 3D
block, the attributes you want to associate to it and adopt
the pin numbers from any project scheme elements stored
in ED.
When the icon is selected the following interface will be

displayed.
Here you can define a preferred Height, Width and Depth

which will be used to automatically create a 3D block, or
you can select the folder icon; this will call up the standard Set Catalogue and Record
interface, here you can select any reference, and ED will employ the dimensions from this.
Once you have defined the dimensions, you should select

the Next >> button to chose the standard attributes to be
applied to the element, through the following interface.
The listed attributes are all those that are available for
Max elements, you can chose which you want to have
available inside your element, by checking the boxes
beside the attributes. The Attribute offset field allows you
to specify the distance that you want your attributes to be separated by; this option is only
applicable when you choose to let ED place your
attributes automatically within the element.
Once you have chosen the attributes you should select

the Next >> button to chose the pins to be applied to the
element, through the following interface.
You have three pin options as follows.
12.15.1.5.1 Insert Connected Pins
12.15.1.5.1.1 From project element

When selected you will have the following interface
displayed through which you can select any project
element from which ED will automatically adopt the pin
numbering. You are able to select the project, drawing,
and element type; in the case that a relay is selected ED will automatically apply the pin
numbers from all the associated contacts in addition to the relay pins.
- 287 -
12.15.1.5.1.2 Define from zero
When selected you will be given the option to define the number of pins to be associated to
your element, the pin numbers, and the manner in which they will be connected through the
pin connections interface.
12.15.1.5.2 Without connected pins

By selecting this option, no pins will be available for your element.
12.15.1.5.3 Pin connections

Depending upon whether you have selected to Insert
connected pins, From a project element or to define
from zero the pin connections screen will be displayed.
Here you are able to add pins, remove pins, define the
pin numbers and the manner in which they will be
placed relative to the element.
To add pins enter a number into the Number of pins field and press the icon.
To delete single or multiple pins, select the pins to be removed, and select the icon.
To change a pin number double click on the Pin name field.
To define the pin orientation, select the pins orientation field to access a
pop down, from which you can select the manner in which they will be
placed in the element and therefore how they will be connected in a
Max cabinet.
12.15.1.5.4 Finish
Once you have specified the elements, size, the attributes and pins, (if any), you want
associated to the element, select the Finish button to start placement of the attributes.
ED will request that you specify the base point, once this is done a 3D block, matching the
dimensions specified, will automatically be placed and the pins will be inserted, (with all the
requisite attributes), relative to the edge of the element, top, bottom, left, or right. The pins
will be placed at half the height of the element.
12. 16 D r a w i n g m e a s u r e m e n ts
You are able to define the measurements that your drawings will use dependent upon the
settings that you define to a particular prototype, these can either be Imperial
measurements, (inches), or Metric measurements, (millimetres). When a prototype
element is created, by selecting the Inches / mm icon, from the make elements toolbar, you
will effectively set the units that will be used whenever that prototype is assigned to a
drawing. The following ED standard commands will be automatically adjusted to suit the
measurement system that you wish to work in.
 Snaps
 Element sizes during insertion
 Multi phase wires distances
- 288 -
 Cross-reference parameters
You should not change a drawings unit of measurement, after having defined them through
the assignment of a prototype and commenced drawing.
12.16.1 Individual make element commands
The following attribute placement commands are available on the Make Elements toolbar
as well as through the definition wizard, and are useful for situations where you wish to add
only one attribute for example.
To employ the keyboard shortcuts for the following commands you must first enter DEF into
the command line prompt, this will then allow you to enter any of the following shortcuts to
activate the commands.
12.16.1.1 Base point
This option defines the element insertion point.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Base Point
 Command line: BASE
As ED elements will cut wires they are inserted onto, and the fact that snap settings are
generally employed for this operation, it is strongly advised that you place any elements
insertion point in a position relative to your element break lines.
Base Point
Format:
Command: BASE
Base point <40.0000,50.0000,0.0000>:
Although the base point can be anywhere, within the

default libraries it is generally placed on the top left
pin of the element, as illustrated.
12.16.1.1.1 Cabinet base points

When creating a cabinet, upon selecting to End the element ED will automatically place a
base point in the centre of the screen. Due to this it is not a requirement that a bas point be
added to these element types.
Base point
12.16.1.1.2 Physical component base

points
If you have created 3D elements then the base
point should be positioned relative to the
element; so if you want half of the element to be
- 289 -
beneath a view, (for example only part of a pushbutton will be shown on the face of a door,
the rest of the button will be within the cabinet), you should position the base point relative
to the data you want shown above/below the UCS view you are placing it on.
12.16.1.2 Defining the pins
The pins are the connection points of the elements.
 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Pins
 Command line: DPOL
The pins should be located at a maximum distance of 2.25mm from the position where the
wire will be connected; this distance is related directly to the JUSTIFICATION point defined
to the attribute.
Pins
Sele
ct to
use
PCP
conn
ectio
ns,
and
defin
When this command is selected, you e are asked for:
grap
Value of pin (max. 8 characters):? hic
Number of order of the pin: 1 size
Select location:
You can see in the prompt lines above that the value of the pin has been defined as a ‘?’
and that the number or order of the pin is ‘1’. This means that my first pin will have the
following properties:
TAG: CN1
PROMPT: CN1
VALUE: ?
By having the value ? you are able to have the pin adopt the numbering from a parent
element, for example, but still have the tag and prompt defined with a value to help you in
realising the true position of the pin relative to your element.
Any system can be used for your element pins, alphabetical, numerical or alphanumerical,
the only exception to this rule is terminals, which must always have two pins numbered 1,
and 2.
- 290 -
12.16.1.3 SNA attributes
This option allows you to place your SNA attribute. This is one of the most vital attributes
for elements. The SNA attribute is where your element numbering will be annotated.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… SNA
 Command line: Refer to table, below.
Command line Attribute Usage

DEF Scheme / layout element / component primary
SNA
SI numbering attribute
DEF Secondary numbering system for physical
SNA2
S2 components.
12.16.1.4 Function attribute

This option allows you to place your XR_FUNCTION attribute. This is vital for elements,
which you wish to cross-reference.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Function
 Command line: DEF FU
The XR_FUNCTION attribute is where your element function will be annotated. You are
also able to use this attribute for information purposes if you so choose.
12.16.1.5 Cross ref. attribute
Another vital attribute, XR_MAIN is where your cross-reference information will be written.
The information noted to this attribute varies upon the type of element that you are cross-
referencing.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Cross.References
 Command line: DEF RC
The cross-reference annotations will be noted at the same angle as the XR_MAIN attribute.
For example, if rotated at 90º the cross-reference information will be annotated at 90º
relative the element.
You can control the amount of information display in this attribute and how it is displayed
with the Cross-reference parameters command refer to page 321.
12.16.1.6 Multi cross reference attribute
This option allows you to add multiple XR_MAIN attributes; from an initial number you
define, i.e. XR_MAIN10, and allow you to place as many attributes as required for the
- 291 -
element. The attribute functions in the same way as previously stated, however it allows
new element types to be created, (refer to Cross-references for relays and contacts).

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Multi Cross.Refrncs.
 Command line: DEFXRMAIN
12.16.1.7 Catalogue & record attribute

This command is divided into two parts; the first has the keyboard shortcut CA, and allows
for the placement of the CATALOGUE attribute. The second part of the command has the
keyboard shortcut RE, and allows placement of the RECORD attribute.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Catalogue&Record.

DEF
CATALOGUE Scheme element manufacturers catalogue
CA
DEF Scheme elements manufacturers part
RECORD
RE number
These attributes provide ED with information relating to the price, weight, size, and
accessories associated to an element, they also link to the TECHDATA attributes described
below. Without these attributes it is not possible to generate a great many of the reports in
ED as they take their information direct from the catalogue and reference data assigned to
your elements.
12.16.1.8 Tech. data attribute
This command will place 5 TECHDATA attributes numbered TECHDATA1 – 5 at once.
These attributes are used to display any technical data associated to a catalogue reference.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Technical Data
 Command line: TR
12.16.1.9 Zone location & group attribute
This command allows you to place the attributes ZONE, LOCATION, and GROUP. The
attributes can be used for a variety of purposes in ED, which include, different counter
options for same elements with different locations and/or zones; filtered list for insertion of
cabinet components etc.
- 292 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Zone,location&group

DEF
ZONE Scheme element zone
OR
DEF
LOCATION Scheme elements location
ST
DEF
GROUP Scheme elements group
GR
12.16.1.10 Terminal prefix

This command is for terminals, and allows placement of the attribute PREFIX. This
attribute will have the terminal strip name (e.g.-X1) annotated into it.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Prefix
 Command line: PR
12.16.1.11 Counter attribute
This command is for terminals, and allows placement of the attribute COUNTER. The
COUNTER attribute will indicate the name/number of the terminal (e.g. 1, PE, etc.).

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Counter
 Command line: CO
12.16.1.12 Cables attributes
This command is for terminals, and allows placement of the attributes CABLE1IN,
CABLE2IN, CABLE1OUT and CABLE2OUT. These attributes have the cable conductor
information annotated into them; the IN / OUT attributes should be placed relative to the
terminal pin numbers CN1 / CN2, CN1 indicating the internal IN side of the terminal, and
CN2 the external or OUT side of the terminal.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Cables
 Command line: CB
12.16.1.13 Rack & slot attributes
This command is for plc elements, and allows placement of firstly the RACK attribute,
followed by the SLOT attribute.
- 293 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: Define… Rack and Slot

This attribute will indicate the rack number
DEF
RACK where the plc module is attached (e.g. 3). It is
RA
only used for Plc Slot elements.
This attribute will indicate the slot number of
DEF
SLOT the plc (e.g. 2). It is only used for Plc Slot
SL
elements.
12.16.1.14 Breaking lines

Command LBRK permits you to draw the cutting lines of the new elements when they are
inserted.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Library Elements Breaking Lines
 Command line: LBRK
The cutting lines are drawn in layer LBRK that is automatically turned off, and so is not
shown in elements previews. When elements are
inserted in a schematic, the wires under the element
are cut, to an equal length as that of the cutting line
drawn. If you draw wires after inserting your
elements, use the Cut wires command to break the
lines.
12.16.1.15 Check element
The command check element permits you to consult the state of the element that it is being
edited, or created.

 ELECTRICAL menu: Library Elements Check Elements
 Command line: CHECKELE
This command informs you of:

 Type of element
 Base point
 Defined pins (fixed or variable)
 Number of necessary information points/attributes
- 294 -
12. 17 M iscellan eo u s m a ke ele m en t co m m an d s
Although the main commands available for making elements intelligent are to be found in
the Make Elements toolbar, the following are other commands that can be of use, in the
process.
12.17.1 Import elements

Refer to page 91

Refer to page 178
12.17.3 Auto-new element

Refer to page 189
12. 18 E lem en t b ro w ser scr een co m m an d s

The Element Browser screen has certain commands that are specific to element drawings
and are outlined below.
12.18.1 Process elements
This function allows commands to be performed on a group of elements by means of a

batch process. Any of the processes outlined below, run in the background allowing you to
continue working with other programs while awaiting a processes completion.
A batch process can be performed on all the

elements within a library or just the selected
elements dependant upon the filter set. Through this
process, the selected elements of a library can be
updated with various options.
The standard options are shown below.
 Switch on all layers: Switches on all your drawing layers.
 Zoom Extents: Zooms all element drawings to their extents.
 Update elements from previous releases: This command is used to update old
elements it will change old layers to the latest systems used, and should be run on old
libraries as a precautionary measure, when updating.
 Execute a script: Execute a script permits you to employ the option Script of
AutoCAD. A Script creates a sequence of commands and is very useful for the
modification of drawings in AutoCAD, (refer to AutoCAD manual for further information). All
scripts written for elements are stored, by default, in the subfolder ED2010\SCRL.
- 295 -
 Plot elements: Prints all the elements of a library. This is very useful for the
printing of library shows.
 Write end script This tool allows you to run a process at the end of standard
batch processes.
12.18.2 Integrate element in tablet
Integrate tablet allows you to assign a position for the current element on the library area of
the tablet menu.
When integrating an element you will have to define:
Tablet drawing (1...4): in zone 2 the user can define up to 4 different pages.
Insertion column (1...17): the column has to be between 1 and 17 as the tablet menu.
Insertion row (1...29): the row has to be between

1 and 29 as the tablet menu.
The elements will be integrated in the library

zone of the menu of one of the four areas of the
library assigned to the project (e.g. the
TABLET2, alternate 1, in the menu DIN_1.mnu
from DIN library).
12.18.3 Library show
This command allows you to automatically

generate drawings showing all of the elements
that are in the currently selected library.
You can specify a cell type that you wish to

employ in the display of your elements, as well
as a titlebox, and prototype that will be
associated to the drawing itself, through the
interface illustrated.
 Titlebox / Prototype: You are able to change either the prototype and/or
titlebox by selecting the Edit.
 Number of elements: This field displays, the number of elements contained

within a library, upon selecting to execute the command this field will countdown as the
- 296 -
cells are inserted in the drawing, upon reaching one, the drawings will be completed, and
the interface will automatically close.
 Drawing set-up: These options allow you to specify the library from which the
cells will be taken as well as the preferred cell type. You are able to manually enter the
number of columns and rows of cells that you want to have in each drawing, by entering
values into the column and row fields.
 Offset: Here you can define the setting out point for the cells within your drawing;
you are able to change the XY co-ordinates to suit different titleboxes.
You are also able to preferred spacing between cells. Depending upon the cell chosen the
offset and spacing defined you can employ the Optimise icon, ED will then automatically
calculate the best number of columns and rows to fit your drawing titlebox.
You can also use Element Filters to accomplish selective library element samples.
12.18.4 AutoCAD element
This command allows you to open the AutoCAD dwg file of the element, and edit the
graphic, and/or add remove or change the properties of the elements attributes.
12.18.5 Handle elements
This feature allows you to copy elements from one library to another and to rename, delete,
and manipulate elements associated data.
WARNING!
Where EDSQL module 6 is being used, and you are connected to an SQL Server, you do
not have the option to cancel, so that any changes implemented will take effect immediately,
these include deletion, renaming, copying etc.
In the manipulation screen, (shown below), the left side indicates the user selected library,
(Origin library), and any elements within it to be manipulated.
- 297 -
Select the tabs to
view the desired
reference data.
The right side of the screen is the library that you are working in at present; (Destiny library),
current elements can be deleted, and renamed, as well as having their associated data
changed, with the options shown.
The lower half of the screen displays the selected destiny libraries selected reference data.
All of the data relates to the Elements information card, and all of the field data can be
changed with the exception of elements associated contacts, in the case of relays.
With the arrow button the selected element and its data will be transferred to the destiny
library, and a user definable name can be allocated.
 Delete: Erases the selected element. This operation will only delete those
selected elements that are located in the Destiny library.
WARNING!
You will NOT be given a warning prior to deletion of a selected element; so, the function
 Rename: Changes the name of a selected element, within the Destiny
library ONLY. You should select an element within the Destiny library, then enter a new
name in the Rename edit box prior to pressing the Rename button.
 New name: By selecting a reference in the Origin library, you can copy an
element into the selected Destiny library by pressing the icon shown below.
The element can be renamed while being copied to the Destiny library by typing the new
name in the New name dialogue box.
Example
In the illustration below, element MOTDCC2 of the BS library is going to be copied into the
library IEC.
- 298 -
As there already is an element no. MOTDCC2 in the IEC library, the element is to be given
a New name, (MOTBS), by selecting the arrow element no. MOTDCC2 will be copied into
IEC and renamed as reference MOTBS.
If an element, which already exists in the

destiny library, is copied from the origin
library, a prompt will appear, (illustrated),
informing you that the element already exists.
Other options provided through this prompt

are as follows:
 New name: Here you can enter a new name for the element that you are
copying; when a new name has been filled in the rename button will become active.
 Overwrite: This allows you to overwrite the element in the destiny library
with the element selected from the origin library.
 Do not copy: This option will effectively cancel the copying process for an
individual element; this option is very useful where you have multiple elements that you are
copying from the origin to destiny library, as you can choose to overwrite, or to not copy
one element at a time.
 Rename: This button will only become active when a name is provided for
n element, which does not exist in the destiny library.
NOTE
If the CANCEL button is selected at the end of the handle elements process, all the
processed information will be cancelled; none of the processed drawings will be added into
the library until confirmation is given through the selection of the Accept button.
- 299 -
13 C AT ALOGUES and REFERENCES
Catalogues contain references of components available from electrical material
manufacturers. Each Catalogue corresponds to a manufacturer or a supplier.
Several catalogues can be allocated to the same manufacturer, by splitting components

into different material families.
The references, which make up the catalogues, are different components that are available
from each manufacturer’s catalogue. Every reference can have up to 999 accessories
assigned to them, and this first level of accessories can have a second level of accessories
assigned to them, creating a two tiered accessory structure, this provides you with a
potential of 998,001 accessories for each reference.
Each accessory assigned to a reference can have a quantity allocated to it, the maximum
quantity for any one accessory being 999, you have the potential to have millions of
accessories assigned to any one reference; this provides you with the ability to break down
even the most sophisticated manufacturers part to its most basic components, and take into
account, for example, the type and number of screws required for a component when
creating your automatically generated parts list and or BOM.
Catalogues
References References
Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories
Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories Accessories
13. 1 C at alo g u e s
Catalogues are essentially databases in dbase format, (dbf), that contain manufacturer
references. ED obtains a great deal of its automatically generated report data from
catalogue references, which are assigned to your schematic elements. A catalogue itself
requires only basic information assigned to it when created, (the majority of the data being
held in the individual references).
- 300 -
The catalogues by default, are kept in
automatically created sub-directories
called \ED2010\Ca. ED is delivered with
several examples, Eldon, Weidmuller,
Siemens, and Telemecanique for example.
When a new catalogue is created you,

have to fill in a reference information card.
The reference card holds data about the
catalogue. This card includes the fields
described below:
 Catalogue: Name of the catalogue. The name of the catalogue

corresponds to a data base file, where all the data of the catalogue will be held. This file
will have the name of the catalogue with a DBF extension. The location of the catalogue,
by default, will be \ \CA. The name of a catalogue is limited to a maximum of sixteen
characters.
 Status: The catalogues can be either AVAILABLE or in BACKUP status.

AVAILABLE catalogues are accessible to work with and may be found either on the local
hard drive or on the network. BACKUP catalogues are those that have been backed up to
the disk or file and are thus not currently available for selection or use.
 References: The number of references in the catalogue.
 Catalogue password: The password of a catalogue allows the user to define an

entrance password to limit it to allowed accesses only.
 Creation Date: The date the catalogue was created.
 Modification Date: The date the catalogue was last modified.

 Descriptions: Description of the catalogue.
 Manufacturer: Complete name of the manufacturer/supplier.
13. 2 C at alo g u e b ro w ser s cre en co m m an d s
13.2.1 Importing catalogues

In order to import catalogues, you should select the Catalogues tab from the ED manager,
as illustrated below.
- 301 -
You can select a single catalogue, or use the Shift and/or Control keys to select multiple
catalogues from the list. By using the Import Catalogue icon , this will open a
window through which you can browse to the location of an AE Mdb you want to import
from.
Once you have selected the Mdb you can change the Configuration file, this allows you to
define which fields from the Mdb will be imported to which ED reference field.
The configuration settings have already been set up based on the information contained in
the Default catalogue.
By then selecting Accept ED will commence importing data form the Mdb.
It should be noted that the time it will take to complete the import process is related to the
number of catalogues selected, and the number of references contained in them. If you
want to get the catalogue data into ED quickly then you can download the listed catalogues
from the Aceri website and restore them in.
13. 3 R ef eren c es
References play a dual role in ED in that the information cards can be used either for main
manufacturer references or for accessories, which you can then assign to main references.
- 302 -
A reference card details a manufacturer’s part. The information is stored in the catalogue
database to which the reference belongs. The more information filled in these fields, the
more data you can automatically obtain from your reports.
The fields are described as follows:
 Name of reference: This field allows you to assign a name to your

reference of up to 20 characters.
 Creation: The date the reference was created.
 Modification: The date the reference was last modified.

 Quality group: Free usage. It may be used for noting the classification of the
component.
 Type: Free usage. It may be used for noting the classification of the
component.
 Units/pack: Free usage. This field allows you to fill in a quantity equal to the
number of items that are in a particular “pack”. So that if reference number 9007 was for a
box of ty-wraps, you could fill in a unit/pack quantity of 200 to indicate that each 9007
reference is made up of 200 individual items. This data is available in reports to assist with
purchasing.
 Units of measurement: Free usage. This field can be employed to indicate the
units of measurement applied to a particular reference. So that if a reference number 9009
was for DIN Rail, you could indicate that the rails came in meter long strips. This data is
available in reports to assist with purchasing.
 Manufacturer: Reference of the manufacturer if it is longer or different from the

name of the reference.
 International standard: International procedures or standard that the component is
manufactured or tested to.
 Description: Description of the reference or the component.
 Family: For information on this option refer to Family, element -

reference association section page 305
 Remarks: Free usage. It may be used for noting any aspect of the
reference.
- 303 -
 Weight: This field provides information relating to the weight of a specific
manufacturers component, the weight fields provided with ED are in kilograms.
 Price: The price of the Current Reference.
 Percentage / Total: These fields allow you to add a percentage discount

that you may obtain from a particular manufacturer.
Example
If you receive a 5% discount from Eldon you would type 5 in the discount field, this will
automatically subtract 5% from the price field and display the revised total cost in the Total
field. So that a component with a price of $20 with a discount of 5% would have a Total
cost field display of $19.
 Accessory references: Accessories can be added to or deleted from any reference

by using the, icons illustrated below.
These icons allow you to add, remove increase and

decrease accessories associated to the reference, the tools
themselves are exactly the same as those found within Set
accessory (refer to Accessories page 138 for further details).
You are able to assign up to 999 accessories

to any Reference information card. Each
accessory in turn can have a quantity
assigned to it, of up to 999, so you are able to
assign 999 accessories to a reference and
you can have up to 999 of each accessory.
Furthermore you can have a second level of
accessories these being the accessories that make up an accessory, as illustrated.
 Technical features 1-5: Technical features of the component. Upon completion of

the technical features analysis, the technical features data will be automatically re-
annotated into the data or attribute point TR, Tech. Data associated to this reference.
 More… This button allows access to an interface where you are able to
assign more descriptions and/or remarks to your reference, there are 5, extra description
and remark fields available, as outlined below.
 Description 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5: Detailed description of the component. The

Description 1 will show the value entered on the previous page of the reference card.
One possible use of this is to indicate the description in several languages. Thanks to the
ability of creating new lists in ED2010, the user can configure the parts list and the bill of
materials in different languages.
 Remarks 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5:Remarks regarding the component or possible assembly

details.
13.3.1 Dimensions…
This button accesses an interface in which you can assign information about: height, width,
depth and diameter of the component. ED will automatically adjust any dimension values
- 304 -
assigned to either mm or inches, dependent upon the Units option selected. So that is you
have specified a height of 150mm and select the inches units, the height will be
automatically adjusted to 5.906 inches.
When positioning a component in the panel

enclosure, or a wiring diagram ED2010 will
automatically create a 3D image to the
match the dimension information filled out in
these fields, unless physical representations
have been associated to the reference.
When physical and/or wiring diagram libraries and elements are

assigned in this interface, a footprint drawing should be specified.
These footprints will be used in your cabinet, and wiring diagram.
Illustrated here on the right you can see a cabinet layout
component footprint, and below it a wiring diagram component,
both of which are derived from the same reference, assigned to a
schematic element.
Dimensions are also used by the physical layout list to make a

surface analysis of the material assigned to each panel.
The Image field allows you to specify the name of

a bmp, or jpeg image file, that you wish to have
associated to a reference; this image will then be
displayed in the reference browser screen, as
illustrated.
ED will first and foremost look for the image file

with the name specified, in the image field that is
contained within the CA sub directory folder and
which has a jpeg extension; failing this ED will look for a bmp file. If ED finds neither the
physical component assigned will have its preview shown. In the case that there is no jpeg,
bmp or associated physical component the catalogues image will be shown.
13.3.2 Def. Contacts
Through this option you are able to apply contact information to a specific manufacturers
reference, this can be achieved in the same manner as outlined in Def. Contacts… on page
231.
1 3 . 4 Te c h n i c a l d a t a
Technical data will automatically be assigned to an element when a catalogue and
reference is defined which contains information within the technical data fields.
CATALOGUE
- 305REFERENCE
-
Of course, the element must have the appropriate TECHDATA attributes, and you must
ensure that you have the correct configuration to allow ED to update an elements technical
data. This configuration option will allow ED to update the technical data fields anytime a
new catalogue and reference is assigned to an element.
If you would rather disable this feature, the Analysis button located in the project
information card, will allow access to the technical data check box shown below:
13.5 Famil y, element - reference association

Families are found within both element and reference information cards, they have been
provided in order to allow you to associate elements to similar references.
The option itself has been provided to allow you to associate elements to references, by a
general family type, which can be specified in the element and reference information cards.
When assigning catalogue references to elements, you can select the icon (shown beside
this section title), within the Set Catalogue and Reference interface, to have only those
references matching the family of the element displayed.
The families are stored in a table, which can have up to 255 different types of families
assigned to it, in a variety of languages. A family field should describe a particular electrical
part, for example, you may choose to associate a Weidmuller reference such as
0105060000 to a family Terminals if you want to generally group that reference type.
Alternatively, the family could be SAK 4, which allows you to more precisely indicate the
reference type.
The same family can then be applied to elements within their element information card, so
that if you have multiple terminal representations, you could set a particular elements family
to Terminals, or SAK 4 to match a particular family defined within your catalogues
references.
To edit and maintain your table of Families you should select the Edit icon to the right of the
families’ field, (illustrated here on the left). This will open the family table as illustrated
below.
By double clicking on a preferred Language field

you may alter the families table information to
suit your requirements. You should note that the
language that you have chosen to work with in
ED defines the family language fields displayed
when you select the pop down in either the
element of reference information cards. So that
if you only work in English for example, there is
no need for you to maintain any other family
information beyond the English data.
- 306 -
13. 6 Ac c e sso r i es
As outlined at the beginning of the chapter accessories provide you with a way of creating
very detailed BOM’s and Parts lists.
Accessories may be employed in two ways dependent upon your preference, the first is as
a way of specifying the “extra” parts required for a completed part, for example, the screws,
nuts and bolts required to mount a 3-Phase fuse within.
The second is as a way of breaking down a manufacturers part, so that you could provide
details of the parts required to make a 3-Phase fuse, i.e three fuses and a fuse base.
13.6.1 Accessories as extra’s
To employ accessories as extra parts that are required for inclusion in reports, as
previously mentioned, you may use one of the following methods:
 Assign accessories in schematics to elements with Set Accessories, (refer to Set

accessory page 137)
 Assign accessories to elements within the Define Parts table (refer to Define parts
page Error! Bookmark not defined.)
 Add accessories to a reference which can then be assigned to an element (refer to
References page 301)
The first two methods are straightforward and simply require you to assign your preferred
accessories to the elements, the last method however requires some extra information be
added to the reference cards accessories, as outlined below.
13.6.1.1 Reference information card accessories

Upon assigning an accessory to a reference information card, ED will automatically stop
displaying the primary reference within your Parts lists and BOM’s.
Example
If you have a reference 0001, and add an accessory to it’s information card of 1004, the
next time you create a BOM only the part 1004 will be displayed, not 0001 and 1004.
The reason for this is to provide as much flexibility as possible, by allowing you to decide
how you want accessories to be handled within ED.
Where you have chosen to use the accessories as additional information to your main part,
it is of course very important that your main part is displayed in your Parts lists and BOM’s.
In order to ensure that this happens you should

add the main reference to itself as an
accessory. Following on from the previous
example, this would require you to add another
accessory to the reference 0001, of 0001,
making the total accessories 1004 and 0001,
This will then display the part 0001 in your

parts lists and BOM’s, ED will not display the
- 307 -
accessories assigned to the main reference accessory however, so that consistency of
information will be maintained.
If you have a second tier of accessories assigned, for example, if you were to add another
accessory of 6001, (which itself had accessories assigned to it), as illustrated below.
Then this second tier will be shown in your

reports, (in the illustration 10004), but not
6006. This is due to having assigned an
accessory to the main reference; this acts in
exactly the same way as described
previously, in as much as assignment of an
accessory requires you to also assign the
main reference to itself for it to be shown in
your reports.
So that to have your Parts list / BOM’s to list

the reference 0001 with an accessory 6006,
as well as the accessories 10004 assigned
to 6006 you would have to have the
following.
13.6.2 Accessories as component parts

This system of employing accessories allows you to define what accessories are required
to make a complete part. This is extremely useful where you are creating a specialist part.
As stated in the previous section, upon assignment of an accessory to a reference through

its information card, the main reference will no longer be displayed in BOM’s and Parts lists.
This is due to the fact that where you are, stating that a 3-Phase fuse is to be made up of 3
No. Fuses and 1 Fuse Base, so that also having the 3-Phase fuse shown in the parts list,
would prove to be extraneous information, as it would effectively show the same
information twice.
1 3 . 7 D e fi n e c o m p o n e n t s
When schematic drawings’ are initially created, the drawing is only a group of elements with
numbers to identify them. A second step is the definition of a manufacturer to each
component.
The following three methods are some of the ways to assign a manufacturer and a
reference to a component:
 In the library element card: If the catalogue and reference information is entered in
the element card, the data will automatically be transferred to the project drawings when
inserting the element. This means that a particular element can have a default catalogue
and reference and then the value does not have to be entered for all of the elements of the
same type.
- 308 -
 In the drawings: Using the commands Set catalogue and reference, you can
define the catalogue or reference. The elements can be selected either individually or
globally.
 Define Parts: This is the third way to associate the References and
Catalogues to the elements of the drawings within a project.
The command defines parts allow you to specify a manufacturer / supplier and a part
number to all of the elements within all of the drawings.
Once the information has been completed, you can automatically generate:
 Reports of bills of materials

 Feedback technical data from the component reference card to the schematics
 Produce a cabinet layout list from which the panel layout is drawn
1 3 . 8 R e f e r e n c e b r ow s e r s c r e e n c o m m a n d s
There is only one command within the reference browser page, which is unique to
references and this is outlined below.
13.8.1 Manipulate references

This feature allows you to copy a reference from the one catalogue to another and to
rename, delete, and manipulate references associated data.
WARNING!
not have the option to cancel, so that any changes implemented will take effect immediately,
these include deletion, renaming, copying etc.
In the manipulation screen, (shown below), the left side indicates the user selected
catalogue, (Origin catalogue), and any references within it to be manipulated.
The right side of the screen is the catalogue that you are working in at present; (Destiny
catalogue), current references can be deleted, and renamed, as well as having their
associated data changed, with the options shown.
Select the tabs to

view the desired
reference data.
- 309 -
The lower half of the screen displays the selected destiny catalogues selected reference
data. All of the data relates to the References information card, and all of the field data can
be changed with the exception of the references associated accessories.
With the arrow button the selected reference and its data will be transferred to the destiny
catalogue, and a user definable name can be allocated.
 Delete: Erases the selected reference. This operation will only delete
those selected references that are located in the Destiny catalogue.
WARNING!
You will NOT be given a warning prior to deletion of a selected reference; so, the function
 Rename: Changes the name of a selected reference, within the Destiny
catalogue ONLY. You should select a reference within the Destiny catalogue, then enter a
new name in the Rename edit box prior to pressing the Rename button.
 New name: By selecting a reference in the Origin catalogue, you can copy a
reference into the selected Destiny catalogue by pressing the icon shown below.
The reference can be renamed while being copied to the Destiny catalogue by typing the
new name in the New name dialogue box.
Example
In the illustration below, reference no.010716 of the Weidmuller catalogue is going to be
copied into the catalogue DEMO.
As there already is a reference no. 010716 in DEMO catalogue, the reference is to be given
a New name, (01WDM), by selecting the arrow reference no.010716 will be copied into
DEMO and renamed as reference 01WDM.
If a reference, which already exists in the destiny catalogue, is copied from the origin
catalogue, a prompt will appear, (illustrated below), informing you that the reference already
exists.
Other options provided through this

prompt are as follows:
 New name: Here you can enter a new name for the reference that you are
copying; when a new name has been filled in the rename button will become active.
 Overwrite: This allows you to overwrite the reference in the destiny

catalogue with the reference selected from the origin catalogue.
 Do not copy: This option will effectively cancel the copying process for an
individual reference; this option is very useful where you have multiple references that you
are copying from the origin to destiny catalogues, as you can choose to overwrite, or to not
copy one reference at a time.
- 310 -
 Rename: This button will only become active when a name is provided for
a reference, which does not exist in the destiny catalogue.
NOTE
If the CANCEL button is selected at the end of the manipulate references process, all the
processed information will be cancelled, none of the processed drawings will be added into
the catalogue until confirmation is given through the selection of the Accept button.
13.8.2 Import References
This command allows you to import catalogue databases from a variety of different formats,
through the following interface:
NOTE
This command cannot be used to import database information from other systems where
the database file is not correctly formatted.
The import options available are outlined below.
13.8.2.1 Filters
By selecting this button you are able to apply a filter to the data that you are choosing to
import. The filter options themselves are as per the standard filter interfaces found
throughout ED, refer to Filter page 21.
13.8.2.2 Filtetype
This is for information purposes only, and allows you to see the currently selected file type
format.
13.8.2.3 Name of the file to import
By selecting the folder option you are able to browse through your system files to locate the
file that you want to import your reference from. There are four file types that data can be
imported from, these being:
 REFS.Dbf – Standard ED references database format.

 *.Dbf - This should be employed to import any references data from versions
earlier than ED2000.
 *.Xls - Standard Excel Xls spreadsheet data.
 *.Xml - Standard XML format data.
13.8.2.4 Configuration
This option is only available when you are importing XML or XLS file type data. In the case
that REFS.Dbf data or *.Dbf data is being imported the configuration options will not be
- 311 -
required, as ED will automatically map imported field data to the appropriate ED2010
reference field.
By selecting this button you are able to define the import

configuration settings; that allow you to map the source files
field information, to ED2010 reference database field,
through the interface illustrated below.
The interface itself has two columns the first of these will
either read XML or XLS dependent upon the file type you
have chosen to import from, you can double click on a field
in the XML or XLS column, and define the name of the
source files field, that will be mapped to an equivalent ED
catalogue field.
ED stores any changes made to your catalogue configuration in the XLSCatSettings.ini file.
These files are stored in your ED2010\Ca\CatalogueName sub directories. This system
allows you to have a different configuration applied to each of your catalogues.
Example
By entering REFERENCE beside the NRELEMCAT, (DBF field for reference name), field
upon importing the data all information contained in the REFERENCE field will be noted
into the ED NRELEMCAT field.
13.8.2.5 Preview
By selecting this button you will be able to see a preview of the data that is to be imported
into ED.
The configuration settings will define the manner in

which the preview information is displayed. So that
the data displayed in the NRELEMCAT field will
match the name of an XLS or XML heading you
have defined as mapping to this through your
configuration.
Example
In the configuration options, the XLS sheet field
REFERENCE has been defined as mapping to the
NRELEMCAT, DBF field.
13.8.2.6 View XML

This option will automatically launch a program in which you will be able to view the data to
be imported.
The program launched will be dependent upon the file association you have made within
Windows. For example, it is usual to have Excel associated to files with an XLS extension;
- 312 -
and so Excel would be opened and the Excel spreadsheet you were to import, would be
automatically loaded.
13.8.3 Export References
This command allows you to export catalogue
databases to a variety of different formats,
through the following interface.
The options available through this interface are

as follows:
13.8.3.1 Filters
By selecting this button you are able to apply a filter to the data that you are choosing to
import. The filter options themselves are as per the standard filter interfaces found
throughout ED, refer to Filter page 21.
13.8.3.2 Filtetype
This is for information purposes only, and allows you to see the currently selected file type
format.
13.8.3.3 Name of the file to export
By selecting the folder option you are able to browse through your system files to define the
location you want to export a file too; you are also able to define the format the file will be in,
either:
 REFS.Dbf – Standard ED2000/2002/2003 references database format.
 *.Dbf - This should be employed to export any references data to versions
earlier than ED2000.
 *.Xls - Standard Excel Xls spreadsheet data.
 *.Xml - Standard XML format data.
13.8.3.4 Configuration
By selecting this button you are able to define the export files configuration settings.
This option is only available when you are exporting to XML or XLS file types. In the case
that REFS.Dbf data or *.Dbf data, is being exported, the configuration options will not be
required, as ED will automatically map exported field data to the appropriate ED2010
reference database field.
When selected you are able to define the export configuration

settings; that allow you to effectively map the ED2010 reference
database fields to a destiny files specific fields, through the
interface illustrated below.
The interface itself has two columns the first of these will either
read XML or XLS dependent upon the file type you have chosen
to import from, you can double click on a field in the XML or XLS
column, and define the name of the destiny files field, an
equivalent ED catalogue field’s data will then be mapped to the
specified destiny files field.
- 313 -
Example
By entering REFERENCE beside the NRELEMCAT, (DBF field for reference name), field
upon exporting the data all information contained in the ED NRELEMCAT field will be noted
into the export files REFERENCE field.
13.8.3.5 Preview
Previews are only available where you are choosing to
export a database to either an XML or XLS spreadsheet.
The configuration settings define the manner in which the

preview information is displayed. So that the data
displayed in the NRELEMCAT field will match the name of
an XLS or XML heading you have defined as mapping to this through your configuration.
- 314 -
14 AN ALYSIS
The following chapter deals with various analyses carried out by ED2010 commands to
indicate relationships between components such as relays and contacts, Plc’s and Cpu’s,
push buttons, etc. How these relationships are formed, and other command options that
affect your projects analysable data are outlined in the following chapter.
The analyses when carried out will cross-reference the following elements:
Elements to cross-reference Icon Command description
Equipotentials Analyse Equipotentials
Relays and contacts Analyse Cross. Ref
Functional blocks and sub-blocks Analyse Cross. Ref

Push-buttons numerable / not
Analyse Cross. Ref
numerable
Cpu’s and Plc slots Analyse Cross. Ref
Harnesses and connectors Analyse Harness

During the course of this chapter, references will be made to elements being either parent
or child to one another, to learn more about this topic refer to page 238.
Cross-reference annotations, vary dependent upon the ANS formula that you have applied
within the project information cards, and the types of elements that are being cross-
referenced.
The annotations are always annotated into the XR_MAIN attribute of the elements, where
this attribute does not exist in an element; no cross-reference data will be noted. The only
exception to this rule is equipotentials; these elements have attributes called XR_PREV
and XR_NEXT.
Location, zone and group data will automatically be annotated/adopted by child elements
when they are referenced to parents.
1 4 . 1 C r o s s r e f e r e n c e s fo r m u l a s
These formulas are defined through the Project information cards, each project being able
to have different formulas applied to them. There are two cross-reference formula types
available, these being:
 Cross-reference for elements

 Cross-reference for equipotentials
There is an almost unlimited amount of variables for the formulas in ED due to the fact that
you can, not only, create formulas with the symbols available, but also you have the ability
to enter wild card characters and thus create formulas of your own devising.
- 315 -
The various ways of creating formulas are covered in previous chapters; please refer to
page 41 for further details on this topic.
14.2 Cross-references for rela ys and contacts

The purpose of this analysis is to indicate the relationship between relays, (parent
elements), and their associated contacts, (child elements).
When a relay is inserted into a drawing the contacts assigned to it will be displayed in the
elements XR_MAIN attribute, these indicate the following information:
 Graphical representation of the contact type(s).

 Number of contacts available within the relay.
 Pin numbers, which the contact will adopt.
 The associated parent or child elements location and/or zone, if defined in the
ANS formula. (This data is only displayed after cross-referencing has occurred).
The link between the coil and its associated contacts is achieved by assigning the same
cross-reference function to both elements. The function being noted in the elements
XR_FUNCTION attribute, and can be up to 40 characters in length. The function can be
used to indicate an elements purpose e.g. ALARM1, Start motor, etc., or can be employed
in any other manner that you decide. Refer to page 133.
The contacts associated to a relay can be defined in any one of three ways as follows:
 Associate the contacts to the library element, refer to page 231

 Associate the contacts a catalogue reference, refer to page
 Apply unique contact information to an element in the scheme, refer to page
ED will make you aware of any errors that are caused when carrying out your cross-
referencing; refer to Common relay and contact cross-reference errors page 324
 Contact numbering: Contacts are numbered by their relative position in the

drawings. The analysis is from top to bottom and from left to right, therefore the first
numbered contact associated to a relay will be the one which is found first in a drawing and
so on.
Example
If there are two break contacts associated to the same relay in a drawing, the numbering
analysis would be 11/12 for the first contact (first available make contact) and 21/22 for the
second, (second available make contact).
 Force Contact: You have the ability to force contacts in ED and thus effectively
freeze their pin numbers, for further information on forcing pins, (refer to page 158), allows
- 316 -
you to force contacts so that you can assign a specific pin numbering to a contact. The
numbering, though, will have to exist in the associated relay card, for a relation to be made.
You can see below that the first contact has had its pin numbers forced, and because of
this, the usual rules to pin assignment do not apply, as the second contact has been given
the primary pin numbers associated to the relay.
14.3 Cross-reference options for elements w ith contacts

This section specially addresses the problems of elements that require cross-referencing in
a more, controlled, flexible, manner, (i.e., black boxes).
They have to be as flexible as functional blocks, with no limit on the number of elements
associated to them, and as controlled as a regular relay.
You can create an element and define the type of pin numbering that you want associated
to the contacts, that share an association with it, but which operates in a completely
different manner to a relay.
To do this you need to employ the attributes XR_MAIN1-20, unlike the standard XR_MAIN
attribute these will only provide a cross-reference location rather than actual contact
depictions.
In the DIN library the MAIN, (5 No. contacts) and MAIN1 (5 No. & 5 NC contacts) elements
are samples of this kind of element. Illustrated below is the element MAIN1. You can see
that the XR_MAIN1-10 attributes have been placed beside contact graphics within the
element block. The contacts are simply dumb graphics.
- 317 -
The CN defaults are defined through a contact definition sheet, as with relays. This will
then define the contact pin numbering when a similar function is assigned to two or more
elements, as illustrated above.
This system has the advantage of using the regular ED performances, such as forcing pins
of the contacts, checking the association between the parent and child elements etc, but it
provides the added bonus of preventing repetitions.
You could therefore create a group of

elements made up of as many of these
relays as you require, with as many pin
attributes as you need, to successfully
accomplish your task.
There are certain aspects of cross-reference

analysis that are managed solely by ED that
should be understood, so that you are able to fully utilise this facility, there follows a list of
those functionality’s which you should study to achieve the best results from cross-
referencing.
ANS and numbering of the different element groups, (relays), use the force command, and
of course make invisible what you do not wish to see, (SNA, CATALOGUE, RECORD or
other potentially unwanted information).
XR_FUNCTION of the different group elements, (relays), use the method you prefer to
create the association between relays and contacts. It is suggested that you avoid the ‘#’
character, this is due to its use, for cross-references of functional and sub functional blocks.
It is recommended that you should employ the use of:
 SPECIAL
 SPECIAL_1
 SPECIAL_2
 SPECIAL_pressure
 SPECIAL_timer
 SPECIAL_control
- 318 -
And so on to clarify which cross-references belong to the Special parent block.
1 4 . 4 C r o s s r e f e r e n c e o f e q u i p o te n ti a l s
In order that the equipotential continuity is noted, equipotential elements have to be
inserted, onto the ends of wires. Within the DIN library, there are a number of equipotential
blocks; some right facing, (RCEQD), and others left facing, (RCEQI). The equipotential
elements have to include XR_PREV, XR_NEXT, DWGPREV, DWGNEXT and
XR_FUNCTION attributes.
An example of an equipotential element as illustrated

showing the attribute positions.
Below you can see equipotentials cross-referenced between two drawings numbered 2 and
3. The ANS formula being employed indicates Drawing No./Column Row.
In this case, 3/1A in drawing 2, and 2/8A in drawing 3.
DRAWING 2 DRAWING 3
To assign continuity in equipotentials all you need do is insert the equipotential elements at
the free ends of the cables; to allow the equipotentials to cross-reference all you need do is
ensure that the wires have the same value assigned to them. This will provide an
association, which will be noted to the equipotential elements upon carrying out an
Equipotential cross-reference analysis.
The connections are noted by the analysis of an equipotential from the first drawing to the
next.
Example
If an equipotential is repeated in the drawings 1, 5 and 6, the program will show that a
connection exists between 1 and 5, and between 5 and 6.
There is a second way in which to assign continuity to an

equipotential, which should only be used in the case that,
multiple solutions of connection exist between several
drawings, by defining a cross-reference function, to two
equipotentials elements.
To do this you should use the Set Function command,

prompting the following dialogue:
An easier way of assigning functions to equipotentials

automatically is with the Automatic equipotential command,
refer to page 124.
- 319 -
There is a short circuit when two different numberings, (marks), are applied to the same
cable or connection tree.
14.4.1 Equipotential connections

There are two options for the treatment of equipotential connections within ED2010; these
can be defined through the Analysis and Annotations, within the Configuration options,
please refer to page 417. Dependent upon the selected option ED will analyse and form
connection between elements as outlined on page 417.
1 4 . 5 C r o s s -r e fe r e n c e o f fu n c ti o n a l b l o c k s a n d s u b -b l o c k s
This analysis is very similar to that previously outlined between contacts and relays, but
provides much greater flexibility. It permits the definition and relationship of two related
elements.
Although these elements are related to one another in the same way as relays and contacts,
in so much as a similar function should be assigned to both, in order to create a cross-
reference link. You will find that the information that can be obtained from the cross-
reference is far more comprehensive.
In the following illustration, you can see a functional block, which is cross-referencing to two
sub-blocks.
Functional sub-
block
Functional block
Functional sub-
block
As you can see the function, which has been assigned to the elements, is DEMO, this will
cause a cross-reference to occur between the three items.
However the two sub-blocks have extensions added to the end of their Demo functions,
these being #Valve Regulator, and #Pressure Control.
By adding the symbol # to the end of a function you are able to add a description of what
performance the blocks are carrying out, this will be automatically annotated into the
functional blocks cross-reference annotations.
Although the functional sub-blocks are only annotated with a basic cross-reference ANS
formula, (blocks will use the standard user defined cross-reference ANS formula). The
functional block contains cross reference information relating to the functional sub-blocks,
- 320 -
pin numbers and pin locations, whether these pins are connected or not, as well as
annotating the sub-blocks, description.
Take the previously illustrated example of the cross-reference
6* 3/3D – Pressure Control

7* 3/3D –
2 3/2C - Valve Regulator
3 3/2C -
The first point of note is that the pin numberings are not in numerical order, despite the
location of the elements in relation to the functional block. This is because the cross-
references are listed in alphabetical order, by their functional description, (Pressure Control
/ Valve Regulator).
Beside the pin numbers 6 and 7 are *, the star symbols denotes the fact that these pins
have no connections. A standard cross-reference notation follows the star, this being,
drawing number, (3), followed by the column and row location of the pins. Finally, the first
pin will also have the functional description beside it, as set by the user.
There is no limit to the number of functional sub-blocks that can be related to a block, when
a functional block has been numbered, the sub-blocks will adopt that numbering.
Another tool that can be employed with blocks

is with XR_MAIN1-20 attributes. By assigning
these attributes to a block, you are able to
relate individual sub-blocks to specific
locations on a block.
By adding the XR_MAIN1-5 attributes, when they

are related to functional sub-blocks with description
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, the cross-referencing will be
annotated in the corresponding XR_MAIN location
on the block.
NOTE
Option * for unconnected pins is eliminated, when
this type of cross-referencing is used.
1 4 . 6 C r o s s r e f e r e n c e s o n p u s h -b u tto n s
Push buttons have two numbering systems defined by their type these types are:
 Standard push-buttons
 Push-buttons numbered
 Push-buttons not numbered
- 321 -
 Standard push buttons
These are considered the push buttons that are numbered independently or have
interconnections between them. The cross-reference will indicate other push buttons that
are connected, the result being shown in the data or attribute point RC (XR_MAIN). The
command Analyse cross-reference will have to be used to indicate a link between the
required push buttons to be cross-referenced.
 Push-buttons numbered / not numbered

This command is similar to the previous command but only one contact is numbered, this
being the push-button to be numbered, the push buttons not numbered will adopt this
elements numbering system.
Numbered Not Numbered pushbuttons
After carrying out a cross-reference analysis, you will achieve the following results.
1 4 . 7 C r o s s -r e fe r e n c i n g o f p l c ’ s
For more details on how cross-referencing between plc elements please refer to page 321.
1 4 . 8 C r o s s -r e fe r e n c e p a r a m e te r s
Cross-reference parameters can be accessed from three different locations within ED as
follows:
 Project information card

Changes made to cross-reference parameters within the project information card will affect
that project only.
 Default Parameters
Changes made to the parameters through this dialogue will cause all new projects to adopt
the settings by default. Any changes will be noted in the settings found in the Analysis and
Lists toolbar.
 Analysis / Lists toolbar

Changes made to the parameters here will cause all new projects to adopt the settings by
default. Any changes will be noted in the settings found in the Default parameters.
- 322 -
The parameters themselves allow you to control the way in which data is annotated into the
XR_MAIN attributes of your elements, by changing the Variable values you are able to
control the XR_MAIN attributes information offset from an elements XR_MAIN attribute
location, the distance between relay contacts and/or functional block annotations, and the
number of contacts contained within a column before another column is started.
Example
If you have a relay with 10 make contacts associated to it, you could define the number of
contacts that will be displayed in one column before another is column is created to display
the data. So by entering 5 into the Variable Values field you will have 5 contacts displayed
in one column, and another column of contacts also made of 5 contacts.
Illustrated here is the dialogue interface through

which you are able to change the variable value
settings in millimetres and/or inches.
This screen shows all the parameters with a pre-view,

and an explanation of the parameters they control.
You can change the Variable value field, in any

project; the value will then be saved within that
project only, so that multiple variables can be set for
various projects.
An element that has already been inserted into a project will not be automatically effected
by any revisions made to the Variable value, however the position of annotations will be
updated to reflect any changes you have made when an analysis of cross-references is
carried out.
The Global checkbox allows you to work with RC contact elements, which have attributes,
rather than very old versions of ED, which employed text. If a user is working with an old
project then the For Text option should be selected.
You can set the variable values at anytime to the values assigned through the Default
parameters option by selecting the By default button, the variable values will then be
changed to suit your project default parameters.
Furthermore you are able to define the way, in which you want unused contact data to be
noted in your drawings, outlined below.
14.8.1.1 Unused Contacts
This option will show unused contacts, relative
to the relay or element with contacts, XR_MAIN
attribute.
- 323 -
This option will display user definable text in
place of any unused contacts, relative to the
relay or element with contacts, XR_MAIN
attribute.
This option will not show, (hide) any unused

contacts, relative to the relay or element with
contacts, XR_MAIN attribute. In the following
example the relay –K1 has 3 available contacts,
however as only 2 contacts are in use the third
will be hidden.
14.8.1.2 Underline break contacts

When selected, any break contacts associated to a relay will have
their cross-reference data underlined.
14.8.1.3 Contacts with location and zone

If this checkbox is not selected ED will assume that the contact associated to a relay is part
of the relay, and therefore has the same location and zone, so that when cross-referencing
occurs the contact will have the relays location and zone applied to it.
When the checkbox is activated the contact will not adopt the location and zone from the
relay, but will retain a unique location and zone, either from the drawing it is in, or the
location and zone applied to it.
- 324 -
1 4 . 9 C o m m o n r e l a y a n d c o n ta c t c r o s s -r e fe r e n c e e r r o r s
14.9.1.1 Too many main elements
Two relays are assigned the same function.
14.9.1.2 Too many contacts of this type

Too many contacts are assigned to a relay.
If fewer contacts are assigned to a relay,

than the relay has capacity for, then ED will
not signal an error but will accept that you
are making a contact reservation for a
possible future association of contacts to the
relay.
14.9.1.3 Pin not assigned
If you have forced or otherwise revised a contacts
pin numbering so that it does not match that
available in the relay.
14. 10 Anal ysing technical data

The technical data analysis allows the technical data information held within the catalogue
reference cards to be annotated into the drawing elements.
Technical data is annotated into elements TECHDATA attributes, and can have up to five
lines of description.
Technical data is added to elements automatically when a catalogue reference contains

technical data field information.
If you amend a references technical data you can update the information within you
element attributes by carrying out a Technical data analysis.
- 325 -
Another application of this command, is to annotate accessory data into schematic element
USER* attributes. This will only be done where the Annotate Accessories (section
18.2.4.5.3) option has been checked in Analysis and annotations.
14. 11 Anal yse Harness

This command will analyse your projects harnesses and their
associated connectors; as well as cross-referencing them to one
another, it will automatically note, connectors wire numbers to the
harness, (where you have an actual harness graphical representation
within your project drawings).
Furthermore the command will analyse connections between elements,

as connectors are regarded as being transparent where one connector
pin connects to another connector pin within a harness. So that in the
illustration below you can see that the contact –K3 will be connected
through the terminal –X1 3 to the diode –D1.
14. 12 D e fi n e p a r t s
This is one of ED’s most powerful and useful tools, it allows you to view all of the elements
contained within your project, and define catalogue and reference data to them, as well as
allowing you to see if this information is correct. When connected to an SQL Server the
define parts interface connects directly to the ED tables within the server. This means that
any changes carried out are written immediately to the tables, due to this you cannot cancel
any changes after they have been made.
Other functionalities within the Define Parts table include:
 Creation of new references.

 Insertion of elements without having to place them in your schematics, (reverse
engineering facility)
 Cut/copy/paste catalogue and reference data amongst elements.
 Edition of element data, such as numbering, location, zone and group.
 Filter elements either with quick search or full filters.
 View element associated library and catalogue data.
- 326 -
The table can be accessed from schematic and/or layout drawings, as well as the Project
browser screen; any changes made will have an immediate effect upon your elements,
which will be updated with the amended information automatically, in schematics. You
should use the update component command in layout drawings as any changes made to
catalogue and reference data will have an effect upon the components representation.
NOTE
Any changes carried out in this display must be accepted for them to be updated in your
project. Selecting the Cancel button will cause all of your changes to be lost.
WARNING
not have the option to cancel, so that any changes implemented will take effect immediately.
The various options available to you through this dialogue window are as follows:
14.12.1 Quick search
This command allows you to apply a quick
search filter to your elements; when selected
the following dialogue window will be shown:
By filling out any of the available fields and

accepting a filter will be applied to your
elements, with only those elements, which
meet your specified criteria being displayed.
14.12.2 Filter
By selecting this button you will access a standard ED filter screen, (refer to page 21), from
where you can select one of the already available filters, edit any that are already existing,
delete, and/or create new filters.
This option is very useful in case you want to define only certain kinds of elements,
contained in a large project.
Example
You could define a filter for elements with the description ‘Motor’ only. This filter will reduce
the list of elements shown, to a list of motors only, thus accelerating the definition process.
- 327 -
It’s also possible to define filters for the selection of catalogues and references to reduce
the amount of information to go through when searching for a specific reference or
catalogue.
14.12.3 Devices / terminals

These two checkboxes allow you to show only project devices, or terminals, or display both
sets of information.
14.12.4 Main display window

This window provides you with comprehensive information relating to the
elements/terminals that you have within your project.
There are 10 columns of information providing a variety of data related to your elements,
you are able to sort the data by selecting any of the headers. These columns contain the
following element/terminal data.
 Drawing: This column shows the drawing number where the element is placed.
 Symbol: This shows the numbering assigned to the element.
 Catalogue: The catalogue that has been assigned to the element.
 Reference: The reference that has been assigned to the element.
 Correct: If you defined a catalogue Eldon, for example, to a cabinet element, and
then assign a reference from another catalogue, if the reference defined does not exist in
the catalogue then this field will be displayed as [ ] indicating that the data assigned to the
element is incorrect. Where a catalogue and reference has been filled in and the field is
blank, by double clicking on it you will be automatically taken to the catalogue and a
reference will be created with the reference name filled in. Where a correct catalogue and
reference is assigned, this field will be marked with the following [X].
 Accessories: If you have an accessory defined to an catalogue reference this

field will be marked with a number indicative of the number of accessories associated to the
element, where the field shows 0 it indicates that the element has no accessories assigned.
By double clicking on this field you will enter the Set Accessories interface, where you can
add and/or modify the accessories associated to a reference, refer to page 137 for further
details on this command interface and its options. You are also able to set/change
accessories by selecting the set accessories icon. The number of accessories listed in this
column is based upon the total number of accessories assigned to an element, through the
Set accessories command. So that you could have 8 accessories of reference 0007 and 2
accessories of 0200, and this would display an accessory number of 10.
 Stock: This field allows you to define whether a particular reference assigned to
an element is in stock or not. By double clicking on the field you will see either [X] or [ ]
displayed, [X] indicates that an item is In stock while [ ] shows that the item is not in stock.
This information can be displayed in reports, and used in ERP or MRP systems to assist in
ordering project parts.
NOTE
The Stock option is only available for users of EDSQL Module 6 when connected to an SQL
database
- 328 -
 Location, zone and group: These fields display the location zone and group data
assigned to an element, where this has not been specifically defined to elements within
your drawings; the elements will adopt the default location and zone of the drawing they are
in.
 Code: This shows the name of the element as defined in the projects associated
library.
 Function: This shows the function, (if any), that has been defined to a
particular element.
14.12.5 Edit catalogue / reference

The purpose of defining parts, as previously mentioned, is to associate a catalogue and a
reference to an element.
Where you have elements that do not have a catalogue and reference defined, or where
the data is incorrect, you can edit the data with the various commands available, these
include:
14.12.5.1 Catalogue and reference
By selecting this icon you will enter the standard set catalogue and reference interface,
from here you can select any catalogue and reference. This information will then overwrite,
the catalogue and reference assigned to the selected element(s).
14.12.5.2 Paste reference
This option allows you to paste reference information only to a selected element(s).
14.12.5.3 Create reference
This option allows you to create a new reference without having to leave the interface to do
so. By selecting, a catalogue with cut, copy, or by simply typing in the name, as well as a
new reference name the icon will automatically become live and upon selection, a blank
reference information card will automatically be displayed.
Due to the fact that cutting or copying will also take the reference name this will be
automatically displayed in the reference information card name field.
14.12.5.4 Find and replace

Through the employment of this command you are able
to find and replace individual or multiple manufacturers
and reference data.
The options available are as follows:
14.12.5.4.1 Only selection

This will only replace the selected elements catalogue and reference data.
- 329 -
14.12.5.4.2 All of the elements
This will replace the catalogue and reference data, of all elements that are found to have
the defined origin information.
14.12.5.4.3 Origin catalogue and reference

The origin data is taken from a selected element, however you can type in catalogue and
reference data manually into these fields if preferred.
14.12.5.4.4 Destiny catalogue and reference

The destiny data can either be manually entered, or you can browse to locate a specific
catalogue & reference by selecting the folder icon. The data in the destiny fields will
replace that of the origin.
You are able to replace either catalogue, or references or both, by employing one of the
three arrows icons.
14.12.5.5 Import
This facility allows you to import elements into your
project from a text file, through the following interface:
By defining a format (fmt) file, followed by a text (txt) file

containing the data you wish to import, you are able to
bring element data into the table, this can include as
much or as little information as you wish to have
associated to your elements. Format files are included
with ED as well as an example text file containing
elements to make up a double sense motor power and
control circuit.
This system provides you with an option for reverse

engineering a project, (refer to page 331 for further details), as you do not require any
drawings within a project to import element data to the define parts table, you are able to
create BOM’s parts lists, etc. based on nothing more than information you have imported,
the reports can be sent to customers for approval, and through the use of the import
elements command, (refer to page 91), you are able to import the actual parts into cabinets
and/or schematics, from the same text file as used in the define parts table.
14.12.5.6 Edit
You may edit information related to individual or multiple elements by selecting them in the
upper half of the screen, the fields in the lower left of the screen displayed in pink allow you
to manually type any changes that you want to make to the select elements numbering,
location, zone, group, catalogue and/or reference. It is also possible to select the Location,
Zone, Group button, and/or the Catalogue, Reference button to access the Set Location,
Zone and Group or Set Catalogue and Reference interfaces, and select information that
you want to have applied.
14.12.5.7 Insert
Through the selection of this button, you are able to add elements to your project; these
can be then be seen in your various project reports. You do not have to have any drawings
- 330 -
either schematic or layout to insert elements into your project, and obtain report information
relating to them. This provides you with another reverse engineering method.
All elements inserted into the table will also be included into the list of components you are
able to place in the cabinets when using the insert component commands.
When selected you will be able to select any numerable element

type from the projects associated library; after having selected
the element you want to insert the following interface will be
displayed.
Through this interface you can define the symbol, location, zone,
group, manufacturer and reference; you also have the option to
insert multiple elements by increasing the number in the Quantity
field. By increasing the quantity to 5, for example, 5 elements will be inserted automatically.
14.12.5.8 Delete
This command allows you to delete any elements that you have either inserted and/or
imported into the define parts table, the command only allows deletion of these items, and
will be automatically disabled when actual elements are selected which exist inside your
projects drawings.
14.12.5.9 Cables
This icon you to go directly to the Connections and cables editor, Cables interface where
you may define/change catalogue and reference data assigned to your projects cables.
14.12.6 Element Navigation
These two icons provide you with the ability to navigate direct to a selected elements
location within either a schematic or layout drawing. By selecting the element you wish to
navigate to and activating the appropriate navigate to icon, (either schematic or layout
drawings), the drawing will be automatically loaded and you will be zoomed into the
element.
These command options will only be available where the Define Parts interface has been
entered through the Project Browser interface, not where the table has been loaded from
within a drawing.
14.12.7 Catalogue and reference information

This displays the description, remarks, and
first technical data field of the currently
selected catalogue reference.
14.12.8 Library element information

This displays the description, remarks, and function of the currently selected project
element. This information allows you to compare the data of the catalogue and reference
with the data assigned to the element to help ensure that both correspond.
Example
You may not want to have an element, which is a thermal protection device to be displayed
in your cabinet enclosure as anything other than a thermal protection device.
- 331 -
14. 13 R e ve r s e e n g i n e e r i n g
ED allows you to reverse engineer a project from a simple TXT file, as follows:
 Direct to project schematic and/or layout drawings

 Direct to the Define Parts table
Through these systems you are able to import fully numbered elements with all appropriate
manufacturers parts data, functionality, location, zone and group data pre-assigned directly
to your drawings.
Alternatively you can import this information to the define parts table, and then generate
parts lists, BOM, etc. that can be sent to customers for approval prior to your company
investing time in actual design work.
The following sections outline how you can create TXT files, and then reverse engineer
your projects with either of the above methods.
14.13.1 Reverse engineering methods

There are two main methods to reverse engineer a project dependent upon the results that
you wish to achieve.
The first allows you to create:

 Reports without schematics or layouts
 Layout drawings
This is achieved by importing text data to the Define Parts table, from this information you
can generate, reports.
As the information exists within the Define Parts table you may then, create your Layout
drawing, in the standard manner within ED, by creating a drawing and employing the Insert
Components command.
The system should not be employed in conjunction with the generation of schematic
drawings, in the same project. This is due to the fact that this method has been designed
to allow for project feasibility studies rather than full project generation. Of course where
you have followed the two steps mentioned here, and have received client approval, you
can create a new project copying the record data only from you feasibility study project.
Handle the layout drawings, (if already generated), and then create your schematic
drawings, and import the elements to your schematics, the Adopt options within Insert
Components will then allow you to automatically form an element / component association.
14.13.2 Creating a TXT file

The data held within the TXT files will be the same when importing to either the define parts
table as when importing to drawings. By associating an appropriate format file you are able
to import successfully to either.
The maximum data that you can assign to elements in your TXT files is as follows:
 SNA Element number.

 CATALOGUE Manufacturer.
- 332 -
 REFERENCE Manufacturer part number.
 LOCATION Assembly.
 ZONE Sub assembly.
 GROUP Element grouping.
 ELEMENT CODE Name assigned to the element in the element information card.
 FUNCTION To allow cross-referencing to occur.
Separators should be used to define where one piece of information ends and where the
other begins. The standard FMT files supplied with ED use semi colon “;” separators. It is
completely at your discretion as to what information you wish to apply to elements, so that
you do not have to assign location, zone and group data, if you do not wish to do so, and
can leave the information in your txt file blank for these fields simply by applying 3 No.
separators, as illustrated below.
-K1;DEMO;0019;;;;REL3H11;FORWARD
This line of text when imported into a drawing would allow you to place the following:
Function
Element defined SNA
by the element Catalogue
code Reference
Tech data taken

automatically
from the
catalogue and
reference data
assigned
The only piece of information that must be filled in is the element name, as this dictates the
element that can be placed in your schematic or layout drawing.
It is not a requirement to define each element for a project if you do not wish, you can
simply specify a group of elements and insert an entire circuit into a schematic drawing.
The only limitations with this latter method is that you will not obtain detailed report
information prior to creating your schematic; you are also confined to creating your
schematic drawing before generating a cabinet layout.
You are able to find example Import TXT files in the ED2010\F directory.
14.13.3 Creating a FMT file

Format files can be generated dependent upon your preferences, there are two types
required for importing data into either the Define Parts table and another to import the same
data into drawings, these format types are as follows:
Format file to be used for the importing of elements to drawings
- 333 -
Format file to be used for the importing of elements to Define Parts
These can be created very easily within any Notepad program; any line of information that
is preceded by a semi colon will be hidden when applying the format file. Thus the title
lines of the above examples, as well as the Length restrictions will be ignored.
The Define Parts format file contains exactly the same data as that employed for drawings,
so that SIMNUM corresponds to SNA, CATALOGUE to NOMCAT etc.
To create your own format file you should always have a header [Format] the next line
allows you to specify which attributes you wish to import, followed by the attribute names,
as previously mentioned the above examples provide the maximum amount of data that
can be imported. You can reduce this by removing attribute information that you do not
wish to include in the import.
You can use either lengths and/or separators to determine where information ends within
the import file.
The file should always have [Data] at the end.
It is possible to include format files at the top of import files if you prefer however by having
the format and import files separately you are assured of greater flexibility.
To ensure that a file is a valid format file type you should change a TXT files extension to
*.FMT
You are able to find example Format files in the ED2010\F directory.
14.13.4 Import project elements

To import txt file information to a drawing you should employ the Import elements command;
refer to page 90 for further details of this command.
To import data to the Define parts table employ the Import command found in the Define
parts table, please refer to page Error! Bookmark not defined. for further details of this
command.
Data that is imported to the Define Parts table, allows you to generate BOM, Parts lists,
and/or Physical Layout reports, without requiring the creation of any drawings.
- 334 -
14. 14 C h e ck erro rs
This command allows you to view and navigate
direct to any errors that may have occurred within
your project drawings. The command itself
maybe accessed through the project browser or
alternatively within your drawings. When the
command is activated the following interface will be displayed:
The interface can be broken down into three main parts, these being the filter options at the
top of the screen, navigation and error deletion, options, and the error location/identification.
14.14.1 Error Navigator Filters

The top of the error navigator window has three pop-down windows, as illustrated below.
By selecting the various options available in the pop down lists you are able to obtain
filtered lists of errors that have been found by ED.
The Error type pop down allows you to view errors by the ED analysis that detected the
error, these being:
 [All] Every error detected by ED will be displayed.
 CABL Only cable errors detected by ED during a project Check cables.
 END Only errors identified during an ED End command will be displayed.
 EQPT Only errors found during an Equipotential analysis will be displayed.
 MAX Any connections errors that may have occurred when carrying out a
Connect command with the Max module will be displayed.
 TERM Any errors related to terminals.
 VMAX Any connections errors that may have occurred when using PCP
connections.
 XREF Only errors found during a Cross-Reference analysis will be displayed.
More specific filters can be obtained by using the Filter by drawing options, in conjunction
with the Error types, so that only errors found in a particular drawing are displayed. This
can prove very useful in the early design phase of large projects, as you are able to pin
point specific areas of the design for completion, while ensuring the eradication of all errors
that may be found there.
14.14.2 Navigate / Delete Errors

When you have located an error you wish to repair you are able to go direct to the problem
area by left clicking on it from the list of those available and then selecting the Navigate
icon. This will automatically load the appropriate drawing and zoom into the problem area.
Where you are using the Navigate option to repair project errors you are able to delete any
resolved issues from the list of those displayed. To do this you should check a listed
error(s); by then selecting the Delete icon any checked items will then be eliminated from
- 335 -
the list. This is to allow you a way in which to track those errors that you feel are resolved,
without having to run an End, Equipotential analysis, Cross-references analysis etc.
14.14.3 Check cables
This icon allows you to view any cables errors that may have occurred within your project,
when selected it will open the Check cables interface, refer to page 343 for further details
on this command.
14.14.4 Errors Description

The lower half of the Navigate errors interface displays the errors that have been found in
the project, the information displayed for each error includes:
 Description Description of the error found by ED
 Analysis Type The type of analysis that located the error, (see above for details
of analysis types)
 Sheet number The drawing number in which the error occurs
 Co-ordinate X The X co-ordinate at which the error occurs
 Co-ordinate Y The Y co-ordinate at which the error occurs
 Date The date on which the error was found
 Time The time at which the error was found
By double clicking on any error ED will automatically Navigate to the location of the error. If
you wish to mark an error as being “under repair” or fixed, you may do so by selecting an
error(s) checkbox, multiple selections maybe made through the employment of the Control
and/or Shift keys. By checking an error ED will show that item in grey this then allows you
a quick way of knowing which items are being addressed/resolved.
Only errors that have been checked can be deleted from the list. If an error is deleted
which has not been fixed ED will display the error again, once an appropriate analysis has
been carried out.
Example
If you delete a cross-reference error, which has not been repaired; by running an Analysis
of cross-references, the next time you enter the Navigate errors interface the error will be
displayed.
- 336 -
1 5 RE P O RTS
There are a number of report commands within ED2010 that allow you to obtain full reports
of all Connections, Bills of Materials, Cross references, Physical Layouts, Errors, From To
lists, PLC, Technical Data Reports, etc.
These lists are obtainable in a choice of languages, and are carried out within selected
projects; all of these lists are detailed in this chapter, and are automatically generated for
you by ED2010.
You also have the ability to create any of the following reports in a dwg format with the use
of the Reports into drawings command.
There are approximately 250 different reports available in ED any of which can be exported
in the following formats:
 Adobe Acrobat (PDF)

 Character separated values
 Comma-separated values (CSV)
 Crystal Reports, 7.0 (RPT)
 Data Interchange Format (DIF)
 Excel 5.0, 5.0(Extended), 7.0, 7.0(Extended), 8.0, 8.0(Extended)(XLS)
 HTML 3.2, 4.0 (DHTML)
 Lotus1-2-3 (WK1), (WK2), (WK3), (WKS)
 ODBC – Craze Sample data, CRDB2, CRGUP, CRINF7, CROR7, CROR8V36,
CRSS, CRSYB, CRXMLV36, dBase files, Word, AutoPLANT, Excel files, FoxPro files-Word,
MS Access data, MS Access for AutoPLANT, Visual FoxPro tabs, Visual FoxPro tables,
Xtreme Sample Database,
 Paginated text
 Record Style, (columns no spaces), (columns with spaces)
 Report definition
 Rich Text (Extract) format
 Tab-separated text
 Tab-separated values
 Text
 Word for Windows (Doc)
 XML
Of course you also have a choice of destination when exporting reports, which include:
 Application
 Disk File
 Exchange Folder
 Lotus Domino
 Microsoft Mail (MAPI)
The export facilities listed previously are purely based upon Crystal Reports, Aceri includes
all the dll's available from Crystal Reports for the export tools, however if you do not have a
specific application, Word for example, then that option will not be available for export.
All reports have the same interface for the generation of reports.
- 337 -
ED2010 has reports in two formats, when EDSQL module 6 is employed; reports will be
generated using Crystal 10. All standard Dbase reports are created with Crystal reports 8.5
WARNING
Crystal reports version 10 requires that customers working with Windows 2000 use service
pack 3 or higher.
1 5 . 1 L i s t i te m s
The list command is available in every ED browser screen and allows you to obtain reports
of your selected browsers information. Each report contains different information; by
selecting a report, a synopsis of the information it contains is displayed, in the list dialogue,
illustrated below.
Example
PRO1, (selected in the illustration), will contain the field data of all your projects, Names,
Descriptions, Project codes, as well as the number of drawings contained in each project,
and the Creation and Modification dates.
Check here, in order to obtain a preview.

Previews can be exported to HTML,
Excel, Word, ASCII text files and other
formats.
Select here to
choose a
system printer
and modify its
configuration
Change
descriptions
and add
reports.
Select the
language you
wish your report
in.
Choose a filter in order to Select one of the
list only specific project. several reports
15.1.1 Adding report languages

When you select the report language pop down, you will find that you may select any
language that ED is available in including, Korean, Chinese, English, Russian, Hebrew,
Spanish, Dutch, French etc. By selecting your preferred language ED will display a list of
the reports available, beside each report is an icon that will show one of two colours, as
follows:
- 338 -
Grey – This indicates that the report is located in the ED2010\F\Reports folder.
Green – This indicates that the report is stored in any F sub directory folder other than
ED2010\F\Reports
ED stores all the report header languages in the ED messages database. Due to this by
selecting a pop down language you will be able to select a report that is stored within the
Reports folder; ED will then apply the relevant language to the reports header.
NOTE
This option has been introduced in order to lower the overall size of the program itself, as
one report can be generated in any available language, rather than having the same report
in multiple folders dependent upon the language you wish to create it in.
If you want to create reports in a language that is not available within ED as standard, you
can do so by simply adding a folder to the ED2010\F directory, this will then be available
within the Language of reports pop-down, as illustrated below:
If you choose the Reports option from the language pop down and create a report, ED will
by default create the report in English, unless you have revised the reports header
language.
15.1.2 Edit reports

The edit reports button allows you to change an existing
reports description.
New reports designed with Crystal Reports, (a Seagate

program not included in the ED pack), can be used in
ED by saving them to the appropriate language
directory within the ED2010\F directory. By then
selecting the Insert icon within the Edit Reports interface you are able to add the reports
name and description, when this is done, the report will be added to the list of available
reports.
Any reports added in this manner will only be available to the Language that is currently
selected.
Example
After creating a new report of projects, PRO1A, I save it to the ED2010\F\English folder;
then select the List Projects icon to access the List items interface. As the report has been
created in English, and saved in the English folder, select the language pop down and pick
the English reports language. Then select the Edit Reports button and select the Insert
icon to add another report to those currently available in English. Type in the exact name
of the report PRO1A, and accept to have this report made available to. By selecting the
report from the list and pressing Accept the report will then be generated.
- 339 -
15.1.3 Insert report
The insert icon allows you to access any newly
created reports inside ED, by assigning the
name of the report; you have created, as well
as any description data you choose to add, the
report will be added to the reports lists from
where it maybe selected.
Inserting a report will not create an rpt file, this must be done through Crystal Reports, it will
only allow you to access and run an already generated report that exists within the pertinent
ED2010\F sub directory.
NOTE
If you want to find out more about Crystal Reports visit their web site on:
www.seagatesoftware.com/products/crystalreports
15.1.4 Report previews and options

Upon creating a preview of a report the report data will be displayed in a window as
illustrated below.
At the top of this dialogue are a number of options that allow you to export print, view pages
etc. as follows:
Icon Usage
Go to first / last page
Go to previous/next page
Cancel reading records
Print the report
Export the report data
Change the reports Zoom factor
Find
Report tree
Refresh report data
Configure printer
- 340 -
Close current report
When choosing to export the following

interface will be displayed through which you
can define the format you want to export to, as
well as the destiny.
1 5 . 2 R e p o r t C e n tr e
The report centre is a one stop solution for the creation of all project related reports, when
selected the following interface will be displayed:
Running along the top of the interface are icons representing the various report types
available for projects in ED, by selecting one of these you will see the available reports
listed in the lower half of the screen.
You can access the reports interface by either, selecting it from the list and pressing Accept,
or by double clicking on it this will then call up the standard list reports interface described
in the previous section.
15. 3 R ep o rt G ro u p s
This interface allows you to create, and edit the reports that are included when running a
report group. Filters that will be applied to reports in the group, the language the reports
will be created in, and the manner in which they will be displayed.
- 341 -
15.3.1 Group Name
A name must be applied in order to identify one report group from another. Once the name
is applied and reports selected you will be able to run these at anytime from the Report
Groups screen.
15.3.2 Options
15.3.2.1 Export to text file
This option allows you to save report data to a txt file. The option to save a reports data to
a txt file is available for every report that is selected for inclusion in a report group. For
example you could select to export CNX2 to a txt file called Connections.txt, COP5 to
export to a Parts.txt, and GRPREF2 to be sent direct to a printer.
15.3.2.2 Printer
This option allows you to send selected reports direct to a printer, or to automatically
generate a report preview. The printer / preview options can be applied to each individually
selected report. For example you could choose to have two reports created with a preview,
with a third report being sent directly to the printer.
15.3.3 Filter
The filter option is only available when a report has been selected. You are able to apply a
different filter to every selected report if required. The filters will be automatically applied to
reports when they are created.
15.3.4 Language
You can select multiple languages for a particular report group. By selecting a language
the list of the available reports will then be displayed in the lower half of the screen. This
allows you to have one report group name, FOR ISSUE, for example, that can have
different sets of reports associated to it dependent upon the language selected. When you
run a report group that has multiple languages selected all the reports will be generated in
the different language sets.
15.3.5 Reports
Here you will find listed all of the available reports in ED, by checking particular reports they
will be included in the report group and will be automatically created when the report group
is run from the Report Groups screen.
- 342 -
16 CONNECTION AND CABLES EDITOR
The connections and cables editor allows for the manipulation of terminal data the
assignment of cables and the generation of terminal pin-out drawings. There are also
facilities for the cabling of project devices contained in ED2010 projects.
Some of the functions of the terminal and cables editor are:

 Automatic generation of terminal pin-out drawings.
 Automatic generation of terminal and cable reports.
 Assign cables to terminals.
 List the terminals and their connections.
 Manipulate individual or multiple terminals numbering and data.
 Feedback modifications to the schematic drawings
 Handle and list cables database for both project and the stock cables.
 Specify terminals pin connections to appliances
 Assignment of cables to elements
The following chapter contains information relating to the Connection and cables editor,
either of which maybe accessed when selecting the terminal/connection editors icon.
The chapter is broken down into four general sections, these being:
 Accessing the editors
 Tools common to both editors
 Terminals editor interface and specific tools
 Connections editor interface and specific tools
1 6 . 1 E n te r i n g th e c o n n e c ti o n a n d c a b l e s e d i t o r
Upon selecting to enter the terminals editor in ED, a terminal strip / device selection window
will be shown.
Terminal, Device, or access Both.
Terminal / device
filter options
Through this window you are able to choose to access either the terminals editor, or the
device cables and connections editor.
The interface has various filtering options to enable you to locate specific project data,
quickly and easily, as outlined below.
- 343 -
16.1.1 Terminal / Devices / Both
The radial checkboxes at the top of the interface allow you to access either the terminals
editor, or the device cables and connections editor, or to access both the terminals and
devices at the same time.
By checking either Terminals, Devices, or Both the data displayed in the lower half of the
screen will show you a list of all your projects terminal strips, or all of the elements
contained within you project, or both all the elements and terminal strips.
16.1.2 Terminals / Devices / Both filtering

The filter fields allow you to enter information in order to more quickly to locate specific
elements and/or terminals.
By typing information into any of the fields the list of terminal strips or devices will be
automatically updated, and will show only the terminals and/or elements that match your
search criteria.
There are two types of filter that you may apply to your project information; either a
precision filter or a general filter, the methods and results that can be obtained from these
filters is outlined below.
TIP!
The filter fields are case sensitive and as such you are able to easily discern between two
or more terminal strips or elements by simply entering a value in upper or lowercase, where
you have chosen to use a mixture of upper and lowercase characters, when assigning data
within your project.
16.1.3 Check
The selection of this button will have ED
analyse your project cable data to look for
discrepancies, if any errors are found the
following message will be displayed:
If you select Yes, Notepad will be launched and a list of the errors displayed, as illustrated
below.
An alternative way of checking for cable errors in your project, (without entering the editor),
is to employ the Check cables command refer to page 343.
In addition to checking the cables for any potential errors this option will delete any
incorrect or invalid connections within the editor itself. This is of particular importance
where you have upgraded from ED2004 or previous; and have chosen to form your
element/terminal connections based on equipotentials; as ED will automatically delete any
unnecessary connections automatically, and make connecting elements and terminals
more logical based upon the scheme drawings, equipotential cross-referencing.
- 344 -
16.1.3.1 Precision filter search
The filter fields allow for the entry of precision data, so that by entering a value -S in the
SNA filter for Devices, the list would be empty, unless you had a project element with an
SNA of –S only. Elements with an SNA of –S1, -S2, -S3, etc. would not fully match the
filters criteria, and would not be shown. You would have to enter the exact value of the
elements SNA, for example –S3 to have that element, only, shown in the filtered list.
16.1.3.2 General filter search
It is not a requirement that you know all your projects terminal strip and/or element
information, to have filtered information. You may employ wild card values to help narrow
down a filtered list, where you are unsure of exactly the terminal strip or device you are
looking for.
To do this you need to include a * character to indicate the variable to be applied in the filter.
So that where you want to see all terminal strips in a project that contain a value of X, you
should enter *X*. This will then regard any prefix or suffix of X as being a variable and
would display a filtered list of terminal strips that include the letter X.
Furthermore, you can use other sets of variable that provide different ways of narrowing a
search beyond the employment of the basic wildcard, as follows.
# Matches a single numeric character, for example, -F# will show all elements with
numbering –F followed by a single numeric digit 1-9, -F1# would show all elements –F10-
19 etc.
@ Matches a single alphabetical character, for example, -@1 will show all elements
with numbering – followed by an alphabetical character A, B, C, D, etc. followed by the
numeric digit 1.
. Matches any non alphanumerical character, for example, .F1 will show all
elements with numbering F1 with a suffix that is not alphanumerical –F1 for example.
* Matches any character including blank spaces, as described previously.
? Matches any single character.
~ At the beginning of a filter it will exclude anything following it.
[ ] Matches any enclosed character(s)
[~ ] Excludes any character(s) enclosed within the brackets
- Can be used within brackets to indicate a range of characters, 1-5 for example,
will include the numbers, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
, This is used to separate two or more filters, so that you can have multiple filters
applied.
` The reversed quote character, means that the character following it should be
taken literally, this is very useful where you have included any of the previously mentioned
filter option characters in a terminal or elements name for example a Fuse called @1 could
be filtered by the formula `@1
- 345 -
An example of a filter which comprises some of the above options is:
-[~K-S][~12]
This will break down as follows:
- Anything with a hyphen preceding it –X1, or –S3 for example.

[~ Means that the data following it within the brackets will not be included.
K-S] As it has been preceded by the tilde ~ symbol the letters K to S inclusive will be
excluded from the filtered list.
[~12] This is in addition to the preceding filter expression, so that the number 1 and/or 2
will also be excluded from the resulting list.
So that elements containing –K, –L, -M, -N, -O, -P, Q, -R, or –S will not be shown all other
elements will be shown, except those with the number 1 or 2 in the name.
The above wildcards and filter options can be used in any of the filter fields.
16.1.4 Selecting terminals / devices / both
The information that is selected before entering the Terminal or Device connection editors
will have a significant effect upon the information displayed within the two different areas of
the program.
You are able to select individual or multiple terminal strips or elements through the use of
Control and/or Shift keys, upon pressing the Select button the terminal or device connection
editors will be opened.
This acts a time saving feature, for example if you only want to amend one terminal strips’
information, in a project comprising hundreds of terminal strips, the time taken to load only
one terminal strips’ data will be significantly less, than the time required to load the data for
the entire project.
If you want to access all of a projects terminal strips or elements, or simply all of the items
listed after the application of a filter, you can do so simply by pressing the Select All button.
This will load all of the information that is currently listed.
16.1.4.1 Terminal selection (displayed data)
Terminal strips are sorted based upon the four main filter options, namely Numbering,
Location, Zone and Group. This means that if you have a terminal strip –X1 consisting of 6
terminals, where –X1 1, 2, 3 are in location LOC1, and the terminals –X1 4, 5, 6 are in
location LOC2 ED will show two –X1 terminal strips, one of which is in location LOC1 and
the other that is in location LOC2. This applies to different zones and/or groups.
Due to this if you choose to Select a terminal strip, as opposed to Selecting All terminal
strips, you will only be able to create terminal drawings, by Location and Zone.
Upon selection of either individual or multiple terminal strips, you will enter the terminals
editor proper; the information displayed here, will include not only the terminals that make
up the selected strip, but also any other terminals that can form a connection.
- 346 -
Example
The project CRANE contains 3 terminal strips, E2, X100, and X300, by selecting X100 only,
the terminals editor will be loaded but will show all of the terminals contained in the strip
X100, and some of the terminals contained in the strip E2 where there is a connection to
X100.
The terminals from E2 that are displayed can be connected to the PE terminals from the
strip X100. So that if you were to select the terminal strip E2 only; then all the terminals
contained in the strip E2 will be shown in addition to the X100 PE terminals.
16.1.4.2 Device selection (displayed data)
Upon selection of either individual or multiple project devices (elements), you will enter the
Connections editor proper, the information displayed here, will be the selected element(s)
only.
16.1.4.3 Both selection (displayed data)
Upon selection of either individual or multiple project devices (elements) and/or terminals,
you will enter the Connections editor proper, the information displayed here, will be the
selected element(s)/terminals only.
16.2 Terminal / De vice / Both connections editors in SQL

When connected to an SQL Server the terminal / device / both editor interfaces connect
directly to the ED tables within the server. This means that any changes carried out are
written immediately to the tables, due to this you cannot cancel any changes after they
have been made.
16.2.1 Terminal / Device / Both connections

Upon starting the terminal and/or connections editors ED will analyse your projects
schematic data, and automatically form connections between terminals and/or element
devices.
The connections automatically formed will vary greatly, dependent upon options that you
have chosen to employ, during the creation of you project. Project options that will effect
your connections are:
 Use of PCP’s refer to page 98.

 Use of 1 or 2 connections refer to page 361
 Form connections by…refer to page, 418
In addition to the above, the number of connections per pin that you have chosen to employ
will also have an effect upon your connection possibilities within the terminals editor. The
connections editor for element devices will show 2 connections per pin of an element at all
times.
Where you have multiple connection options, you may want to change the connection that
the terminal or element device is forming, this can be achieved through the employment of
the connect up, command.
You can also choose to break any connection either you, or ED has formed through the use
of the disconnect command.
- 347 -
NOTE
When employing PCP’s it is possible for you to close a circuit and graphically display the
exact connections that will be formed by terminals and/or elements; when this is done, the
Connect up / Disconnect options will be unavailable and connection changes should be
carried out within your schematic drawings.
1 6 . 3 C o m m o n e d i to r to o l s
The following sections deals with the tools that are common to both the terminals and the
connections editors.
16.3.1 Connect up (terminals, elements, both)

Through this command you can form connections between terminals and/or elements
where you have multiple element connection options.
NOTE
The Connect Up interface will be the same for both terminals and/or elements, only when
you have chosen to work with 2 connections per pin in the terminals editor, where you have
chosen to work with only one connection per pin for terminals the connect up interface will
be as described in section 13.2.1.3 Terminals connect up (one connection)
The Connect up screen will vary between the
terminals and the connections editors; however the
layout and tools available to you are the same in
both.
The following sections will deal with the features

available to you, and the difference that can be
found in both of the editors.
Upon selecting the Connect up icon the following interface will be displayed.
Within this interface you are able to form or break connections between any of the items
displayed.
This interface can be broken down as follows.

16.3.1.1 Main connect up display window
The main window contains information taken from your schematic drawings that shows the
terminal or element that you have selected, and the terminals or elements which it can be,
or is currently, connected to it.
The sorting order of the displayed data is relative to the true connection path of elements
inside your drawings.
So that where you have three elements connected to one another the display order,
regardless of which of the three elements is selected, will be the same.
One listed item will always be highlighted in either pink or blue; the colours are simply to
help you identify the currently selected terminal or element. The colours denote the
following:
- 348 -
 Pink current element or terminal for connection – Not highlighted
 Blue current element or terminal for connection – Highlighted
Each line of information relates to a single terminal or element, a blank line of information
above or below any listed terminal or element indicates that a pins first or second
connection is disconnected/unused.
In the above illustration you can see 3 elements, -F1, -F2, -F3.
–F2 is highlighted in blue; this is to indicate that it was the currently selected element when
the Connect Up icon was used.
The pin for each of the 3 fuses is listed on the right of the display, as each of these pins has
a potential of 2 connections, ED uses the display order to allow you to quickly specify which
pin connections, form connections, between which elements.
The way that ED does this is by considering the line above an element to be connection 1
and the line below it, connection 2. This is shown in the main display of the editor as O_ for
the first connection and _O for the second connection available to any single terminal pin.
Example
The following illustration shows 3 fuses connected to one another on an equipotential, the
letters a and b have been added to more easily illustrate the 2 connections for each of the
fuses pins, a representing the first pin connection b the second.
Pin
Pin Connection
Upon opening the Connect Up interface ED displays the following.
- 349 -
This shows you that the elements are connecting to one another as illustrated, namely.
 -F1 pin 2 connection 1 to –F3 pin 2 connection 2

So that all of the elements are connected to one another, using both of their available pin
connections.
When you have closed a schematic circuit using PCP’s ED regards the connections as
being locked, (as illustrated here on the left), and icons will be displayed to the left of the
listed items to denote that the connections cannot be altered. When items are locked in
this way they may only be unlocked through amendment of the scheme drawings.
16.3.1.2 Connect up tools
There are four icons in the connect interface that allow you to connect and/or disconnect
terminals and/or elements to one another, at either or both their first or second pins
connections. Also you have the facilities to move a selected element up or down in the
display order, which will in turn automatically change the way that connections are made
between elements and/or terminals.
16.3.1.2.1 Connect/disconnect above/below

These icons allow you to connect or disconnect the first or second connection of any
selected element or terminal.
The icons will automatically change dependent upon a selected terminal or elements
connections. In the illustration below you can see the selected fuse –F2 is connected at
both pin of its pins potential connections; due to this the both the icons to the right of the
screen will display Disconnect options.
By selecting the first disconnect icon, -F2 pin 1 connection 1 will be disconnected from –
F1 pin 2 connection 2. The disconnect icon will then automatically change to a Connect
icon, allowing you to reform the connection if you choose.
16.3.1.2.2 Move up/down

These icons allow you to move any selected element or terminal either up or down in the
Connect up display, this will then have a direct effect upon how connections are formed
between your terminals and/or elements.
- 350 -
Refer to the previous sections as to how the ordering of the display effects the connections
formed between elements.
16.3.1.3 Terminals connect up (one connection)
Where you are employing one connection per pin, the Connect up interface will change, to
allow you to see both of the possible connection options simultaneously.
The Connect up option can be employed both internally and/or externally for each terminal.
Available items to Connections presently

connect to. being formed.
This shows you all of the possible connections that can be formed, (based upon your
schematic information), as well as any connections that are currently formed by the element,
you wish to select.
The left hand side of the display shows the elements that your currently selected terminal
can be connected to, while the right hand side shows the connections that are already
being made, by those elements.
To form a particular connection, simply select the element and Accept, in the example
above, terminal X1 PE2, is being selected for connection.
Where you have set your configuration to two connections per terminal pin, you will access
the Connect up interface described previously.
NOTE
This particular system to form connections is not available when using EDSQL module 6
and connected to an SQL Server.
16.3.2 Disconnect (terminals and elements)
Selecting this command will break any connection that is currently formed by the selected
terminal or element; disconnected terminals have null signs indicating that although a
connection is possible you have chosen to break it.
- 351 -
1 6 . 4 C a b l e s (t e r m i n a l s a n d e l e m e n ts )
This command is available within both the terminals and connections editors. Through the
interface you are able to create or modify cables and their conductors within either your
project or your general stock of cables.
Cables can be either copied from the general stock cables database and modified, or
created from scratch, you also have the
ability to modify any currently assigned
project cables data, dependent upon your
preference.
Upon selecting the icon, the following

The command options available within this

interface all relate to the management of
your cables, and outlined as follows.
16.4.1 From project

These are cables that have already been copied to, or created within your project. The
cables will be shown in one of two colours, which is dependent upon the number of
conductors available.
Black – This means that you have conductors available for connection
Red – This means that all of the cables conductors are being used.
16.4.2 From general stock

These cables make up the default cables database, from which you can obtain cable data
to be copied into your projects, any changes or additions made to your general stock cables,
will be available to you in the future, regardless of the project that you are working on.
16.4.3 General report of cables

This option creates a list of all cables created in the General Stock database. These cables
can be added to any project while creating the projects cables.
16.4.4 Report of general project cables

This option creates a list of all cables created in the current project. These reports include
the names, and descriptions, of the cables created.
16.4.5 Report of cables and its connections

This option creates a list of all cables created in the selected project. The cables are
defined in the connections editor and includes the elements connected by various project
the cables.
16.4.6 Report of elements. Only one connection

This option creates a list of elements and their connections. This information is obtained
from the connections editor.
One connection only shows the defined connection for each element pin
- 352 -
The lists can be obtained by screen, printer or to a file. Filters may be used to make
selective lists.
16.4.7 Report of terminals. All connections

This option creates a list of elements and their connections. This information is obtained
from the connections and cables editor.
The All connections report option shows all the possible elements or terminals connected to
each element pin.
The lists can be obtained on screen, or can be sent to a printer or a file. Filters may be
used to make selective lists.
16.4.8 Edit
This command will display a selected cables data,
through the following display window.
Through this interface you can amend any of the

selected cables data, this includes cables already within
your project, which have had one or more of their
conductors already assigned to terminals or elements.
By altering an assigned cables name the change will be
automatically updated within the editors; which in turn
will update your schematic information, upon entering
your project drawings.
You can also change the value of assigned alphabetical conductors, (only), and the revised
value will be automatically updated in the editor. So that if a cable conductor RED
connects two elements, by changing the value RED to BLUE the value will be automatically
updated in the editor and therefore the scheme drawing.
16.4.8.1 Origin and destiny
These fields allow you to either select a cables origin and destiny from any one of the
zones applied within your project; or manually enter a value if preferred. The information
entered here is employed when generating cables reports to provide you with the cables
from and to data.
16.4.8.2 Catalogues and references
These fields allow you to associate a manufacturer and reference to your projects cables,
this provides costing, cabling time, and other information which is shown when creating
your BOM’s. Upon selecting this button the standard ED Set catalogue and reference
interface will be displayed, refer to page 136 for further details.
16.4.8.3 Family
The Family field allows you to associate the cables to a manufacturer’s part type, Motor
cables, for example, to help in locating the appropriate type of manufacturer’s cable, when
assigning a reference. For more information on Family, element - reference association
refer to page 305.
- 353 -
16.4.8.4 Numerical / alpha numerical conductors
You are able to specify the numerical conductor number from which you wish to start by
assigning a number to the Numerical conductors’ First field. To increase the number of
numerical conductors that you have, you should change the Numerical conductors’ Last
field.
So that in the example below, the first numerical conductor will be 100, and the last will be
300, providing you with 201 cable conductors numbered 100-300.
Should you wish to use alphanumerical conductors in addition to, or in place of, your
numerical conductors, you should fill in the fields, found in the lower half of the screen.
16.4.9 Copy in project

This command is used to add new cables from the General Stock to the selected Project, or
to provide repeats of cables already within your project.
When selected you will be provided with the opportunity to assign your cable a name, and
modify any of it’s related data, such as origin, destiny, description, length etc.
Upon accepting, the cable will be available within your project.
16.4.10 Insert
This allows you to create new cables from scratch, within either your project or general
stock cables.
16.4.11 Delete
This allows erasing of any cables from general stock and any unused project cables.
16.4.12 View conductors
This button allows you to view the free numerical conductors that you have available, on a
selected cable.
To
the left of the View conductor’s button, is a rule to provide you with information relating to
the number of conductors still available, the blue bar acts as an approximate indicator of
the number of conductors available.
The 3 number fields above the free conductor indicator, display, (from left to right).
 100 The first numeric conductor
 200 The mid point conductor number, ED will round this figure up, do that if
you had conductors, 1 to 5 the mid point would be 3.
- 354 -
 300 The last numeric conductor
As these conductors are used the bar will reduce in size, so that when 50%, (100
conductors in the above illustration), of the numerical conductors are in use you would see
the following.
16.4.12.1.1 Free conductors

In the lower right of the screen, you will find the total of free conductors for the selected
cable. This information provides precise figures on the number of conductors available.
The total of free conductors includes the total of numeric and alphabetic conductors
available.
In the illustration above, you can see that the cable has conductors 100 – 300 available in
addition to alphanumerical conductors, this in turn means you have a total of 201 numerical
cables, and 4 alphanumerical conductors, giving you a Total of 205 conductors. As you
use the cables conductors, either Numerical or Alphanumerical the Free conductors figure
will be reduced.
1 6 . 5 C a b l i n g (t e r m i n a l s a n d e l e m e n ts )
Although the wire up commands outlined below are available within both the terminals and
the connections editors, the connections editor only allows you wire up between an Origin
and Destiny device, rather than internally and externally as with terminals. So that although
the process for cabling your elements is the same as that for cabling terminals there are
only one set of cabling icons.
In the centre of the editors are sets of icon commands that allow you to wire up, individual
and/or multiple terminals or elements, as well as delete any cables that have been used
between your elements and/or terminals.
Any cables that are used will be automatically annotated to your terminals/elements within
your schematic drawings.
Above you can see that terminal –X1 1 has been connected to element
–M1, at pin U using the cable W001 with the cables first conductor.
This will be shown in your schematic drawing as follows:
Due to the elements forming a connection directly to one another, the

cable and conductor information will be automatically written to both the
element and the terminals.
- 355 -
Refer to page 351, Cables (terminals and elements), for further information relating to the
creation of cables within your project.
16.5.1 Wire up (terminals and elements)
This command allows you to drag and drop cable conductors to form both internal and/or
external cable connections, in the case of the terminal editor; and origin destiny cable
between elements in the connections editor. When first selected you must choose, (or
copy into your project), a cable type that you want to employ for making your connections,
once this has been done you will be returned to the editor interface, and your cursor will
change as illustrated below.
The cursor image will display information relating to the cable that you currently have, as
follows:
Cable name Number of conductors
Conductor number
So that in the example above the cable W001, conductor number 1, of 4, is about to be
used to form a connection between terminal –X1 1 and element –M1.
Every time a cable conductor is placed the total number of available conductors will
decrease.
If you want to change either the conductor number and/or the cable type that
you want to employ for a specific connection(s), you can do so by right mouse
clicking once, this will then call up the following interface.
To select a different cable conductor number simply highlight it with your

mouse cursor, and press Accept to return to the editor interface and continue
placing cable conductors.
If you wish to change, the cable that you are using you should press the button
at the top of the interface displaying the cable name, as illustrated below.
Press to select a
different cable.
This will open the cables interface where you can select another cable from the project or
copy a new cable into the project.
- 356 -
By left mouse clicking on the appropriate terminals internal and/or external cable slot; or
elements cable slot, between the origin and destiny devices, the selected cable conductor
will be placed, and the next conductor will be ready for cabling.
Once a cable has had all its conductors used, you will be returned to the cables interface
and the cable will turn red in the cables interface.
To exit from this command you should simply de-select the wire up icon.
16.5.2 Delete (terminals and elements)
This option eliminates one cable conductor connection either internally or externally
assigned to a selected terminal, or between an origin and destiny device, in the
connections editor.
16.5.3 All (terminals and elements)
This command allows you to wire up all the terminals in a terminal strip, or all an elements
pins. Another option is that you may select multiple terminal or element pins, by using the
Shift and/or Cntrl keys, ED will then cable up only those selected terminal and/or element
pins.
Upon selecting the icon you will be placed in the cables interface where you should either
select a cable from your project and/or copy a new cable into your project.
Upon accepting the selected cable, your terminals will be wired up from your selected
terminal downward, until you either run out of conductors, the terminal strip number
changes, or a different element zone is encountered, (the element zone is determined by
whether you are cabling internally or externally).
In the case that you are cabling origin and destiny elements within the connections editor,
the same process, as previously described will be carried out, but ED will wire up your
elements from your selected element or downward, until you either run out of conductors,
or the origin element changes.
16.5.4 Delete all (terminals and elements)

This option deletes all the cables and conductors assigned to a group of terminals. The
command will always delete cable conductors from the selected terminal downward, and
will stop deleting the cables when all of the selected cable conductors are deleted; the
terminal strip number changes, or a different element zone is encountered, (the element
zone is determined by whether you are deleting internally or externally).
In the case that you are deleting cables between origin and destiny elements within the
connections editor, the same process, as previously described will be carried out, but ED
will delete all your cables from the selected origin element downward, until all of the
selected cable conductors are all deleted, or the origin element changes.
1 6 . 6 Te r m i n a l e d i t o r c o m m a n d s a n d o p ti o n s
The following sections will deal purely with the information found in, and the tools available
to you when working within the Terminals editor.
- 357 -
16.6.1 Terminal editor interface
The terminal editor screen shows all the information related to the internal and external
connections of your terminals, any bridging that occurs between them, cable and conductor
information etc.
Although the amount of data can

appear somewhat daunting at
first, the editor display and the
information it contains is very
easy to read, when you consider
that the entire display is divided
into two halves, the left hand side
of the displays deals with internal
(From) terminal connections, the
right hand side external (To)
connections. The two sides
being divided down the middle by
data relating to the terminals that
form the common link, this is the area highlighted in pink.
The screen can be further broken down into the upper display screen, and the lower
information / command interface, both of which are described in detail below.
Internal External
element data Terminal data element data
16.6.2 Terminal display screen

The upper half of the editor interface shows the terminals, data relating to the elements
connected internally and externally to a terminal and the cables connecting these elements
together.
16.6.2.1 Internal / External element data
Internal elements are displayed on the left hand side of the interface and provide the
following information:
 Elements location
 Elements zone
 Elements SNA (numbering)
 Elements pin number which is connected to the terminal
 Elements pin connection
There are two possible connections available per pin for both elements and terminals, in
ED the first connection is denoted in the editor as o_ the second connection is shown as _o.
- 358 -
16.6.2.2 Internal / External connection data
The cables connecting the terminals to the elements both internally and externally are
displayed here, this is in the form of the cable name, followed by the cable conductor
number, (the conductor number can be either numerical or alphanumerical). The cable
name is user definable and can be of up to 15 characters in length.
16.6.2.3 Terminal data
This is data relating to the terminal, which forms the connection between the internal and
external elements, the column headed, Terminal, displays the terminal strip name and
terminal number. The order column shows numbers, which can be assigned to your
terminals to allow you to change their sorting within the editor. The bridges column will
provide a graphic display of any bridge connections that are formed between terminals, as
illustrated below.
This information will only be displayed where the options With bridges
is employed. This provides you with an effective preview of how
bridging will be displayed within your terminal drawings. This maybe
turned on by employing the Bridges option, refer to page 365.
The type’s column allows you to show graphical representations of

the terminal type or accessories associated to a specific terminal. By
using Control and/or Shift, multiple terminals can be assigned the
same Ttype. This information will then be displayed in your terminal drawings.
You can then select a terminal type that will be incorporated into the links of the terminal
drawing. All the types are found in the Monta library, (TTYPES), and can be edited to suit
your preference.
16.6.3 Terminal, internal, external detailed connection data

The lower half of the editor contains more detailed information relating to the internal and
external elements and the terminal to which they are connected.
In the illustration below, you can be seen that the centre shows information related to the
selected terminal, to the left the internal connection and to the right the external connection.
- 359 -
In the terminal information area, you are able to edit any of the fields highlighted in blue,
these are as follows:
16.6.3.1 Order
This is used to specify a numerical order different from the terminal name. You should
activate this field in the configuration if you want to sort your terminals by this field. Refer
also to the automatic numbering of field order in Tools.
16.6.3.2 Symbol
This is the name of the terminal strip and its number, the terminal strip being, -X1, and the
terminals number, 1.
16.6.3.3 Function
If the terminals have been defined a function attribute, this information will be shown here.
Some companies choose to employ this field to specify the use of a current terminal.
16.6.3.4 Equipotential
This field shows the equipotential that the terminal is on, where you have inserted spare
terminals, that do not exist in the schemes, the field will be available for edition.
Any changes made to the terminal data will be automatically feedback to the terminals
within the drawing.
16.6.4 Rotate terminal
This option when employed will rotate a terminals pin connections, so that the internal and
external connections will effectively be swapped, as illustrated below.
It
can be seen that the element -M1 has been swapped with –F2. When the drawing is
entered you will find that the terminals pin numbers have been swapped over, where pin 1
indicates internal connections, and pin 2 external connections.
16.6.5 Self-connection / Disconnect all

On the right hand side of the terminal editor are two commands, one of which allows you to
break all of the connections within the editor, both internally and externally, and another
that will automatically reconnect all your terminals based upon your schematics.
Self-connection
Disconnect all
- 360 -
1 6 . 7 G o To : ( te r m i n a l s )
This option allows you to quickly locate terminals within the editor, when selected the
By entering data into any of the fields, upon accepting ED will

automatically move to and select the terminal that matches the
search criteria that you have entered. To quickly clear the fields
to run a new search you can select the Delete All button, at the
top of the interface.
1 6 . 8 C o n fi g u r e t e r m i n a l s
Through this command you are able to change the terminals editor configuration, as well as
being able to set many default parameters for the creation of your terminal drawings. All of
the options available are outlined below.
16.8.1 Index of terminals

Through these checkbox options you are able to effectively change the display order, or
index of your terminals within the editor display, and also change the way in which ED will
regard a set of terminals in relation to a terminal strip.
As the way in which terminals are displayed in the editor effects a number of issues, from
the order in which they are placed within terminal drawing, to the grouping of terminals in a
terminal strip, it is important that you utilise these tools to best reflect the manner in which
you want your terminals information displayed, prior to carrying out any “fine” ordering
adjustments.
The index display reflects the order in which ED will group terminals, for example Location,
which is the first option, will group terminals by their location and show these at the top of
the main editor display. By checking the Zone option ED would order terminals by their
Location and then by their Zone, this will mean that the terminals displayed at the top of the
main editor display will be those that share the same location, below them will be terminals
sharing the same zone.
Furthermore the locations, zones etc. will be displayed first numerically then alphabetically.
So that if you have 4 terminals on a strip –X1 with location of 1, A, 2, B, respectively ED
would order the terminals as follows:
-X1 1 (LOCATION = 1)
-X1 3 (LOCATION = 2)
-X1 2 (LOCATION = A)
-X1 4 (LOCATION = B)
There are two fixed Index settings, which may not be altered, namely
the Terminal Strip and Drawing + X + Y + Pin. So that if no Index
options were checked ED would order your terminals by Terminal
Strip and then by the terminals schematic positioning within your
project drawings, these options are always checked in order to
provide some coherence to your terminal editor display.
- 361 -
 Location: Sorts by the terminals location value.
 Zone: Sorts by the terminals zone.
 Group: Sorts by the terminals group.
 Terminal strip: This is always fixed, so that terminals will always be index by
strip, in addition to any other parameters applied, terminal strip will take indexing
precedence over the other index options numbered 5-9.
 Order: Sorts by the, user definable, order column fields. This is one of the most
flexible sort options, as it can be edited through the terminals display or through the tool
options.
 Equipotential: Sorts by the terminals connected equipotential value.
 Function: Sorts by the function defined to a terminal.
 Terminal: Sorts by the name of the terminal.
 Drawing + X + Y + pin: This parameter is always fixed; all other index

parameters will take precedence over this option.
16.8.1.1 Differentiating terminal strips by index
Within the terminal editor you are able to discern between terminal strips that have the
same terminal strip name, this can be very useful when used in conjunction with the
terminal editors Tools.
Differentiating can be achieved by using the indexing options. If you wanted to apply
changes to 50 of 100 terminals all of which are a part of the terminal strip, -X1, you can use
the Location, Zone, and/or Group indexing tools to ensure ED differentiates between them.
So that if you had 50 terminals in Location CHASSIS, and another 50 in Location DOOR,
by checking the Location index option, when using your terminal editor Tools ED would
regard the to terminals in the location CHASSIS as being one terminal strip; and the 50 with
location DOOR as being another terminal strip.
16.8.2 Number of connections
The terminal display can be configured to display one or two connections.
WARNING!
If you are using two connections and form your own connections, changing the
configuration to one connection will result in the loss of your terminals second connection
data. It is best to choose if you want to use one or two connections in your project, and to
use this format throughout.
If you set the configuration to 2 connections, you will be able to connect two elements to a
single terminal pin, both internally and/or externally; this is because every element pin
within ED is regarded as having two possible connections. You are also able to determine
if the connections should be open or closed. The latter can be
achieved by checking the Open ring box, which will become live
upon selecting, Use 2 connections.
- 362 -
By employing the Use 2
connections option you will
have your have terminals
secondary pin connection
connected to your
elements first pin
connection, this is not
automatically displayed within the editor however and you should carryout out a Disconnect
All, command followed by a Self Connection. This will ensure that the connections are
displayed correctly as illustrated.
In the case that two connections are used, the terminal drawings will include the second
connection in the following manner: Connection indicator
16.8.3 Terminal drawing

The options available allow you to define your
terminal drawings preferences. The preferences
available include how many terminals one drawing
should contain before another is created; how the
drawing should be annotated, whether terminal
bridges and/or terminal type graphics should be
shown, as well as the type of Matrix you wish to
employ in displaying your terminal drawing. These
settings will be used as your default parameters for the creation of terminal drawings.
The options are as follows:
 Change drawing when change…: This option allows you to automatically create a
new terminal drawing for each different location and / or zone that you have within a project.
So that if you have two number terminal strips –X1, -X2. -X1 having a location and zone of
CHASSIS / BAY – 1; and strip –X2 a location and zone of CABINET2 / BAY – 2, you will
have two number terminal drawings created, one for each terminal strip, as they have
differing location and/or zones assigned to them.
 Numerical drawing/Drawing with prefix $: These options allow you to define how
the new terminal drawings are named upon their creation, either 1, 2, 3…etc., or $1, $2,
$3…etc.
 With functions: When functions are associated to terminals this option allows
them to appear in the drawings.
 With Bridges: If there are two terminals with the same equipotential value, they
can be connected with a bridge. Refer to page 365 for further details.
- 363 -
 Same zone only: When checked bridges will only be formed by terminals that are
in the same zone.
 Only neighbouring: This checkbox becomes active when the checkbox,

With bridges is checked, it allows for your terminal drawings to display terminal bridges, but
contiguously only, rather than with multiple levels.
 Number of terminals: The number of terminals can be changed if the Matrix

drawing is modified. Default value: 53 terminals. I.e. 53 terminals will be displayed in a
single drawing before a new drawing is created.
 Number of cables: The number of cables can be changed if the Matrix

drawing is modified. Default value: 10. This allows you to define the number of cables that
will be displayed in one drawing prior to another being created.
The terminal drawings are created from two

prototype drawings, a standard layer/lines
prototype, and a matrix, within which your data will
be displayed. By selecting the Change buttons you
are able to define how your terminal drawing
information is to be displayed.
16.8.4 Graphic drawing

Elements in ED can have terminal graphics assigned to them, (refer to page 236), by
checking either the origin and/or destiny checkboxes you will have the elements connected
to the terminal displayed graphically within your drawing.
Terminal drawing graphic
- 364 -
16.9 Terminal editor Tools
The Tools command allows you to selectively manipulate the terminals information.
In this screen, you will find the following options:
16.9.1 Selections
16.9.1.1 Only selection
This checkbox will cause only those terminals you have selected in the terminal display to
be changed by any processes carried out within this interface.
16.9.1.2 Terminal strip selected
This checkbox will cause only the terminals selected terminal strip to be changed by any
processes carried out within this interface. It is only necessary to select one terminal for its
entire strip to be effected by manipulation changes.
NOTE
The way in which ED regards a terminal strip can vary dependent upon the terminal
indexing options you are using, refer to page 361 for more information.
16.9.1.3 All terminal strips
This will only cause all of the terminal strips within your project to be effected by changes
you carryout.
16.9.2 Rename term. Strip

This option is used to change the name of a terminal strip; by filling in the new name you
wish to assign and pressing the Rename term. strip button the selected terminals / strips
will be changed.
16.9.3 Renumber Terminals

This option allows you to assign a new number to your terminal(s) automatically. The
renumbered terminals will use the current terminals counter value from your project; you
may access and change the counters directly from the terminals tools interface by pressing
the Counters icon.
WARNING
not have the option to cancel, so that any changes implemented will take effect immediately.
- 365 -
16.9.4 Renumber Order
This option allows you to assign an order to your terminals, that can then be used in
conjunction with the configure index options, to change the display order of your terminals
within the editor. This is done by using the Start and Increment fields, to specify the
number you want to start the order numbering from, and the increments you want them to
increase by. By selecting the Renumber order button you will then apply the incremental
numbering to your terminals order field.
16.9.5 Copy Order to Terminals

This command copies the order field data direct to the terminals number, this is very useful
if you have assigned a terminal strip to your terminals but have not numbered them. A
warning message will be provided prior to allowing you to overwrite already numbered
terminals.
16.9.6 Copy Equipotential to Terminals

This command copies the equipotential field data direct to the terminals number. A warning
message will be provided prior to allowing you to overwrite already numbered terminals.
16. 10 B rid g es
Terminal bridges are used to indicate connections between terminals when there are a
number of terminals on a single wire, for example, if there are layers of these, your
schematic drawings can become complex. ED allows for a maximum of 32 layers of
bridges.
The bridges indicated within the terminal drawings act, not only as an aid to reading the
schematics, but also are a useful tool when the physical terminals are being wired.
Example
The following example explains how to display terminals bridges within your terminal
drawings, when using the 2 connections per terminal option. The example has been
designed with a view to allowing you to understand how to make connections and form
bridges in ED.
The example below shows the wire 24Vdc, which

has a number of terminals connected to it. All of
the terminals being part of the terminal strip –X1.
As previously outlined in this chapter, each of

these terminals has a potential of, two connection
points per pin. Bridges will exist between all of these terminals, automatically forming them
between neighbouring terminals. As this example will be using two connections and
bridges, go the configure options and ensure the
options 2 connections, and With bridges are
activated. After accepting and entering the editor
display, press the Reindex icon to show your
bridge connections, which should be as per the
illustration.
- 366 -
As you can see ED has made no connections to
the secondary pin connections for your 4
terminals, by selecting the disconnect all icon,
followed by the self connection icon, your display
will be updated so that you have both terminal
pin connections being formed as illustrated.
The results that you should achieve are illustrated below in an extract from a terminal
drawing, based upon the 4 example terminals.
By comparing the two sets of bridging, you can see that none of the connections being
formed in the editor at present are correct. To change a connection, you should firstly
select the terminal pin whose connection you want to change, (terminal –X1 1, pin 1, or the
first terminal in the editor display), select the Internal connect up icon, which will call up the
following display.
The elements on the left hand side are all of those that can be connected to terminal –X1 1,
as you can see in the terminal drawing extract, -X1 1 pin 1 needs to be connected to
terminal –X1 3 pin 2, so by
selecting the second
connection of terminal –X1 3
in the display and pressing
Accept, you will have formed
a connection. Reindex the
terminal display, and you will
see that the bridge display
has been updated as
illustrated.
By repeating this process, you are able to form and view the bridge connections that you
want to have formed inside your terminal drawing. So that when your terminal display
shows bridging like this:
- 367 -
You will know that your terminal drawing bridging will be displayed in the manner you want.
NOTE
Bridges cannot be formed between terminals that are in different zones.
16. 11 Te r m i n a l d r a w i n g s
Based upon the information that you have generated in your schematics and manipulations
carried out inside the editor, you will be able to automatically create your terminal drawings.
When the Terminal drawing icon is selected, the following display window will appear.
Before Accepting, to create your drawings, you can select a number of options to help
define the drawing format.
These options are:
 Prototype library / Prototype: By double

clicking on the selection, (MONTA, in the example
above), the user will be able to select the prototype
library that they wish to employ, by doing so you will
also be able to define your preferred drawing prototype.
 Matrix library / Matrix By double clicking
on the selection, (MONTA, in the example above), you
- 368 -
will be able to select the library from which the matrix will be taken, as well as your
preferred matrix, matrix drawings include certain attributes that will ensure higher quality
terminal drawings, as follows:
 Projectstrip: Informs ED where to re-annotate the name of the project to

which the FIRST terminal from the terminal strip belongs.
These attributes have to be placed into the MATRIX block, (which is inserted into the
terminals’ prototype drawings), for their correct re-annotations when creating the terminals’
drawings.
In MONTA library, there is also another matrix prototype called MATRIX1. In this other
prototype, the terminal information is annotated vertically.
 Titlebox Library: This option allows the user to select the type of title box to be
used with the terminal drawing and the title box library from which it will be taken.
 Modified: Every time the user chooses to produce terminal drawings a

number of drawings will be created corresponding to the number of terminal strips within a
project. If the user has, for example, a project with terminal strips -X1 - -X9, and only
makes amendments to one of the strips, -X4, then it can be time consuming to have to
produce 9 terminal drawings, to incorporate the one change. With Modified, you can select
and deselect those terminal strips, which have or have not been edited, and thus save time.
Select YES for any terminal strips you have amended, and wish to produce drawings for,
and NO for any terminal drawings that you wish to leave unchanged, and thus not produce
new drawings for.
 Origin graphic: Allows you to choose if you want to display the origin
graphics in your drawing.
 Destiny graphic: Allows you to choose if you want to display the destiny graphic
in your drawing.
Refer to the Technical Guide for details of attributes for terminal Matrix drawings.
 Spare Terminals: By checking this option on ED will automatically populate

terminal drawings with spare terminals. Spare terminals will be inserted into terminal
drawings, where gaps occur in the numbering of terminals in a scheme drawings terminal
strip.
Example
Terminal strip –X1 has terminals numbered 1-5, and 9-20, by checking the Spare terminals
option the terminal drawing will contain spare terminals numbered 6-8.
16. 12 Te r m i n a l r e p o r ts
Upon selecting this icon the following interface will be displayed.
- 369 -
The report options are outlined in the following sections.



defined in the terminal editor. The difference with the project cables is that it includes the
connections of the cables.
The lists can include the origin and destiny elements.
16.12.4 Report of terminals. Only one connection

This option creates a list of terminals and their connections. This information is obtained
from the terminal editor. These lists are a complementary system to the terminal drawings.
One connection only shows the defined connection for each terminal pin.
selective lists.
16.12.5 Report of terminals. All connections

This option creates a list of terminals and their connections. This information is obtained
from the terminal editor. These lists are a complementary system to the terminal drawings.
All connections shows all the possible elements connected to each terminal pin.
selective lists.
16. 13 R ein d e x
When you have changed the tools index options you will need to reindex the editor
information so that the display is updated, by pressing this icon your terminal display data
- 370 -
will be re-ordered to show your sort/index changes This is exceptionally useful where you
are changing the position of terminals by altering their order, as it will allow you to
constantly update the display, without having to enter any other interfaces. Another
employment for this command is where you have selected to use bridges, selecting the
reindex icon will update your display to show the terminal bridges.
16. 14 In sert t er m in al s
The insert option allows you to add as many terminals as desired into the terminal editor
and thus to reports and terminal drawings.
To indicate the number of terminals the user wishes to

add, they should select the prompt box and type the
desired number, (10 in the example above). When the
Insert button is selected, the following options will be given.
The information choices reflect those of the selected
terminal within the editor.
If the user chooses to ignore the options, the terminals will be inserted, devoid of
information
Inserted
elements
To automatically add information from another terminal within the editor, the user should
select the terminal with information that best reflects that which the user wishes to copy into
the inserted terminal(s).
The options are as follows:

 Location: This will copy the location of a selected terminal.
 Zone: This will copy the zone of a selected terminal.
 Terminal strip: This will insert a terminal into the selected terminal strip.
 Terminal: This will assign the same number to the terminal to be inserted,
as that of the selected terminal.
 Function: Copies the function into the inserted terminal.
 Equipotential: This will copy the selected equipotential value of the selected
terminal to that of the inserted terminal.
NOTE
The Delete terminal button can only be used to delete inserted terminals, not terminals
placed within schematic drawings.
- 371 -
16. 15 C o n n e c ti o n s e d i to r i n te r f a c e c o m m a n d s a n d o p ti o n s
The following sections will deal purely with the information found in, and the tools available
to you when working within the Connections editor.
Upon selecting the device(s) that you want

to edit, the following interface will displayed.
The connections editor screen shows all the

information related to the connections of
your elements pins, cable and conductor
information etc. Each elements pin has a
potential of 2 connections, which can be
formed automatically using PCP’s or by
using the connect up options available to
you through this editor.
16.15.1 Connections display screen

The upper half of the interface shows the elements, data relating to connections being
formed to these elements and cable and conductors assigned between the connected
elements.
Connection
data
Origin element data Destiny element data
Selected element data The selected element is displayed on the left hand side
of the interface and provides the following information relating to the Origin elements.
 Elements zone
 Elements group
 Elements pin number
There are two connections available for every element pin, in ED the first connection is
denoted in the editor as o_ the second connection is shown as _o. ED will always show
both connections of every elements pin, within the connections editor.
Connection data The cables connecting the Origin and Destiny elements is displayed
here, this is in the form of the cable name, followed by the cable conductor number, the
conductor number can be either numerical or alphanumerical. The cable name is user
definable and can be of up to 15 characters in length.
Destiny element data The right side of the interface displays the connected destiny
elements information, which includes.
 Elements pin number
- 372 -
 Elements group
 Elements zone
Where a line of information is blank, this denotes that the Origin elements, pin connection
currently forms no connection. Illustrated below you can see that the Origin element -F1, is
connected at pin 2, connection 1 to the Destiny element –K1, at pin 1, connection 2.
While the second connection of -F1 pin 2 forms no connection.
16.15.2 Origin, destiny element detailed connection data

The lower half of the editor contains more detailed information relating to the origin
elements and the destiny devices to which they are connected.
In the illustration, you can be seen

that the left side of the interface shows
information related to the selected
origin element and to the right the
information relating to the destiny
device, to which a connection is
formed.
There are also preview windows that display a graphic representation of the origin and
destiny elements, these are provided to help assist in realising your project device
connections.
The cable and conductor fields will display the data relating to cables connecting the
selected origin element to a destiny device.
16. 16 Go To: (de vices)

This option allows you to quickly locate devices within
the editor, when selected the following interface will be
displayed.
By entering data into any of the fields, upon accepting

ED will automatically move to and select the device that
matches the search criteria that you have entered. To
quickly clear the fields to run a new search you can
select the Delete All button, at the top of the interface.
16. 17 C o n fi g u r e e l e m e n t s
Through this command you are able to change the connections editor display configuration.
When selected the following interface will be displayed:
- 373 -
Through these checkbox options you are able to
effectively change the display order, or index of your
origin elements within the editor display.
The index display reflects the order in which ED will group

elements, for example Location, which is the first option,
will group elements by their location and show these at
the top of the main editor display. By checking the Zone
option ED would order elements by their Location and
then by their Zone, this will mean that the elements
displayed at the top of the main editor display will be
those that share the same location, below them will be elements sharing the same zone.
Furthermore the locations, zones etc. will be displayed first numerically then
alphanumerically. So that if you have 4 elements with location of 1, A, 2, B, respectively
ED would order them as follows:
-F1 (LOCATION = 1)
-F3 (LOCATION = 2)
-F2 (LOCATION = A)
-F4 (LOCATION = B)
There is one fixed Index setting, which may not be altered, namely the Drawing + X + Y +
Pin. So that if no Index options were checked ED would order your elements by the
schematic location within your project drawings, this option is always checked in order to
provide some coherence to your connection editor display.
 Location: Sorts by the elements location value.
 Zone: Sorts by the elements zone.
 Group: Sorts by the elements group.
 Equipotential: Sorts by the elements connected equipotential value.
 Function: Sorts by the function defined to an element.
 Numbering: Sorts by the elements SNA (numbering).
 Drawing + X + Y + pin: This parameter is always fixed; all other index

parameters will take precedence over this option.
16. 18 E l e m e n t r e p o r ts
When selected the following interface will be displayed:
- 374 -

defined in the connections editor and includes the elements connected by various project
the cables.
16. 19 C h e ck cab l es
This command option is found in the Check errors interface, (refer to page 374 for further
details), found in the Analysis and Lists toolbar, and within the Project Browser screen, the
command is only available to users working with the Connection and cables editor. The
command itself will analyse your project drawings, looking specifically at terminal and
element cables and conductors.
Upon selecting the command icon, the following

Here you will find a list of all the cables contained

within your project drawings, followed by the cables
description. Beside each cable you will see one of
two icons.
The green arrow indicates that the cable and all it’s associated conductors
currently are assigned to either terminals or elements within your project are correct.
The red triangle indicates that ED has located an error in the cable or one of its
conductors. You can learn more about the error by double clicking on it. This will return
you to the Check Errors interface and automatically filter and display a list of the CABL
errors only, which you can then navigate to.
NOTE
When you access the Check errors interface ED will automatically apply an errors filter,
which will only allow you to review your projects cable errors.
- 375 -
16.19.1 Cable errors
Cable errors can be caused in a number of ways, any of which can be easily remedied, the
most common causes for ED to find a cable error are:
 Having two terminals or

elements connected directly to one
another, but each of the connected
pins has a different cable or
conductor.
****ERROR: Cable-conductor different at the other end.[Cable/conductor name]
 Having either cables assigned to terminals and/or elements that do not exist in the
projects cable database.
****ERROR: Cable CABLENAME is not in the project
 Conductors assigned to terminals and/or elements that do not exist in the projects
cables
****ERROR: Conductor CONDUCTORNAME is not in the cable.[Cable/conductor name]

 A conductor is applied which does not exist in the cable.
****ERROR: Conductor CONDUCTORNAME from cable CABLENAME has been used

more than once.
1 6 . 2 0 F o u r l e ve l E x p o r t t e r m i n a l s ( M - c o m m , M - P r i n t , M - L a b e l ,
R ail D e sig n er)
This feature allows you to export data from your project drawings in Weidmuller compatible
formats, which then provide you with the ability to import your information directly into a
range of Weidmuller software packages, including the M-Software Collection, M-Print, M-
Comm 2 and M-Label providing you with all the necessary tools you need to generate
markers quickly and simply to your specifications.
All these programs include import functions to optimise your marking procedures, enabling
the easy transfer of data directly from ED.
M-Print The software solution for the printing of markers or labels and production of
customised formats.
M-Comm 2 The software solution for ordering laser-produced markers to customer

specifications.
M-Label The software solution for the printing of any type of label containing any number of
different field types, e.g. text, bar code, line diagram, graphics.
Rail Designer Project planning and ordering made easy. Reduced preparation time for
tendering of individual terminal rails.
Please contact Weidmuller to learn more about software product range.
- 376 -
When you select this command option for the first time, ED will automatically scan your
system for any of the Weidmuller software packages named previously. Once this process
has been completed the Export terminals interface will be displayed, as illustrated.
If ED does not automatically locate any Weidmuller

package, that you know is installed on your system,
(this is generally due to installation of the software
in locations other than the default), you are able to
employ the folder icons, to browse through your
system to locate the programs EXE file manually,
This will then enable the relevant program option.
By selecting anyone of the available programs, you

will see that the information displayed in the lower
half of the screen is altered. ED does this
automatically by altering the available project
information, to reflect what is required for the
appropriate software package. This information will
match the relevant software packages import
format.
Example
Where MPRINT has been selected you will have a list of the terminal counters, 1, 2, 3, etc.
as this suits the terminal labelling requirements for MPRINT.
Also, where available, ED will allow you to select to export not only
terminal data but also information relating to your components, by
checking or un-checking the terminals and/or components boxes you
are able to export your preferred information.
16.20.1 Export file

ED will automatically locate the selected Weidmuller software folder in which to place the
ED export file. Furthermore ED will automatically apply the appropriate Weidmuller
compatible format to the file to the export file; this will be dependent upon the software that
you have selected to export to.
Example
If you selected to export to M-Label the format *.WEI would automatically be applied.
The export file will be assigned the name ELEC by default, however you are able to change,
the name, the export file type, and the location to which the file is saved to, by selecting the
folder icon.
You may then browse to a preferred location and change the export files format, as
illustrated below.
- 377 -
NOTE
Due to on-going collaboration between Aceri and Weidmuller, the Export terminals facility
within electrical designer is subject to feature enhancement. To learn more about the range
of Weidmuller products mentioned please contact either Aceri UK Ltd. or your nearest
Weidmuller distribution centre.
TIP!
You may find that Rail Designer does not automatically start when exporting the terminal
information to it. If this is the case, please select Windows Explorer. Then select the Tools
dropdown, Folder Options, File Types. Select ‘New’ and type a file extension of ‘AEF’.
Change the program associated to it to the Rail Designer executable. You will need
administrative rights on your PC.
16. 21 M u l ti -d e c k te r m i n a l s
Multi deck terminals can be created in ED2010 in two ways, these being within the cabinets,
where a single terminal may have up to eight pins, and through the use of Export Terminals
where multiple terminals can be employed to obtain markers for a single multi-deck
terminal(s).
The methods and results for creating multi-deck terminals are outlined as follows.
16.21.1 Multi-deck terminal markers

This can be done by having multiple terminals in your schematic drawings associated to
one another by function. Alternatively, if you do not want to have extra terminals shown in
the schematics, you can insert spare terminals within the terminal editor, and apply
functions to them.
When using this system you should ensure that all the terminals have a Weidmuller
manufacturers reference assigned to them, so that they will import to Rail Designer
correctly. Also that the same part is applied to terminals that make up the markers on a
single terminal.
The COUNTER, assigned to the individual terminals will be used as the pin marker when
exporting your project terminals information to Rail Designer.
- 378 -
16.21.2 Multi-deck cabinet terminals
It is possible in ED2010 to have up to 4 schematic terminals make up one multi-deck
terminal with up to four levels, each terminal being indicative of each level of a single multi-
deck terminal, and its actual connections.
NOTE
If you do not want to have extra terminals shown in the schematics, you can insert spare
terminals within the terminal editor, and apply functions to them.
It is not a requirement for terminals associated to a single multi-deck terminal component,
to be on the same equipotential, or indeed to have the same numbering counter.
To associate individual schematic terminals to one single multi deck terminal, you need to
assign a function to terminals within ED to indicate which level of the multi-deck terminal
they are and therefore the connections that will be formed to the different terminal pins.
By associating two or more schematic terminals to one another by employment of a

function, when assigning a catalogue and/or reference to any one of the terminals, ED will
automatically apply the same data to all the terminals.
The reason for this is that by grouping the terminals with a function, you are effectively
stating that they all make up one component and as such must be the same manufacturers
part.
16.21.3 Multi-deck Terminal functions - Cabinets
To associate terminals to one another, you need to apply a function to them, (refer to page
133, Set function), an example of a function that you should assign is FUNCTION#a this
can be broken down as follows:
FUNCTION This allows you to group terminals, so that where four or more terminals
are assigned the prefix FUNCTION1 then they will be regarded as being markers or pin
connections for 1 terminal in either Rail Designer or a multi deck physical component;
FUNCTION2 would then indicate a second terminals markers or pin connections, and so on.
The function prefix can be anything you choose. It does not have to be called FUNCTION,
for example.
# This is obligatory and acts as a separator between the function prefix, (to group
terminals to one physical terminal), and the suffix that is employed to indicate the terminals
marker or pin position.
a This letter is obligatory, and determines the terminal pin marker, or level of the pin
in relation to the multi deck terminal.
The letter suffix which is applied to terminals within ED2010, is essential as it defines the
level at which the terminal connections shall be formed. The following table indicates the
functions, which maybe applied to your terminals.
- 379 -
Function Schematic terminal Pin value of cabinet Level of the cabinet
Suffix pin terminal terminal
a / b or ab 1 1 First level
a / b or ab 2 2 First level
c / d or cd 1 3 Second level
c / d or cd 2 4 Second level
e / f or ef 1 5 Third level
e / f or ef 2 6 Third
g / h or gh 1 7 Fourth level
g / h or gh 2 8 Fourth level
Each level of a multi-deck has a potential of 3 functions that can be applied to any one
schematic terminal, to define the terminals level in relation to the multi-deck. The following
illustration shows the way in which ED regards each level of a terminal, and the functions
that can be applied.
4th level– Function g, h, or gh
3rd level– Function e, f, or ef

2nd level– Function c, d, or cd
1st level – Function a, b, or ab
In the schematics you could use any of the following combination of functions, (dependent
upon your preference), to achieve the same results.
Example 1
Example 2
- 380 -
Example 3
So that by applying a function suffix, a, b, or ab that terminal is then related to the first level
of the multi-deck, regardless of whether the function suffix is a, or b or ab.
16.21.4 Multi-deck Terminal functions - Rail Designer
To associate terminals to one another when employing ED’s Export terminals command, is
exactly the same as outlined in the previous section; namely FUNCTION#a etc. Although
the basic make-up of the function is the same, you are provided with more options for the
assignment of functions to terminals where they are being export to Rail Designer.
Notation of mark in Rail Level of the cabinet

Function Suffix
Designer terminal
a Upper First level

b Lower First level
ab Upper and Lower First level
c Upper Second level

d Lower Second level
cd Upper and Lower Second level
e Upper Third level

f Lower Third level
e / f or ef Upper and Lower Third level
g Upper Fourth level

h Lower Fourth level
gh Upper and Lower Fourth level

The assignment of functions to terminals allows you to not only define the level of the actual
terminal that they will be associated too, but also to define the exact location that the mark
will be placed on the terminal.
16.21.5 Multi-deck terminals connections
The connections that are made by a multi-deck terminal component within a cabinet; will
exactly mirror those made within your schematic drawing(s) by the associate terminals
- 381 -
The following illustration show two terminals connected internally to two fuses, and
externally to two lights.
The functions assigned to the terminals are as follows:
FUNCTION#a
FUNCTION#c
This denotes that the connections will be made to the first two levels of a multi-deck
terminal component within a cabinet.
FUNCTION#c
FUNCTION#a
So that the first level of the terminal (pins 1 and 2) are used to connect
–F1 to –H1 and the second level or tier of the terminal (pins 3 and 4),
connect –F2 to –H2.
16.21.6 Multi-Deck Terminal attributes

Multi-deck terminal components will have all the same attributes as
standard Physical components; in addition to these, each pin of the
component has extra attributes available to it; refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide.
- 382 -
17 P L C’s
electrical designers’ Plc module incorporates facilities and commands for the editing and
maintenance of automatic programmables.
The Plc module provides you with all of the necessary tools for the manipulation, importing,
exporting, and programming of plc’s, as well as a number of other tools specifically
designed to allow you to increase your productivity when working with plc data.
All of the previously mentioned functionalities that can be carried out on plcs’ can be
implemented using the plc toolbar, (illustrated below); the various applications of these
commands are outlined during the course of this chapter.
1 7 . 1 P L C e l e m e n ts
There are three plc element types in ED these being CPU’s, PLC SLOTS, PLC SUB
SLOTS, each of these shares an association. Information relating to the attributes required
to make any of these three element types intelligent within ED can be found in the ED2010
Tech Guide.
17.1.1 PLC CPU

The Plc CPU element is considered to be the parent element of a plc slot and represents
the main part of a PLC: power connections, etc.
CPU and PLC slot cross-referencing is not unlike that of functional blocks and sub blocks
(refer to page 392).
17.1.1.1 CPU required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
- 383 -
17.1.2 PLC slot
Represents individual PLC slots they can be as large as required, and being unlike any
other element have a unique set of attributes. These act as child elements to CPU’s and
have many traits unique to them, to learn more about PLC’s in ED, refer to page 391.
17.1.2.1 PLC slot required attributes
262 CN# Pin values
260 ADD# Element number
267 DES# Element number
268 LAB# Element number
266 COM# Element number
276 ZONE Zone
268 GROUP Group
271 RACK PLC rack
272 SLOT PLC slot
273 SYM# Element SNA and pin that the associated sub slot is
connected to
17.1.3 PLC sub slots

These elements represent an individual plc slot pin; they will cross-reference to plc slots,
and will adopt the pin numbering from the slot pin that they are associated. They share
similar attributes as plc slots. To learn more about cross-referencing between slots and
sub slots, refer to page 391.
Examples of plc elements can be found in the DIN library supplied with ED, to learn more
about the different types of plc element that can be created in ED refer to page 382.
17.1.3.1 PLC sub slot required attributes
CN1 Pin value must equal 1
276 ZONE Zone
- 384 -
268 GROUP Group
271 RACK PLC rack
272 SLOT PLC slot
1 7 . 2 P L C to o l b a r c o m m a n d s
17.2.1 Number PLC

With this command, you can numerate the values of the attributes: Pin, Address and/or
Label.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC Number PLC
 Command line: NUMPLC
By selecting the number plc icon, the following dialogue window will open:
At the top of the screen are three checkboxes, by selecting or deselecting these, you are
able to define which attributes you want to be included / excluded from the automatic
numeration process.
Once you have decided which attributes to number you can define the information that you
want to have associated to them.
You have a number of options from which to choose as follows:

17.2.1.1 Prefix
Text to be added to the beginning of the numeration i.e. I0., E0:, A., etc.
- 385 -
17.2.1.2 Counter
Numeric counter start point, the numeration will start from the counter assigned and will
increase by increments of 1, so that a counter set at 100, would have pins numbered 100,
101, 102, 103, etc.
17.2.1.3 Suffix
Text to add to the end of the numeration i.e. Z, Y., etc.
17.2.1.4 Start pin
The pin you want numbering to start from, this is especially useful if you only want to apply
information to only some of your plc pins.
17.2.1.5 Endpin
The last pin to be numbered.
17.2.1.6 Iteration
This option allows you to define which pin data you would like to be skipped during the
incremental numbering of your plc slot. By defining 3 within this field with a start pin of 1
and an end pin of 4 the first three pins, ADDress and/or LABel will be numbered with the
same value, 1 for example, while the fourth pin will be numbered number 2. So that, the
first three pins have had their incremental numbering skipped.
Due to restrictions based upon cross-referencing between PLC slots and sub slots, the Pins
checkbox option will be automatically greyed out upon entering a value higher than 1 in the
Iteration field. Please refer to PLC Slots and Sub slots, page 392 for further details.
NOTE
By specifying that you want to Start numbering a plc at pin 8, and wish to end the
numbering at pin 6, your plc will have its pins numbered in reverse, i.e. pin 8 will be
numbered 1, pin 7 will be numbered 2, and pin 6 will be numbered 3.
17.2.1.7 Base
You are provided with a choice of base numeration systems to use.
The numbering base can be defined as:
 Binary: 1, 10, 11, 100, 101, 110, 111, 1000.

 Octal: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 10.
 Decimal: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10.
 Hexadecimal: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B.
Once you have defined the various parameters, selecting the Accept button will cause the
information to be automatically annotated to your plc.
- 386 -
17.2.2 Info. PLC
Through the selection of this command you are able to assign data to your plc, as a whole,
and modify the data for every pin the plc contains.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC Info PLC
 Command line: INFOELE
 Module required: Professional /
Premium versions
When selected the following dialogue will be displayed
The upper half of the screen labelled Attributes allows

for the assignment/ modification of data that will be
applied to the plc as a whole, such as its associated
catalogue and reference, rack and slot location, etc.
The lower half of the screen, labelled Pins shows you the information associated to an
individual pin; the lower right hand side of the dialogue window shows two numbers, these
numbers indicate the pin number that you are currently looking at and the number of left, so
that 1/7 indicates you are looking at pin 1 and that there are a further 7 pins on the selected
plc.
You can move from one pin to another by selecting the arrow, buttons, (illustrated below),
these allow you to move backwards or forwards, through your plc pins data.
Beside these buttons is a number, which also indicates the pin number that you are
currently viewing.
Where you have a sub slot that has RACK and SLOT attribute data that corresponds to that
within a PLC Slot you are able to access the ADDRESS edit icon. Selecting this will show
a pop down of the data assigned to the PLC SLOT, as illustrated below:
By selecting any of the items available, all of the

information will be applied to the element, such
as address, pin, label, description, etc. Lines of
information which are shown in red denote that
the information has already been applied to
another sub slot, and is thus already in use.
17.2.3 Export PLC

This command allows you to export your plc pin data, while applying a specific format to the
data being exported, the exported file will be stored as a simple text, (TXT), file, which can
then be sent to other companies for addition and/or alterations; the revised file can then be
imported back to you plc at a later date, ensuring that the task of correctly assigning
information to your plc does not have to be carried out twice.
 Toolbar: PLC
- 387 -
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC Export PLC
 Command line: EXPLC
When selected the screen illustrated below will be displayed, this interface has four parts,
relating to:
 Manipulation of identifiers ordering, and lengths.

 Application / saving of format files.
 Location and name of export files to be saved.
 Display of associate plc identifier data.
17.2.3.1 Attributes
This shows the various attribute/identifiers associated to your plc, the order in which they
will be exported, and the character length of each.
Below this are three buttons and a field displaying the description of
the selected attribute such as, pin, address, label, comment, etc.
The buttons allow you to adjust the order of the attribute/identifiers, so

that by selecting the downward pointing arrow, while having the
identifier CN (PIN), selected you would change the order so that ADD,
(ADDRESS), will be the first displayed in your export file, followed by
CN.
You can follow the changes by looking at the plc data displayed in the bottom half of the
interface, this shows you the order of your identifiers, and the information that has been
assigned to them; the display order is automatically adjusted to reflect your order changes.
The tick button, (illustrated here on the

left), allows you to show or hide a
particular attributes data in the exported
file, by selecting the button the selected
identifiers checkbox, will be selected
(ticked) / deselected (blank). An attribute
which has been deselected will have its header marked [Hidden] as illustrated below. You
can also simply select the appropriate identifiers checkbox, with your cursor, to select /
deselect it, if you choose.
- 388 -
The length of your identifiers can be changed by double clicking on the appropriate number;
this will highlight the number in yellow, and allow you to manually type in the desired field
length.
17.2.3.2 Format
Another way of changing the order and display of your attributes as well as their lengths,
(other than changing them manually), is by selecting a particular format file. Format files
contain data relating to the attributes you want to incorporate in the export file, their display
order, length, and the separator, (if any), that you want to employ.
Another option available to you, other than loading a particular format, (FMT), is to save a
format that you have created manually, this being based upon changes that you have made
to identifier order and length.
To load a format file, you should select the folder icon, (illustrated here on the left); this will
open the following interface.
You can now browse through your computer to locate any

stored format files you have, (example FMT files can be
found in the directory ED2010\F), upon selecting a format
file you will be able to view the data it contains in the lower
half of the browse window, and thus ensure that you have
located the correct format file for your requirements prior to
opening it.
To save a format of your own, you should first adjust your

identifier data, and their lengths, once this has been done
you can define the separator type that you want to employ
in the file itself, (if any), by checking one of the format
checkboxes you can specify any separator type that you
wish.
By selecting the Save button, the

browse interface will open, (illustrated),
you can then move to the folder you
wish to store the file in, and are able to
assign a File name to it; pressing the
open button in this interface will then
save the FMT file for future usage.
All format files are stored in an ASCII format by ED.
If you are creating multiple format files, you should press the X icon, (illustrated here on the
left), every time you wish to create a new FMT file, this will clear the format files directory
- 389 -
location and name, if you do not do this, pressing the Save button will cause your
previously created FMT file to be overwritten with any changes that you have carried out.
17.2.3.3 Export file
After having set up your format for the plc data, you can save the file to any location within
your computer by selecting the folder icon, and using the browse option to locate the
appropriate folder location, you can then apply a name to the file; pressing the open button
in the browse window will the save the data as a text (TXT) file.
Once you have done this the files directory location and name will be displayed, as
illustrated below.
Due to export files being in a text format, they can be opened with any basic text, Notepad,
WordPad program and edited to your requirements.
17.2.3.4 Plc data
As previously described, the lower half of the screen displays the plc identifiers data.
This information cannot be

sorted, and displays the data by
order of pin, the first pins
information being shown at the
top of the display, the last pins
data, at the bottom.
17.2.4 Importing PLC information
This command allows you to import data to a PLC’s pins from an external file, and allows
you to effectively program those pins based upon a simple text file.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC Import PLC
 Command line: IMPLC
The file can have any format applied to it that you choose, this is to ensure that only the
identifier information you want imported is applied, and in the order that you require.
If you are importing data from a file that you know contains a format header already, it is not
necessary to apply another format file prior to importing.
The screen illustrated above allows you to locate the import and format file from your
computer or network, (selecting the folder icon will open a browse window), upon selecting
an import file, the information it contains will be displayed in the lower half of the screen.
- 390 -
If an import file is selected which does not
contain header information, an error
message will be displayed stating that either
the file cannot be opened or the format is
not correct. Where this occurs you must
apply a format file prior to selecting your
import file.
Format files can be easily created using the

Export plc interface; refer to Export PLC
page 386 for further details on creating and
saving format files.
Once you have selected an appropriate

format and import file, you should select
those data lines that you wish to import; this can be achieved by using the shift and/or
control keys, the first line selected will be applied to the first pin of you plc the second line to
the second pin and so on.
If you do not select any of the import files data then no information will be imported to your
plc, selected lines will have their background turned blue in colour.
17.2.5 Set rack & slot

This command allows you to select single or multiple PLC slots, and/or sub slots, to assign
a rack and/or slot value to them.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC Set rack & slot
 Command line: SETRACK
 Module required: Professional / Premium
versions
Upon selecting the elements and accepting your choice, the

Here you can specify a new rack and/or slot name, or

choose any from the existing list. You are able to turn off
either of the existing lists, by checking or deselecting the
checkboxes at the top of the screen.
17.2.6 Plc to wire

With this command you can select a certain attribute from your plc and have the data
copied from each of the plc’s pins directly to your equipotential wires, or to connected
elements, SNA.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC PLC to Wire
 Command line: PLC2WIRE
- 391 -
You will only be able to employ this command when wires have been drawn to a plc’s pins,
and/or where elements are connected by a wire to the pins. In the case of wires, the wire
marks must not have been assigned a value, and elements must not have been numbered,
as shown below.
You can then select the plc to wire icon, the prompt will then be given to select a plc, and
once this is done the command line will require you to:
Indicate the elements or cable marks to be numbered.

Everything or [ Selection ]:
You should then specify if they wish to Select the

marks/elements individually or simply include All the
marks/elements, (this must be done each time the
function is carried out).
Once you have decided how to pick the marks/elements,

and one or more have been chosen, the following option
will be given:
From the above table, the user can choose which of the pin attribute information to copy to
the wire mark/elements SNA.
In the example below, Description of Pins CN3 and CN4 has been
copied to its corresponding wire mark.
17.2.7 Cross-referencing PLC’s

The cross-referencing for plc’s is unlike any other found in ED because there are effectively
three tiers, of elements that can be cross-referenced to one another, these being:
 CPU
 PLC slot
 PLC sub-slot
- 392 -
CPU’s represent the parent element, plc slots are child to the CPU’s, and plc sub slots,
represent a third level and are regarded as individual pins of the plc slots, or sub elements.
17.2.8 CPU’s and PLC slots
To associate these elements to one another you should simply apply the same function to
them, this will create a cross-reference link, and the elements will cross-reference to each
other as normal. Where you have applied rack and slot information to the plc slot, this data
will be included in the cross-reference, as illustrated below.
Function
CPU
Cross-reference data
including rack and slot
Function
PLC SLOT
Rack and
slot data
As with other elements plc slots adopt their numbering from the parent, they are associated
to, -CPU2, in the above example. There is no limitation to the number of plc slots that can
be assigned to a CPU.
17.2.9 Plc slots and sub slots
Unlike any other elements, you have to ensure that four of the elements attributes contain
the same information for cross-referencing to occur, the attributes being:
 Rack
 Slot
 Address
 Pin
The reason for the number of attributes to ensure cross-referencing relates to the fact that
rack and slot attributes are applied to a plc slot as a whole, while address can be applied to
multiple pins of the same slot, the pin attribute data is unique. This then allows you to
cross-reference a plc sub slot to every pin of a plc slot.
Although slightly more work is required to allow cross-referencing to occur, a greater

amount of data is shared between the two elements than with any other element types, the
data, which is adopted and fed back, is as follows.
Information shared between Plc Slot and Plc Sub Slot:
 Cross-references with standard ANS formula information.

 Address
- 393 -
 Rack
 Slot
Information adopted from the Plc Sub Slot and fed back to the associated Plc Slot Pin:
 The ANS and pin number of the element to which the plc sub slot is connected.
(Terminals are regarded as being invisible by the sub slot).
Information adopted from the Plc Slot Pin and fed back to the associated Plc Sub Slot:
 The pin numbering applied to the associated pin.

 Where a slot has been associated to a CPU the SNA (numbering) data will be
applied to the sub slot also.
This provides you with a high level of cross-reference interaction between the two elements;
to learn more about plc sub slots refer to page 383.
Through the employment of different plc slot display formats, you are able to obtain,
variations in the quality of data displayed in your drawings, an illustration of which is
displayed below:
Below you can see a diagram illustrating the three tier system that exists for plc elements,
the CPU’s being the main control system for the various plc slots, which in turn are made
up of many plc sub slots.
- 394 -
CPU
PLC SLOTS
PLC SUB SLOTS
17.2.10 Common PLC slot sub slot errors

The same PLC slot Address is assigned to more than one sub slot in a project.
Two or more PLC slots are assigned the same Rack and Slot information.
1 7 . 3 P L C r e p o r ts
When selected you will enter a standard ED reports interface, from where you are able to
generate a choice of plc specific reports.
- 395 -
18 XLS AUTOM ATION®
electrical designers’ XLS automation provides the perfect tool for the production of P and ID,
the generation of loop diagrams, and for any companies working in the petrochemical
industry, by providing an XLS drawing generator.
It is a requirement that companies using this feature have EXCEL installed.

Through the employment of only two commands, you are able to configure ED to accept
XLS data, and generate multiple drawings automatically based purely upon your
spreadsheet data.
The following chapter deals with how you can manage your xls information, configure ED to
accept this and generate drawings within various titlebox types.
1 8 . 1 X L S S p r e a d s h e e ts
Due to ED2010’s document management system you are able to create, modify and store
your XLS data within the pertinent projects.
ED is flexible in the placement of data within the spreadsheets, as well as title line
identifiers assigned to the XLS data columns, there follows a break down of the information
that is required within an XLS for the correct functioning the automation process.
18.1.1 XLS row breakdown

The Xls provides with the data to define the following:
 Slot type and information to be associated to it.

 Device type connected to the slot and information to be assigned to it (if required).
 Terminal type and information to be assigned to it (if required).
 Wire mark value (if required)
 Second terminal type and information to be assigned to it (if required).
ED locates this data; based upon the column heading, as defined by the Xls settings, refer
to page 399 for further details. So that the first column of your Xls maybe defined as
Element name and the data found in this column defines the element that is going to be
inserted into the drawings.
There is a limitation on the number of columns that can have information relating to the
previously mentioned items that will be inserted into your drawings, these are as follows:
Column field data available for SLOT DEVICES
 Slot Name: Provides the element name for a slot device.

Example
If when this column is filled in with SL01 ED will search in the library associated to your
project for an element with this name, and will insert it into your drawing.
 Location: This is the location of the slot card, this data corresponds and
will be written into the elements LOCATION attribute.
- 396 -
 Slot: The slot number. This data corresponds with, and will be written
into, the elements SLOT attribute.
 Rack: The rack number. This data corresponds with, and will be
written into, the elements RACK attribute.
 Add: The address inside the slot card (it is important for sub slots)
 Orientation: It identifies the direction (top/bottom/left/right) of the signal and

forces the direction of printing (left: left-to-right, right: right-to-left, etc)
 Pin Number: Identifies the pin number in a slot card
 Catalogue: This is the catalogue of the slot card, this data corresponds and
will be written into the elements CATALOGUE attribute.
 Record: This is the record of the slot card, this data corresponds and will
be written into the elements RECORD attribute.
 SNA: This is the SNA of the slot card, this data corresponds and will
be written into the elements SNA attribute.
 Desc1-5: This is the DESCRIPTION1-5 of the slot card, this data

corresponds and will be written into the elements DESCRIPTION1-5 attribute.
Column field data available for DEVICES
 Device Name: Provides the element name for a device connected to a slot.
Example
If when this column is filled in with FS01 ED will search in the library associated to your
project for an element with this name, and will insert it into your drawing.
 Device SNA: This is the SNA of the device, this data corresponds and will be
written into the elements SNA attribute.
 XR_Function: This is the function assigned to the device, this data

corresponds and will be written into the elements XR_FUNCTION attribute.
 Device Location: This is the location of the slot card, this data corresponds and
will be written into the elements LOCATION attribute.
 Device Pin: This is the value assigned to the device pin, this data
corresponds and will be written into the elements CN attribute.
 User1-5: This is the value assigned to the devices user attributes, this data
corresponds and will be written into the elements USER attributes.
NOTE
If there is no data assigned to the term/term2/wire fields in the XLS then no mark will be
placed in the case of the wire, and no terminals will be placed between the slot and device.
Column field data available for TERM / TERM2
 Term Name: Provides the element name for a terminal.
- 397 -
Example
If when this column is filled in with T01 ED will search in the library associated to your
project for an element with this name, and will insert it into your drawing between the slot
and device.
 Term Counter: The counter number. This data corresponds with, and will be
written into, the terminals COUNTER attribute.
 Term Prefix: The terminal strip prefix. This data corresponds with, and will be
written into, the terminals PREFIX attribute.
 Term SNA: The terminals SNA being a combination of the terminal prefix
and counter. This data corresponds with, and will be written into, the terminals SNA
attribute.
 Term Location: The terminal location. This data corresponds with, and will be
written into, the terminals LOCATION attribute.
Column field data available for WIRE
 Wire Number: Value assigned to a wire mark.
18.1.2 Flexibility and Restrictions

The headers themselves can be arranged in any order that you prefer within the Xls, so that
the first field could be TERM NAME and the second WIRE NUMBER, etc. this makes no
difference to ED’s import functionality.
Also the headers do not have to be in the first row of the spreadsheet, but can be anywhere
within the file, as illustrated below:
Here you can see that the headers are located in the
fourteenth row, the only restriction on this being that all
the headers must be located in the same row, and that
they have their pertinent information located below
them.
It is essential that ED locates the slot device, or sub slot, as this information drives the
insertion of the device, placement of terminals and the wire connecting them.
18.1.2.1 Sub Slots
Where sub slots are being inserted you must specify the Slot Name in every row, as
illustrated below, as these are individual elements.
- 398 -
Sub Slot name
It is not necessary to fill in the pins numbers for sub slots. Where you are associating a sub
slot to a slot you must ensure that the RACK, SLOT, and ADDRESS data be filled in as this
links the sub slot to the appropriate slot pin.
The last requirement is that a sense be associated to the sub slot, this provides orientation
information for the device, Up, Down, Left, Right.
18.1.2.2 Slots
Where you choose to insert a slot you need only fill out the Slot name once,
however it is a requirement that a value is assigned to every pin the slot
has.
The reason for this is that it provides ED with not only the pin numbers, but
also defines how many connections, there will be for the element. Thus if
you chose to insert a device with 15 pins, but only specified 13 pin numbers
ED would consider that the element had only 13 pins.
The last requirement is that a sense be associated to the slot, this provides orientation
information for the device, Up, Down, Left, Right.
18.1.2.3 Devices
The device can be single or multi pin and should have a device ID specified in where you
wish to have a connection to a slot or sub slot pin. To indicate that you do not want to form
a connection on a certain pin you can leave the Device ID field blank.
You have a choice of methods for numbering your device pins, you can leave these fields
blank, in which case ED will use the default value assigned to the elements CN attributes.
Alternatively, you can enter a pin value that will then be absorbed into the element CN
attribute.
18.1.2.4 Wire values
By entering a value a wire mark will be applied to the wire connecting devices, where this
field is blank no mark will be placed.
18.1.2.5 Terminals
There are two terminal data sets, by filling in the information in none, one, or both; you will
define how many terminals will be inserted between devices.
18.1.2.6 Connection configurations
Below are illustrated the various connection configuration options available.
- 399 -
Slot to multi pin devices
Slots to single pin devices
Sub slots to single pin devices
Sub slots to multi pin devices
These options can be created in any order and in any variations, so that you can have multi
pin devices connected to sub slots, and slots; slots and sub slots to multi and single pin
devices etc.
1 8 . 2 X L S to P L C s e tti n g s
This command allows you to configure an ED INI file, which determines the header data
that is to be mapped to your element attributes.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC XLS Settings
 Command line: XLSSETTINGS
- 400 -
When this command is selected the following interface will be displayed:
By changing any of the fields you are able to define the header that ED will search for in the
XLS, this allows you to generate drawings for different customers, who may prefer to have
different column headers.
1 8 . 3 D e fi n i n g X L S d a t a p l a c e m e n t
You are able to define the regions of drawings that will be used by for the insertion of your
PLC data. This can include drawings with single, or multiple rows.
You are able to define the regions of drawings that will be used by for the insertion of your
PLC/Cell data. This can include drawings with single, or multiple columns of row attributes.
This is achieved by adding LIMIT attributes to your preferred titleboxes. By placing LIMIT1
and a LIMIT2 attributes you define the area in which the slot / sub slot, device, wire, and
terminals will be placed, the main options that you have available are illustrated below.
These are of course, flexible dependent upon the number of rows you have within your
titleboxes, and the standard you are working to DIN or ANSI for example.
ED will recognise the location of rows where the area defined, covers multiple rows as in
the first example illustrated above.
- 401 -
To assign the LIMIT attributes you should employ the AutoCAD command ATTDEF this
command allows you to enter an attribute name and define its location within the titlebox
element drawings, this is most easily achieved by entering the name as LIMIT1 and
selecting the Pick point option. You can then place the attribute repeat the process for
LIMIT2.
IEC DIN
standard standard
The attributes themselves can be any size you prefer, and there are no restrictions on
layers used, so that you can choose to have them hidden within your drawings.
The illustrations show the different limit settings required for an ANSI and a DIN standard
titlebox. It is a requirement that ANSI titleboxes, (those with multiple rows) have the LIMIT1
setting to the left of the first row attributes, so that ED reads the first row. LIMIT2 should be
to the right of any row set that you do not wish to include in the usable are.
As DIN titleboxes, (those with a single row and column attribute sets), will not have the
same constraints as ANSI titleboxes, you need only specify the limits within the titlebox, so
that the area does not include either Row or Column attributes. The area that you define
can be as large or as small as you wish.
1 8 . 4 X L S to P L C (X L S 2 P LC )
To run the XLS automation you should have selected the project in which you want your
drawings to be generated, and should enter the AutoCAD environment.
 Toolbar: PLC
 ELECTRICAL menu: PLC XLS to PLC
 Command line: XLS2PLC
By entering the XLS2PLC command the following interface

will be displayed:
You should browse to the location of the XLS that you wish
to employ for your plc generation. By then choosing to Open
the XLS ED will initiate the XLS Automation, automatically
creating as many as drawings as required to accommodate
all of your XLS data.
ED will also automatically fill in a description
and drawing title lines based upon the XLS
- 402 -
selected and the number of drawings generated.
18.5 Automation elements

The elements that are used for the automation process have certain requirements that must
be adhered to, in order to obtain the best results.
ED spaces the elements based upon the actual size of the element, this can be fixed by
indicating brackets about elements, as this allows you to easily ensure equal element
heights. The brackets can be put in a hidden layer if you do not wish them displayed in
your drawing
The first element inserted into you drawing will define the positioning for all the other
elements. The placement of the first element will be based upon the CN pin attribute,
which will placed in line with the titlebox attribute LIMIT1, and the actual element size, as
described previously.
Bracket Bracket
EQ.
EQ.
Bracket Bracket
By then positioning the element pin

at a point equidistant between the
EQ.
top and base you are able to
ensure that ED will connect to the
pin precisely.
EQ.
This system should also be applied
to elements with multiple pins, so EQ.
that a four-pin motor, for example,
would have the pins spaced as
illustrated below.
- 403 -
19 M AX MODULE
electrical designers’ Max module provides all the tools to create true cabinet drawings, in 2
and 3D, with automatically calculated trunking fill factors, automatic true point to point
wiring, advanced numbering facilities, as well as cabinet specific reports which can be
exported direct to certain wire cutting machines.
For this module three toolbars are required, the first two being the Layout and Panels
toolbars, please refer to pages 195, 206 for further details on their commands and uses, the
third toolbar is specifically for the max module, and is illustrated below.
1 9 . 1 M a x to o l b a r c o m m a n d s
19.1.1 Components connection

Through this command, you are able to specify cable types to be employed for the creation
of your component connections, as well as having a choice of whether to use a closed or
open circuit system.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Connection
 Command line: CONNECT
 Module required: Premium
versions
After selecting the various options available to you,

(illustrated in the dialogue shown below), pressing
the Accept button will automatically wire up your
cabinet’s components, to meet your criteria.
All connections formed will be along the shortest

possible route between the components.
19.1.1.1 Cable types
When selected, you will access the following screen, (Components connection), from here
you are able to specify the type of wire that you wish to employ for connecting your
components.
Through this dialogue, you are able to edit

the list of existing wires available, by
inserting and/or deleting Cable types and/or
Cable sizes in either inches and/or mm units
of measurement. By selecting either the
mm or inches radial boxes different sets of
wires will be displayed.
- 404 -
The Description field provided for wire sizes is to allow you to enter a gauge description for
a wire, so that a table does not have to be referred to when choosing a cable type for
example.
By selecting a specific Cable type and Accepting you will be returned to the connections
dialogue, which will show the selected cable type, and a list of the conductors associated to
it.
19.1.1.2 Select equipotentials to reset
By selecting individual equipotentials from the list you are able to reset their connections to
the ED default.
Example
If you have carried out a manual connection edit, (CONEDIT), on three of your wires,
L24/R56/T34. But have decided that you would like to have the default setting for R56 re-
instated, you can do this by selecting the equipotential wire R56 from the list titled, Select
equipotentials to reset.
Upon pressing the Accept button the wire R56 will have its connection broken, and have
the ED default connection re-applied to it. The wires L24/T34 will retain the manual
connections that you carried out, however.
It should be noted that if your schematic equipotentials have not been numbered they will
appear as blank lines in the equipotentials list, they can however, be modified and used in
the normal manner.
19.1.1.2.1 Select All

The select all button will select all equipotentials within your project
and upon accepting it will break all of the connections within the
cabinet and remake them to the ED default.
This is very useful if you have made a number of manual

connections, which you wish to delete, but are unable to remember
the wires initial connections, made by ED.
19.1.1.3 Connection loop
The connection loop allows you to select the type of connections that you want applied to
your cabinet components, either an open circuit connection, or a closed circuit connection.
19.1.1.4 Wires offset

The wires offset field allows you to specify the offset distance of wires from the mid-point of
your cabinet trunking. The distance values are measured in drawing units.
- 405 -
You should be aware that the wire-offset variable has no specific units, however you should
reduce the offset value when working in cabinets created in inches, it is better to decrease
the offset size as illustrated above, as one unit in an inches drawing will create a far greater
offset, than one unit in a mm drawing.
The offset option itself is more for aesthetic purposes than anything else, and as such you
should change the settings freely to create the results your prefer.
19.1.1.5 Segregation
This checkbox allows you to specify whether you want the segregation option to activated
during connection or not, (for further details on segregating wires refer to page 203),
checking the box with a tick will activate the option, while deselecting it will leave the option
off during the connections process.
19.1.2 Manual connection
When the CONEDIT command is selected you will enter the MANUAL CONNECTION
dialogue box, (illustrated below), through this dialogue you are able to choose to wire up
components either by selecting a pin within the drawing, or by choosing an individual
equipotential to wire between components.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Conedit
 Command line: CONEDIT
19.1.2.1 Select wire (type)

To specify a conductor you should select the type you wish to use from the list, prior to
employing the pick a pin or equipotential options available to you for the wiring of
components.
19.1.2.2 Select equipotential to connect
The right hand side of the dialogue displays a list of all the equipotentials contained within
your project drawings, the equipotentials being described in terms of the ANS employed
within the schematic drawings.
- 406 -
By selecting a specific equipotential and pressing, the Accept button you will be returned to
the cabinet drawing. All of the component pins, which can be wired up with the selected
equipotential, will be enlarged and highlighted to the user-specified Pin size and Colour.
Selecting two or more pin numbers will cause the selected equipotential to form a
connection.
19.1.2.3 Pick a pin
By selecting the button Pick a pin you will be returned to the cabinet drawing, from where
you are able to select any of the components pins.
When a component pin is picked, it will be enlarged and highlighted to the user-specified
Pin size and Colour, any other component pins, which share a potential connection, will be
highlighted in the same manner.
The command line will then request that you:
Select the initial pin:
At this point, you are required to choose the first pin which will form the connection, after
selecting the initial pin, the prompt will then require you to:
Select the final pin or a router:
By selecting cabinet routers, you are able to define the path that the equipotential will follow
to a component. By selecting only a pin, ED will wire up the two components, following the
shortest possible route through the trunking.
19.1.2.4 Colour
The colour button allows you to specify the colour that components pin numbers will be
displayed in, when an equipotential is chosen either for connection, or the Pick a pin option
is selected.
19.1.2.5 Pin size
By increasing the pin size number, the display size of component pins will be increased,
this is to ease selection and location of pins when zooms are not employed.
NOTE
If you are working with trunking that has wire segregation applied to it, upon entering the
cabinet drawing to manually connect your wires, trunks will turn RED in colour where an
equipotential you wish to connect is included in the equipotentials not allowed and thus
denotes that you have specified that you do not wish the wire to pass. However you are
able to force segregated cables to pass through the trunk should you wish with this
command.
19.1.3 Section and colour edition

This command is available for both scheme drawings, as well as max cabinets, however
dependent upon the drawing type in which it is used, you will have certain features disabled,
due to their being redundant.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Section & Colour Edition
- 407 -
 Command line: SECEDIT
To learn more about how this command may be employed within scheme drawings, refer to
page 121 Section and colour edition.
The command, when employed within a Max

layout drawing, allows you to change the
size and true colour for a specific wire(s).
Upon selecting the wires that you want to

modify and accepting your selection, the
The available options are outlined in the

following sections
19.1.3.1 Cable Types
This interface can be accessed from three locations within ED these being:
 Connect Up cabinet components
 Colour and section Edition for cabinets
 Colour and Section Edition for scheme's
19.1.3.1.1 Cable Types within Cabinet Layouts
19.1.3.1.1.1 Connect Up cabinet components

When the cable type is defined through the connect up interface ED will apply the cable
type, conductor size / gauge to all wires connecting components that have not already had
a cable type defined within the projects schematic drawings.
This information is displayed in two forms; the first is that the cable type’s conductor size
defines the actual thickness of a poly line connecting components to one another. The
second is within any MAX reports you generate that will display the cable type, size etc.
dependent upon the report created.
19.1.3.1.1.2 Colour and section edition for cabinets

Within your cabinet drawings, this command option allows you to change the cable type,
and size of a single wire connecting individual or multiple components.
This information is displayed in two forms, the first is that the cable types conductor size
defines the actual thickness of a poly line connecting components to one another. The
second is within any MAX reports you generate that will display the cable type, size etc.
dependent upon the report created.
19.1.3.1.2 Cable types within Scheme Drawings
19.1.3.1.2.1 Colour & section edition for schemes

When employed within a scheme drawing, the cable type, gauge, size etc. will be applied to
the selected wire(s) ~MARK, furthermore it will be applied when connecting components to
one another within a cabinet layout. Where the cable type, is only used for scheme
- 408 -
purposes the information applied will be displayed in any Preferred Connection Path reports
created.
19.1.3.1.3 Cable types display

When selected, you will access the following screen, (Components connection), from here
you are able to specify the type of wire that you wish to employ for connecting your
components within you cabinet and schematic elements as described previously.
Through this dialogue, you are able to edit the list of existing wires available, by inserting
and/or deleting Cable types and/or Wire sizes in either inches and/or mm units of
measurement. By selecting either the mm or inches radial boxes different sets of wires will
be displayed.
The Description field provided for wire sizes is to allow you to enter a gauge description for
a wires actual size. This field has been included for ease of use when working in inches,
for example, as a 10 gauge (AWM) wires' size is 0.1820", ED displays this true wire size in
the Conductor field, however it is easier for users to simply select a 10 gauge wire than to
refer to a table in order to match the gauge to conductor size.
The C.S.A field contains a wires Cross-Sectional Area information that is used within
cabinets to automatically calculate trunking fill factors.
By selecting a specific Cable type and Accepting you will be returned to the one of the three
interfaces used to access this dialogue.
19.1.3.2 Wire colour
The Wire Colour option allows you to select a true colour from the available list for the
selected wire. Use the Insert button to add another colour to the list of those available, this
information will then be displayed in Max and/or Preferred Connection Path reports.
19.1.4 Clear all connections
When employed this command allows you to disconnect all of your cabinets’ components
connections made up to that point.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Clear all connections
 Command line: CLEARCON
You will have to specify if you wish the connection to be cleared or not, the AutoCAD
command line prompt will provide the following message:
Erase all connections? (Yes / No):
To which you must respond with either a Y or N reply.
19.1.5 View equipotentials

This command enables you to view a single equipotential wire within your cabinet, when
the command is selected you are required to pick a single wire that you wish to view. By
either right mouse clicking or by pressing the enter key, all equipotentials with the exception
- 409 -
of that selected will be frozen, enabling you to view a wires origin and destination more
easily.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max View Equipotentials
 Command line: EQVIEW
To restore your equipotentials you need only repeat the command, and enter or right
mouse click, without selecting an equipotential to re-activate those previously frozen.
19.1.6 Connections errors

This command allows you to identify connections errors within your layout drawings.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Connection errors
 Command line: CON_ERR
When you carry out a Components connection command, you may receive an AutoCAD
command line prompt stating.
There are errors in the component connectivity…Execute CON_ERR to see them.
By selecting the Connections errors icon the command will

automatically launch the Check errors interface, refer to
page 334 for further details on this.
There is a second option available to you however, by

entering CON_ERR into the AutoCAD command line; ED will
automatically display the following interface:
This shows a list containing all of the reasons why your

connections are not being formed.
19.1.7 Connection reports
Connection reports provide you with a list of the available reports, which can be
automatically generated to display your cabinet’s physical wiring. These reports operate in
the same manner as others found throughout ED.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Connection reports
 Command line: CONREPORT
19.1.8 Update components

The update components command allows you to update your cabinet’s elements without
having to delete and re-insert them into your cabinet, when selected; you are given the
option to update All of the drawings elements, or to Select which elements you want to be
updated.
- 410 -
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Update components
 Command line: UPB23
When this command is carried out on elements, any changes made to the graphic
representation of the element within the library will be shown. The elements attribute
values, set in the schematics will be retained with the exception of the elements pin
numbers; these will be reset to match the library elements default values.
Example
If a fuse has pin number defaults set to 1 / 2, within the physical library, and these are
changed to ? / ? after the element is inserted into the cabinet layout, upon carrying out an
Update components command the values will change to ? / ?, regardless of the pin
numeration of the element within the schematic drawings.
19.1.9 Number wires

Through this command, you can have information automatically noted to your layout
components pins. The information noted relates to the wire connecting components and
the destiny components SNA and pin number.
 Toolbar: Max
 ELECTRICAL menu: Max Number wires
 Command line: NWIRE
In the following example, you can see that the fuse –F2 is
connected to –F1 at pin 2, by the equipotential L1. This
information is placed in the layer EQUIPOT.
19.1.9.1 Number wire with scheme PCP’s

If you have employed Preferred Connection Paths (PCP’s) in your scheme design, you can
place components in your cabinet, and by running the Number Wires command, the
connection pin and equipotential data will be noted to your elements, as illustrated below.
This is a benefit derived from the use of PCP’s; as you are not required to place Trunking,
or carryout a
Components connection
command; as the true
connections formed
between components
have already defined in
your schemes.
- 411 -
19.1.9.2 Max cabinets
The information noted within max cabinets when this
command is invoked, relates to the wire connecting
components and the destiny components SNA and pin
number.
In the following example, you can see that the fuse –F2 is
connected to –F1 at pin 2, by the equipotential L1. This
information is placed in the layer EQUIPOT.
19.1.9.3 Number wire in wiring diagrams
Wiring diagrams require exact connections to have been formed, in order to note internal /
external connection information to components. There are three ways that you can assure
the connection data is precise, these being:
 The use of PCP’s within scheme’s

 Connecting components within a Max cabinet
 Accessing the Connections and cables editor
You are not restricted in the option that you use, and may employ, PCP’s Max connections
and the Connections editor in conjunction with one another, in order to achieve the
connection results that you want.
If you have not employed one of the methods described to define your connections, for
example, you have four elements connected on a T-junction, have no cabinet drawing, and
have not entered the connections editor, no connection information will be noted to you
wiring diagram components. This is because ED has multiple options that may or may not
be correct, and you are required to identify your preferred connections in order to have the
data displayed.
19.1.9.3.1 Number wire wiring diagram refresh

Using the Number Wires command, within Wiring Diagrams, will note your internal and
external connection data to your wiring diagram components. The data noted to them will
be dependent upon the ANS formula’s assigned to them in you project information card.
Number wire also allows you to refresh wiring diagram internal / external connection data,
so that if you have added elements and/or altered a PCP path within your scheme, running
the command will update your attribute connection information. You should also use
Number wire to refresh your wiring diagram information where you have entered the
connections editor and changed a connection between elements, or have manually
changed a connection between components within a cabinet. The final application of this
command is to update your wiring diagram components information if you have changed
the ANS formula, or the way that ED should regard an internal / external connection.
- 412 -
20 UTILITIES
The various utility options available within ED2010, allow you to carryout operations that will
affect all of the data contained within ED. In addition, there are tools available for
configuring ED interfaces to a preferred language, setting analysis options, and controlling
project, library and catalogue ownership.
2 0 . 1 C h a n g i n g th e u s e r
This command allows you to change your user name and type without having to quit the
program.
The new user must be registered in the users’ database, (refer also to configuring section,
for further details).
2 0 . 2 C o n fi g u r i n g
By typing CONFIGCL or by clicking on the Configure icon in
the utilities you enter the configuration dialogue. Here you can
customise ED. Click on any button to configure the following
program items.
20.2.1 Appearance
This option allows you to configure the
appearance of your ED interfaces, determine
your preferred font styles, and element insertion
bitmaps, through the following interface.
Refer to the Technical Guide for more

information about customising the programs
appearance.
20.2.2 Styles
Through this interface, you are able to create and define the styles that you want applied to
element attributes in ED2010. The Styles interface itself is divided into two parts:
 Attributes
 Styles
20.2.2.1 Attributes
This interface contains a list of all attributes available within ED, each line has the specific
attributes name; the style that is will be applied to it and the actual colour of the attribute
when it is placed in a drawing.
- 413 -
By selecting any item on the list a preview of
the attribute as well as information about the
style applied to it, will be displayed on the right
hand side of the interface.
You are able to change the Style and/or the

colour applied to individual or multiple
attributes.
By right mouse clicking on any attribute a pop

down will be displayed, as illustrated below:
The information on this list relates to all of the styles that you
have available in the Text Styles section of the interface,
(see below for further details). By selecting any one of these
the relevant style will then be applied to the attribute.
Should you wish to change multiple styles at the same time,

you can do so by using Shift and/or Control keys while
checking the attributes you want to revise.
You are able to alter attributes colours by double clicking in the appropriate attributes
Colour column, this will then display the standard AutoCAD colours window from which you
can select your preferred colour for the attribute.
You may of course change multiple attributes colours at the same time by using Shift
and/or Control keys while checking the attributes you want to revise.
20.2.2.2 Text styles
You are able to define information that will be applied to individual and/or multiple attributes
through the following interface; as well as being able to create new styles and delete any
existing styles that have become redundant.
Dependent upon whether you work in millimetres or inches you can select the appropriate
checkbox in order to have the text heights
information displayed in the Double click to access available
corresponding units. font types
If you set an
Using this interface, you are able angle, the text
to define parameters that will be will be
applied to your element attribute oblique.
text styles.
Change width settings to

stretch text.
- 414 -
By double clicking on the Source column, you are
able to define the font type that you wish applied to
a certain attribute through the interface
NOTE
Any users that are still working with text annotations instead of attributes, the previous text
styles will be used to annotate the information in their information
point: .SNA, .FUNCTION, .CATALOGUE, .REFERENCE, .ZONE, .TECH_DATA
and .LOCATION.
TIP!
The UPDSTYLE command can be used in conjunction with any changes carried out to your
attribute or text styles allow you to automatically update your drawings text styles.
20.2.2.2.1 Create New Styles

You can create new styles by selecting the Create New Style icon, displayed here on the
left. Upon selecting this icon the following interface will be displayed:
Here you may fill out the information that you want to
have applied to your new style, such as the Style name,
Font type, text Height etc. by entering the information
and accepting the style will be created, and will be
available for application to your attributes.
You may, of course, change multiple attributes colours

at the same time by using Shift and/or Control keys
while checking the attributes you want to revise.
20.2.2.2.2 Delete Styles

You can delete styles by selecting the Delete Style icon, displayed here on the left. Upon
selecting this icon the highlighted style(s) will be deleted, from the list of those available.
If you chose to delete a style(s), which

is currently, applied to an existing
attribute ED will display the following
message
This is due to the fact that it is only

possible to delete styles that do not have an association with an attribute.
- 415 -
20.2.3 Directories
Through this interface, you can change the
data directories; by selecting any of the
folder icons, you will be able to browse
through your computer directories to locate
your various ED files. The only exception is
the Program directory; this location must be
defined through your shortcut properties,
where applicable. Using the Windows Start
key to locate ED will cause ED to be loaded
from its install location.
TIP!
If you are configuring your directories to a network, and experience difficulties, please
check that you have the correct drive mapping, and that you are not subject to any network
restrictions.
By changing the DATA directory path, the Projects, Libraries, Catalogues, Reports and
Templates will all be automatically set to the same location. This only applies where all the
folders have the same location.
20.2.4 Analysis and annotations

Through this window, you have a choice of
options from which to select, various
analyses can be set to the users preference.
20.2.4.1 Update title-box

By checking this option the user will automatically update any changes carried out to the
title box within the drawing information card, whenever entering a drawing.
20.2.4.2 Terminal counters
This option allows terminal counters from earlier versions of ED2010 to be easily
assimilated into version 2003.
20.2.4.3 Show “pin not connected” errors
This option allows you to show or hide a specific error message in your scheme drawings.
The error relates to element pins that have no connected wires.
When checked the error messages will be

shown in the scheme’s and identified in
the ED Error checker, as illustrated.
If not checked this error will not be shown in either the scheme drawings, nor identified in
the ED Error Checker.
20.2.4.4 Analyse Harness
The checkboxes allow you to define when you would like ED to carryout analyses of
harnesses and connectors, these options maybe set as follows.
- 416 -
20.2.4.4.1 Analyse by Project
By selecting this option ED will carryout an analysis across an entire projects drawings,
when an Analyse Harness command is carried out.
20.2.4.4.2 Analyse Current Drawing

When checked the Automatically checkbox will be made available as illustrated below:
By leaving only the Current Drawing option checked, upon

selecting to run an Analyse Harness command, ED will analyse
the currently selected project drawing; this acts a good time
saving feature where you are making amendments to a single
drawing which will not affect other project drawings.
By selecting the Automatically checkbox the Entering and Exiting checkboxes will become
available as illustrated below:
It is obligatory that you now select to have a Harness

Analysis carried out upon either Entering or Exiting a
drawing, dependent upon your preferences. ED will then run
a Harness Analysis on any drawing you either enter (open)
or exit (end).
20.2.4.5 X-Ref Analysis
The checkboxes allow you to define when you would like ED to
carryout a cross-reference analysis, these options maybe set
as follows.

By selecting this option ED will run a cross-reference analysis across an entire projects
drawings, when the Cross-reference analysis command is carried out, or whenever an
element function is changed or assigned, this latter analysis is only done when the Analysis
on line checkbox is selected.

By leaving only the Current Drawing option checked,

upon selecting to run a Cross-reference analysis
command, ED will analyse the currently selected project
drawing; this acts a good time saving feature where you
are making amendments to a single drawing which will
not affect other project drawings.
available.
It is obligatory that you now select to have a Cross-reference Analysis carried out upon
either Entering or Exiting a drawing, dependent upon your preferences. ED will then run a
Cross-reference Analysis on any drawing you either enter (open) or exit (end).
- 417 -
20.2.4.5.3 Analysis on line
When this checkbox is selected, ED will automatically analyse cross-references when
functions are assigned to elements, or existing elements have their functions changed.
Where larger projects are being revised, you can save time by de-selecting this option and
running a full Cross-reference analysis when your changes are complete. Any errors that
may have occurred can be quickly located with the EDERRORS command, and/or the
Cross-reference errors report.
20.2.4.6 Tech. Data Analysis
This option affects the tech. data analysis the checkboxes allow you to define when you
would like ED to carryout analyses of technical data, these options maybe set as follows.

By selecting this option ED will carryout an analysis across an entire projects drawings,
when an Analyse Technical Data command is carried out.

By leaving only the Current Drawing option checked, upon

selecting to run an Analyse Technical Data command, ED
will analyse the currently selected project drawing; this acts
a good time saving feature where you only want technical
data updated on elements in a specific drawing.
available as illustrated below:
It is obligatory that you now select to have an Analyse

Technical Data carried out upon either Entering or Exiting a
drawing, dependent upon your preferences. ED will then run
an Analyse Technical Data on any drawing you either enter
(open) or exit (end).
20.2.4.6.3 Annotate Accessories

This checkbox provides you with the ability to have accessories (assigned to a catalogues
reference) annotated into schematic elements attributes. The accessories will be noted to
the elements USER* attributes.
20.2.4.7 Equipotential analysis
The options available here allow you to define the way in which ED treats and analyses
equipotential connections, by checking the Form connection on marks option, ED will
analyse and make connections based upon the wire mark values.
When deselected ED will form connections based upon equipotential elements placed on
wires with the same wire mark assigned to them. Refer to page 319 for more information
on equipotential connection treatment within ED.
You can also define whether you want ED to automatically analyse your equipotentials or
not.
- 418 -
20.2.4.8 Exiting
By checking this option ED will automatically analyse your drawings equipotential data
when Ending / exiting a drawing. If you are working in an incomplete project that contains
equipotential errors, this option should be deselected before running a script; otherwise an
error message will be displayed in any drawings containing equipotential errors. The error
message displayed does not cancel the script; however it does require you to manually
Accept on the message dialogue before the script will proceed.
20.2.4.9 Form connections by mark
When this option is checked ED will analyse and form element
connection based upon the location of similar wire marks. This
system is the same as that used in earlier versions of ED
In the above illustration you can see a pushbutton –S1, connected to a terminal X1 1, and
to a fuse -F1, due to the fact that all these elements are on the wire L1, the terminal and/or
the elements have the potential to be connected to one another in any order within the
Connections editor, as illustrated below.
20.2.4.10 Form connections by equipotential

When unchecked ED will analyse and form element connection
based upon the wires with the same mark value where equipotential
elements are placed. In addition to this, when using Self connection
in the editors ED will automatically connect the elements to one
another based upon the equipotential cross-referencing, and ED will
only allow you to form connections based on the equipotential cross-
referencing.
In the above illustration you can see a pushbutton –S1, connected to a terminal X1 1, X1 1
to the fuse -F1, -F1 to –K1 despite to the fact that all these elements are on the same wire
L1, the elements will be automatically connected to one another based upon the
equipotential cross-reference data.
- 419 -
20.2.5 Elements insertion / Navigator
This interface provides you with a variety of options for the treatment of elements during
insertion, navigation zoom factors, and whether you prefer to use a digitizer rather than a
mouse.
Choose Cutting
parameters only
if you use the old
system for cut
wires.
This indicates the
magnification the
destiny object will
be viewed at
when Navigator
is employed.
20.2.5.1 Element insertion

There are two options available to you when inserting elements into drawings, you may
either employ, the LBRK, breaking lines, or an older system of breaking lines in the form of
Cutting parameters.
20.2.5.1.1 Cutting lines

This is the default option used by ED2010, and determines where wires will be cut, based
upon the position of LBRK lines within your element drawing, when the element block is
inserted into your schematic drawings. Refer to page 293 Breaking lines for further details.
- 420 -
20.2.5.1.2 Cutting parameters
This option allows you to cut wires, where elements overlay/overlap them, but does not
require you to use LBRK lines in the creation of your element. The area that will be cut
back by an element when using this option, is defined through the element information card
Phase option, refer to Element information card page 227, for more information on this
option.
20.2.5.2 Navigator
The zoom factor field allows you to define the preferred zoom magnification that will be
automatically applied upon navigating between elements; dependent upon your
preferences this may be defined in inches or millimetres.
20.2.5.3 Digitizer tablet
By checking this option you will enable the use of a digitizer tablet when working with ED,
by employing this option you will also activate the Library Browser Update Menu option.
20.2.6 Language
Use this option to change the language you want ED to
use when communicating with you. This modification
will not affect AutoCAD2009, 2008, 2007 menus, only
the ED window messages and edition command
messages.
20.2.6.1 Date format

The date format allows the user the potential of setting
there in system calendar to any desired specification.
20.2.6.2 Window width factor
This is to allow you to increase or decrease the window size, ED will automatically adjust
your window sizes to accommodate your choice of language, however if you have specified
a large program font, you may find that you need to increase the size of the screen.
20.2.6.3 Default units
These check boxes allow you to specify the units of measurement that you want associated
to any particular language; as such you can have Spanish language have Millimetres as the
default, but English set to Inches, for example.
The default units themselves are applied only where you import, or open AutoCAD
drawings from version 14 or previous. With the release of version 2000 AutoCAD included
a new Drawing units for Design Centre blocks option, (refer to AutoCAD manual for further
details), opening r.14 drawings in pure AutoCAD 2000 or higher, will have these units set to
Unitless by default, however within ED your Default Units will automatically be applied to
the Drawing units for Design Centre.
20.2.6.4 Active drawing limit
This option relates to working within the AutoCAD MDI environment. By setting a number
in the Active drawing limits field you effectively define the number of AutoCAD dwg files that
can be open at any one time.
- 421 -
When the number of drawings open in AutoCAD is exceeded ED will automatically close
the first drawing file that was opened.
20.2.7 Control
This option allows the user to check the
password being used, type in the
password and Accept to have confirmation.
To gain access to the Access Key

Controls, (illustrated below), the user
should enter the password ED.
From here, the user can insert user names, edit and add passwords, Lock and Unlock
individual and/or multiple items information, view which user has been working with what
information and for how long. To lock or unlock multiple information project, libraries etc.
simply use the Control and/or Shift keys while making your selections.
20.2.8 Default parameters

Through this option you are able to assign default settings to your projects, this settings
allow you to set up ANS systems, prototype, and titlebox defaults; as well as allowing you
to access the analysis options (refer to page 51 for further details on project analysis
options).
By defining your preferred parameters here they will be automatically applied to any new
projects created.
When defining the titlebox and/or prototype

within the default parameters you will be
required to specify a schematic library, prior
to having access to the titlebox/prototype
interface; this is due to the fact that titleboxes
and/or prototypes may be stored within a
schematic library. After having selected a
library type you will enter the titlebox/prototype interface where the titleboxes/prototypes will
be made available from the selected schematic library as well as the MONTA library.
20. 3 R eo rg an is e all
This command is used occasionally for indexing and purging database files. It also updates
databases structures if any data from previous versions are found.
Backup drawing files, (*.Bak), which are automatically created by AutoCAD, are eliminated
in this process in order to free disc space.
All menus will be automatically updated when this process is carried out.
- 422 -
2 0 . 4 Te x t e d i to r
The text editor option allows a user to access to the Notepad of Windows.
This is very useful where you are creating format files, generating macro’s etc.
2 0 . 5 E x i ti n g e l e c tr i c a l d e s i g n e r 2 0 1 0
When the user has finished their session and wishes to quit ED2010, they
should exit from the browser/ manager and then simply close down the
program in the standard AutoCAD manner as illustrated below, by selecting
the pull down menu File and picking Exit.
- 423 -

ED2010 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ED2010 User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

USE R GU ID E

© 2010 ACERI, S.A. 10.06.17-BCN1

Tutorials can be obtained through your local distributor, or from Aceri.

20.5 Exiting electrical designer 2010 __________________________________ 422

Please note that the codes displayed will vary

A synopsis of the modules is as follows:

 The assembly module provides panel designers with scheme-layout consistency

 The assembly module provides panel designers with scheme-layout consistency

 The PLC module ensures consistency of information between the PLC

Groups of drawings go to make up projects.

Dwg files held in Dwg blocks held in

Reference (SIEMENS) BOM

To create a project, it is only necessary to associate a library, (symbols standard), and

3.2.1 Universal Naming Convention

Projects A group of drawings and documents, that go to make up an electrical

Library Contains symbols representative of electrical standards, standards such

Catalogue Contains references of manufacturers parts

Reports Contains reports

3.3.1 Projects and drawings

The directory structure of the projects, when ED is first installed is

The information and the Dwg format

3.3.3 Catalogues and references

Inside each directory, are reference and accessories databases. In

 Project Browser Provides all of the commands specifically related to the

 Library Browser Provides all of the commands related to the

 Catalogues Browser Provides all of the commands related to the

No password is required by default for any user types.

The user need only

System information Access the

Information from the

Displays currently selected Project, Drawing, Library,

4.3.1 Your company logo

4.3.2 Main Manager commands

Level Icon Command Page Level Icon Command Page

ED-Pro-Prem Activate User 412 ED-Pro-Prem Reorganise all 421

ED-Pro-Prem Configure 412 ED-Pro-Prem Edit text 422

4.5.1 Delete (common browser command)

4.5.2 Remove (common browser command)

4.5.3 Quick search (common browser command)

When selected, a blank information

You can enter any parameter, into any

4.5.4 Filter (common browser command)

Select to Edit, Create,

List of the fields

Use this button for test that Expression of the filter,

4.5.4.3 Filtering syntax

‘DATA’ condition DATA-BASE FIELD

Examples of some commonly used filter syntaxes are as follows.

This provides you with the benefit of not having time

For more information on filters refer to the ED2010 Technical Guide.

4.5.5 Backing-up and restoring (common browser command)

When restoring data an extra option is available as illustrated, by

By selecting one of the various systems, you can edit

Where you select to back-up / restore data to or from an

You can set the date to Today at anytime, by simply selecting

Creation Modification Verification

4.5.8 Field lengths

Article No. of characters

5.1 S ystem requirements

SQL Server minimum requirements:

Depending on the amount of data to be managed, systems should be improved.

"Y:\UTIL\MS SQL Desktop Edition English\SETUP.EXE" SAPWD=ACERI

select @dbnamea='ACERI' - Change the name here, if required/preferred.

select @dbnamea='COMPANY' - Change the name here, if required/preferred.

5.3 Absorbing existing Filters/Text styles

-- Default name is ACERI, but you could substitute it for

By selecting the Connection button, you can

5.6.1 Log files

 Command line: DATATEST

When the command is activated the following

By checking any listed project, library, and/or

By selecting the Display Error Data icon ED